UC-NRLF 
 
 SB 257 3bfi 
 

 
 REESE LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 Received 
 
 ft 
 
 , i goo , 
 
 1 Accession No. SC3(oS . Class No. 7 6Q I 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2007 with funding from 
 
 Microsoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOkennrich 
 
J- 
 
 G 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 s. x • 
 
 
 
 
 n in nr 
 
 T3T 
 
 M_ 
 
 \ 0^, XKA> 
 
 S 
 
 't^XL 
 
 -£i 
 
 \ \0j1~ •* 
 
 U^4 
 
 -4>L^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 ail -0" 
 
 JC 
 
 ^^s aI> 
 
 JJC 
 
 e. 
 
 <W- J*™- 
 
 jLw\s % A*k\ jjlm\, t 
 
 aZ &<WL» 
 
 jj, 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 T 
 
 TiL 
 
 
 \|W 
 
 kJL 
 
 X a, 
 
 0^ x *LAs 
 
 G 
 
 
 2au^vu 
 
 > 
 
 
 ^UjJIm/ 
 
 ®UJ 
 
 
 *LA 0L»O» -^j 
 
 JlX4 
 
 
 
 wiU x sO-k~* 
 
 X* 
 
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 
 
 LATIN LANGUAGE 
 
 FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS 
 
 BY BENJAMIN HALL KENNEDY, D.D. 
 
 CANOX OF ELY 
 
 NEW EDITION 
 
 LONGMANS, GKEEN, AND CO. 
 
 SQ PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON 
 
 NEW YORK AND BOMBAY 
 
 1897 
 
SC3 (o^ 
 
PREFACE (?97 
 
 THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 Tkb distinctive features of this Elementary Latin Grammar , as 
 compared with that of Lilly, may be stated as follows. 
 
 I. Accidence. — 1 . Quantity is briefly noticed in the first chapter, 
 and the quantities of Latin words are marked throughout ; thus 
 the learner is impressed with the importance of pronunciation, and 
 prepared for the study of Prosody. 2. The Adjective is set down 
 as a distinct part of speech, instead of the Participle. 3. The use 
 of the Pronoun hie, hcec, hoc, in the declension of Nouns is dis- 
 pensed with as unnecessary, — all that it is intended to teach being 
 supplied by judicious Praxis. (See " the Child's Latin Primer.") 
 4. The term Conjunctive Mood is adopted from the best modern 
 writers, its special uses (Potential, Subjunctive, &c.) being re- 
 served for explanation in the Syntax. 5. The Participle, or 
 Gerundive, in dus has been deprived of the name of Future, to 
 which it certainly has no claim. 6. The Future Perfect in ro has 
 been removed from the Conjunctive to its proper place in the In- 
 dicative Mood. 7. The Tenses are translated by one sign only, the 
 other English signs being afterwards specially noticed. In like 
 manner, the varying forms, ere for erunt, re for ris, fui for sum, &c, 
 are omitted in the paradigms, and specially noticed in a subsequent 
 place. It is hoped that the paradigms have been made easier to the 
 learner by these changes, and also by the synoptical form in which 
 they are printed. 8 The old memorial hexameters for genders of 
 Nouns, flexion of Verbs, &c, are replaced by rhyming Latin lines 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 in octosyllabic rhythm, which are learnt (as the Author has found) 
 with infinitely greater ease, remembered quite as well, and applied 
 with at least equal readiness. In adopting this alteration, the 
 Author has followed not only the dictates of his own judgment, 
 but also the general practice of Continental School Grammars. 
 
 II. Smaller Syntax and First Rides of Construing. — These rules 
 are intended to introduce the beginner to the practice of construing 
 simple sentences, before he enters upon the further study of 
 Syntax. 
 
 III. In the larger SyntaXj the Author has applied the improved 
 principles of modern philology to the memorial system of instruc- 
 tion. He has chosen Latin rules on account of their superior con- 
 ciseness ; and, while he has made the individual rules short and 
 clear enough for memorial citation, he has also adhered as nearly as 
 he might to philosophical accuracy in their arrangement ; following 
 the growth of the sentence from its simplest to its complex forms, 
 and carefully explaining the distinction between the simple and 
 compound sentence, as also between the several kinds of compound 
 sentences. It is only by an accurate understanding of these dis- 
 tinctions that a learner can thoroughly master the doctrine Of the 
 Subjunctive mood, so eminently important in Latin ; and, how 
 easily and perfectly it can be mastered by the method here adopted, 
 the Author knows from long experience. By the Second Part of 
 this Syntax (§§ 180 — 200) the Author is willing that the merits 
 of this Grammar should be tested : it being remembered that boys 
 are not supposed to study those rules until they are practically 
 grounded in the Syntaxis Minor. It has not been thought neces- 
 sary to append a translation of the higher Syntax. 
 
 IV. The elementary rules of Prosody are thrown into the form 
 of memorial Latin verses. This plan is appropriate to the subject 
 itself, and suited to learners who have already made some progress 
 in the language. Although it has been impossible in these verses 
 to avoid occasional deviations from approved rhythm, yet, it will 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 be found that the objectionable lines do not form so much as one 
 tenth part of the whole number ; while of verses decidedly inhar- 
 monious chere are only 5 or 6 out of 225 ; and even these may be 
 turned to advantage, as examples of what should be avoided in 
 rhythm. 
 
 The Author has never departed from the usual Grammatical 
 Nomenclature, except for powerful reasons. In addition to the 
 instances before mentioned, he wishes to draw the attention oi 
 scholars to the great advantage of the term Copulative Verbs, as 
 applied by him to the class of Verbs (sum, no, videor, vocor, &c), 
 which couple a Subject and a Nominal Predicate. He is not aware 
 that any collective term has heretofore been invented for them 
 and the Syntax rules affecting them have been consequently vague 
 and loose. In order to appropriate here the word Copulative, the 
 Author has given to et, que, &c, the name of Sociative Conjunc- 
 tions, and to aut, vel, &c, that of Dissociative : terms also better in 
 themselves than Copulative and Disjunctive. 
 
LATm GRAMMAR. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, OR WOKD-FORMATION* 
 
 SIGNS OF SPEECH. 
 
 § 1. Grammar teaches the rules of speech. Latin Grammar 
 teaches the rules of the Latin speech, which was 
 spoken by the ancient Romans. 
 
 S 2. The Parts of Speech are Words : and the elements of 
 Words are Letters. 
 
 § 3. The Latin Letters are twenty-five, being the same as 
 the English without W. 
 
 Capitals : A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, 
 P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 
 
 Small : a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m. n, o, p, q, r s, t. 
 u, v, x, y, z. 
 
 § 4. Six of the Letters are Vocales, Vowels, self-sounding, 
 a, e, i, o, u, y : the rest are Con son antes, Conso- 
 nants, which cannot be sounded without a vowel. 
 
 § .5. Consonants are divided into Liquids, Double Conso- 
 nants, and Mutes. 
 
 The Liquids are 1, m, n, r ; Double Coflaonanta, x, z $ 
 the rest are Mutes. 
 
 B 
 
% l ACCIDENCE, 
 
 § 6. A Syllable consists of one or more letters pronounced 
 in one breath ; as I-lex. 
 
 A Diphthong is the sound of two voweh meeting in 
 one syllable. 
 
 There are three usual diphthongs, ae, oe, au; and 
 three seldom used, ai, ei, eu. 
 
 § 7. Every Syllable is considered short ( w ) or long ( " ) in 
 quantity, according as its vowel is short or long. 
 
 " Short by nature, . . as amor. 
 Long by nature, . . as esu. 
 
 A Vowel J Short by position before another 
 may be vowel, ... as pios. 
 
 Long by position before two con- 
 sonants or a double consonant, as pernox. 
 
 Obs. All diphthongs are long ; as caudse. 
 
 § 8. Puncta, the Signs of Punctuation, or Stops, are the same 
 in Latin as in English : Comma (,) ; Semicolon ( ; ) ; 
 Colon (:) ; Full Stop (.) ; Note of Interrogation (?) , 
 Note of Admiration (!). 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 § 9. The Parts of Speech, or Words, are of three kinds : 
 I. Nomina, Nouns ; which are threefold : 
 
 (1) Nomina Substantia, Nouns Substantive, oi 
 
 names of persons and things : as, Caesar,. 
 Ccesar ; ovum, an egg ; virtus, virtue. 
 
 (2) Nomina Adjectiva, Nouns Adjective; which 
 
 express the qualities of persons and things, : 
 as, clarus, illustrious ; grandis, large ; liber, 
 
 , free. 
 
 (3) Puonomina, Pronouns \ which are used to avoid 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 3 
 
 the frequent repetition of Substantives : as, 
 egtf, /; tu, thou ; Ille, he ; qui, who. 
 
 Nets, Names of persons and places are called Proper Names : 
 other Substantives are called Common Nouns, or Appel 
 latives. 
 
 EL Verba, Verbs ; which express what persons and 
 things do, suffer, or are : as, Ceesar venit, Cce- 
 sar comes; virtus laudatur, virtue is praised * 
 ovum est grande, the egg is large. 
 
 III. Particul2E, Particles ; which are four-fold : 
 
 (1.) Adverbia, Adverbs ; which express the quali- 
 ties of verbs or adjectives : as, bene, well ; 
 celeriter, quickly ; nunc, now. 
 
 (2) Pr/EPOSitiones, Prepositions ; which express the 
 
 relations of nouns to each other : as, Caesar in 
 Italiam venit, Caesar comes into Italy. 
 
 (3) Conjunctions s, Conjunctions ; which connect 
 
 the other parts of speech : as, ego et Caesar, 
 /and Ccesar ; venit ut laudettir, he comes that 
 he may be praised. 
 
 (4) Intertectiones, Interjections ; words of excla- 
 
 mation : as, heu, eheu, hei, vse, alas ! heus, 
 ho ! 0, oh I en, ecce, lo ! 
 
 § 10. Therefore the Parts of Speech are Eight ; viz. 
 
 1. Substantive; 
 
 2. Adjective; 
 
 3. Pronoun ; 
 
 4. Verb ; 
 
 which are Flexibilia, 
 Flexible, or, declined. 
 
 5. Adverb ; 
 
 6. Preposition ; 
 
 7. Conjunction ; 
 
 8. Interjection; 
 
 which are Inflexibilia, In- 
 flexible, or, undeclined. 
 
 Note. Flexio, Flexion, is the manner of changing the endings of words 
 in order to show their relations to other words. The flexion of 
 Nouns is called Declinatio, Declension; the flexion of Verbs 
 Conjugatlo, Conjugation. 
 
1 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Jll. The Substantive is declined by Number and Case. 
 
 Numeri, the Numbers, are two : 
 
 I. Singularis, Singular, which speaks of one, a3, Magist&j 
 a master, 
 
 II. Pluralis, Plural, which speaks of more than one, as, 
 Magistrl, masters. 
 
 Casus, the Cases, are six : 
 
 L Nommativus, the Nominative (or Subject) Case, usu 
 ally goes before a Verb, and answers the question 
 Who, or What ? as, Who teaches ? Magister docet, 
 the master teaches. 
 
 II. Genitiviis, the Genitive Case, has the sign of, and an- 
 swers the question, Whose, or Whereof ? as, Whose 
 voice ? Magistrl vox, the voice of the master. 
 
 III. Datlvus, the Dative Case, has the signs to, for, and 
 answers the question, To or for Whom? To or for 
 What ? as, To whom do I speak ? Loquor magls- 
 tro, / speak to the master. 
 
 TV. Accusatlvus, the Accusative (or Object) Case, follows 
 the Verb, and answers the question, Whom or 
 What? as, Whom do I see? Video maglstrum, 
 I see the master. It also follows Prepositions. 
 
 V. Vocatlviis, the Vocative Case, is of one called or spoken 
 to : as, O magister ! master ! 
 
 VL Ablatlvus, the Ablative Case, has the signs by, with, 
 from, in, and others, and often follows Prepositions : 
 as, By whom am I taught ? DSceor a magistro, 
 / am taught by the master. 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 § 12. There are Five Declensions of Latin Substantives, 
 known by the endings of the Genitive Case Singular. 
 
 The Genitive Singular of the 1st Declension ends in <e. 
 
 2nd 
 3rd 
 4th 
 5th 
 
 i. 
 is. 
 us, 
 ei. 
 
 § 13. Geneua, the Genders, of Nouns are three ; 
 I. Mascullnum, Masculine. 
 II. Feminlnum, Feminine. 
 III. Neiitrum, Neuter. 
 
 Nate. When a Noun can be either Masculine or Feminine, ita 
 Gender is called Commune, Common : as, parens, aparent. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 § 14. The Nominative of the First Declension ends in a; 
 except a few Greek words, chiefly Proper Names, 
 which end in as, es, or e. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Flural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Mens-a, a table 
 
 Mens-ee, tables 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Mens-ee, of a table 
 
 Mens-arum, of tables 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Mens-ee, to or for a table 
 
 Mens-is, to or for tables 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Mens- am, a table 
 
 Mens-as, tables 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Mens-a, table 
 
 Mens-ae, tables 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Mens-a, by y with, or from a 
 table. 
 
 Mens-Is, by, with, or from tables. 
 
 Obs. 1. Some Nouns take urn as well as arum in the Genitive Plural '• 
 as, ccellcolum or coellcolarum. 
 
 Obs. 2. Dea, a goddess, has Dative and Ablative Plural deabus. So 
 fllia, a daughter, flliabus. 
 
 Note. Greek Nouns in as, es, e, are thus declined : — 
 
 Nom. JEne-as, Gen. w, Dat. sb, Ace. an or am, Voc. a Abl. a. 
 
 Nom. Anchis-es, Gen. ae, Dat. a?, Ace. en Voc. eor&, Abl. a or e 
 
 Nom. C^bel-e, Gen. es, Dat. ae, Ace. en Voc. e Abl. g 
 
ACCIDENCE, 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION 
 
 $ 15. The Nominative ot the Second Declension ends in U3 
 orife/yof the Masculine gender : in urn of <-he Neuter 
 gender. 
 
 (a) Masculine Substantives. 
 
 l. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. Domln-us, a lord 
 
 Gen. Domin-I, of a lord 
 
 Dat. Domin-o, to or for a lord 
 
 Ace. Domin-um, a lord 
 
 Voc. Domin-S, lord 
 
 Abl. D6min-o, by, with, ox from a lord. 
 
 Plur. 
 Domin-i, lords 
 Domin-orum, of lords 
 Domln-is, to or for lords 
 Doniin-6s, lords 
 Domin-i, O lords 
 Domln-is, by, with, or from lords. 
 
 2. 
 Nom. Magist-Sr, a master 
 Gen. Maglstr-i, of a master 
 Dat. Maglstr-o, to or for a master 
 Ace. Maglstr-um, a master 
 Voc. Magist-er, O master 
 Abl. Magistr-o, by, withy or from a 
 master 
 
 Magistr-I, masters 
 Magistr-orum, of master* 
 Magistr-is, to or jor masters 
 Magistr-os, masters 
 Maglstr-I, masters 
 Magistr-Is, by, with, or fri 
 masters. 
 
 Nom. Pu-Sr, a boy 
 
 Gen. Puer-I, of a boy 
 
 Dat. PuSr-o, to or for a boy 
 
 Ace. PuSr-urn, a boy 
 
 Voc. Pu-gr, boy 
 
 Abl. PuSr-o, by, with, or from a boy. 
 
 Pu&r-I, boys 
 
 Piier-orum, of boys 
 
 Piier-Is, to or for boys 
 
 Pu&r-os, boys 
 
 PuSr-I, O boys 
 
 P tier-is, by, with, or from boys. 
 
 (b) Neuter. 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. Regn-um, a kingdom 
 Gen. Regn-I, of a kingdom 
 Dat. Regn-o, to ox for a kingdom 
 Ace. Regn-um, a kingdom 
 Voc. Regn-um, O kingdom 
 AbL Regn-o, by, with, or from 
 kingdom. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Regn-a, kingdoms 
 Regn-orum, of kingdoms 
 Regn-Is, to ox for kingdoms 
 Regn-a, kingdoms 
 Regn-a, O kingdoms 
 Regn-Is, by, with, or from king* 
 dorns. 
 
OR WOKD-FORMATION. 7 
 
 Ofc* 1 Most Substantives in er are declined like magiste'r, dropping e 
 in the Genitive. Those declined like puer, keeping e, are: 
 socer, gener, armlger, 
 adulter, vesper, signlfer. 
 
 Obi' 2. Liber, a book, is declined like maglste'r. LlbSr, Bacchus, and 
 Xiberl,' children, like piier. 
 
 Ofo. 3. Fillus, genius, and Roman Proper Names in liis, make the 
 Vocative in i : as, fill, O son ; geni, O genius ; Mercurl, O 
 Mercurius ; Cai, O Cuius- Pom pel, O Pompeius. 
 
 Obs. I. Genitives in ii were anciently contracted into i ; as ingenium, 
 disposition, Inge nil, Ingeni. 
 
 Obs. 5. Some Nouns take um as well as or am in the Genitive Plural : 
 as, nummum or nummorum. 
 
 Note 1 . Deiis, God, is thus declined : — 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Norn. Deiis, God 
 
 Gen. Del, of God 
 
 Dat. Deo, to God 
 
 Ace. Deum, God 
 
 Voc. Deus, O God 
 
 Abl, Deo, by, with, or from God. 
 
 Plur. 
 Di (seldom Del or Dii), Gods 
 Deorum or Deum, of Gods 
 DIs (seldom Dels or Diis), to Gods 
 Deos, Gods 
 
 DI (seldom Dei or Da), O Gods 
 Dis (seldom Deis or DTis), by 
 with, or from Gods. 
 
 Note 2. Vir, a man, Gen. vlrl, &c. Plur. Nom. vlrl, &c. 
 
 Note 3. Greek words in &*, o"n, are thus declined . — 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Delos 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Colon 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dell 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Coll 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Delo 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Colo 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Delon or Delum 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Colon 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Dele 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Colon 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Delo. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Colo. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 § 16. The Nominative of the Third Declension ends in a, e, 
 o, c, I, n, r, s 9 t, x : the Genitive always ends in is, 
 but is formed from the Nominative in many different 
 ways. 
 
8 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 § 17. Formation of the Genitive in Third Declenbion. 
 
 Nora. Termination. 
 
 A 
 
 E 
 O 
 
 AN, EN, ON 
 
 rs(parisyl.) 
 
 £S (impari- 
 
 syl.) 
 
 Gen. adds tls : as, poema, poemafis. - 
 Gen. is: as mare, maris. - 
 
 Gen. adds wis .• as, leo, leonis ; natio, nationis. 
 
 But caro, carnis. - 
 Gen. inis : as, ordo, ordinis ; virgo, virgtnis. 
 
 So homo, nemo, turbo, Apollo. But llgo, 
 
 ligonis ; Macedo, Macedonis. 
 
 Lac, lactis. ------ 
 
 Gen. adds is : as, sol, soils. But mel, mellis ; 
 f 21, f ellis ; sal, sails. - - - - 
 
 Gen. adds is : as, Titan, Titanis ; ren. renis. 
 But sindon, slndonis ; so Gorgon ; halcyon ; 
 with others. Some Proper Names make 
 otitis, as, Xenophon, Xenophontls. - 
 
 Gen. inis : as, lumen, luminis ; so pectin. - 
 
 Gen. arts : as, calcar, calcaris ; or arts, as, 
 jubar, jtibaris ; par, parts. But f ar, farris. 
 
 Gen. adds is : as, career, carceYIs ; ver, 
 verls. ------- 
 
 Gen. casts out e and adds is : as, pater, patris. 
 (So also Imber, Imbris ; and names of 
 months in er ,• as, November, Novembris. ) 
 But Juppiter, Jovis ; iter, ltinens ; lateY, 
 lateris. ------- 
 
 Gen. oris : as, honor, honoris ; but arbor, 
 arboris ; iequor, iequoris ; marmor, mar- 
 moris ; cor, cordis. - 
 
 Gen. adds is : as, f ulgur, f ftlguris ; fur, f uris. 
 
 Gen. dris : as, ebtir, eboris. But j^cur, 
 jgcinoris and jScoris. - 
 
 Gen. atis : as, ietas, aVtatis. But vas, vasts ; 
 
 vas, vadis ; mas, maris ; as, assls. 
 Gen. antis : as, Pallas, Pallantis ; eo gigas ; 
 
 Slephas ; adamas. - 
 Gen. ddis : as, Pallas, Palladis. - 
 Gen. is.- as, nubes, nubis. - 
 
 Gen. itis : as, mile's, militis : so hosp&s ; s&- 
 
 telles ; merges. --..-. 
 Gen. itis: as, sSges, segetis: so InterprSs, 
 
 teggs. ------- 
 
 Gen. Ms : as, qules, quletls. 
 
 idis : as obses, obsldls. - 
 
 idis : only pes, pedis, with its com- 
 pounds. ------ 
 
 idis : only merces, heres. - 
 
 But CSres, CSreris ; ies. ferla ( N. ) ; prajs, pr&dfs. 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 Vora. Termination. 
 
 is(parisyl.) 
 
 is (imparl- 
 
 syl.) 
 
 AUS 
 LS, NS, RS 
 
 OX 
 
 ux 
 
 Gender. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 INI. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 N. M. 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 F. 
 
 F 
 
 
 Gen. is .♦ as, avis, avts ; amnis, amnis. 
 
 Gen. idis : as, lapis, lapldis : so cassis (hel- 
 met) : tigris (also parisyll.). - 
 
 eris : as cinis, cineris ; pulvis, piil- 
 
 veris. ------ 
 
 itis r\ls, litis: so Samnis, Quirls, Dls. 
 
 But sanguis, sanguinis ; glTs, gliris. 
 
 Gen. otis ; as, dos, dotis : so cos ; sacerdos. 
 
 oris . as, flos, floris; os, oris. 
 
 But custos, custodis; bos, bovis; os, ossls. 
 
 Gen. utis : as, virtus, virtiitis: so servitus; 
 juventus ; senectus ; saliis. 
 
 udis: as, palus, paludis : so Incus. But 
 
 pecus, peciidis. ----- 
 
 uris : as, tellus, telluris ; and monosyl- 
 lables; as rus, mus. - 
 But griis, griiis ; siis, suis. - 
 
 Gen. eris : as, vulniis, viilneris ; Venus, Ven- 
 eris. ------- 
 
 oris : as, pecus, pecoris. - - - 
 
 Gen. audis: only laus, iaiidis ; fraus, fraudls. 
 
 Gen. tfs for s : as, puis, pultis ; frons, fron- 
 tis ; pars, partis. But frons, frondis ; 
 glans, glandis. - 
 
 Gen. inserts i before s : as, trabs, trabis ; 
 stirps, stlrpis ; hi ems, hiemis. But Ca- 
 lebs, caelibis. - 
 
 Gen. cipis : as municeps, municipis. So 
 prlnceps, aiiceps. - 
 
 Gen. itis : capiit, capitis, and its compounds. 
 
 Gen. acis : as, pax, pacis. But fax, facts. 
 Gen. ids : as, judex, judicis : so vindex ; 
 
 Index ; Ilex ; carex. But vlbex, vlblcls ; 
 
 vervex, vervecis ; nex, necis. - - - 
 egis : as, lex, legis. But grex, gregis; 
 
 remex, remigis. - 
 
 Remark senex, senis ; supellex, supellectilis. 
 Gen. icis : as, cornlx, cornlcis : so phoenix. 
 icis : as, callx, calicis : so fornix. But 
 
 strlx, strigis ; nix, nivls. - 
 
 Gen. dels : as, vox, vocis. But nox, noctis. 
 Gen. ucis : as, nux, nucls. But lux, lucis ; 
 
 Pollux, P5llucis ; conjux, conjugis. 
 Gen. ygis : as, Phryx, Phrygis. Some have 
 
 ycis, ycis. - - - - - 
 
 Gen. cis or gis : as, lynx, lyncis ; arx, arcis ; 
 
 Sphinx, Sphlngis. - - - - 
 Obs. Pari3yllable is a Noun having as many syllables in the Gen. Sing, 
 as in the Nom. ; I mparisy liable a Noun having more syllables 
 in the Gen. Sing, than in the Nom. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 C. 
 N. 
 F. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 F. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 
10 
 5 18. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 Examples in the Third Declension. 
 
 A. Masculine and Feminine Substantives. 
 
 (a) Parisyllables ; or not increasing in the Genitive Singular. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Nub-es, a cloud 
 
 
 Nub-es, clouds 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Nub-is, of a cloud 
 
 
 Niib-ium, of clouds 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Niib-I, to or for a cloud 
 
 
 Nub-ibiis, to or for clouds 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Nub-em, a cloud 
 
 
 Nub-es, clouds 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Nub-es, cloud 
 
 
 Nub-es, clouds 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Nub-e, by, with, ox from a 
 
 cloud. 
 
 Nub-lbus, by, with, or from clouds* 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Civ-ls, a citizen 
 
 2. 
 
 Civ-es, citizens 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Civ- is, of a citizen 
 
 
 Civ-ium, of citizens 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Civ-I, to or for a citizen 
 
 
 Civ-tbus, to or for citizens 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Civ-em, a citizen 
 
 
 Civ-es, citizens 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Civ-Is, citizen 
 
 
 Civ-es, citizens 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Civ-e, by, with, or from a citizen. 
 
 Civ-ibus, by, with, or from citizens. 
 
 (b) Imparisyllables ; or increasing in the Genitive Singular. 
 
 l. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. Leo, a lion 
 
 Gen. Leon-Is, of a lion 
 
 Dat. Leon -I, to or for a lion 
 
 Ace. Leon-em, a lion 
 
 Voc. Leo, lion 
 
 Abl. Leon-e^ by, with, or from a lion. 
 
 Plur. 
 Leon-es, lions 
 Leon-um, of lions 
 Leon-lbus, to or for lions 
 L^on-es, lions 
 Leon-es, O lions 
 Leon-ibus, by, with f or from lions. 
 
 Nom. Virgo, a virgin 
 
 Gen. Virgin-Is, of a virgin 
 
 Dat. Virgin- 1, to or for a virgin 
 
 Ace. Virgin-em, a virgin 
 
 Voc. Viigo, O virgin 
 
 Abl. Virgin-**, by, with, or from a 
 virgin. 
 
 Vlrgin-es, virgins 
 Vlrgln-unr», of virgins 
 Vlrgln-lbus, tc or for virgins 
 Virgln-es, virgins 
 Vlrgln-es, O virgins 
 Vlrgln-lbus, by, with, or from 
 virgins. 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 11 
 
 3. 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. iEtas, an age 
 Gen. ^tat-is, of an age 
 Dat. jEtat-I, to or for an age 
 Ace. iEtat-em, an age 
 Voc. iEt-as, O age 
 Abl. jEtat-e\ by, with, or /rom an age. 
 
 Plur 
 iEtat-es, ages 
 iEtat-um, of ages 
 iEtat-Ibtis, to or /or ages 
 iEtat-es, ages 
 iEtat-es, O ages 
 JEtat-Ibus, by, with, or from ages* 
 
 Norn. Comes, a companion 
 
 Gen. Comit-Is, of a companion 
 
 Dat. C6mlt-I, to or for a companion 
 
 Ace. Comlt-em, a companion 
 
 Voc. Comes, companion 
 
 Abl. C6mlt-S, oy, wi7A, or from a com- 
 panion. 
 
 C6mlt-es, companions 
 C6mit-um, of companions 
 Comlt-Ibtis, to or for companions 
 Comit-es, companions 
 Comit-es, O companions 
 Comlt-Ibus, by, with, or from 
 companions. 
 
 Nom. Serpens, a serpent 
 
 Gen. Serpent-is, of a serpent 
 
 Dat. Serpent-I, to or for a serpent 
 
 Ace. Serpent-em, a serpent 
 
 Voc. Serpens, serpent 
 
 Abl. Serpent-e, by, with, or from a 
 serpent. 
 
 Serpent-es, serpents 
 Serpent-ium, of serpents 
 Serpent-Ibus, to or for serpents 
 Serpent-es, serpents 
 Serpent-es, O serpents 
 Serpent-Ib&s, by, with, or from 
 serpents. 
 
 B. Neuter Substantives. 
 
 (a) Plural ia. 
 
 l. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. Mar-g, the sea 
 
 Gen. Mar-Is, of the sea 
 
 Dat. Mar-I, to or for the sea 
 
 Ace. Mar-e, the sea 
 
 Voc. Mar-e, O sea 
 
 Abl. Mar-i, oy, with, or /rom Me sea. 
 
 Plvr. 
 Mar-ia, seas 
 Mar-Ium, of seas 
 Mar-ibiis, to or for seas 
 Mar-ia, seas 
 Mar-la, O seas 
 Mar-ibiis, by, with, or from seas. 
 
 Nom. Animal, an animal 
 
 Gen. Animal 4s, of an animal 
 
 Dat. Animal- I, to or for an animal 
 
 Ajc. Animal, an animal 
 
 Voc. Animal, animal 
 
 Abl. Animal i, by, with, or from an 
 animal. 
 
 Animal-la, animals 
 Anlmitl-ium, of animals 
 Anlmal-ibus, to or for animah 
 Animal-la, animals 
 Animal -I a, O animals 
 Anlmal-ibus, by, with, or f-om 
 animals . 
 
12 
 
 ACCIDENCE 
 
 (l>) Plural a. 
 1. 
 
 Sing 
 Nom. Opus, a work 
 Gen. OpeV-is, of a work 
 Dat. Oper-I, to or for a work 
 Ace. Op- us, a work 
 Voc. Op- iis, work 
 
 A bl. Oper-e, by, with, or from a work. Oper-ibtis, by, with, or from work*. 
 
 Phr. 
 
 OpSr-a, works 
 Oper-um, of works 
 Oper-ibtis, to or for ivorks 
 Oper-a, works 
 Oper-a, works 
 
 2. 
 
 Nom. Fulmen, lightning 
 Gen. Fulmin-is, of lightning 
 Dat. Fulmin-I, to or for lightning 
 Ace. FulmSn, lightning 
 Voc. Fulmen, lightning 
 A bl. Ful min-e, &y, wiYA, or from light- 
 ning. 
 
 Fiilmin-a, lightnings 
 Fulmin-um, of lightnings 
 Fulmin-ibtis, to or for lightnings 
 Fulmin-a, lightnings 
 Fulmin-a, lightnings 
 Fulmin-ibtis, by, with, or from 
 lightnings. 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 § 19. The Nominative of Masculine and Feminine Substan- 
 tives of the Fourth Declension ends in us ; that of 
 Neuter Substantives in u. 
 
 l. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. Grad-iis, a step 
 
 Gen. Grad-iis, of a step 
 
 Dat. Grad-ijj, to or for a step 
 
 Ace. Grad-um, a step 
 
 Voc. Grad-iis, O step 
 
 Abl. Grad-ii, by, with, or from a step. 
 
 Plu? 
 
 I Grad-iis, steps 
 Grad-iium, of steps 
 Grad-ibiis, to or for step* 
 
 I Grad-iis, steps 
 
 I Grad-us, steps 
 
 I Grad-ibiis, by, with, or from steps 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen-u, a knee 
 
 G&n-ua, knees 
 
 Gen. 
 
 GSn-iis, of a knee 
 
 Gfin-uum, of knees 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Gen-u, to or for a knee 
 
 Gen-ibiis, to or for knee* 
 
 Ace. 
 
 GSn-u, a knee 
 
 Gen-ua, knees 
 
 Voc. 
 
 GSn-ii, knee 
 
 Gen-ua, knees 
 
 Abl, Gen-ii, by, with, or from a knee. 
 
 Gen-ibiis, by, with, or from hires. 
 
OR WORD-FOltMATION. 
 
 13 
 
 Obs. 1 . The following words take tibas instead of ibus in the Dative and 
 Ablative Plural : 
 
 Arciis, tribus, artus, Querctis, aciis, 
 
 Speeds, portiis, partus, Veru, lacus. 
 
 Obs. 2. Domus is peculiarly declined. See Notes. 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION". 
 
 § 20. The Nominative ends in es> 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Flur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Faci-es, a face 
 
 
 Fact- es, face* 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Faci-ei, of a face 
 
 
 Facl-erum, effaces 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Faci-ei, to or for a face. 
 
 
 Faci-ebus, to or for faces 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Fad-em, a face 
 
 
 Fact- es, /aces 
 
 Voc, 
 
 Faci-es, face 
 
 
 Faci-es, faces 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Faci-e, by, with, or from 
 
 a face 
 
 Faci-ebiis, by, with, or from faces. 
 
 ON SOME CASES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 
 
 §21. 
 Im pro em Accusativo, 
 / pro e in Ablativo 
 Dant buris, ciicumis, dmussis, 
 Ravis, sitis, vis, et tussis ; 
 Et flumina quse claudit is, 
 Ut Albis, Litis, Tiberis. 
 Im vel em Accusativo, 
 /vel e in Ablativ5 [clams, 
 Dant neptis, febris, messis, 
 Puppis, pelvis, restis, navis, 
 Securis, turris ; adde his 
 Sementis atque strigilis. 
 
 §22. 
 / Slngiilaris Ablativi, 
 la Pluralis Nominatlvi 
 Neutra gaudent flngere, 
 Quae exeunt in al f ar, e. 
 His excepta sunt in ar, 
 Baccar, nectar, jubdr, far. 
 
 §23. 
 Ium pr5 um quae efferunt 
 Plural! Genitivo sunt : 
 
 (1) /formantia Ablativo- 
 
 (2) Non crescentia Genitivo : 
 
 (3) Pleraque in x vel s 
 Post consonantem positis : 
 
 (4) Cum aliis Monosyllabls : 
 Mas, mus, nix, nox, d.i 
 
 (ossis), cos, 
 Sal, sol, cor, pax, glis 
 lis, et dos. 
 
 His excipienda sunt 
 (Quee um libenter efferunt), 
 Vates, senex, pater, panis % 
 Et accipiter, et cdnis, 
 Frater, mater, juvenis, 
 Et ssepitis apis, voliicris 
 
J4 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ^ 24. A. Adjectives of Three Terminations in us, a, um^ 
 or er, a, um, are declined in the Masculine ana 
 Neuter Genders like Substantives of the Second 
 Declension, and in the Feminine Gender like 
 Substantives of the First Declension : as, bonus, 
 good; niger, black; tener, tender. 
 
 Singular. 
 M. F. N. 
 
 N. Bon-us bon-a bon-ura 
 
 G. Bon-I bon-se bon-I 
 
 D. Bon-o bon-ee bono 
 
 A. Bon-um bon-am bon-um 
 
 V. B6n-e bon-a bon-um 
 
 A. Bon-o bon-a bon-o 
 
 N. Nlg-Sr nigr-a nigr-um 
 
 G. Nigr-I nigr-se nigr-I 
 
 D. Nigr-o nigr-ae nigr-o 
 
 A. Nigr-um nigr-am nigr-um 
 
 V. Nlg~Sr nigr-a nigr-um 
 
 A. Nigr-o nigr-a nigr-o 
 
 N. Tener te'ne'r-a tener-um 
 
 G. Tener- j ten^r-se tener-I 
 
 D. Tener-o tener-a? tener-o 
 
 A. Tener-um tenSr-am tener-um 
 
 V. TenSr t^ner-a tener-um 
 
 A. Tener-o tener-a tener-o 
 
 Plural 
 M. F. N. 
 
 Bon-I bon-se bon-a 
 
 Bon-orum bon-arum bon-orum 
 
 Bon-Is bon-Is bon-ls 
 
 Bon-os bon-as bon-a 
 
 Bon-I bon-a? bon-a 
 
 Bon-Is bon-Is bon-Is 
 
 nigr-ae mgr-a 
 nigr-arum nigr-orum 
 nigr-is nigr-is 
 nigr-as nigr-a 
 nigr-se nigr-a 
 nigr-is nigr-is 
 
 Nigr-I 
 
 Nigr-o rum 
 
 Nigr-is 
 
 Nigr-os 
 
 Nigri 
 
 Nigr-is 
 
 Tener-i tener-a? tener-a 
 
 Tener-orum tener-arumteuer-oruui 
 Tener-Is tener-Is tener-is 
 Tener-os tener-as tSner-a 
 Tener-I tener- se tener-a 
 Tener-is tener-Is tener-Is 
 
 Obs. The Adjectives declined like tener are, asper, lacer, liber, misSi, 
 prosper, and the compounds of fero and gero, as aurifer, 
 beliiger. Dexter is declined both ways. 
 
 § 25. B. Adjectives with Two Terminations or One Ter- 
 mination follow the Third Declension of Sub- 
 stantives : as, tristis, sad ; felix, happy ; Ingens, 
 huge; melior, better. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 M.F. N. 
 
 M.F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M.F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 Trlst-ls trist-S 
 
 Fel-Ix 
 
 
 Ingens 
 
 G. 
 
 Trist-ts 
 
 Fellc-Is 
 
 
 Ingent-Is 
 
 D. 
 
 Trist-I 
 
 Fellc-i 
 
 
 Ingent-1 
 
 A. 
 
 Trist-em trist-e' 
 
 Felic-em 
 
 fel-ix 
 
 Ingent-em Ingens 
 
 V. 
 
 Trist-ts trist-e' 
 
 Fel-lx 
 
 
 Ingens 
 
 A.. 
 
 Trlst-I 
 
 Fellc-I 
 
 
 Ingent-1 or £ , 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 15 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 K. Trist-es trist-la 
 
 Felic-es felic-m 
 
 Ingent-es mgent-ia 
 
 G, Trlst-ium 
 
 Felic-ium 
 
 Ingent-ium 
 
 D. Trist-ibus 
 
 Felic-ibus 
 
 Ingent-ibus 
 
 A. Trist-es trist-ia 
 
 Felic-es felic-ia 
 
 Ingent-es Ingent-lS 
 
 V, Trist-es trist-ia 
 
 Felic-es felic-ia 
 
 Ingent-es ingent-la 
 
 A. Trist-lbus 
 
 Felic-ibus 
 
 Ingent-ibus 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 Norn. Mell-or melt- us 
 
 Melior-es mglior-X 
 
 Gen. Meltor-ls 
 
 Mellor-um 
 
 Dat. Melior-i 
 
 Mehor-ibus 
 
 Ace. Melior-em meli-us 
 
 Mellor-es melior-a 
 
 Voc. Meli-or mell-iis 
 
 Melior-es melior-a 
 
 Abl. Melior-e' or I 
 
 Mellor-ibus 
 
 Obs Adjectives in er, following the Third Declension of Substantives* 
 have Three Terminations in the Nom. Sing. : as, acer, acr-is, 
 acr-e, sharp ; celer, celer-is, ce'le'r-S, swift. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 r 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Acer 
 
 acr-is 
 
 acr-S 
 
 Celer 
 
 celer-is 
 
 celer 8 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Acr-is 
 
 acr-is 
 
 acr-is 
 
 Celer-is 
 
 celer-is 
 
 celer-is 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Acr-I 
 
 acr-i 
 
 acr-i 
 
 Celer-I 
 
 celer-i 
 
 celer-I 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Acr-em 
 
 acr-em 
 
 acr-S 
 
 Celer-em 
 
 celer-em 
 
 celer-d 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Acer 
 
 acr-is 
 
 acr-e 
 
 Celer 
 
 celer-is 
 
 celer-e 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Acr-I 
 
 acr-I 
 
 acr-I 
 
 Cele'r-I 
 
 celer-I 
 
 celSr-I 
 
 The Plural terminations are like those of tristis; except cele'rum. Geni- 
 tive Plural of celer. 
 
 § 26. The following are irregularly declined in the Singular 
 
 
 
 Unus, one. 
 
 
 Uter, which 
 
 of two. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Un-tis 
 
 iin-a 
 
 iin-um 
 
 Ut-er utr-a 
 
 utr-um 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 Un-ius 
 
 
 Utr-ifis 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 Un-I 
 
 
 Utr-I 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Un-ura 
 
 iin-am 
 
 iin-um 
 
 Utr-um utr-am 
 
 utr-um 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Un-o 
 
 un-a 
 
 iin-o 
 
 Utr-o utr-a 
 
 utr-o 
 
 
 Alius, another. 
 
 
 Alter, one of two. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Ali-iis 
 
 all-a 
 
 ali-tid 
 
 Alter alter-a 
 
 alter-um 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 Al-Iiis 
 
 
 Alter-iiis 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 All -I 
 
 
 Alter-! 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ali-um 
 
 all-am 
 
 all-ud 
 
 AlteV-um alter-am 
 
 alte-rum 
 
 Abl. 
 
 All-o 
 
 all-a 
 
 al-io 
 
 Alter-6 alter-a 
 
 alter-o 
 
 Ob*. Like unus are declined ullus, any ; nulliis, none ; soliis, alone f 
 totiis, whole. Like titer: neuter, neither ; uterquS, each ; iiter- 
 vis, uterlibet, which you wilL 
 
16 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 $ 27. The Adjective is compared by three Degrees , the 
 Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative : as, 
 
 Pos. Comp. Sup. 
 
 Duriis, hard; durior, harder; durissimus, hardest ; 
 
 The Comparative is formed from the Positive by 
 changing i or is of the Genitive into ior. 
 
 The Superlative is formed from the Positive by 
 changing i or is of the Genitive into issimus ; as, 
 
 Pos. Comp. Sup. 
 
 Durus, hard, Gen. dur-i • dur-ior dur-Issimiis 
 
 Brevis, short. " brev-is brev-ior brev-issimus 
 
 Audax, bold, " audac-is audac-ior audac-Issimus 
 
 § 28. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 O) Adjectives in erform the Superlative by adding -rimus 
 to the Nominative : as, pulcher, beautiful, Comp. 
 piilchr-ior, Sup. pulcher-rimus ; celer, swift, cele- 
 rior, cSlerrimus. So vetiis, ancient, (Gen. veteris,) 
 Sup. veterrimus. 
 
 (2) The following form the Superlative in lllimus : 
 
 facilis, dlfficilis, 
 similis, dissimilis, 
 gracilis, et humllis. 
 
 (3) Adjectives in dictis, f icus, volus, form their Compa- 
 
 ratives and Superlatives as if from Positives in 
 dicens, f icens, volens : as, 
 
 in&ledicus, slanderous, maledicentior, maledicentlssimus, 
 beneficus, beneficent, beneficentior, bfeneficentlssimus, 
 benevolus, benevolent, benevolentior, benevolentissimtis. 
 
 (4) If the Positive has a vowel before us, the Comparative 
 
 and Superlative are formed by prefixing the Ad- 
 verbs magis, more, maxime, most, to the Positive : 
 as, ardii-us, steep ; magis arduus, more steep ; 
 maxime arduus, most steep. But those in quus are 
 compared as usual : as, antlquus, ancient, antiquior, 
 antiquissimiis. So strenutis, vigorous, forms Sup. 
 strenuissimus ; pius, pious, pilssimtis. 
 
OK WOUD-FORMATION. 
 
 §29. 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 Pos. 
 
 
 Comp. 
 
 Sup. 
 
 Bonus, good 
 
 
 mellor 
 
 optimus 
 
 Mai us, \ad 
 
 
 pejor 
 
 pessimus 
 
 Magnus, great 
 
 
 major 
 
 maximus 
 
 Parvus, small 
 
 
 minor 
 
 minim iis 
 
 Mult us, much 
 
 
 plus 
 
 plurimus 
 
 Nequam, wicked 
 
 
 nequior 
 
 nequisslmus 
 
 Dives, rich 
 
 
 divltior or ditlor 
 
 cTivltisslmus or dit7sg*mu 
 
 Senex, old 
 
 
 senior 
 
 (natu maximus) 
 
 Jfivenls, young 
 
 
 junior 
 
 (natu minimus) 
 
 Exteriis, outward 
 
 
 exterior 
 
 extremtis and extlmita 
 
 Ini'eriis, low 
 
 
 inferior 
 
 Infimus and Imus 
 
 Superus, high 
 
 
 superior 
 
 supremus and summiis 
 
 Postertis, hindward 
 
 posterior 
 
 postremus and postiimtis. 
 
 Comparatives and Superlatives formed from Prepositions. 
 
 Pos. Comp. Sup. 
 
 (Citra, this side of) clterlor ct^miis 
 
 (Intra, within) Interior liuimus 
 
 (Ultra, beyond) ulterior ultlmus 
 
 (Pra?, before) prior primus 
 
 (Propfi, near) proplor proximus. 
 
 Comparatives and Superlatives formed without a Positive. 
 
 Comp. Sup. Comp. Sup. 
 
 Deterlor, worse deterrlmus Ocior, swifter ocissimtis 
 
 Potior, more desirable potlsslmus 
 
 Vbs. Many Adjectives are not compared at all; others have no 
 Comparative ; some no Superlative. 
 
 § 30. Adverbs derived from Adjectives are compared in 
 us and e : as, 
 
 (Dlgniis, worthy,) digne, worthily, dignius, dlgnissime. 
 ( Gravis, weighty) graviter, weightily, graviiis, gravlssime. 
 Ln the same manner, — 
 
 S&pe, often, syepius, ssepissime. 
 
 Dm, long, diutiias, diOtissime. 
 
 Penitus, deeply, penitius, penitissime. 
 
 Magis, more, maxime ; detenus, worse, deterrime ; 
 potius, rather, potissimum; ociiis, more quickly, ocis- 
 sime ; priiis, sooner, prlmum ; have no Positive. 
 
 Belie, prettily, bellissime ; merito, deservedly, meritls- 
 slme ; nuper, lately, nuperrime ; have no Compa- 
 rative. 
 
 Satis, enough, satms ; secus, differently, secl&s ; have 
 no Suoeriative. 
 
 c 
 
18 
 
 ACCIDENCB, 
 
 ill 
 
 si? 
 
 B S 9 •» 
 
 < SPtl 
 
 1 1 5 
 
 « 2«<! v. 
 
 2 2l* 
 
 ■ 3 
 
 *3 • w .X 
 
 0> e« tr* S . 
 
 q l*LJ )« icu 
 
 5 25 OS cr b«'l 
 
 Crt . 
 
 03 ' 
 
 g4J 
 
 10) ,£ 
 
 §3 IO 
 
 £ >3 
 
 >0 >0) 
 
 s t3 
 
 io) »S J2 ,fe » .98 *8 '> ,2 
 
 o >o> o ,5 2 .^ ,8 io) > J 
 ><» ^3 3 -2 S * « "V ifi i8 
 -3 O "3 itf ,3 i2 tf Jff *d >5 
 
 S3'* aS^S P*3 a w 
 i3 ~0 +j ca^M <o na i3 > 
 
 >o» £3 >r* 
 
 •8 
 ritf 
 
 •S'2, 
 
 *» >-> i^ ,_ im a — 5 
 
 © «-. a '^ 9 3 '3 ^ 
 
 •2 '-2 'a '5 iS '53 ,~ '3 H3 i-: 
 
 1 w 2- ELil '« .« '2 12 aSii 
 
 l •*» C* C* x 
 
 1«, 
 
 ( >fl a to) > 1.3 
 
 to 
 
 101 
 
 ■a 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 10) 
 
 '(fl 
 
 152 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 
 10) 
 
 
 d 
 
 "8 
 
 10) 
 
 10 
 
 -c 
 
 3 10 a -a 13 -d *S of i 
 
 5 T3 13 > V T3 IP 2 U* 
 
 * ■ £ • ■ 
 
 S S>i 
 
 5 e 
 
 >3 
 
 £.3 5 
 
 
 tf! 
 
 
 >3 to 
 
 «/; 
 
 >3 
 
 >a a, 
 
 6* 
 
 0- £ 
 
 
 14 
 
 a >3 
 
 '5 x 
 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 CT tn 
 
 03 'O 
 
 2,- 5 y a >o) >-« S 
 
 5« >3 5 >i> >o> >- -d 3 ,3 
 
 -.3 S >3 -JS M ^ >3 '> w 
 
 » p s * jg 5 g a s "S •> 
 
 )3 a >a» "O 2 tl a > 3 >- na 10) 
 
 a »3 'd >o O irt ,3 £ -g >o t3 
 
 ic >a> a >a ,§j 3 3 ,g ,g->3 3 
 
 !:-cs 
 
 
 '« * £ -s 
 
 < 3 « 
 
 < OJ ^ 
 
 |5 
 
 2S 
 cc o 
 
 *Vo 
 
 !x» 
 
 >3 >0 
 
 8 >3 
 i3 T3 
 
 JO 
 
 >3 
 
 S S .S h e?-2 S 
 
 3 TJ S 
 
 : a c u, .3 
 .3 'Ti Bio o 
 
 S S '3 >S 3 1 2g 
 
 K E w) n 'a ii i 
 
 >o> bJOii 
 
 
 ,S* o >0 >0) 8 >3 } 
 
 S 10 a *d is -o • 
 
 3 a '> ,3° 
 
 ,3 g id '> 
 
 a « id -a 10) 
 
 3D.- fn 
 
 •a) w 8 
 ■8 to) ,3 
 
 '^a 
 
 '> i3 
 
 T3 13 . 
 
 
 X^ 
 
 X 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION 
 
 19 
 
 03 IV 
 
 IV v* 
 
 ■© -^ a i 
 
 2 oS 
 
 3 ■« : 
 
 £"fcC>; 
 
 4 1.. 
 
 'V ^ 101 05 03 "5* ** 
 
 Cr, to o iv id) a G 
 
 ,§Pi«r«2 -c Q i» 'g 
 
 1 'I S •§ «S =g 'S 
 
 ■ O G i3 « v "d +3 
 
 : G- >rj 
 
 IV G *j S >-H 
 
 bO»9> G ai S 3 
 
 c fcJDio) id '2 o" 
 
 Q o tJO,s R c 
 
 
 C 1 C « ui >0 G 
 
 £3 
 
 |<U 33 
 
 03 ;3, 
 
 S-l 
 
 a g 
 
 3 09 
 
 •« £ 
 
 cr"0> 
 G O 
 
 ?2 
 
 q g 
 
 3 >v 
 
 cr « 
 
 !T"T3 
 
 >« 
 
 *?>,- •§ ,- »s 
 
 II Fi is 1111 tf I til 
 
 c * as 10 g i3 6 o tJ 13 ccra »io G 
 
 bD*S . 
 
 c 5 
 
 C«2 ho? 
 
 7= G 
 
 a 3 
 
 >g I 
 
 i e!§ 
 i '3 >v 
 
 . g a 
 
 2 >3^ 
 
 03 
 
 ST Wi >3 be 
 
 •3 X 
 
 T 1 r« 
 
 B.,3 >3 
 
 3 1 ,1 1 1 •! 
 
 fa/3 U 03 03 — a ' 
 
 I* w !2 'S iv i<u- 
 c -a T- e 5 O i 
 
 iO C ,§ I >3 *» 
 
 •2 s >3 « a 
 
 Cf. 
 
 S w ns 5 
 
 5 ■m id ^ 
 
 >3 " 
 
 a J S 
 
 P <« '© 
 
 03 >3 3= 
 
 ■ ill 
 
 G '«« 
 >3 10) — 
 
 ill 
 
 G 2 
 
 10) - 
 bJC 
 
 SSI 3?^ 
 
 c"8 53 ,5 £P^ i 
 B M 0,*3 c- g . 
 
 : a 
 
 ' cr 03 «s io c 
 
 't/Dirt 5 us '5 5 
 
 3 2 w ,a> ^ c 
 
 10 G ,§ ,§ >3 >£ 
 
 ci3 o o-o 5 a* a* 3 
 
 ia) i~ c : bc>o> 
 
 
 •f= SB 
 
 gun 
 
 uaginta 
 Ti millia 
 enta mil 
 centum 
 
 KB 5 
 
 §-s 
 
 2" 3 £Pt$ 
 
 G 0) 
 
 3 *j 3 ,^ 
 
 
 
 3 >a> 
 
 3 IV 3 >S 
 
 CT-O 
 
 C 0) 0~"T3 
 
 
 ^X 
 
 UU 3 Q U O i. hh 
 
 
 9 M » Q 
 
 OOOOOOiQ — QQQQQOOOOOO 
 u; 50t-»CiCiOOOOOOOOOOOOQ 
 
 '2§88! 
 
 i 1 
 
 ►f . £ 
 iv m » 
 
 "5.5 o- 
 
 •O S t G 
 
 » J w 
 
 X ^ .. 
 IO) s •• 
 
 1*8 
 
 ■ ^<K 
 .. Kj) g 
 
 2a2 
 
 G*. G "W 
 
 a'S.§ 
 
 ** «> a 
 
 CV. CU 03 
 
 •2 i&'H, 
 
 C- u 3 
 3 i2 ♦» 
 
 9 r ' 2 
 a sj 3 
 
 •rj » 03 
 
 1 s s 
 
 V "" 3 
 
 V P*.G 
 
 G G-.S 
 
 S» O w _ 
 
 g^ 02 g «<w 
 
 >^ 2 -3 
 
 B X ^ o © 
 
 S'3 o^'S 
 
 2 £• h 03" >^ 
 
 e- 5 =5 >3 G 
 
 5 ,5 2 «P 
 
 5 = 2 5 © 
 
 -•^ &d 
 
 «e P *» 2 •• 
 
 & *5 
 
2C 
 
 > 
 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 
 
 § 32. 
 
 Duo, two 
 
 , Tres, three, and Millia. thousands. 
 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 Dtio 
 
 dine 
 
 duo 
 
 Tres tri* 
 
 . . Millia 
 
 G. 
 
 Diiorum 
 
 duarum 
 
 duorum 
 
 Trlum 
 
 MI 11mm 
 
 D. 
 
 Diiobus 
 
 duabtis 
 
 duobtis 
 
 Tribiis 
 
 Millibus 
 
 A. 
 
 Duos 
 
 diias 
 
 dtio 
 
 Tres tri& 
 
 Millia 
 
 A. 
 
 Diiobus 
 
 duabus 
 
 diiobus 
 
 Tribiis 
 
 Millibus 
 
 Note 1. Ambo, both, is declined like Duo. 
 
 Note 2. The other Cardinal Numbers, from quattiior to centum, are 
 undeclined. MillS is also an undeclined Adjective. 
 
 DECLENSION OF PEONOUNS. 
 
 § 33. Pronomina, Pronouns, are 
 
 A. Personalia, Personal Pronouns : ego, /; tu, thou ; 
 
 sin, himself, herself, or themselves. 
 
 B. Possessiva, Possessive Pronouns, which are derived 
 
 from the Genitives of the Personal Pronouns : as, 
 metis, my, mine; tiius, thy, thine; suus, his, her, or 
 their own ; ndster, our ; vester, your. 
 C. Demonstrativa, Demonstrative Pronouns : hie, this ; 
 llle, Istg, that ; and Determinativa : is, that; ipse, 
 self; idem, the same. 
 T). Relativtjm, the Relative Pronoun qui. who or ivhich ; 
 Interrogativum, the Interrogative, quis, qui, who 
 or wkatt and their compounds. 
 
 34. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 A. PERSONALIA. 
 
 1 . — Pronoun of 1st Persoa. 
 
 Plur. 
 Nos, we 
 
 Nostri and nostrum, of us 
 Nobis, to or for us 
 Nos, us 
 Nobis, by, with, or from us. 
 
 2. — Pronoun of 2d Person. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Tii, thou Vos, ye 
 
 Tul, of thee Vestrl and vgstrum, of you 
 
 Tibi, to or for thee Vobis, to or for you 
 
 Te, thee . Vos, you 
 
 Te, by, with, ox from thee. I Vobis, by, with, or from you 
 
 Sing. 
 Ego,/ 
 Mei, of me 
 Ml hi, to or for me 
 Me, me 
 Me, by, with, or from me. 
 
OR WORD- FORMATION. 
 
 21 
 
 Obs 
 
 3. — Pronoun of 3d Person. 
 
 Sing, and Plur. 
 Nom. (wanting) 
 
 jjren. Sfil, of himself, herself or themselves 
 Dat. Sibi, to or for himself herself or themselves 
 Ace. Se or sese, himself herself or themselves 
 Abl. Se or sese, fry himself herself or themselves. 
 
 These Pronouns sometimes take tne syllable met : as, egomSt, 1 
 myself ; vosmSt, ye yourselves ; sibime't, to himself 
 
 I 35. 
 
 B. POSSESSIVA. 
 
 Metis, mea, meum ; tiiiis, tua, tiium ; suiis, sua, suum ; like bonus, § 24 
 Noster, nostra, nostrum ; vester, vestra, vestrum; like nigSr, § 24. 
 
 Obs. 1. Metis, Voc. Masc. mi. 
 
 lbs. 2. Gentilia Possessiva : nostr-as, -atfs, of our country ; vestr-a> 
 
 -arts, of your country ; cuj-as, -atis, of what country ? 
 Obs. 3. The Possessive Relative, cujiis, cuja, ciijum, whose? 
 
 § 36. C. DEMONSTRATIVA et DETERMEN' A 1 IV A. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 N 
 
 Hie hsec 
 
 hoc 
 
 Ille* 
 
 ilia 
 
 Illud 
 
 Is 
 
 ea 
 
 id 
 
 G. 
 
 Hujiis 
 
 
 
 Illius 
 
 
 
 Ejus 
 
 
 I). 
 
 Hulc 
 
 
 
 nii 
 
 
 
 EI 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Hfmc hanc 
 
 hoc 
 
 Ilium 
 
 Illam 
 
 mad 
 
 Eum 
 
 earn 
 
 Id 
 
 A. 
 
 Hoc hac 
 Plur. 
 
 hoc 
 
 1115 
 
 ilia 
 Plur. 
 
 Illo 
 
 Eo 
 
 ea 
 Plur. 
 
 eo 
 
 N 
 
 HI ha? 
 
 haec 
 
 iui 
 
 Ills 
 
 ilia 
 
 II 
 
 eee 
 
 ea 
 
 G. 
 
 Horum harumhorum 
 
 Illorum lllarum 
 
 Illorum 
 
 Eorum earum eorui/ 
 
 D. 
 
 His 
 
 
 
 mis 
 
 
 
 lis or els 
 
 A. 
 
 Hos has 
 
 hsec 
 
 lllos 
 
 Illas 
 
 Ilia 
 
 Eos 
 
 eas 
 
 ea 
 
 A. 
 
 His 
 
 
 
 mis 
 
 
 
 lis or els 
 
 Sing. 
 Nom. Idem eadem idem 
 Gen. Ejusdem 
 
 Dat. Eldem 
 
 Ace. Eiindem tandem idem 
 Abl. Eodem eadem eodem 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Ildem eadem gadem 
 
 Eorundem earundem eoriindem 
 
 Ilsdem or elsdem 
 Eosdem easdem eadem 
 
 Ilsdem or elsdem 
 
 Obs. Ist6 is declined like Ille ; Ipse like Ille, but with Neut. S. Ipsum 
 
 §37. 
 
 D. RELATIYUM. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Qui quae 
 
 quod 
 
 Qui qua? qua 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Cujiis 
 
 
 Quorum quarum quorum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Cui 
 
 
 Quibtis or quels 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Quern quaro 
 
 quod 
 
 Quos quas qure 
 
 Abl 
 
 Quo qua 
 
 qi»5 
 
 ► Qui bus or quels 
 
22 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 The following are mostly declined like Qui. 
 
 H) Quts, quid, and Qui, quse, quod; G. cujus, &c. ; who or whatt 
 (Interrogative.) 
 
 (2) Quis, qua, quid, any one. (Indefinite.) Qui is also used indefinitely. 
 
 (3) Quidam, quaklam, quoddam or qulddam ; G, cujusdam ; D. cuidam; 
 
 Ace. quendam, quandam, quoddam, &c. ; a certain one. 
 
 (4) QuivTs, quaWIs, quodvls or quidvis ; G. cujusvis ; any one. 
 
 (5) Quilibet, quaelihet, quodlibet or quIdllbSt ; G. cujuslibe't ; any one 
 
 (6) Quicunque, quieeunque, quodcunque' ; G. cujusciinque ; who or 
 
 whatsoever. 
 
 (7) Qulsnam, quid nam, and quinam, qusenam, quodnam ; G.cujusnam; 
 
 who or what ? 
 
 (8) Quisquls, Neut. quidquid ; Abl. quoquo ; who or whatsoever. 
 
 (9) Quisque, quseque, quodque or quidque, each. 
 
 (10) Quisquam [qiuequam], quidquam, any one. Plural wanting. 
 
 (11) Quisplam, quzepiam, quldpiam, any one. 
 
 (12) Aliquls, allqua, aliquld, and aliqui, aliqua?, aliquod, some one. 
 
 (13) Ecquis, ecqua, ecquid, and ecqul, ecquaj, ecquod, any one 9 
 
 (14) UnusquisquS, unaqua?que, uniimquodque or unumquldqufc ; Q. 
 
 iiniuscuj usque ; each one. 
 
 THE VEEB. 
 
 88. Verbs have Two Voices (Voces) : 
 
 (1) Vox Activa, the Active (or Doing) Voice : as, 
 
 amo, I love. 
 
 (2) Vox Passiva, the Passive (or Suffering) Voice : 
 
 as, amor, I am loved. 
 
 Verbs of the Active Voice are either 
 
 (1) Transitiva, acting on an object : as, amo Deum, 
 
 Hove God: or, 
 
 (2) Intransitiva, vel Neutra, expressing a state : 
 
 as, sto, I stand. 
 
 Obs. Neuter Verbs Active have no Passive Voice, except 
 as Impersonal s in the Third Persons Singular. 
 
 Deponentia, Deponent Verbs, though conjugated in 
 the Passive Voice chiefly, lay aside (depouunt) the 
 Passive, and take an Active signification: some 
 being Transitive ; as, hortor, / exhort ; some Neuter ; 
 as, morior, / die. 
 
OH WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 § 39. Verbs have Three proper Moods (Modi) : 
 
 23 
 
 Modus 4 
 
 (1) Indicatives, Indicative, for unconditional 
 action : as, amo, / love, 
 
 (2) Conjunctives. Conjunctive, for condi. 
 tional action : as, amem, / may love. 
 
 (3) Lviperativus, Imperative, for command 
 or entreaty : as, ama, love thou. 
 
 Ok*. The Conjunctive Mood in some of its uses is called Sub- 
 junctive, in some Potential. 
 
 Vorbs have also : 
 
 (1) Infinitivus, an Infinitive (improper) Mood, ex- 
 
 pressing the action of the Verb without re- 
 lations of Person : as, amare, to love, amavissS, 
 to have loved. 
 
 (2) Gerund i a, Gerunds; Three in number : 1 
 
 (a) ftmandi, of loving, O m 
 
 (b) amando, for or by loving, 
 
 (c) amandum, the loving ; 
 
 (3) Supina, Supines ; Two in number : 
 
 (a) amatum, to love, 
 
 (b) amatu, to be loved ; 
 
 4) Participia, Participles ; Two for each Voice : as, 
 
 » . f Present Part., amans, loving, 
 
 \ Future Part., amaturus, about to love. 
 
 p € . f Past Part., amatus. loved, 
 
 \ Part., in dim amandus, meet to beloved. 
 
 Ndte. Participles are so called, because they take part ot 
 the properties of Verbs, as Tense and Transitive 
 Power, and part of the properties of Adjectives, 
 as Case and Gender. Thus they are the Ad- 
 jectives of the Verb, as the Infinitive (with the 
 Gerunds and Supines) forms its Substantive. 
 
 § 40. Verbs have Six Tenses (Ternpora); Three for unfi- 
 nished action, Three for finished action 
 
24 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 Unfinished Action. 
 
 (1) Prjesens, Present; as, amo, I love, or am loving. 
 
 (2) Prjeteritum Imperfectum, Preterirnperfect : as, amabam, 
 
 / was loving. 
 
 (3) Futurum Imperfectum, vel Simplex, Future Imperfect 
 
 or Simple : as, amabo, / shall love, or shall be loving. 
 
 Finished Action. 
 
 (1) Prveteritum Perfectum, Preterperfect : as, amavl, 7 loved, 
 
 or have loved. 
 
 (2) Pr^eteritum Plusquamperfectum, Preterpluperfect : as, 
 
 amave'ram, I had loved. 
 (8) Futurum Perfectum vel Ex actum. Future Perfect or 
 Exact : as, amavero, / shall have loved. 
 
 § 41. Verbs are conjugated also by Two Numbers, Singulai 
 and Plural ; and by Three Persons in each Number : 
 
 The First expressing the Person! „ w „ _ , , - vr.«s«l*« „,', io 
 
 t> u ^ t ego amo, / love, nos amamus, we love. 
 
 or Persons who speak : as, J ° 
 
 The Second expressing the PerO 
 
 son or Persons to whom one L tu amas, thou lovest, vos amatis, ye lovu 
 
 speaks : as, - - J 
 
 The Third expressing that of | _ 11v ^ Vl » , -n- * - A \.i 7 
 
 , . , 1 t die amat, Ae Zoue*, ah amant, Mey lovt 
 
 which one speaks : as, w 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 
 
 § 42. There are Four Conjugations of Latin Verbs. 
 
 L The First Conjugation is known by a before re : as, 
 amare, h5rtare. 
 II. The Second Conjugation is known by e before re : 
 as, mSnere, v&rere. 
 
 III. The Third Conjugation is known by e before re: as, 
 
 regere, loquere. 
 
 IV. The Fourth Conjugation is known by i before re: 
 
 as, aiidire, partlre. 
 
 § 43. In order to conjugate a Latin Verb, it is necessary to 
 know : (1) The Present Indie. Act. 1st Person ; (2) 
 The Preterperfect Indie. Act. 1st Person ; (3) The 
 Infinitive Pres. Act. ; (4) The Supine in urn. For 
 from these the other Tenses may be derived. 
 
OR WORD- FORMATION 
 
 2.5 
 
 § 44. It is useful for the learner, when conjugating a Verb* 
 to mention also the 2d Person Sing. Pres. Indie. 
 Act., the Gerunds, Supines, and Participles. He will 
 therefore conjugate the Verbs as follows : — 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 1st Conj. 
 
 2d Conj. 1 
 
 3d Conj. 
 
 4th Conu 
 
 Pres. Ind. lit Pers. 
 
 am-o 
 
 mon-eo 
 
 reg-o 
 
 aud-io 
 
 „ 2d Pers. 
 
 am- as 
 
 mon-es 
 
 reg-Is 
 
 aud-is 
 
 Preterperfect 
 
 am-avi 
 
 mon-ui 
 
 rex-I 
 
 aud-ivi 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 am- are 
 
 mon-ere 
 
 reg-ere 
 
 aud-Ire 
 
 Gerund in di 
 
 am-andl 
 
 mon-endl 
 
 reg-endl 
 
 aud-iendi 
 
 „ do 
 
 am-ando 
 
 mon-endo 
 
 reg-endo 
 
 aud-^endo 
 
 „ dura 
 
 am-andum 
 
 mon-endum 
 
 reg-endum 
 
 aud-Iendura 
 
 Supine in urn 
 
 am-atum 
 
 mon-itum 
 
 rect-um 
 
 aud-itum 
 
 „ u 
 
 am-atu 
 
 mon-itu 
 
 rect-ii 
 
 aud-itu 
 
 Participle Present 
 
 ara-ans 
 
 mon-ens 
 
 reg-ens 
 
 aud-lens 
 
 „ Future 
 
 am-aturiis 
 
 mon-iturtis ^rect-urtis 
 
 aud-Iturtis 
 
 PASS 
 
 IVE VOICE. 
 
 Is* Conj. 
 
 2c? Conj. 1 3d Conj. 
 
 4th Conj. 
 
 Pres. Tnd. 1st Pers. am-or 
 
 mon-e'or reg-or 
 
 aud-ior 
 
 „ 2d Pers. am-aris 
 
 mon-eris |reg-eris 
 
 aud-Irls 
 
 Preterperfect iSm-atus sum 
 
 mon-itiis sum rect-iis sum 
 
 aud-itiis sum 
 
 Infinitive am-ari 
 
 mon-erl 
 
 reg-I 
 
 aud-iri 
 
 Participle Perfect am-atiis 
 
 mon-lttis 
 
 rect-us 
 
 aud-itiis 
 
 „ in dus am- and us 
 
 mon-endtis 
 
 reg-exidus 
 
 aud-iendus 
 
 EXAMPLES F< 
 
 OR CONJUGATION. 
 
 1st Conj., like am-o. 
 
 
 2d Conj., like mon-eo. 
 
 ar-6, I plough 
 
 
 hab-eo, I have 
 
 cert-o, / contend 
 
 
 deb-eo, I owe 
 
 clam -o, / cry out 
 
 
 terr-eo, I frighten 
 
 ciir-o, / regard 
 
 
 prohib-eo, I forbid 
 
 opt-o, I wish 
 
 
 exerc-eo, I exercise 
 
 piign-o, I fight 
 
 
 praeb-eo, I afford 
 
 nomln-o, / name 
 
 
 adhib-eo, I apply 
 
 iedlfic-o, I build. 
 
 
 cohib-eo, I restrain. 
 
 '3d Conj., like reg-o. 
 
 
 4th Conj., like aud-io. 
 
 teg-o, I cover 
 
 
 fm-io, lend 
 
 sug-o, / suck 
 
 
 pun-io, I punish 
 
 jung-o, I join 
 
 
 mun-io, /fortify 
 
 cing-o, I gird 
 
 
 nutr-to, / nourish 
 
 dic-o, I say 
 
 
 vest-io, / clothe 
 
 diic-o, Head 
 
 
 custod-io, I guard 
 
 vgh-o, I carry 
 
 
 Imp?d-lo, I hinder 
 
 coqu-o, j 
 
 1 cook 
 
 
 € 
 
 iud-io, Tins 
 
 truct. 
 
36 
 
 § 50. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 THE THIRD 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 S. Reg-o, I rule, 
 rSg-is, thou rulest 
 reg-lt, he rules 
 
 PL reg-lmus, we rule 
 reg-itls, ye rule 
 reg-unt, they rule 
 
 S. reg-ebam, I was 
 reg-ebas, thou wast 
 reg-ebat, he was 
 
 PL reg-ebam iis, we were 
 reg-ebatis, ye were 
 reg-ebant, they were 
 
 S. rex-I, I ruled 
 
 rex-isti, thou ruledst 
 rex-it, he ruled 
 
 PI. rex-imus, we ruled 
 rex-istis, ye ruled 
 rex-erunt, they ruled. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 reg-am, I may 
 reg-as. thou mayst 
 reg-at, he may 
 reg-amus, we may 
 reg-at is, ye may 
 reg-ant, they may 
 
 reg-erem, / might 
 reg-eres, thou mightst 
 reg-eret, he might 
 reg-erem iis, we might 
 reg-eret is, ye might 
 reg-erent, they might 
 
 rex-erim, I may 
 rex-eris, thou mayst 
 rex-erit, he may 
 rex-erimus, we may 
 rex-eritis, ye may 
 rex-erint, they may 
 
 S. rex-Sram, I had 
 rex -eras, thou hadst 
 rex-Srat, he had 
 
 PL rex-gramus, we had 
 rex-Sratis, ye had 
 rex-erant, they had 
 
 
 rex-issem, I would 
 rex-isses, thou wouldst 
 rex-Tsset, he would 
 rex-issemiis, we would 
 rex-issetls, ye would 
 rex-Issent, they would 
 
 S. r2g-am, I shall 
 rSg-es, thou shalt 
 reg-St, he shall 1^ 
 
 PI. reg-emiis, we shall \ ^ 
 reg-etis, ye shall 
 reg-ent, they shall 
 
 rect-urtis sim, / may 
 rect-urus sis, thou mayst 
 rect-urtis sit, he may 
 rect-uri si m iis, we may 
 rect-uri sitis, ye may 
 rect-im sint, they may 
 
 & 
 
 PL 
 
 rex-Sro, I shall 
 rex-eris, thou shalt 
 rex-erit, he shall 
 rex-erimtis, we shall 
 rex-eVitis, ye shall 
 rex-grint, they shall 
 
 f reg-endl, of ruling 
 Utrunds. < reg-end5, for or by ruling 
 [ rSg-endum, tne ruling 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 37 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 reg-e, r£g-lto, rule thou 
 reg-ito, let him rule 
 
 reg-itS, rtfgltote, rule ye 
 reg-unto, let them rule 
 
 rSg-grg, to rule, or 
 be ruling. 
 
 rSg-ens, ruling. 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 
 rex-isse, to have 
 ruled. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rect-umm essg, to 
 be about to rule. 
 
 rect-urtis, about to 
 rule. 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 Supines. < 
 
 ect-um, to rule. 
 ect-u, to be ruled. 
 
 
23 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 | 46. 
 
 THE FIRST 
 
 ACTTTB 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 i 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 d 
 
 5 
 
 S. Am-o, I love 
 
 am- as, thou lovest ~%^' 
 
 am-at, he loves 
 PL am-amus, we love 
 
 am-atis, ye love 
 
 am-ant, they love. 
 
 am-em, r may 
 am-es, thou mayst 
 am-et, he may 
 am- emus, we may 
 am-et is, ye may 
 am-ent, they may 
 
 ■J 
 
 
 5 
 
 cs 
 
 & 
 
 J 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 a, 
 
 S am-abam, / was 
 am-abas, thnu wast 
 am-abat, he was 
 
 PL am-abam lis, we were 
 am- abatis, ye were 
 am-abant, they were 
 
 ,5 
 
 am-arem, I might 
 am-ares, thou mightst 
 am-are't, he might 
 am-arem us, we might 
 am-aretis, ye might 
 am-arent, they might 
 
 •4 
 
 
 S. am-avl, I loved 
 
 Sm-avisti, thou lovedst 
 am-avl t, he loved 
 
 PL am-avlmiis, we loved 
 am-avl stls, ye loved 
 am-averunt, they loved. 
 
 am-averim, / may 
 am-averis, thou mavst -£ 
 am-averit, he may 1 § 
 am-averim us, we may I « 
 auri-averitls, ye may 3 
 am-averint, they may 
 
 
 <£ 
 
 o, 
 
 a 
 'a, 
 
 E 
 
 P* 
 
 J? 
 5 
 
 f 
 
 B 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 S. am-aveVam, T had 
 am-averas, thou hadst 
 am-averat, he had 
 
 PL am- ave ramus, we had 
 am-averatis, ye had 
 am-averant, they had _ 
 
 B 
 
 V' 
 
 5 
 „3 
 
 am-avissem, / would 
 am-avlsses, thou wouldst 
 am-avlssct, he would 
 am-avissemiis, we would 
 am-avissetis, ye would 
 am-avlssent, they would 
 
 b 
 
 | 
 
 
 S. am-abo, I shall 
 am-abis, thou shalt 
 am-abit, he shall 
 
 PL &m-ablmus, we shall 
 am-abitis, ye shall 
 am-abunt, they shall j 
 
 am-aturus sim, I may 
 am-aturus sis, thou ntayst 
 am-aturus sit, he may 
 am-aturl slmus, we may 
 am-atiiri sitis, ye may 
 am-aturl slut, they may 
 
 5 
 •2 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 3 
 
 S. Sm-avero, I shall 
 am-averis, thou shalt 
 &m -ave lit, he shall 
 
 Ft. am-averim us, we shall 
 am-averitls, ye shall 
 S,m- aver Int, they shall 
 
 8 
 
 "•-2 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 f am-andl, of loving 
 Gerunds. < am-ando, jfor or 6y loving 
 y am-andum, the loving. 
 
 
OR WORD- FORMATION. 
 
 «9 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 1 
 
 Imperative Mood. 1 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 am-a, am-ato, love thou 
 am-ato, let him love 
 
 am- atS, am-atote, love ye 
 am-anto, let them love. 
 
 am-arg, to love, or 
 be loving. 
 
 am-ans, loving. 
 
 
 
 
 
 am-avlss£, to hate 
 loved. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 am-atu rum ess£,fo 
 be about to love. 
 
 am-aturus, about 
 to love. 
 
 
 
 
 Supine,, f*™-^™''? 1 ™- 
 r ^ am-atu, to be loved. 
 
30 
 
 * 47. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 THE FIRST 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 i 
 
 G 
 
 S. Am-or, lam ^ 
 
 am-er, 7 may 
 
 
 * 
 
 am-aris, thou art J 
 
 am-eris, thou mayst 
 
 *8 
 
 
 H 
 
 am-atur, Ae is 1 •« 
 
 am-etiir, he may 
 
 
 c 
 
 PL am-amur, we are f » 
 
 am-emur, we may 
 
 -2 
 
 
 
 - - v - 1-2 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 am-amini, ye are 
 
 am-emml, ye may 
 
 «o 
 
 
 £ 
 
 am-antur, they are J 
 
 am-entiir, they may 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 S. am-abar, I was 
 
 
 am-arer, I might "j 
 
 
 am-abaris, thou wast 
 
 if 
 
 am-areris, thou mightst 1 ,. 
 am-aretur, he might 1 g 
 
 
 5. 
 
 .§ 
 
 am-abatiir, he icas 
 
 
 
 PL am-abamur, we were 
 
 g» 
 
 am-aremiir, we might f-2 
 
 
 0) 
 
 am-abamini, ye were 
 
 3 
 
 am-areminT, ye might 1 -o 
 
 £ 
 
 am-abantur, they were 
 
 o 
 
 am-arentiir, they might J 
 
 
 
 & am-atiis sum, / was 
 
 
 am-atiis sim, I may 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Sm-atus es, thou wast 
 
 
 am-atiis sis, thou mayst 
 
 S 
 
 
 S3 
 
 am-atiis est, he was 
 
 ■« 
 
 am-atus sit, he may 
 
 JN 
 
 
 1 & 
 
 OP 
 
 PL am-ati sum us, we were 
 
 
 am-ati simiis, we may 
 
 * £ 1 
 
 
 £ 
 
 Sm-ati estls, ye were 
 
 ""* 
 
 am-ati sltis, ye may 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 am-ati sunt, they were 
 
 
 am-ati sint, tliey may 
 
 
 
 'j 
 
 S. am-atiis eram, I had 
 
 -| 
 
 am-atiis essem, I would 
 
 
 
 I «2£ 
 
 am-atiis eras, thou hadst 
 
 "« 
 
 am-atiis esses, thou wonldst 
 
 8 
 
 
 1 
 
 am-atiis erat, he had 
 
 s> 
 
 am-atiis esset, he would 
 
 ►•S j 
 
 
 "5. 
 
 PL am-ati eramiis, we had 
 
 **f 
 
 am-ati essemiis, we would 
 
 sj 
 
 
 V 
 
 am-ati eratts, ye had 
 
 
 am-ati essetls, ye would 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 am-ati erant, they had 
 
 - 
 
 am-ati essent, they would 
 
 
 
 ii 
 i 
 
 B 
 
 S. am-abor, I shall 
 
 
 
 
 
 am-aberis, thou shalt 
 
 ll 
 
 
 
 am-abitiir, he shall 
 
 
 
 Pt. am-ablmiir, we shall f "§ 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 2 
 
 am-ablmlni, ye shall 1 -o 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 am-abuntiir, they shall J 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 S. Sm-attis £ro, / shall 
 
 
 
 
 am-atiis ens, thou shalt 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 am-atiis erlt, he shall 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 PL am-ati grimiis,tt;esAa7/ 
 
 g| 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 am-ati eritis, ye shall 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 am-atl &Tunt,they shall 
 
 
 
 
 ' " ■ 
 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 31 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Partieiphs. 
 
 
 am-arg, am-ator, be thou 
 am-ator, let him be 
 
 am-amirii, &m- aminor, be 
 am-antor, let them be 
 
 
 am-arl, to be loved. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 am-atum esse, to 
 have been loved. 
 
 am -fit lis, loved. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 am-atum Irl, to be 
 ahcvt to be loved. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sm-andfis, meet to 
 be loved. 
 
 UNIVFRQTTV 
 
3? 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 § 48. 
 
 THE SECOND 
 
 ACTH E 
 
 fivdicative Mood. 
 
 S. Mon-eo, I advise 
 mon-es, thou advisest 
 mon-et, he advises 
 
 PL mon-emus, we advise 
 mon-etls, ye advise 
 mon-ent, they advise. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 mon-eam, / may 
 mon-eas, thou mayst i 
 mon -eat, he may 
 mon-eam us, we may i 
 mon-eatls, ye irjiy 
 mon-eant, they may j 
 
 S. mon-ebam, / was 
 mon-ebas, thou wast 
 mon-ebat, he was 
 
 PL mon-ebamfis, we were 
 mon-ebat is, ye were 
 mon-ebant, they were 
 
 mdn-erem, / might 
 mon-eres, thou mightst 
 mon-eret, he might 
 mon-eremus, we might 
 mon-eretls, ye might 
 mon-erent, they might _ 
 
 S. mon-iii, / advised 
 
 mon-uistl, iuou advisedst 
 mon-irit, he advised 
 
 PL mon-ulmus, we advised 
 mon-ulstis, ye advised 
 mon-uerunt, they advised. 
 
 mou-uerim, / may 
 mon-ueris, thou mayst 
 mon-uerit, he may 
 mon-uerimus, we m r 
 mon -fieri tis, ye ma 
 mon-uerint, they v.ay / 
 
 ► § 
 
 S. mon-fieram, I had 
 mon-ueras, thou hadst 
 mon-iierat, he had 
 •§. j PL mon-ueramfis, we had 
 
 mon-ueratls, ye had 
 mon-uerant, they had j 
 
 mon-fussem, / would 
 mon-uisses, thou wouldst 
 mon-uisset, he would 
 mon-ulssemus, we wotdd 
 mon uissetis, ye would 
 mon-uissent, they would t 
 
 PL 
 
 mon- ebo, T shall 
 mon-ebis, thou shalt 
 mon-ebit, he shall 
 mon-ebimiis, we. shall 
 mon-ebltis, ye shall 
 mon-ebunt, they shall _ 
 
 mon-iturtis sim, I may 
 mon-Iturus sis, thou mayst 
 mon-iturus sit, he may 
 mon-ituri slmus, we may 
 mon-ituri sitts, ye may 
 mon-ituri sint, they may 
 
 1 J 
 
 S. mon-iiero, I shall 
 mon-ueris, thou shalt 
 mon- fieri t, he shall 
 
 PI. mon-fierimus, we shall 
 mon-ueritis, ye shall 
 mon-iie'rlnt, they shall __ 
 
 {mon-endl, of advising 
 mon-endo, for or by advising 
 mon-endum, the advising. 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 33 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 • 9 • • • 
 
 mon»S, mon-eto, advise thou 
 mon-eto, let him advise 
 
 ■ mon-et§, mon-etote', advise ye 
 j mon-ento, let them advise. 
 
 mon-erS, to advise, 
 or be advising. 
 
 mon-Sns, advising 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 mon-ulssg, to have 
 advised. 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 mon-iturum ess£, 
 to he about to ad- 
 vise. 
 
 mon-lturiis, about 
 to advise. 
 
 
 
 
 r~ — 
 
 Suptnes. < 
 
 non-itum, to advise 
 non-itu, to be advise 
 
 d. 
 
54 
 
 § 49. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 THE SECOND 
 
 PASSTVE 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 S. Mon-Sor, lam 
 mon-eris, thou art 
 mon-etur, he is 
 
 PL mon-emiir, we are 
 mon-emini, ye are 
 mon-entur, they are j 
 
 S. mon-ebar, 1 was 
 
 mon-ebarls, thou wast 
 mon-ehatur, he was 
 
 PL mon-eb.'imiir, we were 
 mon-ebamlni, ye were 
 mon-ebantiir, they were 
 
 S. mon-itus sum, / was 
 mo n- it us es, thou wast 
 mon-itus est, he. was 
 
 PL mon-iti stimiis, we were 
 mon-iti estis, ye were 
 mon-lti sunt, they were 
 
 S. mon-itus eram, I had 
 mon-ltiis eras, thou hadst 
 mon-itus erat, he had 
 
 PL mon-iti eram us, we had 
 m6n-iti eratls, ye had 
 non-lti erant, they had 
 
 S. mon-ebur, / shall 
 mon-eberls, thou shalt 
 mon-ebltur, he shall 
 
 PI. mon-ebimur, we shad 
 mon-eblmini, ye shall 
 mon-ebuntiir, they shall 
 
 S. itton-Hus Sro, / shall "1 
 mon-ltiis &ris, thou shalt \ s .. 
 mon-itus grit, he shall [& % 
 
 PL mon- ill SrlmuSfWe shall f a -| 
 mon-iti eYitis, ye shall 4: 3 
 mon-lti Srunt, they shall \ 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 mon-ear, / may 
 mon- earls, thou may est 
 mon-eatiir, he may 
 mon-eamur, we may 
 mon-eaminl, ye may 
 mon-eantiir, they may 
 
 mon-erer, / might 
 mon-ereris, thou mightst 
 mon-eretiir, he might 
 mon-eremur, we might 
 uion-eremlni, ye might 
 mon-erentiir, they might 
 
 mon-itus sim, / may 
 mon-ltiis sis, thou may si 
 mon-itus sit, he may 
 mon-lti simus, we may 
 mon-iti sitls, ye may 
 mon-lti sint, they may 
 
 mon-itus essem, I would 
 inon-itus t±sses,thouwouldst 
 mon-itiis esset, be would 
 mon-iti esscmus,M/'<? would 
 mon-lti essetis, ye woUd 
 mon-iti essent, they would 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 86 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Imfinitive Mood. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 
 mon-erS, m5n-etor, be thou 
 mon-etor, let him be 
 
 [be ye 
 mon-eminl, mon-eminor, 
 mon-entor, let them be 
 
 
 mon-erl, to be ad- 
 vised. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 mon-ltum esse, to 
 have been advised. 
 
 mon-ittis, advised. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m5n-ttumlrl, to be 
 about to be advised. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iD^n-endfis, meet 
 to be advised. 
 
36 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 < 50. 
 
 THE THIRD 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 1 
 
 Indicative Mood 
 
 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 I 
 1 
 
 S. Reg-o, I rule, 
 rSg-is, thou rulest 
 reg-1t, he rules 
 
 Pi. reg-imiis, we rule 
 reg-ltis, ye rule 
 reg-unt, they rule 
 
 reg-am, I may 
 reg-as. thou mayst 
 reg-at, he may ^ 
 reg-am us, we may j [[ 
 reg-atis, ye may 
 reg-ant, they may 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 • 
 
 S. r^g-ebam, / was 
 reg-ebas, thou wast 
 reg-ebat, he was 
 
 PL reg-ebamus, we were 
 reg-ebat is, ye were 
 reg-ebant, they were 
 
 s 
 
 reg-erem, / might 
 reg-gres, thou mightst 
 reg-eret, he might j& 
 reg-eremiis, we might f £ 
 reg-eretis, ye might 
 reg-erent, they might 
 
 
 a. 
 a 
 
 1 
 1 P-. 
 
 5 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 S. rex-i, I ruled 
 
 rex-Istl, thou ruledst 
 rex-it, he ruled 
 
 PI. rex-imus, we ruled 
 rex-istis, ye ruled 
 rex-eriint, they ruled. 
 
 rex-erim, / may 
 rex-eris, thou mayst 
 rex-erit, he may 
 rex-erimiis, we may 
 rex-eritis, ye may 
 rex-erint, they may 
 
 e 
 
 5 
 
 
 S. rex-eram, I had 
 rex -eras, thou hadst 
 rex-erat, he had 
 
 PL rex-eramiis, we had 
 rex-eratts, ye had 
 rex-erant, they had 
 
 "8* 
 
 "•1 
 
 k 
 
 rex-issem, I would 
 rex-isses, thou wouldst 
 rex-isset, he would 
 rex-Issemtis, we would 
 rex-lssetis, ye would 
 rex-lssent, they would 
 
 1 
 a 
 
 * k 
 
 6 
 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 a. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 S. reg-am, I shall 
 reg-es, thou shalt 
 reg-et, he shall 
 
 PL reg-emus, we shall 
 reg-etis, ye shall 
 reg-ent, they shall 
 
 >4 
 
 t 
 
 rect-urus sim, / may 
 reet-uriis sis, thou may^ 
 rect-urtis sit, he may 
 rect-urT simiis, we may 
 rect-uri sitis, ye may 
 rect-uri sint, they may 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 V 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 Ex 
 
 S. rex-gro, I shall 
 rex-eris, thou shalt 
 rex-erit, he shall 
 
 PL rex-erimiis, we shall 
 rex-gritis, ye shall 
 rex-Srint, they shall 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 f reg-endl, of ruling 
 Gtrunds. < rgg-endo, for or by ruling 
 (^reg-endum, tne ruling 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 37 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood, 
 
 Infinitive Mood, 
 
 reg-e, rgg-lto, rule thou 
 reg-ito, let him rule 
 
 reg-itg, rSgltote, rule ye 
 reg-unto, let them rule 
 
 r£g-£rg, to rule, or 
 be ruling. 
 
 rex-isse, to have 
 ruled. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 r£g-ens, ruling. 
 
 rect-urum essS, to 
 be about to rule. 
 
 rect-uriis, about to I 
 rule. 
 
 o . f rect-um, to rule, 
 upines. | r g Ct _ G) tQ fo ru i ec i 9 
 
38 
 
 § 51. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 THE THIKD 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 - 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 6 
 1 
 h 
 
 c 
 9 
 S 
 
 c 
 
 S. Reg-or, /am 
 reg-eris t thou art 
 reg-lttir, he is 
 
 PL reg-imur, we are 
 reg-lminl, ye are 
 reg-untiir, they are 
 
 3 
 
 reg-ar, / may 
 reg-aris, thou mayst 
 reg-atiir, he may 
 reg-amiir, we may 
 reg-aminl, ye may 
 reg-antiir, they may 
 
 ■d 
 
 -Si 
 ► s 
 
 k 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 1 s 
 
 & 
 
 m 
 
 S. reg-ebar, I was 
 
 reg-ebaris, thou wast 
 reg-ebatiir, he was 
 
 PL reg-ebamur, we were 
 reg-ebamini, ye were 
 reg-ebantur, they wrre 
 
 ■d 
 > 
 
 J 
 
 reg-erer, / might 
 reg-ereris, thou mightst 
 reg-eretiir, he might 
 reg-eremur, we might 
 reg-eremini, ye might 
 rgg-erentiir, they might 
 
 "d 
 
 <5 
 
 
 S. rect-us sum, I was ' 
 rect-iis Ss, thou wast 
 rect-iis est, he was 
 
 PL rect-I siimus, we were 
 rect-I estis, ye were 
 rect-I sunt, they were 
 
 •d 
 
 rect-iis sim, / may "i 
 rect-iis sis, thou mayst J « 
 rect-us sit, he may 1 <> "5 
 rect-I slmiis, we may C » jj 
 rect-I sltis, ye may 1 4» 
 rect-I slnt, they may 
 
 
 "5. 
 
 S. rect-iis eram, / had 
 rect-iis eras, thou hadst 
 rect-iis erat, he had 
 
 PL rect-I eram iis, we had 
 rect-I eratis, ye had 
 rect-I erant, they had 
 
 >x3 
 
 s 
 
 rect-iis essem, / would 
 rect-us esses, thou wouldst 
 rect-iis esset, he would 
 rect-I essem iis, we would 
 rect-I essetis, ye would 
 rect-I essent, they would 
 
 * 1 "3 
 
 < 
 
 
 8 
 a 
 
 S 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 S. rSg-ar, I shall 
 
 reg-eris, thou shalt 
 reg-etiir, he shall 
 
 PL reg-emur, we shall 
 reg-eminl, ye shall 
 reg-entiir, they shall - 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 a> 
 
 1 
 
 S. rect-iis ero, I shall 
 rect-iis eris, thou shalt 
 rect-iis erit, he shall 
 
 PL rect-I grim us, we shall 
 rect-I Sritls, ye shall 
 rect-I grunt, they shall 
 
 1 
 
 •< 
 
 
 
 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 r&g-ere, reg-itor, be thou 
 rSg-itor, let him be 
 
 re'g-imlnl, reg-imlnor, be 
 rdg-untor, let them be 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 reg-I, to be ruled. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 rectum essS, to -_. y o , . 
 . ' : rect-us, ruled, 
 
 have been ruled. 
 
 rec-tum Iri, to be 
 about to be ruled. 
 
 r£g-endua, meet 
 to be ruled. 
 
40 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 THE FOURTH 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood, 
 
 
 6 
 a 
 h 
 
 i 
 
 £ 
 
 B 
 a; 
 
 •jfi 
 
 o 
 
 a, 
 
 S 
 5 
 
 S. Aud-lo, I hear 
 aud-ls, thou hear est 
 aud-it, he hears 
 
 PL aud-Imiis, we hear 
 aud-itls, ye hear 
 aud-iunt, they hear. 
 
 aiid-iam, I may 
 aud-las, thou mayst 
 aud-iat, he may 
 aud-iamiis, we may 
 aud-iatis, ye may 
 aud-iant, they may 
 
 
 
 S. aud-iebam, T was 
 aud-lebas, thou uast 
 aud-iebat, he was 
 
 PL aud-iebamus, we were 
 aud-iebat is, ye were 
 aud-iebant, they were 
 
 g 
 < 
 
 aiid-irem, I might 
 aud-lres, thou mightst 
 aiid-lret, he might 
 aud-iremus, we might 
 aud-iretis, ye might 
 aud-irent, they might 
 
 i 
 
 9 
 
 
 S. aiid-lvi, / heard 
 
 aud-lvlstl, thou heardst 
 aud-lvit, he heard 
 
 PL aud-ivimus, we heard 
 aud-lvlstis, ye heard 
 aiid-lverunt, they heard. 
 
 aud-lverim, / may 
 aud-lveris, thou mayst 
 aud-lverit, he may 
 aud-lverimus, we may 
 aud-lveritis, ye may 
 aud-lverint, they may 
 
 B 
 
 
 S. aud-iveram, I had 
 aud-lveras, thou hadst 
 aud-lverat, he had 
 
 PL aud-iveram iis, we had 
 aud-lveratis, ye had 
 aud-lverant, they had 
 
 
 aud-lvlssem, / would 
 aud-lvlsses, thou wouldst 
 aud-ivisset, he ivould 
 aud-lvlssemtis, we would 
 aud-lvlssetis, ye would 
 aud-ivissent, they would 
 
 6 
 
 
 J5 
 
 Pi 
 
 i 
 & 
 
 S. aud-lam, / shall 
 aud-ies, thou shalt 
 aud-let, he shall 
 
 PL aud-iemiis, we shall 
 aiid-letis, ye shall 
 aud-ient, they shall J 
 
 
 aud-lturiis sim, I may 
 aud-lturiis sis, thou mayst 
 aud-lturiis sit, he may 
 aud-lturl slmiis, we may 
 aud-lturl sitis, ye may 
 aud-lturl sint, they may 
 
 © 
 
 
 1 
 I 
 
 S. aiid-Tvero, I shall 
 aud-lveris, thou shalt 
 aud-lverlt, he shall 
 
 PL aud-lverimus, we shall 
 aud-lveVitls, ye shall 
 aud-lverint, they shall 
 
 3 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 f aud-lendl, 0/ hearing 
 Gerunds. < aud-iendo, /or or oy hearing 
 (^ aud-iendum. Me hearing. 
 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 41 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 j 
 
 aud-I, aud-lto, hear tJiou 
 aud-ito, let him hear 
 
 aud-ite, aud-Itote, hear ye 
 aud-Iunto, let them hear. 
 
 aud-irg, to hear, or 
 be hearing. 
 
 aud-Iens, hearing. 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 aud-lvlss£, to have 
 heard. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aud-iturum essS, to 
 be about to hear. 
 
 aud-iturtis, about 
 to hear. 
 
 
 
 
 „ . j"aud-Itum, to hear 
 1 ? ' I aud ltu, to be heard. 
 
12 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 53. 
 
 THE FOURTH 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 6 
 c 
 h 
 g 
 
 CD 
 
 S. Aud-ior, / am 
 
 aud-Iris, thou art 
 
 aud-ittir, he is "^ 
 Pi. aud-imiir, we are \ | 
 
 aud-imini, ye are 
 
 aud-iunttir, they are J 
 
 aud-iar, I may 
 aud-Iaris, thou mayst 
 aud-iatur, he may 
 aud-iamtir, we may 
 aud -Xamlni, ye may 
 aud-iantiir, they may 
 
 J 
 
 
 5 
 
 B 
 
 P. 
 C 
 
 CD 
 &. 
 
 B 
 
 & aiid-iebar, /was 
 
 aud-iebaris, Mom was^ 
 aud-iebattir, he was 
 
 PL aud-tebamiir, we were 
 aud-iebamlni, ye were 
 aud-iebanttir, they were 
 
 
 aud-irer, I might 
 aud-irer is, thou mightst 
 aud-iretiir, he might 
 aud-iremiir, we might 
 aud-iremini, ye might 
 aud-Irenttir, they might 
 
 8 
 
 - <*> 
 
 
 S. aud-itus sum, / was 
 aud-ltus es, thou wast 
 aud-itus est, he wis 
 
 PL aud-iti sum iis, we were 
 aud-"it? estls, ye were 
 aud-iti &uui, they were 
 
 
 aud-itus sim, I may 
 aud-itiis sis, thou mayst 
 aud-itiis sit, he may 
 aud-iti simiis, we may 
 aud-iti sitis, ye may 
 aud-iti sint, they may 
 
 ft 
 
 ■« S 
 5 .2 
 
 ' 
 
 ti 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 "5. 
 b 
 b 
 
 S. aud-ltus eram, / had 
 aud-itus eras, thou hads 
 aud-itus erat, he had 
 
 PL aud-iti eramiis, we had 
 aud-iti erutls, ye had 
 aud-iti erant, they had 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 u 
 J 
 
 aud-itiis essem, I would 
 aud-itiis esses, thou wculdst 
 aud-itiis esset, he would 
 aud-iti essemiis, we would 
 aud-iii essetis, ye would 
 aud-iti essent, they would 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 b 
 g 
 
 S. aiid-tar, 7 shall 
 
 aud-ieris, thou shalt 
 s aud-ietiir, he shall 
 
 PL aud-iemur, we shall 
 aud-iemini, ye shall 
 aud-Ientiir, they shall ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 8 
 
 £ 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 fa 
 
 S. aud-itus 2ro, / shall 
 aud-itus er is, thou shalt 
 aud-itiis erit, he shall 
 
 PL aud-iti ertm u s, we shall 
 aud-iti iritis, ye shall 
 aud-iti Srunt, they shall 
 
 8 
 6 "3 
 
 M 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 43 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 aud-ire', aud-itor, be thou 
 aud-itor, let him be 
 
 {ye 
 aud-imlnl, aud-iminor, be 
 aud-luntor, let them be 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 aud-Irl, to be heard. 
 
 Participles, 
 
 aud-itum esse, to 
 have been heard. 
 
 aud-itum IrT, to be 
 about to be heard, 
 
 aud-Itfis, heard. 
 
 'aud-lend&s. meet 
 to be heard. 
 
*4 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 ON THE SIGNS OF THE TENSES. 
 
 § 54. Most of the Tenses have more than one Sign, or may 
 be put into English in more than one way, though in 
 the foregoing tables only one is given. 
 
 SIGNS OF TENSES IN THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pres. Amo, / — love, or am loving, 
 
 Preterimp. Amabam, / — loved, or was loving, or used to love, 
 
 Preterperf. Amavi, 1 — loved, or have loved. 
 
 Preterplup. Amaveram, / had loved. 
 
 Fut. Imp. Amabo, / — shall or will — love, or be loving. 
 
 Fut. Perf. Amaver5, 1 — shall or will — have loved. 
 
 SIGNS OF TENSES IN THE CONJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 WHEN POTENTIAL. 
 
 Pres. Amem, / — may, or can, or would, or should, or 
 
 could — love, or be loving. 
 Preterimp. Amarem, / — might, or would, or should, or could 
 
 — love, or be loving, or have been loving. 
 Preterperf. Amaverim, 1 — may, or can, or might, or would, 
 
 or should, or could — have loved, or love. 
 Preterplup. Amavissem, / — might, or would, or should, or 
 
 could — have loved. 
 
 §55. 
 
 Note 1. When the Conjunctive Mood is truly Subjunctive (that is to say, 
 subjoined to governing Conjunctions or Relative Pronouns,} 
 it often has the same signs as the Indicative: as, 
 
 Laudaberis modo parentis. 
 
 Thou wilt be praised if thou obeyest. 
 
 Laudabar quum pdrerem. 
 
 I was praised when I obeyed. 
 
 Laudatur qu6d pdruerit. 
 
 He is praised because he obeyed 
 
 LaiidavT Sura qui pdruisset. 
 
 I praised him who had obeyed. 
 
 Note 2. The Present Conjunctive is also used for the Imperative Mood : 
 as, 
 Act. Amem, may I love, or let me love. 
 
 Ames, mayst thou love, or love thou. 
 Amet, may tie love, or let him Love. 
 Amemiis, may we love, or let us love. 
 Ametis, may ye love, or love ye. 
 Anient, may they love, or let them love 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 46 
 
 Pass. A mer, may / be loved, or let me be loved. 
 
 Ameris, mayst thou be loved, or be thou loved. 
 Ametiir, may he be loved, or let him be loved. 
 Amemur, may ive be loved, or let us be loved. 
 Ameminl. may ye be loved, or be ye loved. 
 Amentur, may they be loved, or let them be loved. 
 
 A T o£e 3. The Infinitive in re stands for the Preterimperfect as well as 
 for the Present Tense : and the Infinitive in isse stands for 
 the Preterpluperfect as well as for the Preterperfect Tense : as 
 
 (1) Dicit me amare. 
 He says {that) I am loving. 
 Dixit me amare. 
 He said {that) I was loving. 
 
 (2) Dicit me amavlsse. 
 
 He says (that) I loved, or have loved. 
 Dixit me amavlsse. 
 
 He said (that) I had loved. 
 
 VERBS JSf 10 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 § 56. Verbs in io of the Third Conjugation, in the Tenses 
 derived from the Present-stem, throw away i before 
 another i ; but keep it before a, o, u, and e, except 
 before er or e final : as, rapi-5, rap-e, rapi-iint, 
 rap-erg, rapi-ebam, rapi-am, rap-erem, rap-i, rapi- 
 ens, &c. These Verbs are the following with their 
 compounds : 
 
 Capio. ciipio, facio, jacio, 
 Fugio, fodio, pari 5, lacio, 
 Rapio, sapio, specio, quatio, 
 GrSdicr, morior, potior, patior. 
 
 J 57. VARIETIES OF FORM. 
 
 (a) The following changes are made in the several Con- 
 jugations, chiefly by the poets : 
 
 1. Avis into as ; as, amasti for amavisti ; zimasse for 
 amavisse. 
 Aver into ar ; as, amarunt for amaverunt ; amaram 
 for amaveram. 
 
46 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 II. Evis into es ; as, implessem for lmplevissem * lmplessB 
 for Implevlsse. 
 Ever into er ; as, Implerunt for impleverunt ; implero 
 for implevero. 
 IV. Iv into i; as, audiit for audlvit; atidierunt for au- 
 dlverunt. 
 Ivis into m, or is ; as, audiisse and audisse for audi- 
 vlsse. 
 
 Note. Novl, in the Third Conjugation, changes wis into os ; as, nostl 
 for novisti : and over into or ; as, noram for noveram. Petlvi 
 from peto, and desivi from destno, take the same changes as 
 Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 (Jb) The Third Person Plural of the Preterperfect Active 
 often ends in ere instead of erunt; as, 
 
 Amaveriint or amaverS. 
 Monueriint or monuerfi. 
 Rexeriint or rexere. 
 Audlverunt or audlvere. 
 
 Note. We must not change dvSre into are", or Svere" into Srt : 
 thus, amavere must not become amare, nor iUipleVerl 
 ImplerS, because these are the forms of the Infinitive. 
 
 (c) In the Second Persons Singular of several Passive 
 Tenses, re is often put for ris ; as, 
 
 I. Amabaris or amabare ; amaberis or amabere. 
 Aniens or amere ; amareris or amarere. 
 
 II. Monebaris or monebare ; moneberis or monebere. 
 Monearis or moneare ; monereris or monerere. 
 
 III. Eegebaris or r6gebare ; regeris or rggere. 
 Regans or regare ; regereris or regerere. 
 
 IV. Audiebaris or audiebare ; audieris or audiere. 
 Audiaris or audiare ; audireris or audlrere. 
 
 Note, It is not usual to write re for ris in the Second Person 
 Present Passive, on account of the confusion with Infin. 
 Act. and Imperat. Pass. But in Deponent Verbs the 
 change is less objectionable ; as, hortarS for hortaris. 
 
 (d) In the Passive Tenses formed with the Auxiliary Verb 
 sum, fiii may be used for sum ; fueram for eram ; 
 fuero for ero ; fiierim for sim ; and tuissem for es- 
 sem ; with a stronger past force : as, 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 47 
 
 Amatus 
 Monitus 
 Rectus 
 Audittis 
 
 sum or f iil, I ivas, or have been 
 eram or fueram, / had been 
 ero or fuero, I shall have been 
 sim, or fiierim, I may have been 
 ta essem, or fuissem, I should have been 
 
 loved, 
 advised, 
 ruled, 
 heard. 
 
 (e) Dico, diico, facio make in the Second Person Imperative 
 
 die, due, fac. 
 
 (f) The old Infinitive Passive in ier for % is sometimes used 
 
 by the epic poets ; as, amarier for amarl. 
 
 (g) The Participle in dus of 3d and 4th Conj. is sometimes 
 
 formed in undus as well as endus, especially that of 
 Verbs in to ; as faciendus or faciundus. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 
 
 § 58. The Participles in rus and dus maybe conjugated with 
 all the Tenses of the Verb sum : and this is called 
 the Periphrastic Conjugation ; as, 
 
 (/) am 
 
 was 
 
 Amaturus sum 
 
 — es 
 
 — est 
 Amaturi sumiis 
 
 — estis 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 have 
 been 
 ffi 
 
 fulsti 
 ftttt 
 
 fuimiis 
 fuistis 
 
 eram 
 
 Sras 
 
 erat 
 
 eramus 
 
 eratis 
 
 shall 
 
 be 
 er5 
 eris 
 erit 
 erimus 
 eritis 
 
 shall have 
 
 been 
 fuero 
 ffi eris 
 fuerlt 
 fuerimiis 
 fueritis 
 
 — sunt erant fiierunt erunt fuerlnt 
 
 And the other Moods in like manner. 
 
 3 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Amandiis 
 
 Am and I 
 
 (/) am 
 
 sum 
 
 es 
 
 est 
 
 sumiis 
 
 estis 
 
 sunt 
 
 was 
 
 eram 
 
 eras 
 
 erat 
 
 gramiis 
 
 eratis 
 
 erant 
 
 have 
 been 
 fui 
 fulsti 
 
 flllt 
 
 fuimiis 
 
 fuistis 
 
 fuerunt 
 
 shall 
 be 
 6ro 
 ens 
 grit 
 erimus 
 eritis 
 erunt 
 
 shall have 
 
 been 
 fuero 
 fueris 
 fiierit 
 fuerimiis 
 fueritis 
 fuerlnt 
 
 -I *« 
 
 And the other Moods in like manner. 
 Aoto, The Participle in dus is often called the Gerundive. 
 
48 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 § 59 Deponent Verbs follow the Passive Conjugation, but 
 take also Gerunds, Supines, and Participles Active. 
 Intransitive Deponents want the Supine in u, and 
 Participle in dus. 
 
 Ca) CONJUGATION OF TRANSITIVE DEPONENTS. 
 
 1 
 / exhort. 
 
 H5rt- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hurt- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 Hort- 
 
 or 
 
 aris 
 
 at us sum 
 
 art 
 
 andi 
 
 ando 
 
 andum 
 
 atum 
 
 atu. 
 
 ans 
 
 atiis 
 
 aturiis 
 
 and iis. 
 
 fear, 
 
 ver-eor 
 
 ver-eris 
 
 ver-ittis sum 
 
 ver-erl 
 
 ver-endl 
 
 ver-end5 
 
 ver-endum 
 
 ver-itum 
 
 ver-itu 
 
 ver-ens 
 
 ver-ittis 
 
 ver-ituriis 
 
 ver-endus. 
 
 3 
 speak, 
 loqu-5r 
 loqu-eris 
 locu-tus sum 
 16qu-I 
 loqu-endl 
 loqu-endo 
 loqu-endum 
 locu-tum 
 locu-tu 
 loqu-ens 
 locu-tiis 
 locu-turiis 
 loqu-endiis. 
 
 4 
 divide. 
 part-ior 
 part-iris 
 part-itiis sum 
 part-irl 
 part-iendl 
 part iendo 
 part-iendum 
 part-itum 
 part-itu 
 part-iens 
 part-itiis 
 part-Iturus 
 part-iendus. 
 
 {b) CONJUGATION OF INTRANSITIVE DEPONENTS 
 
 1 2 
 
 I wander, 
 
 Vag-or 
 
 Vag-aris 
 
 Vag-atiis sum 
 
 Vag-arl 
 
 Vag-andl 
 
 Vag-ando None 
 
 Vag-andum 
 
 Vag-atum 
 
 Vag-ans 
 
 Vag-atus 
 
 Vag-aturus. 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 fall, 
 
 fawn. 
 
 lab-or 
 
 bland-ior 
 
 lab-ens 
 
 bland-iris 
 
 lap-sus sum 
 
 bland-itiis sunr. 
 
 lab-i 
 
 bland-iri 
 
 lab-endi 
 
 bland-iendl 
 
 lab-endo 
 
 bland-iendo 
 
 lab-endum 
 
 bland-iendum 
 
 lap-sum 
 
 bland-itum 
 
 lab-ens 
 
 bland-iens 
 
 lap-siis 
 
 bland-itus 
 
 lap-surus. 
 
 bland-itiiriis. 
 
OR WORD -FORMATION 49 
 
 VERBA DERIVATA, DERIVED VERBS. 
 
 § 60. I. Frequentativa, Frequentative Verbs, express the 
 repetition of an action, are of the 1st Conjuga- 
 tion, and end in -ito, -to, -tor : as, rog-ito, / ask 
 often, from r5g-o ; mm-itor, I threaten often, 
 from min-or ; can-to, I sing often, from can-o. 
 II. Inceptiva or Inehoativa, Inceptive Verbs, express 
 the beginning of an action, are of the 3rd Con- 
 jugation, and end in -asco, -esco, -isco. 
 Some are derived from Verbs : as, 
 Lab-asco, I begin to totter; from lab-o, (lab-as). 
 Pall-esco, / turn pale ; „ pall-eo, (pall-es). 
 
 Trem-isco, I begin to tremble; „ trem-o, (trem-is). 
 Sc-isco, / begin to know ; „ sci-o, (scis). 
 
 Some from Nouns : as, 
 
 Puer-asco, / become a boy ; from puer. 
 Mlt-esco, I become mild; „ niltis. 
 
 III. Desiderativa, Desiderative Verbs, express the de- 
 sire of an action, are of the 4th Conjugation, end- 
 ing in -urio^and derived from Supines in -um : as, 
 Es-iiri5, / am hungry ; from ed5, es-um. 
 
 VERBA ANOMALA, IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 § 61. Irregular Verbs are such as do not form their Tenses 
 according to the common rules : as, 
 
 (1) Possum, potes, potiil, posse, potuisse, potens, to be able. 
 
 (2) Volo, vis, voltil, velle, voltiisse, volendi, volendo, volen- 
 
 dum, volens, to be willing. 
 
 (3) Nolo, n on vis, nolm, nolle, noliiisse, nolendi, nolendo, 
 
 nol(~ndum, nolens, to be unwilling. 
 
 (4) Mal5, mi* vis. malul, malle, maluisse, malendi, malendo 
 
 malendum, malens, to be more ivilling. 
 
 (5) Eo, is, Ivi, ire, Ivisse, itiirum esse, Sundi, eundo, eun- 
 
 dum, itum, Itu, guns or lens, lturiis, to go. 
 
 (6) Fero,fers. ttili, ferre, tiilisse, laturum esse, fer£ndi, fer- 
 
 endo, ferendum, latum, latu, ferens, laturtis, to bear 
 
 (7) Flo, fis, factus sum, fieri, factum esse, factum In 
 
 fact iis, faciendus, to become or be made. 
 (&) Feror, f erris, latus sum, f erri, latum essfc, latum Iri, 
 latus, f erendus, to be borne. 
 
60 
 
 §62. 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J-" 
 
 J 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 i 4 * 4 
 
 3 
 id 
 
 ■ 
 • 
 
 +5 
 
 3 
 jD 
 
 
 B 
 ID 
 
 l 
 
 :3 
 
 B 
 ID 
 
 s 
 
 13 
 
 5 
 
 >D 
 10 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 | 
 
 CO 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 la a 1 
 
 » i-< ico ice 
 • i ii 
 
 c/3 
 
 ID 
 
 H 
 
 co 
 
 JD 
 
 l 
 
 
 ID 
 
 'g 
 
 ID 
 
 >D 
 >3 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 >B 
 
 '33 
 
 CO 
 
 
 >3 <* 2 3 
 
 is s S 
 
 ■ 
 
 >3 
 
 3 
 ID 
 
 >3 
 
 1 
 
 
 >3 
 
 s 
 
 ID 
 
 >3 
 
 s 
 
 ID 
 
 J 
 *i- 
 
 >D 
 
 >b r-* — 1 
 Jl C 
 
 In D 'U 
 
 i 
 f 
 
 
 ■55 ( S ice ice 
 i • ii 
 
 ■ 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 1 T 
 
 *? 45 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1* 
 
 
 
 
 >3 
 
 n 
 
 >D 
 
 
 >D 
 
 hi 
 
 ID 
 
 >D 
 >3 
 1 
 
 >D >^ 
 1 «o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 >D 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 i i ii 
 
 id 
 
 ID 
 
 
 ID 
 
 ID 
 
 >3 
 
 >D i-< 
 
 
 i 
 
 v: 
 
 l 
 
 
 l 
 
 In 
 
 1 ■*■' 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pot-tierim 
 Vol-iierim 
 Nol-uerim 
 Mal-uerim 
 
 r— *— » * 7j 
 
 
 
 Pos-sim 
 VSl-im ) 
 Nol-im 1 
 Mal-im J 
 E-am 1 
 Fer-am 1 
 Fi-am J 
 Fer-ar 
 
 B 
 
 d 
 a 
 
 C/3 
 
 ig 
 
 ft 
 
 Vel-lem 
 Nol-lem 
 Mal-lem 
 
 3 
 d 
 
 s a 
 
 D D 
 
 Si >D 
 JD p5 
 
 S- 
 >D 
 
 U 
 
 ID 
 
 Iv-Srim 
 Tiil-erim 
 Factus 1 
 Latiis J 
 
 
 
 *» • 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 possun 
 volunt. 
 
 snolunt 
 
 malunt 
 
 Sunt. 
 
 ferunt. 
 
 flu lit. 
 
 fSruntu: 
 
 3 
 
 'S3 
 
 >3 
 
 ice 
 
 jo 
 
 ID 
 
 ice 
 
 -3 
 
 '5 
 
 753 
 
 >3 
 
 3 
 
 ice 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 
 B 
 19 
 
 ID 
 >3 
 
 ID l3 
 • (0 
 
 
 1 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 J S 1 1 w | « | 
 S| '§ 1 2 e c 1 
 
 j3 
 
 >D 
 
 CO 
 
 ice 
 
 jo 
 
 ID 
 
 i 
 
 ile 
 
 -3 
 
 ■ 
 
 ile 
 
 jo 
 
 ID 
 
 *B 
 
 1 
 
 ice 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 1 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 f 
 
 CO S 
 >3 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 possumus 
 
 volumtis 
 
 nolumus 
 
 malumus 
 
 imiis 
 
 ferimus 
 
 fimiis 
 
 ferimur 
 
 73 
 >3 
 
 3 
 
 MS 
 
 i- 
 >D 
 
 CO 
 
 s 
 
 ID 
 
 73 
 >3 
 
 s 
 
 M 
 
 -O 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 ice 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 
 Ii 
 )3 
 
 B 
 ice 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 )3 
 
 CO 
 
 CO '~ A ^ I 
 
 S w c 
 >-h ice \es 1 
 
 1 4^. — , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S- 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 potest 
 
 vult 
 
 nonvul 
 
 mavult 
 
 it 
 
 fert 
 
 fit 
 
 fertiir 
 
 MS 
 
 >D 
 1 
 
 xe 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 1 
 
 Ml 
 
 JO 
 
 >ce 
 
 J2 
 ID 
 
 53 
 
 1 
 
 ID 
 
 >3 
 
 1 
 
 
 ! 
 
 potes 
 vis 
 
 nonvls 
 
 mavis 
 
 Is 
 
 fers 
 
 fls 
 
 ferns 
 
 73 
 M 
 
 .3 
 
 -a 
 
 ID 
 
 73 
 
 '3 
 
 co 
 
 «ce 
 
 JO 
 ID 
 
 *2 
 
 ID 
 
 3 
 
 •T g 
 
 8 I 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 £ s I 
 
 
 1 e 
 
 jo ce 
 
 ID JO 
 si Ia > 
 >D i- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 ce 
 
 
 >ce 
 
 , rt .« ,_ 11 
 
 A > CO 
 
 
 
 5 ^ 
 5/5 IB 12 12 lo 5 ° 
 to >5 "O "2 io >5 12 >d 
 
 >d id id '^ 
 
 >o O "O ^ 
 {Jh> ^ S 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 ID 
 
 >D 
 
 E&i 
 
 >3 53 >3 >3 
 
 53 O 75 |£ 
 
 lv-I 
 Tul-i 
 Factu 
 Latiis 
 
 - 
 
 
 •asuax juosaaj 
 
 
 •jaajjaduiiao^ajj 
 
 *ic>d)ja(tjd)ajj 
 
OR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 51 
 
 t3 
 
 1 
 
 S3 
 
 
 co 
 
 F 
 
 >a 
 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 1 
 
 Ig 
 
 o !S3 
 
 >3 
 
 
 12 •< 
 
 SSSE 
 
 0) 0> CD & 
 
 
 *— «. CO 
 
 ' co 
 
 £ Ia> 
 
 » S $ " 
 
 
 
 Oi 1 * ^ 
 
 3 JS 3 >3 
 
 o 
 
 y. 
 
 8 «9 
 
 •r >3 £ 
 
 >o >o io •« 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 >0 irt \7t 
 
 Hfa J 
 
 ooiois J 3 i§ ieL 
 (^ > £ g £ H ^ >-l 
 
 •pajj3dn{djaj8Jj 
 
 •3 l=« 
 
 •3 
 q 
 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 To 
 
 
 IO 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ll 
 
 
 
 
 xb 
 
 
 >o 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 IO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .« 
 
 
 IC 
 
 
 
 IO 
 
 a 
 
 i3 
 
 IO 
 
 
 
 xu 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 IO 
 
 
 xy 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 .- 
 
 IO 
 
 £ 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 >CJ 
 
 
 >i> 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 ioC 
 
 (O 
 
 in 
 
 B 
 
 
 To 
 
 'O 
 
 8 
 
 xo 
 
 I 
 
 ."— s 
 
 /~S/^\ 
 
 / ~ N 
 
 CO 
 
 **5 
 
 CO 
 
 r- 
 
 is s a 
 
 ,Q I0> 10) 
 
 S-l <M >-H 
 
 >9 co >rj 
 
 3 i s 
 
 ^Q 14) IO) 
 
 c >3 >3 
 
 3= S S 
 
 pD IO) IO> 
 
 jg >s 
 
 J C 
 
 i2i5_ 
 
 2 »» io» 
 
 '2 S | S S B h 
 
 J> -i —■ -i 'O jl c« ' 
 
 >o >o £ «2 ^? >S li ><u 
 
 >3 >3 >3 >? 'g XL jS 2 
 
 j, j j A >o j, ts '5 
 
 >o >o io ig • >3 ica lea 
 
 •;oajjadm [ ajn^nj | •y?sjja { ][ aatvinj 
 
52 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 § 63. C°) Edo, / eat, edis or es, edi, edere or esse, edlsse, 
 esurum esse, edendi, edendo, edendum, esurn, 
 esu, edens, esuriis, to eat. 
 
 Pres. Indic. Act. 
 
 Sing. Ed5, edis or es, edit or est : 
 Plur. edimus, editis or estis, edunt. 
 
 Conjunct Preterimp. Act. 
 Sing. Ederem or essem, ederes or esses, edergt or esset . 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 ederemus or 
 or essent. 
 
 essemus, ederetis or essetis, ederent 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2d Pers. Ede or es ; edito or est5 ; 
 3d Pers. edito or esto ; 
 2d Pers. edite or este, editote or estote ; 
 3d Pers. eduntd. 
 
 Ob*. The other Tenses are regular : also the Passive Voice ; except 
 that esttir may be used for editur, and essetiir for ederetur. 
 
 VERBA DEFECTIYA, DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 64. Defective Verbs are such as want many of the usual 
 parts of a Verb. 
 
 (1) Aio, I say ; and Inquam, say I. 
 
 Indic. 
 
 rAio 
 
 ais 
 ait 
 
 aiiint. 
 
 aiebam 
 
 aiebas 
 
 aiebat 
 
 aiebamiis 
 
 aiebatis 
 
 aiebam 
 
 Covj. 
 
 aias 
 aiat 
 
 aiant 
 
 Indic. 
 
 Inquam 
 
 Con). 
 
 inquis 
 
 inquit 
 
 inquimus 
 
 inquitis 
 
 inquiunt 
 
 inquias. 
 inquiat. 
 
 mquiatis. 
 inquiant 
 
 inquiebam 
 inquiebas 
 
 — 
 
 inquiebat 
 inquiebamiis 
 inquiebatis 
 inquiebant. 
 
 — 
 
CR WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 58 
 
 Preferperf. — , inquisti, Inquit, — , inquistis, — . 
 Fut. Imperf. — , Inquies, Inqmet. 
 Imper. inque, Inquito ; Inquite. 
 Part, of alo, alens. 
 
 5 65. 
 
 (2) Qu&so, 1 entreat; 1st Pers. PI. qu&sumua. 
 
 (3) Fari, to speak ; used by the Poets in this and a few 
 
 other forms, as fatiir, he speaks ; fabor, / shall 
 speak ; fare, speak thou ; Part (fans), f antis, 8tc. ; 
 fetus ; fandus ; Ger. fandi, fando ; Sup. fatu. 
 
 (4) The Imperatives ; 
 
 Apage, begone. 
 
 Ave, avete, hail ; Infin. avere. 
 
 Cedo, cedite, or cette, give me. 
 
 Salve, salvete, hail; Infin. salvere ; Fur. sal- 
 
 vebis. 
 Vale, vvilete, farewell ; Infin. valere. 
 
 (5) Aiisim, afisis, ausit — , — , aiisint : for audeani, I 
 
 may dare. 
 Faxim, faxis, faxit, faximiis, faxitis, faxint : for 
 faciam, / may do, or fecerim, / may have done. 
 Also faxo, for faciam, I shall do, or fecer5, I 
 shall have done. 
 
 (6) Prseteritiva ; or Verbs conjugated only in the Pre- 
 terperfect and its derived Tenses ; ccepi, / begin ; 
 5di, I hate ; memini, / remember. 
 
 66. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 t fCoepi 
 f 1 0di . 
 
 Conj. 
 
 coeperim 
 
 oderim 
 
 meminerim 
 
 In Jin. 
 
 coepisse. 
 
 odisse. 
 
 meminisse. 
 
 Part. 
 
 c&pissem. 
 odissem. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 meminissem. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 coapturum esse 
 osiirum esse 
 
 c&pturus. 
 osuriis. 
 
 4 fCoeperam 
 
 5 < Oderam 
 £ ^Memineram 
 
 % f Cceper5 
 * i Odero 
 
 | LMeminero. — — — 
 
 Imper. Sing. Mement5, Plur. mementote. 
 
 Obs. 1. For ccepl and its Tenses may be used the Passive cceptus sum 
 
 and its Tenses before an Infinitive Passive. 
 Obs. 2. Novi, I know t Preterp. of nosco, is also used as a Praeteritive. 
 
64 
 
 ACCIDENCE, 
 
 § 67 
 
 (7) Impersonal Verbs are conjugated only in the Third 
 Persons Singular of the Proper Moods, and in 
 the Infinitive Mood. 
 
 A. Impersonal Verbs Active have no Passive Voice. The 
 principal of these are of the 2nd Conjugation. 
 
 Op5rtet, t&det, miserSt, 
 Piget, piidet, poenitet, 
 Libet, licet, liquet, et 
 Decet atque dedecet. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Preterimp 
 Preterperj. 
 Preterplu. 
 Fut. Imp. 
 Fut. Per/. 
 
 indie. 
 
 Opdrtet 
 
 Oportebat 
 
 Opdrtuit 
 
 Op5rtuerat 
 
 Oportebit. 
 
 Op or tiler it. 
 
 Conjunc. 
 
 oporteat 
 oporteret 
 oporttierit 
 oportiiisset 
 
 Infin. 
 
 oportere. 
 oportuisse. 
 
 The Persons are expressed by the Cases following the Verb j 
 as, 
 
 Sing. Oportet me, it behoves me, or / am behoven. 
 Op5rtet te, — thee, or thou art — 
 Opdrtet eum, — him, or he is — 
 
 Plur. OportSt nos, — us, or we are — 
 Oportet vos, — you, or ye are — 
 Oportet eos, — ■ them, or they are — 
 
 And 
 
 so in the other Tenses. 
 
 § 68. B. Intransitive Verbs may be used impersonally in the 
 Passive Voice : as, luditiir, from ludo, I play. 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Conjunc. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Luditur 
 
 ludatur 
 
 ludi. 
 
 Preterimp. 
 
 Ludebatiir 
 
 luderetur. 
 
 
 
 Preterperf. 
 
 Lusum est 
 
 lusum sit 
 
 lusum esse. 
 
 Preterplu. 
 
 Lusum erat 
 
 lusum esset 
 
 lusum fuissS. 
 
 Fut. Imp. 
 
 Ludetiir 
 
 — 
 
 lusum iri. 
 
 Fut. Per/. 
 
 Lusum erit. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
OR WORD- FORMATION. 55 
 
 The Persons are expressed by an Ablative Case with the 
 Preposition a or ab following the Verb : as, 
 
 Pres. Indie. 
 
 Sing. Luditiir a me, it is played by me, or I play, 
 
 Luditiir a te, — thee, or thou playest. 
 
 Luditiir ab eo, — him. or he plays, 
 
 Plur, Luditiir a nobis — us, or we play. 
 
 Luditiir a vobis, — you or ye play, 
 
 Luditiir ab eis, — them or they play. 
 
 And so in the other Tenses. 
 
 § 69. C. The Neuter of the Gerundive Participle in dus, 
 is used impersonally, in the same manner, with 
 a Dative or Ablative after it to mark the Per- 
 sons : as, 
 
 Pres. Indie. 
 
 &Ludendum est mini, it must be played by me, or / 
 Ludendum est tibi, — thee, or thou 
 
 Ludendum est ei, — him, or he 
 
 P.Ludendum est nobis, it must be played by us, or we 
 Ludendum est vobis, — you, or ye 
 
 Ludendum est eis, — them, or they • 
 
 And so in the other Tenses. 
 
 <*The Particles are treai»d of in other parts of this Grammar ) 
 
 1 
 
56 
 
 L OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS 
 
 § 70. 
 
 A. GENERAL RULES. 
 
 Virl, Populi, et Divl, 
 Ventl,Menses,Montes, Rivi 
 Generis sunt Masciilinl. 
 
 (2.) 
 
 Plantce, Divce, Femince, 
 Terra?, Urbes, Insula? 
 
 Generis sunt Feminini. 
 
 (3.) 
 
 Vox indeclinabilis 
 Neutriiis est Generis. 
 
 (4.) 
 
 Sunt Communis Generis 
 CiviSy hostis, juvents, 
 Testis, judex, artifex, 
 Auctor, exsul, oplfex, 
 Comes, here's, hospes, dux y 
 ObseSy interprets, conjux, 
 Incoldy sdcerdoSy vlndex, 
 AdolescenSy infans, index, 
 Parens, pra?sul, par, custos, 
 Munlceps, sdtelles, bos. 
 Miles, vates, augury grus, 
 Cants, tigris, serpens, sus: 
 Dama, talpd jungimiis. 
 
 B. OF GENDER IN THE DECLENSIONS. 
 § 71. I. FIRST DECLENSION; 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 A St e sunt Fenrinina ; As St es sunt MasculM. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 MasculmS sunt In a 
 Musculorum nomlnJi, 
 
 Ut nautd, vSrnd St p#et<& 
 Scurrd, scrlbd gt prtiphetdL 
 
GENDER OP NOUNS. 
 
 57 
 
 § 72. II. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 Masctilinls us et er, Neutris um tribuitiip. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (1) Feminina sunt In us 
 Alvus, drctiis, car bus us, 
 CUus, humus, methodus; 
 
 (2) Neutra virus, pglagus, 
 Vulgus fere Neutrum sXt, 
 Masculum sublnde fit. 
 
 J 73. 
 
 III. THIRD DECLENSION, 
 (a) FIRST PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 Masciilis Insentur 
 
 Quod claudit o, or, os, vel er, 
 
 Et Nomen desmens in es 
 Si flectit casus impares. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (1) HIS Femlnin& sunt 
 
 In do et go qua? destnunt : 
 Sed MasculinS manent cdrdd, 
 Ligo, ordo atque' margo. 
 
 (2) Sunt In io FemlnlnS: 
 Tantum Ilia Masctilina, 
 Quee vel oculis spectabis, 
 Vgl tii manibus tractabis. 
 
 (3) Card (carnh) mavult se 
 Femininls adderS. 
 
 (4) Neutra paiica sunt in or s 
 
 ^lqu6r, ador, mdrmo'r, c6r 
 Feminlnum est arbo'r. 
 
 (5) Femtmna cos et dds, 
 Neutra sunt iitrumque' os, 
 
 (6) Neutra multa sunt In er, 
 Verber, slier, dclfr, ver, 
 TubSr, uber, 5t cadaver, 
 Piper, iter, et papuver. 
 
 (7) JEs est Neutrum ; sex In es 
 Qua? flectiint casus impares 
 Fenilnina, compts, ttiges, 
 Merces, merges, quies, seges. 
 
 §74. 
 
 (b) SECOND PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 FeminTnTs Inseras 
 
 Quiti eladdunt » x, aus et as, 
 
 S cum consonante nexa, 
 Es sequaliter Inflexa. 
 
fS 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 HX CAPTIONS. 
 
 y\ ) Multa sunt quae claudlt is 
 Masculini Generis, 
 Amnis, axis, cdllis, collis, 
 Caulis, ciicumis etfollis, 
 Fdscls, funis, fustis, finis, 
 Ignis, Drbis atque crinis, 
 Pdnis, pitcts, postis, ensis, 
 Sentis, cdrbis, torquis, mensts, 
 Torris, unguis et ciinults, 
 Ve~ctis, vermis et soddlis, 
 Cassis, cinis, glis et dng?ds, 
 Lapis, pulvls atque sanguis. 
 
 (2) PleraquS quae claudlt ex 
 Maseulina sunt, iit grix : 
 Sed Femlnina manent nex, 
 Supellex, ilex, carex, lex. 
 
 (8) Maseulina sunt in ix 
 Fornix, phoenix et calix 
 
 (4) Maseulina sunt in as 
 
 Fas ( vadis ), gigds, clephds, 
 As (dssis), mas et dddmds, 
 Neutra, vds (vdsis), nefds,fds 
 
 (5) Mascullnls adde mons, 
 
 Fons et torrtns, gryps et pons, 
 Rud'tns, hydrops, dens et bidens 
 Or tens, occidens et tridtns. 
 
 (6) Maseulina sunt In es 
 Verres et acindces. 
 
 § 75. (c) THIRD PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 Neutra claudunt aete, | Ar, ur, us, c, I, n et t 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (1) Maseulina sunt in ur 
 
 Furfur, turtur, vultur,fur. 
 
 (2) Masciillna sunt in us 
 LSpiis (leporis) et mus. 
 
 (3) Femlnina sunt In us 
 Virtus atque servit/ls, 
 Juve?itus, incus atque palus, 
 Senectus, tellus atque sdlus, 
 Quibus longa manet u 
 
 In Genitlvl transitu. 
 
 (4) Est et pecus (picudis) 
 Feminlnl Generis. 
 
 (5) Mascula In I sunt mugil, 
 Consul, sal, sdl atque pngil 
 
 (6) Maseulina sunt ren, splcn, 
 Pectin, delphin, dttdyen. 
 
 (7) Femlnina sunt in on 
 Gdrgon, sindon, halcyon. 
 
 § 7C IV. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 Masculls In Quarta us, Neiitrls u tribuimus. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 FgxnlnmS sunt In Us 
 Quirts dfimus, pOrtlcOs* 
 
 Aciis, Idus atque' mdnus, 
 Tribus, niirU8, socrus, anus, 
 
PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. 59 
 
 5 77. V. FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULE. 
 
 Feminlnls Inseres Quintse nomina in e$. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 Dies est in Slngiilo In Plurall Niimdra 
 
 Mas vSl Femininum : Semper Mascullnunin 
 
 II. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 §78. I. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. 
 
 (a) Singiilaris Numerus 
 
 Miiltis deest Nominibus : 
 Ut Manes, locull, Penates ; 
 Cuna, thermos, nugS, grates ; 
 
 Armd, viscera, magalld, 
 Cum deum festls, tit FWr&lid 
 (6) Lectitantlbus apparent 
 Miilta qua? Plurall carent. 
 
 II. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN CASE. 
 
 NonnullI casus absunt his, Et multa prieter ha?c apparent 
 
 Fas, frugis, ddpis, opts, vis : Quae casibiis nonniillis carent. 
 
 III. NOUNS REDUNDANT IN NUMBER. 
 
 In a vel 1 qua? efferunt Numerum Pluralem, sunt 
 
 Frenum, cdrbasus St locus, 
 Rdstrum, sibilus St jocus, 
 Tartarus fit in Plural! 
 Tdrtdrd, et caelum call, 
 
 IV. NOUNS REDUNDANT IN CASE. 
 
 Abundant qusedam Casibiis, | Ut ddmus, laurus, (Edipiis, 
 
 III. OF THE PRETERPERFECTS AND 
 SUPINES OF LATIN VERBS. 
 
 §79. I. FIRST CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBa 
 
 Verborum Prima Conjiigatio, 
 Cm 6 as are termmatio, 
 Avi in Perfecto fit, 
 Siipino atum subjicit. 
 (Am-o, am-as, am-are, am-avi, am-atum.) 
 
60 
 
 PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES* 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Lav 5 lavl Id turn cutt, 
 Et lavdtum vlndicat. 
 
 (4) Dd fit dedi atquS ddtum, 
 Std fit steti at que - statum. 
 
 (5) Micd dat Perfectum miciiU 
 Plied dat Perfectum piicul ; 
 Nullum fert Siiplnum micd 9 
 ~dtum dat vel -itum plied. 
 
 (1 ) HTnc excipiendS sunt 
 Quae ul itum erFerunt : 
 Crgpd, ciibd atque sdnd, 
 Dtimd, vetd atque tdnd, 
 
 (2) S#cd sifcui atquS sectum; 
 Fried friciii atque frictum. 
 
 CS) Juvd juvi jUtum stat; 
 
 §80. II. SECOND CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBSL 
 
 Verbdrum Altera Conjugatio, 
 Cul eo es ere termlnatio, 
 Ul in Perfecto fit, 
 Supm5 itum siibjicit. 
 
 (MSn-So, mones, mon-ere, mon-uT, mon-itum.^ 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (1) Hlnc exclplenda sunt 
 Qua? evi Stum efFerunt : 
 Ut ned nSvi atque netum ; 
 Deled del-e"vi -etum. 
 Addefled, P m, his, 
 
 Et died, cum compositls. 
 
 (2) His in di Perfectum stat, 
 Sum Suplnum terminate 
 Pi dndi prdnsum prdnded ; 
 Sedi sessum sided ; 
 
 Vidi visum video. 
 S&d spdndSd spopdndi spdnsum ; 
 Tdndid totdndi tdnsum ; 
 Mdmdrdi mdrsum mdrded ; 
 Pependi pSnsum pended. 
 
 S) His In si Perfectum fit, 
 Sum Siiplnum exigit. 
 Jussi jussum jiibed ; 
 Mulsi mulsum miilced 
 Dat, ftldemque' mulge'd ; 
 TSrsi tersum teryed ; 
 Arsi arsum drd€d ; 
 Risi visum rided ; 
 Sudsi sudsum sudde"d ; 
 Mdnsi mdnsum mdned ; 
 Hast hcesum hared. 
 Sic St dlySd alsi dat, 
 Fulged fulsi vlndicat ; 
 
 Urg$d Item ursi fit ; 
 Sed his Suplnum deficit. 
 
 (4) Dant si et turn indulged, 
 Et tor- si tor -turn tor-qued. 
 
 (5) Auged auxi auctum fit ; 
 Friged frixi susciplt; 
 Luged, luced, luxi dant, 
 Sed non Suplnum generant. 
 
 (6) Ha?c Perfecto volunt vi, 
 Turn Siiplno sufficl : 
 Caved cdvi atque cautum ; 
 Fdveo fdvi atque fautum ; 
 Fdved fdvi atque fdtum ; 
 Mdved mdvi atque mdtum ; 
 Voved vdvi atque vdtum. 
 
 (7) His iii In Perfecto stat, 
 Turn Suplnum terminat. 
 
 D&t ddcid ddctum ; dat mistum mU- 
 
 cifo ; sdrptum 
 Sdrbfo; fit tened tentum ; fit tdrrSa 
 tdstum, 
 
 (8) His Prater itum Passive, 
 Praesens scrlbitur Active; 
 Audid dat ausus sum ; 
 Gauded gdvisus sum ; 
 StiledquS sdlitus sum 
 
PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. 
 
 ffl 
 
 § 83 III. THIRD CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Verborum Tertia ConjugatTo, 
 Cm 5 is ere terminatio, 
 Perfectum vari«je formse dat, 
 Turn vel sum Supino stat. 
 
 (Reg-o, reg-is, rex-i, reg-erg, reet-um.) 
 
 Special Rules with 
 
 §82. (a) Bd et pd. 
 Bd, pd habent additum 
 Perfecto psi, Supino ptum : 
 Ut nubd nupsi atque nuptum. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 liumpd tamen rupx ruptum ; 
 BlbO bibl bibitum ; 
 Strtipd str&pul strepilum. 
 
 (b) Cd, gd, hd, qud. 
 Cd, gd, hd, quo, sic declino, 
 XI Perfecto, ctum Supino : 
 Ut ducd duxl atque ductum; 
 Sugd siixi atque suctum ; 
 Eego rexl atque rectum ; 
 Vehd vexl atque vectum. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (1) Scd Perfecto jiibet vi, 
 Turn Supino siibjicl ; 
 
 Ut cresco crevl cretum ; suesco 
 Suevl suetum ; sic quiescd. 
 Nosed ndvl ndtum dat ; 
 Pdscd pdvl pdstum stat. 
 Cdmp&scd fit cdmpescul ; 
 Pdpdscl pdscd ; dlscd didici. 
 
 (2) Ted let atque ictum; 
 Vlncd vicl atque victum ; 
 Llnqud liqui atque lictum. 
 
 (3) Pared dat pepercl pdrsum. 
 
 (4) Spdrgd sparst atque spdrsumj 
 Mirgd mSrsi atquS mersum ; 
 TlrgO tirai atqug tersum. 
 
 their Exceptions. 
 
 (5) Ago egl atque actum ; 
 Frdngd fregl atque frdctum / 
 Tango tetigl et tdctum ; 
 Pdngd pepigi et pactum ; 
 Sed composta-pep? -pactum; 
 Pungd pupugl et punctum ; 
 Jungd junxl atque junctum. 
 Lifgd legl vlndlcat, 
 Compostum ssbpe lexl dat. 
 
 (6) Figd fixl flxum ; fingd 
 Finxl atque fictum ; pingd 
 Pinri f aclt atque plctum ; 
 String d strlnxl atque' strict um, 
 
 (c) Do. 
 
 Do Perfecto jiibet si, 
 Sum Supino sufflcl. 
 Last lazsum faclt latdd ; 
 (Verum cessl cessumcidC:) 
 Sic il-lidd -list -llsum ; 
 Divldd di-visl -visum. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 ( 1 ) Quae exeunt in dndd, Sudd, 
 Flecte dd in di vertendo. 
 Pendd fit pependl pensum 
 Tendd dat tetendi tensum. 
 
 (2) Flndd tamen fidl flssum ; 
 Sclndd scidl atque scissum i 
 Fundd fudl atqu&fiisum; 
 Tundo tutudi et tusum. 
 Cudd cudi atque cusum ; 
 Cddd c&cidi et cusum; 
 Ccedd fit cticldi canon § 
 Faclt idd Sdi e»uru 
 
62 
 
 PRETERPERFECTS AXD SUPEN'ES. 
 
 (3) AbdS, dddd, cdndd, cr&lli, 
 Obdd, perdU, reddd, edd, 
 PrCdO, trddd, vendo, dedd, 
 Quae a dd composta sunt, 
 -didi, ditum, eflerunt : 
 Ut edd edidi St Solium, 
 Dedd decRdi et dSdUunu 
 
 id) 
 
 To. 
 
 Flectd flexi atque flexum ; 
 2?2ct8 next atque nexum ; 
 Pectd pexi atque' pexum ; 
 Petivi St petitum petd ; 
 Messui et messum metO ; 
 Mittd mist mlssum dat ; 
 Vertd vSrfi versum stat. 
 Verbum quod a sistd fit 
 Perfecto -stiti sufflcit 
 
 § 83. («) 5b. 
 
 So" stct situm fit ; drcessG 
 Sic formatur, et lacesso. 
 VisO rwi vlndicat ; 
 Pi/wo" /h/ismi plstum dat. 
 
 § 84. (/) & 
 
 L'nura In xtf ^er3 stat, 
 Quod texui textum vlndicat. 
 
 | 85. (g) Lo. 
 
 Ld lul turn : sic consuls 
 Flectitur ; et Gcculo. 
 Sed colul et cultum cold, 
 Molui mdlitum fit molo 
 A cello verba ceUui ; 
 Sed percello percuti 
 Conjugabis et pircuhum , 
 Pello pipuXi et pulsion ; 
 Velio velli (v&si) vtUsum. 
 Fdllo ritfefeltifalsum; 
 Psallo psdlli ; solid salsum ; 
 TdUd sustull formatum 
 In Supino fit subldtum. 
 
 « 
 
 Mo. 
 
 Md mux mitum fit ; Ktfrimd 
 Fr&nul fremitum ; sic g#md, 
 Et Supino carens trgmd 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Si turn : cdmd cdmsl cdmtum, 
 Promo promsi atque prdmtum % 
 Sic flectuntiir sumo, demO i 
 Sed enii atque emtum imd ; 
 Pressl atque pressum premd. 
 
 (Inter m St * vel t 
 
 Latinl saepe ponunt p. 
 
 Sic fiunt sumpsi, dempsi, dSmp~ 
 
 turn., 
 Cdmptum, promptum, sumption, 
 
 emptum.) 
 
 (•) 
 
 No. 
 
 Cdnd cantum cidni, 
 Composta -centum -cinil ; 
 Gignd genui ginitum ; 
 POnd posul positum ; 
 Temnd temsi temtum d&t ; 
 Sternd strdcl stratum stat. 
 Sperno spred atque' spretum 
 Cento" cred atque cretum ; 
 Llnd led atque litum ; 
 SinO sivl atque situm. 
 
 U) no. 
 
 Verro verri atque* vSrsum ; 
 Curro dat cucurrl cursum ; 
 Quaro fit qua-sivi -situm j 
 Tero trivi atque tritum ; 
 Uro ussi ustum stat ; 
 Gero gessi gestum dat ; 
 Fero tuli atque latum ; 
 Sero sevi atque sdtum; 
 Sero serui sertum dat, 
 ST cum vl nectendi stat. 
 
 § 86. (4) 
 
 lo. 
 
 Fdcidfeci atque factum ; 
 Jdciojed atqu&jdctum ; 
 Dant a ZaciS Zexi ledum ; 
 Et a specid spexi spec turn ; 
 FocP.Dfodi fit ftissumqui ; 
 Ft^io/w^Z/tt^wwquS ; 
 Ca/?io cejoi at^ue caption / 
 Rapid rdpul et rdptum ; 
 
PRETERPERFECTti AND SUPINES. 
 
 63 
 
 Cup-lvl -Hum cupid ; 
 Pip£ri pdrtum pdrio ; 
 Qudtid qudssum vindicat, 
 SSd In compostls cussum dat 
 
 87. (J) Ud St vd. 
 
 UO format wi utum : 
 Ut tribud tribul tributum. 
 
 Vb" Inflectlt vi St utum : 
 Ut solvo solvl et sdlutum g 
 VdlvQ volvi et vol utum. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Flud tarn en fluxum flux\ ; 
 Struo structum atque struxi t 
 Vivo vixl victum dat ; 
 Stinguo stinxl stlnctum stat. 
 
 IV. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBH 
 
 Verborum Quarta Conjilgatio, 
 Cul id is ire terminatio, 
 Ivi in Perfects fit, 
 Supin5 itum sufficit. 
 (Aiid-io, aiid-is, aud-ire, aud-lvl, aud-Itum.) 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 SdnctO sdnxl sanctum fit ; 
 Nee -civl -citum respuit. 
 Vlnxl vlnctum vincid ; 
 Fulsl fultum fulciO ; 
 Sdrcid fit sdrsi sdrtum ; 
 Fdrcidque fdrsl fdrtum ; 
 Amicio dmicul dat; 
 Sdlid sdlul (sdlii) stat ; 
 At singultid sinyiiltum ; 
 Et sep&lio sepultum ; 
 
 Venzd v&ni vSntum fit ; 
 ( Ve~neo venil suscipit ) ; 
 Se~pid s€psi septum dat ; 
 A perio -p£rul -pertum stat ; 
 Sed cdmperid cdmpirl ; 
 Et reperio repperl. 
 Hausl haustum haurxH j 
 Sensi seusum sentiO. 
 
 ( 89. 
 
 V. DEPONENT VERBS 
 
 Deponentia flexeris 
 Ex Actlvorum regulis ; 
 Nam Pr&teritum Passlvum 
 Siipini est Derivatlvum. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 (I) SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 R8dr rdtiis efflcit ; 
 Mis&redr misertus fit ; 
 Fdtior fdssiis ; flectS sis 
 Fessiis in composltis. 
 
 (2) THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Labor lapsus suscipit ,• 
 Utor usiis efficit ; 
 Loquor effTcit IdcuHts # 
 Sequor efficit s^cutHs ; 
 
64 
 
 CHANGES OF VERBS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 Nitdr ntsiis riixus stat ; 
 Irutus sum irdscdr dat ; 
 Qu&rdr quSstus ; grddidr gres- 
 
 SUS ; 
 
 Pdtidr passiis sum, £t -pessics 
 In compostis ; fit u/ciscdr 
 Ultus ; dptus sum dplscdr ; 
 S£d ddeptus ddipiscdr ; 
 Prdftciscdr fit prdfectus / 
 Expergiscdr experrectiis ; 
 Fit Oblltus obliviscor ; 
 Et cOmmentus comminlscdr / 
 
 Sed ndnclscor f acit niichls « 
 Et pdciscor f acit pdctiis. 
 Mdrtuus sum f acit moridr ; 
 Ndscor nut us ; ortus oritir 
 Quels Futura moriturus, 
 Ndsciturus, drlturus. 
 
 (3) FOURTH CONJUGATION 
 
 Quartae mensus metidr , 
 Format orsws Ordidr ; 
 At experior expertug, 
 Et oppcridr dppertus. 
 
 90. 
 
 VI. INCEPTIVE VERBS. 
 
 (1) A Verbis ducta Inceptlva 
 Flex&ris tit Primltlva : 
 Sic ixdrsi exdrdescd, 
 Obsdlevi dbsdISscd ; 
 Trgmui vlndicat tr&miscO t 
 Et rescivi fit resciscd. 
 
 (2) Factorum ex No minibus 
 Perfectls ul terminus : 
 Evdnescd sic Svaniii ; 
 CdnsdnescO fit cdnsdnui. 
 Plurima Siiplnis carent, 
 Perfecta, miiltis non apparent 
 
 VII. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 lmpersonalia flexgris 
 Ex Personalium regiills ; 
 Sic pudft f acit puduit ; 
 Pasnitfr pcenituit ; 
 Opdrtit sic 6pGrtv.iL 
 
 Sed miseret misgrtum Sst ; 
 LibSt libuit libitum Sst ; 
 Tadet dat pertasum Sst 
 Vel t&duit i sic pigSt fit 
 Pigitum est et ptguit. 
 
 VIII 
 
 VERBS WANTING PRETERPERFECTS AND 
 SUPINES. 
 
 In 5pe'ribus Latinis, 
 Multa Verba quse Supinis, 
 
 Multa quee Perfecto carent, 
 Lectitantibus apparent 
 
 § 91. IV. OF THE CHANGES OF VERBS IN 
 COMPOSITION. 
 
 (1) A In e converteris 
 
 Horum in Compost tis : 
 ArdOy cSrpO, ddmnd, lactd, 
 Fdtlscdr, falW, fdrcid, jdctd, 
 
 Grddidr , pdtidr, pdrtldr, trdctb 
 Pdrid, patrdy atque candd, 
 Sacrdj spdrgd. atquS sc&ndG. 
 
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 65 
 
 (2) A In ? converteris 
 Horum In Composltis : 
 Ago, cttdb, cdub, frangb, 
 Hiibcb, lUttb, ftitcor, pdngb, 
 Sttlib, sttftub, atque tango, 
 C&pib, r&pib, scipio, fttcib, 
 J&cib, Idcio, p/dccb, t&cib. 
 Excepta : ptrtlgb, ptrpl&ctb ; 
 £tcum Adverblls mlstum fbtcib. 
 
 (3) A^xn u convertlto 
 Ex cdlcb , saltb, qudtib. 
 
 (4) E In i converteris 
 Horum in Composltis : 
 Egcb, tinib, atque tmb, 
 Spccib, stdhb, atque prcmb, 
 Adde dedi atque It go, 
 Adde stttti atque rtgb. 
 
 Sunt excepta : rtlego, 
 Pirltgb, et praltgd, 
 
 Nnta. 
 ST, mutato Simpllci, 
 Compost! Priesens sumsit i, 
 
 In Perfecto siimet c : 
 
 Si longam valet fingerS : 
 
 Sic deficio fit difici ; 
 
 Sic prbjicib project . 
 
 Sic cbnspicib cbnspexi ; 
 
 Sic a dirtgb dircxi. 
 
 P'trgb (pir-rtgb) perrcxi ; 
 
 Surgb (siis-rcgo) surrtx'i ; 
 
 Pbrrigb (pro-rcgo) pbrrczx, 
 
 (5) jE In i, a quairb, cckdo 
 Composta mutant, et a ladb, 
 
 (6) Au in o convertit plaudb ; 
 Ail in u commiitat claiido t 
 Au in t solummodo 
 
 Ex audio dat obedib, 
 
 (7) Redupllcatlo Slmplicls 
 Exibit e Compositis : 
 Sic a pt/lb, ptpiili, 
 
 Fit xmpillo, impiili,. 
 Sed a disco, posco, do" 
 Composta servant, et a sfo. 
 
 § 92. OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION 
 
 ^1) Con- fit Pra?posItio cum, 
 Quando stat compositum. 
 
 v'2) Tantum in Composltis 
 
 Stant ambi, rt, si, sus, et dis. 
 
 (3) Prseposltlo termmantem 
 Szepe mutat consonantem 
 Sic, tit flat si mills 
 Consonant! Slmplicls : 
 Ut ad-ft-rd fit ajfrro, 
 Ut in-lhio fit iWin~^ 
 Ut ob-peto fi* ipprto. 
 
 (4) iV in m convertlte 
 Ante b vel ante p. 
 
 Ut cbn-btbb fit cdm-btbd> 
 Ut in-plico fit irn-pltcd. 
 
 (5) Alia alia? transferunt, 
 Qua* relatu longa sunt ; 
 Unum hoc notandum do, 
 Ab-fcro fit cmftf% 9 
 Ab-fugio fit attfi^ft). 
 
65 
 
 SYNTAXIS MINOR, 
 
 IN TIRUNCULOKUM GRATIAM CONCINNATA. 
 
 § 93. A. I. Adjectiva, Participia, et Pronomina cum Sub- 
 stantivis suis genere, numero, et casu concordant: 
 ut. 
 
 Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus opes, 
 
 1. Substantivum per ellipsin intelligitur : ut, 
 
 Laborem plerique fugiunt. (supple homines.) 
 
 2. Neutra Adjectiva Substantivorum vice funguntur : ut, 
 
 Omnium rerum mors est extremum. 
 
 II. Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominativo numero et 
 persona : ut, 
 
 Omnia vitia contra naturam pugnant. 
 
 1 Aliquando Infinitivus, vel Locutio aliqua, pro Nominativo ponitur 
 ut, 
 
 Non est mentiri meum. 
 
 Incertum est qudm longa vita futura sit. 
 
 2. Nominativus Pronominum raro exprimitur : ut, 
 
 Nitimur in vetitum semper cupimusque negata. 
 Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut, 
 
 Ego reges ejeci : vos tyrannos introduoti*. 
 8. Impersonalia Nommativum non habent expressum : ut, 
 
 Tcedet ipsum vehementerque pcemtet. 
 •4* Person* Verbi sum saepe intelliguntur : ut. 
 
 Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum. (supple •§/.) 
 
SYNTAXIS MINOR. t>7 
 
 &. Infinitivus interdum Nominativo postponitur : ut, 
 
 Turn pins JEneas humeris abscindere vestetn. 
 
 6. Plerumque autem Infinitivus Accusativo postponitur, praecedentc 
 Verbo finito . ut, 
 
 Tradunt Homerum ccecum fuisse. 
 
 "HI. Relativum cum Antecedente concordat genere, numero, 
 et persona ; casu autem construitur cum sua sen- 
 tentia : ut, 
 
 Ea est jucundissima amicitia, quam similitudo 
 morum conjugavit. 
 
 B. 1. Substantivum, forma sed non sensu singulars saepe habet Vertoum, 
 Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, 
 
 Pars epulis onerant mensas. 
 
 Subeunt Tegecea juventus Auxilio tardi. 
 
 Q. Duo vel plura Nomina singularia habent plerumque Verbum, -Ad- 
 jectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, 
 
 Veneno absumpti sunt Hannibal et Philopamien. 
 
 t. Verbum plurale cum Nominativo dignioris persona?, Adjectivum 
 vero vel Relativum cum Substantivo dignioris generis, fere 
 concordat. 
 
 b t Prima persona dignior est quam secunda, secunda quam tertia : ut, 
 
 Si tu et Tuttia valetis, ego et Cicero calemus. 
 
 •B. In rebus animatis dignius est masculinum genus quam femininum : 
 ut, 
 
 Pater mihi et "nater mortui sunt. 
 
 d. In rebus inanimis Adjectivum vel Relativum saepissime erit in 
 neutro genere : ut, 
 
 Divitice, decus, gloria, in oculis sita sunt. 
 
 8. Verba Copulativa, sum, Jlo, videor, vocor, cum siaii- 
 libus, sive finiti modi, sive infiniti, eundem habent 
 utrinque casum : ut, 
 
 Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus. 
 Begins agnoscor per rata signa puer 
 Vobi& licet esse beatis 
 
OS SYKTAXIS MTSOR. 
 
 4. Verbum, inter duos Nominativos positum, interdum cum posteriore 
 solo concordat : ut, 
 
 Arnantium irce amoris integratio est. 
 
 8. Relativum, inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatum, cum po- 
 steriore solo saspc concordat : ut, 
 
 Thebce, quod Bveotia caput est. 
 
 6. Substantivo, Pronomini, et interdum Sententiae, ap- 
 
 poni potest Substantivum ejusdem rei in ecdem 
 casu : ut, 
 
 Effodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum. 
 
 JVos consules desumus. 
 
 Cogitet oratorem institui, rem arduam. 
 
 7. Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt, 
 
 alterum in Genitivo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Recubans sub teg mine fagi. 
 
 § 9 4 C. I. Verba Transitiva regunt Accusativum pro- 
 pioris Objecti: ut, 
 
 Sperne voluptates. 
 Imprimis venerare Deum. 
 
 1. Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva Accusativum admittunt suae 
 
 operationis: ut, 
 
 Duram servit servitutem. 
 Claudius aleam hisit. 
 
 2. Verba quasdam, rogandi praesertim et docendi, duplicem habent Ac- 
 
 cusativum : ut, 
 
 Pacem te poscimus omnes. 
 
 Quid nunc te, asine, litter as doceam ? 
 
 a. Plurima ex his in Passiva Voce retinent Accusativum rei : ut, 
 Motus doceri gaudet Ionicns. 
 
 3. A?cusa f 4vus Respectus Graeco more subjicitur turn Verbis Neutria 
 
 et Passivis, turn Adjectivis : ut, 
 
 Micat auribus et tremit artus. 
 Inficitur teneras tota rubore genaB 
 Nudce sunt brachia. 
 
SIX TAXIS MINOR. t& 
 
 4. Accusativum regunt hse Przepositiones : 
 
 Ante, apua\ ad, adversus, 
 Circum, cir^a, citra, cis, 
 Contra, inter, erga, extra, 
 Infra, intra, juxta, ob, 
 Penes, -pone, post, et prater, 
 
 Prope, propter, per, secundum- 
 Supra, versus, ultra, trans; 
 His super, subter, addito, 
 Et in, sub, si fit motio. 
 
 II. Vocativus, Appellati casus, regitur ab Interjectione 
 vel expressa, vel intellecta : ut, 
 
 Fill \elojlli. 
 
 1. tnterjectiones en et ecce regunt Accusativum atque Nominativum : o, 
 
 ah, heu, hem, proh, Accusativum, Nominativum, et Vocativuni t 
 ut, 
 
 En miser um hominem I 
 
 Ecce nova turba atque rixa 1 
 
 Heu miserande puer ! 
 
 Heu vanitas humana ! 
 
 Proh Deum atque hominum fidem 
 
 Proh sancte Juppiter / 
 
 2. Dativum regunt hei et vce : ut, 
 
 Hei misero mihi ! 
 Vce tibi, causidice / 
 
 111. Omnia fere Adjectiva et Verba, item Adverbia et Sub- 
 stantia, regunt Dativum remotioris Objecti, cujug 
 causa est aut fit aliquid : ut, 
 
 Non solum nobis divites esse volumus. 
 Mihi istic nee seritur 7tec metitur. 
 Numa virgines Vestce legit, 
 Urbi pater est urbique maritus. 
 
 a. Ita sum possessive significans Dativum possidentis habet: ut, 
 Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca. 
 
 '». Dativum regunt plurima Adjectiva, Adverbia, et Verba, interdum 
 etiam Substantiva, a quibus indicatur 
 
 Commodum, communication 
 Comparatio, consecratio, 
 Congruentia, consuetudo, 
 Auxilium et aptitudo, 
 Benignitas, vicinitas, 
 
 Traditio, venia, demonstratio, 
 Promissio, fides, et narratio, 
 Obsequium, imptrium, 
 Et quicquid his contrarium ; 
 Cum nubo, vaco : cetera 
 
 Jucunditas, afiinitas, t Sub prima stabunt regula. 
 
70 SYNTAXIS MINOIi. 
 
 Ut, Patriot sit idoneus, utilis agris. 
 Est Jinitimus orator i poeta. 
 Turba gravis pad placidatque inimica rpxutu 
 Congruenter natural vivendum est. 
 Culture patientem commodat aurem. 
 Quod alii donat sibi detrahit. 
 Hoc mihi coujirnwvit et persuasit. 
 Nobis spondet fortuna salutem. 
 Pkilosophia medetur animis. 
 Tibi favemus. 
 lrascor tibi. 
 
 Victrix causa dtis placuit. sed victa Catorri. 
 Puree pio generi. 
 Anguis Sullat apparuit immalanti. 
 O formose puer, nimium ne crede colon. 
 Imperat aut servit coUecta pecunia cuique. 
 Placitone etiam pugnabis amori ? 
 Venus nupsit Vulcano. 
 Philosophic semper vaco. 
 Nulla Jides regni sociis. 
 
 3. Communis, simiiis. proprius, par, atque alienus, 
 
 Fiuraque, nunc voluere Dativum, nunc Genitivum : ui, 
 
 Media simillima veris sunt. 
 Deos esse similes tui putas ? 
 Propria est nobis mentis agitatio. 
 Proprium est oratoris ornate dicere. 
 
 b. Delecto atque juvo, jubeo, rego, latdo, guberno, Accusativo contra 
 regulam junguntur : ut, 
 
 Multos castra juvant. 
 
 Tu regere imperio populos, RoJnane, memento. 
 
 e, Tempero et moderor nunc Dativum nunc Accusativum habent : ut 
 Hie moderatur equos qui non moderabitur ira:. 
 
 S. Dativum ferme regunt Verba composita cum Adverbiis bene, satis* 
 male ; et cum Praepositionibus, praesertim his : — 
 
 Ad, ante, ab, Sub, super, ob, 
 
 In, inter, de, Con, post, et pra, 
 
 ut, Ceteris satisfacio semper ; mihi nunquam. 
 Sicilia quondam Italia adhtpsit. 
 Gigantes bellum diis intuhrunt. 
 Andtum ova gallinis satpk supponimut. 
 
 a. Multa ex his variant constructionem : ut, 
 
 ITehetii retiquos Gallos virtute praeedunt* 
 In amort hac insunt vitia. 
 
C1NTAXIS MINOR. 71 
 
 S. l>ativus A p;ent is sequitur Verbalia in bilis, et Gerundivum in dus j 
 interdum Participia perfecta ; rard Verba Passiva : ut, 
 
 Mult is Hie bonis Jiebilis occidit. 
 Restat Chremes qui mihi exorandus est. 
 Magttus civis obit et formidatus Othoni. 
 Barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor uUi. 
 
 m. Verba et Participia Passiva plerumque habent Ablativum Agents 
 cum Praepositione a vel ab : ut, 
 
 Laudator ab his, culpatur ab Mis. 
 Mors Crassi est a multis defleta. 
 
 4. Dativus Propositi additur Verbo sum et multis aliis, vel pro No- 
 minativo vel pro Accusativo : ut, 
 
 Exemplo est magni formica laboris. 
 Nuchum amisi ; reliquit pignori putamina 
 
 a. Saepe duplex admittitur Dativus : ut 
 Exitio est avidum mare nautis. 
 
 IV. Genitivus Possessors sequitur omnia fere Substantiva, ueena* 
 Verba sum, facio, fio, per ellipsin Substantivi : ut, 
 
 Singulorum opes sunt divitice civitatis. 
 Omnia, qua, mnlieris fuerunt, viri fiunt. 
 Scipio Hispaniam Romance ditionis fecit. 
 
 1. Est Impersonale praeponitur Genitivo, si intelligitur 
 
 Indoles, indicium, Munus aut ojficium. 
 
 ut, Cujusvis hominis est errare. 
 
 Improbi hominis est mendacio fallere. 
 Est adolcscentis mnjores natu vereri. 
 
 2. Fit etiam ellipsis aliorum Nominum ante Genitivum : ut, 
 
 Hectoris Andromache, (supple uxor.) 
 Deiphobe Glauci. (supple jilia. ) 
 Ventum erat ad Vestce. (supple templum.^ 
 Hvjus video Byrrhiam. (supple servum.) 
 
 3. Genitivus Personalis in Possessivo Pronomine late us redpit alteruia 
 
 Genitivum sibi concordantem : at, 
 
 Respublica med unius operd salva erat. 
 Nostros vidisti fientis ocellos. 
 
 4. Genitivus Qualitatis sequitur Substantiva : ut, 
 
 Ingenui vultus puer ingetiuique pudoru. 
 
 Qualitas etiam in Ablativo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Senex promissa barbd, horrenti capiflo. 
 
72 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 
 
 5. Vocabula Partitiva, Numeralia, Comparativa, et Superlativa re>runt 
 Genitivum, quocum genere concordant : ut, 
 
 Multcc harum arborum med ipsius manu sunt satct. 
 
 Utroque vestrum detector 
 
 Sequimur te, sancte deorum. 
 
 Sulla centum viginti suorum arnisit. 
 
 Major Neronum. 
 
 'iallorum fortissimi. 
 
 Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapiU 
 
 Minime omnium'. 
 
 $. Hi Genitivi, gentium, terrarum, aliique, sequuntur Adverbia hue* "dt 
 quv, ubi, similia : ut, 
 
 Migrandum aliqud terrarum arbitror. 
 
 7. Quantitatem significantia Adverbia et Substantiva, item Neutra Ad- 
 
 jectiva ac Pronomina, Genitivum regunt : ut, 
 
 Satis eloquentice, sapiential parum. 
 Justitia nihil expetit pramii. 
 Aliquid pristini roboris conservaU 
 Quantum nummorum, tantum jidei. 
 
 8. Genitivum yegunt Verbalia in ax, Participia quasdam adjective posita, 
 
 et Adjectiva significantia 
 
 Notitiam, curam, et cupiditatem, 
 Memoriam, metum, crimen, po- 
 testatem, 
 
 JEt qua: contrario sensu stant 
 Poetae multa alia dant : 
 
 ut, Tempus edax rerum. 
 
 Animus alieni appetens, sui profusus. 
 Nescia mens hominum est fati. 
 Ontnes immemorem benejicii oderunU 
 Fraterni sanguinis insons. 
 Ira est impotens sui. 
 O seri studiorvm. 
 
 O Verba quaedam accusandi, absolvendi, damnandi t monendi, regunt Geni- 
 tivum rei : ut, 
 
 Cvndeninamus haruspices stultitioe. 
 lies adversa admonent nos religionum. 
 
 i u. Memini, recordor, reminiscor, obliviscor, nunc Genitivum regunt, nurw 
 Accusativum: ut, 
 
 Jubet mortis te meminisse Deug. 
 Dulces moriens reminiscitur Aigos. 
 
 1 1 Misceor, miseresco, Gcnitivo junguntUT : Utt 
 Nil nostn miserere 
 
SYNTAXJS MINOR. 73 
 
 V. Adjectiva, Verba, et aliquando Substantiva, admittunt 
 Ablativum significantem causam, vel instrumentum, 
 vel mod urn, vel materiam, vel respectum, vel limita- 
 tionem qualemcunque : ut, 
 
 Cceptis immanibus effera Dido. 
 
 Oderunt peccare mall formidine pcence. 
 
 Hi jaculis, illi certant defendere saxis. 
 
 Injuria jit duobus modis, vi aut fraude. 
 
 Animo constamus et corpore. 
 
 Ennius ingenio maximus, arte rudis. 
 
 Mardonius natione Medus. 
 
 Non grandis natu est, sed tamenjam cetate provectus, 
 
 1. Fitngor,frucr, utor, vescor, Ablativum regunt ; potior, Ablativum vei 
 
 Genitivum: ut, 
 
 Fungar vice cotis. 
 
 Cilm victoria posset uti, frui maluit. 
 
 Numidce ferind came vescebantur, 
 
 Auro vi potitur. 
 
 Romani signorum potiti sunt, 
 
 2. Acijectiva et Verba, qua? ad copiam egestatemve pertinent, Ablativum 
 
 regunt ; multa etiam Genitivum : ut, 
 
 Amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus* 
 Numquam animus motu vacuus est. 
 
 Turpe est diffiuere luxurid. 
 
 Vacare culpa maximum est solatium. 
 Dives opum, dives pictai vestis et auri. 
 Mancipiis locuples eget ceris Cappadocum rex* 
 H(£ res vita me saturant. 
 
 3. Opus et usus Ablativum regunt : ut, 
 
 Ubi res adsunt, quid opus est verbis ? 
 Usus est jilio viginti minis. 
 
 4. Adjectiva, dignus, indignus, praditus, fretus, contentus, item Verbum 
 
 dignor, Ablativum regunt : ut, 
 
 Dignum laude virum Musa vetat mori. 
 Lentulus est singulari modestid prceditus. 
 Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. 
 
 5. AWativus Pretii sequitur Verba et Adjectiva signi6cantia emp» 
 
 tionem, venditionem, vel cestimationem : ut, 
 
 Ego spem pretio non emo. 
 Plurimus auro venit honos. 
 Muitorum sanguine victoria sietit. 
 Quod nan opus eat, owe carum est. 
 
*74 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 
 
 a. Pe/ Ellipsin usurpantur, omissa voce pretio, Ablativi, "ill, parvo 
 
 minimo, nimio, magno, plurimo, duplo, et dimidio} ut, 
 
 Parvo fames constat, magno fastidium. 
 
 b. fl£stimatio rei plerumque Genitivum habet, praesertim ellipticos 
 
 illos, magni, parvi, minimi, pluris, atque plurimi : ut, 
 
 Sapiens dolorem nihili facit. 
 
 Vbluptatem virtus minimi facit 
 
 Pluris est oculatus testis unus quam auriti decern, 
 
 e. Tarn Pretium quam iEstimationem significant, pluris, minoris, tanti, 
 (juanti, maximi : ut, 
 
 Emit hortos tanti qitanti Pythius voluit. 
 
 6. 
 
 Ablativus Differentiae jungitur Adjectivis, Adverbiis, et Verbis com- 
 parative et superlativae significationis : ut, 
 
 Sol multis partibus major est quam luna. 
 A Cynicis tunica distantia dogmata, 
 
 a. In primis Ablativi elliptici : 
 
 Altera, hoc, eo, quo, Dimidio, duplo, quanta, tanto, 
 
 Nihilo et nimio, Paullo, multo, aliquanto : 
 
 ut, Eo gravior est dolor, quo culpa major. 
 Tanto pessimus omnium poeta, 
 Quanto tu optimus omnium patronus. 
 
 7. Ablativus Comparationis regitur a Comparativis, sive Adjectivis, 
 
 sive Adverbiis : ut, 
 
 Viliu8 argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. 
 Puto mortem dedecore leviorem. 
 
 a. Quam eleganter omittitur post plus, amplius, minus : ut. 
 Plus quingentos colaphos inf regit mihi. 
 
 8. Ablativum regunt ha? Praepositiones : 
 
 A f ab, absque, coram, de, 
 Palam, clam, cum, ex, et e, 
 Sine, te.nus, pro, et pra : 
 
 His subter, super, addito. 
 Et in, sub, si fit static 
 
 a. Prapositio in Compositione eundem nonnunquam casum regit, quern 
 
 et extra Compositionem regebat : ut 
 
 Detrudunt naves scopulo. 
 Te nunc aUoquor, Africane. 
 
 b. Verba discedendi, separandi, arcendi, removendi, et simiiia, omissi 
 
 quoque Praepositione, regunt Ablativum : ut, 
 
 Cedes coemptis saltibus et domo. 
 
 Populus Athentensis Phocionem patrtd pepulit. 
 
SYNTAXIS MINOR. 76 
 
 C Hue refer Ablativum post Verba et Participia Originis, qualia sunt, 
 natus, prognatusy satus, creatus, ortus : ut, 
 
 Atreus Tantalo prognatus, Pelope natus. 
 Sate sanguine divunu 
 
 d. Tenus vel Genitivum pluralem vel Ablativum regit, et post suum 
 Casum ponitur: ut, 
 
 Crurnm tenus a mento palearia pendent, 
 Antiochus Tauro tenus regnare jussus est. 
 
 4. Cum ita subjungitur casibus Pronominum Personalium, et plerum- 
 que Relativi, ut ex duobus vocibus una fiat : ut, mecum, tecum, 
 tecum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum vel quocum, quibuscum. 
 
 9. Substantivum et Participium conjunctim ponuntur in Ablativo. 
 quern Absolutum vocant: ut, 
 
 Regibus exactis consules creati sunt. 
 Casare venturo, Phosphore, redde diem. 
 Pereunte obsequio imperium etiam intercidit 
 
 a. Absolute etiam ponitur Substantivum cum Si!bstantivo vel Adjective, 
 ubi intelligitur Participium existendi: ut, 
 
 Nil desperandum est, Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. 
 Jamque cinis, vivis fratribus, Hector erat. 
 
 § 95. D I. 1 . Definitio Temporis in Ablativo pc fcur, si rogatur quando 
 vel intra quantum tempus : ut, 
 
 Hieme omnia bella conquiescunt. 
 Quicquid est, biduo sciemus. 
 
 2. In definiendo Tempore multus est Praepositionum usus : ut, 
 
 Sol binas in singulis annis reversiones facit. 
 
 De die. (id est, ante Jinem diei.') 
 
 De node, (id est, ante Jinem noctis.) 
 
 De multd node, (id est, multo ante Jinem noctis.) 
 
 Sub vesperum. (id est, uppropinquante vespero.) 
 
 Diem ex die expecto. 
 
 3. Quanto tempore abhinc, ante* vel pdst, interdum per Ablativum, ro- 
 
 terdum per Accusativum dicitur : ut, 
 
 Comitia jam abhinc triginta diebus erant habita. 
 Hoc factum est ferme abhinc biennium. 
 
 4. Duratio temporis, ubi rogatur quamdiu, frequentius iu Accusative) 
 
 punitur, rarius in Ablativo : ut, 
 
 Pericles quadraginta annos prcefuit Athenh. 
 Imperium Assyrii mille trecentis annis tenuere. 
 
<0 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 
 
 II. 1. Locus, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur itt Ablativo, vel sine 
 Praepositione, vel longe frequentius cum Praeposit'one in : ut. 
 
 P>am forte" Via Sacra. 
 In Lemno uxorem ducit, 
 
 2. Oppidi nomen, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in Ablativo, modo 
 sit vel teniae Declinationis, vel pluralis Numeri : ut, 
 
 Alexander Babylone mortuus est. 
 Philippus Neapoli est, Lentulus Puteolis, 
 Thebis nutritus an Argis. 
 
 3 &jd in Genitivo ponitur, si et Deelinacionis est primae vel secunda 
 et singularis Numeri : ut, 
 
 Quid Roma faciam ? mentiri nescio. 
 Is habitat Mileti. 
 
 4. Loci nomen a Praepositione fere regitur post Verbum motus : ut, 
 
 Profectus est in Galliam. 
 Ab Europd petis Asiam. 
 
 b. Oppidi nomen, ad quod itur, in Accusativo sine Praepositione fer£ 
 ponitur : ut, 
 
 Regulus Carthaginem rediit. 
 
 6, Oppidi nomen, ex quo itur, in Ablativo sine Proposition** fere 
 ponitur; ut, 
 
 Demaratus fugit Corintho. 
 
 7 Sed et Oppida saepe capiunt, et alia Nomina omittunt Praepositionem 
 
 post Verbum motus : ut, 
 
 A Brundisio nulla Jama venerat. 
 
 Pars Scythiam et rapidum Cretan veniemus Oaxen, 
 
 8 Humus, domus, et rus oppidorum constructionem imitantur : ut, 
 
 Cadmus spargit humi, mortalia semina, dentes. 
 Parvi sunt f oris arma, nisi est consilium domi. 
 Ite domum saturai, venit Hesperus, ite capella. 
 Video rure redeuntem senem. 
 
 III. 1. Spatium Distantias frequentius in Accusativo, interdam in Abla- 
 tivo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Aheram ab Amann iter unius diet. 
 
 JEsculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab Epidaum 
 distui. 
 
 9. Spatium Progressions in Accusativo ponitur : utt 
 Millia turn pransi tria repimus. 
 
SYNTAX1S MINOR. 
 
 3. Spatium Dimensionis frequentissime in Accusative interdum 
 Ablativo, interdum in Genitivo ponitur: ut, 
 
 Rrant muri Babylonis ducenos pedes alt's 
 jLengum sesquipede, latum pede. 
 Areas latas pedum denum jacito. 
 
 § 96. E. I. 1. Libet, licet, liquet, et pluaque Impersonal!*, reguut Da- 
 tivum : ut, 
 
 Ne libeat tibi quod non licet 
 Scevis inter se convenit tirsis. 
 
 2. JHget, pudet, pcenitet, tcedet atque miseret, regunt Accusativum Peraunaj 
 cum Genitivo Rei, vel cum Infiintivo: ut, 
 
 Miseret te aliorum : tui te nee miseret, nee pudet. 
 Me civitatis morvm piget tadetque. 
 Eos partim scelerum. partim ineptiarum pocnitet. 
 Quern poznitet peccasse> pceni est innoceiis. 
 
 3* Delectat, juvat, decet, dedeceU oportet, Accusativum capiunt: ut, 
 
 Mejuvat in prima coluisse Helicona juve?itd. 
 Oratorem irasci minime decet. 
 Legem brevem esse oportet. 
 
 4. Pcrtinet, attinet, Prsepositicnem ad cum Accusativo sumunt : ut, 
 
 Ad rempublicam pertinet, me conservari. 
 Profundat, perdat, pereat, nihil ad me attinet, 
 
 5. Interest et refert Genitivum admittunt : ut, 
 
 Interest omnium rectd facer e. 
 
 Refert compositionis, quce quibus anteponas. 
 
 6. Cum his Verbis junguntur, loco Pronominum Personalium, Ab- 
 
 lativi feminini, med, tud, sua, nostra, vestrd, subaudita voce 
 re : ut, 
 
 Et tud et med interest te valere. 
 
 Quid refert lued, cui serviam ? 
 
 7. Adduntur his Verbis Genitivi JEstimationis, tanti, quanti, magni, 
 
 parvi, pluris : ut, 
 
 Utriusque nostrum magni interest, ut te videam. 
 
 Hoc non pluris refert qudm si imbrem in cribrum geras. 
 
 8. Verba Neutra in Passiva Voce impersonaliter usurpantur pro quibus* 
 
 iibet personis : ut, 
 
 Ab omnibus reclamatum est. (scil. omnes reclamdmnt.) 
 Quid ayitur ? statur (^scil. stciur a nobis, sive stamus. 
 
7S SYNTAXIS MINOR. 
 
 II. 1. Activa seiitentia fere omnis ita in Passivam convert! potest, ut 
 Nominativus Activa? sententia? fiat in Passiva Ablativna 
 Agentis. 
 
 (A.) Si Activa? sententia? Verhum Accusativum habet propioris Objecti, 
 Verbura in Passiva personale erit, Accusativo Activa? in No 
 minativum Passiva? transeunte : ut 
 
 Act. Egregii consul rem gessit. 
 Pass. Egregii ab consule res gesta est. 
 
 (B.) Sin minus, Verbum Passiva? impersonate erit, et vei sine casa 
 stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quern in Activa regebat : ut. 
 
 Act. Hostes constanter pugnabant. 
 Pass. Ab hostibus constanter pugnabatur. 
 
 Act. Medicinal nos indigemus. 
 Pass. Medicines a nobis indigetur. 
 
 2. Ubi nihil ambigui esse potest, supprimitur Ablativus Agentis post 
 
 Im personalia Passiva: ut, 
 
 Itur in antiquum silvam. 
 
 3. Hinc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi, atque ab Activis, 
 
 praterquam unum Accusativum propioris Objecti. 
 
 4 Vapub, veneo, exulo, liceo, fio, cum aliis quibusdam, vi Passiva con- 
 struuntur : ut, 
 
 Testis ab reofustibus vapulavit. 
 
 Malo a cive spoliari t quam ab hoste vinire. 
 
 Torqueor, infesto ne vir ab hoste cadaU 
 
 §97 F. I. Infinitivus cum Gerundiis et Supinis Substantivum Verb! 
 efficit. 
 
 1. Infipitivus multis Verbis ac Participiis adjungitur et poetice* Ad- 
 jectivis : ut, 
 
 Invidere non cadit in sapientem. 
 
 Videor pios errare per lucos. 
 
 Solent diu cogitare qui magna volunt gerere. 
 
 Et cantors pares et respondere parati. 
 
 2. Pro A'jcusativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in dam post Pr»- 
 positiones: ut, 
 
 Breve tempus satis est longum ad bene vivendum. 
 Mores puerorum se inter tulendum detegunt. 
 
SYNTAXIS MINOR. 79 
 
 5. Pro Genitivo ponitur Gerundium in di post Adjectiva et Substaiv 
 tiva: ut 
 
 Cupidus sum satisfaeiendi reipublicce. 
 Thucydides omnes dicendi artificio vincit. 
 
 4. Pro Dativo ponitur Gerundium in do post Adjectiva et Verba 
 
 nonnulla : ut, 
 
 Crassu8 disserendo par esse turn potuit. 
 
 5. Pro Ablativo ponitur Gerundium in do Causam, Instrumentum, 
 
 aut Modum significans, vel cum Praepositionibus ab, de % ex, 
 in, cum : ut, 
 
 Nihil agendo homines male facere discunt. 
 Jovem ajuvando nominamus. 
 
 6. Gerundia Active significant: si vero Transitiva sunt, eorum con 
 
 structio Passive repraesentari potest, imd frequentius reprse- 
 sentatur, per Participium in dus, quod inde Gerundivi nomen 
 accipit. 
 
 7. Gerund iva constructio ejusmodi est, ut Substantivum in Gerundii 
 
 casum trahatur, cum quo concordet Gerundivum : ut, 
 
 E terra, ignem elicimus ad colendos agros. 
 Occasio videbatur rerum novandarum. 
 
 8. Ad Necessitatem Passive significandam Gerundivum in Neutre 
 
 Genere impersonaliter adhibetur : ut, 
 
 Civium bonis est a vobis consulendum. 
 Orandum est ut sit mens sana in corpore sano, 
 
 I I. I. Supinum in urn postponitur, ut Accusativus, Verbis motum sig- 
 
 nificantibus : ut, 
 
 Speetatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsce. 
 Scitatum oracula Phasbi mittimus. 
 
 2. Supinum in u postponitur, ut Ablativus Respectus, turn multis 
 Adjectivis, turn Substantivis fas, nefas, opus: ut, 
 
 Nil dictu foedum visuque hcec limina tangat, 
 
 Intra qua puer est. 
 
 Ecce (nefas visu) serpens altaribus exit. 
 
 III. Participia, Gerundia, et Supinum in urn, regunt casus suoruu 
 
 Verborum ; ut, 
 
 Ausi omnes immane nefas, ausoque potiti. 
 
 § 98. G. 1. Neutra Adjectiva utriusque Numeri ponuntur interduin 
 Adverbialiter, praesertim apud poetas: ut, 
 Serviet cbternum qui parvo nesciet uti. 
 Asper, acerba tuens, retro rtdit. 
 
HU 
 
 SYNTAXIS MINOR. 
 
 2. Conjunctiones Sociativa? et Dissociativae similes Casus, 
 Tempore connectunt : ot, 
 
 Mlraiur portas strepitumque et strata viarunu 
 Virtus nee eripi nee surripi potest. 
 
 Nisi alia constructionis ratio ijitercedat. 
 
 Modos, et 
 
 H. 1 
 
 Ne", prohibitiva Conjunctio, Imperativo vel Subjunctivo Morio 
 jungitur: ut, 
 
 A T e qua meis esto dictis mora, 
 Ne can/eras cvlpam in me. 
 
 Subjunctivum exigunt h.e Conjunctiones : 
 
 Ut (that) 
 
 Ne (lest, that — not) 
 
 Quo (in order that) 
 
 Quominus (but that) 
 
 Quin (but that) 
 
 Qmtm (since) 
 
 Licet "] 
 
 Quamvis L (although) 
 
 Ut 
 
 \ (I wish that) 
 3. Subjunctivum vel Indicativum pro re nata capiunt hae Conjuncti- 
 
 on* vided that") 
 
 (as if) 
 
 } 
 
 ones 
 Quum 
 
 Ubi I (when) 
 Ut 
 
 Dum 
 Donee S- (until) 
 Quoad J 
 
 Quoties (as often as) 
 Simul ac (as soon as) 
 
 Ante-quam \ fore 
 
 Pmus — quam J v 
 
 Post — quam (after that) 
 
 Si (if) 
 
 Nisi (unless) 
 
 Etsi "J 
 
 Etiamsi I (although) 
 
 Tametsi I 
 
 Indicativum plerumque capiunt hae Conjunctiones, nisi ratio loci 
 Subjunctivum postulet : 
 
 Quod (that, because) 
 Quia (because) 
 Quoniam (since) 
 Quando (when, since) 
 Siquidem (inasmuch as) 
 
 Ut (from the time when) 
 
 Dum "j 
 
 Donee i- (whilst, as long as) 
 
 Quoad J 
 
 Quanquam (although) 
 
 5. Quamvis cum Indicativo reperiiur apud historicos et poetas: ut, 
 
 Quamvis ingenio non valet,, arte valet, 
 
 6. Relativum, qui, qua, quod, Subjunctivum regit, ubi signifieat quum, 
 
 quamvis, ut, vel talis ut: ut, 
 
 Miseret tut me, qui hunc facias inimicum tibi. 
 Litems misi quibus et placarem eum et monerem, 
 Est qui vinci possit. 
 l&uis est qui non oderit protervam pueritiam 9 
 
SYNTAXIS MINOR. 8i 
 
 7 Pronominibus et Particulis interrocandi, subordinate positie, Sub- 
 junctivus additur ut, 
 
 Ipse quis sit t utrum sit, an non sit, ia quoque riesctt, 
 
 Talia sunt : 
 
 Quis, quantus, qualis, qui, quot, quotus, uncle, ubi, quantity 
 Quam, quamobrem, quare, cur, quornodo, nuni, n£, ut, an % utrum. 
 
 3. Kelativum vel Conjunctio, quum subordinatur Innnitivo vel Sub- 
 junctive Subjunctivum regit : ut, 
 
 Cazsar ad me scripsit, gratissimum sibi esse quod quieverira. 
 Molior ut Cccsar mihi concedat ut absim, quum aiiquid in tten.itn 
 contra Cnceum agatur. 
 
 9. Conjunctio intelligitur aliquando : ut, 
 
 Philosophic servias oportet. (supple ut. ) 
 
 Quceram justum sit necnepoema. (supple utrum ) 
 
 Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, lcare, haberes. (supple si.) 
 
 Naturam expellas furco., tamen usque recvrreL (sTipple et£i* ) 
 
82 
 
 FIRST 
 
 RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING; 
 
 FOR THE USE OP BEGINNERS. 
 
 § 99. A. As every independent Sentence must have 
 
 L A Verb in a Proper Mood, expressed or understood , 
 
 II. A Subject in the Nominative Case, expressed or un- 
 derstood; with which the Verb agrees (see § 101.): 
 
 •So observe more particularly : 
 
 (a) A Substantive may have any of these Adjuncts * 
 
 (1) Adjectives agreeing with it; 
 
 (2) Substantives in apposition to it; 
 
 (3) A Genitive governed by it; 
 
 (4) A Preposition and Case depending on it. 
 
 (b) An Adjective may have any of these Adjuncts: 
 
 (I ) An Adverb qualifying it ; 
 
 (2) Cases governed by it ; 
 
 i'S) A Preposition and Case depending on it. 
 
 (e) A Verb may have any of these Adjuncts : 
 
 (1) An Adverb qualifying it; 
 
 (2) Cases governed by it ; 
 
 (3) Prepositions (with their Cases) depending on it; 
 
 (4) An Infinitive depending on it. 
 
 S, Therefore, in order to construe a simple Sentence : 
 I. Find its Verb, which must be in a Proper Mood. 
 Obs. If no such Verb appear, Sst or sunt is probably understood. 
 
 H. Find its Subject, which will be a Nominative Case of 
 the same Number and Person as the Verb, answer- 
 ing the question who or what ? 
 
FIRST RULES OP CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 83 
 
 Obs. 1. If no such Nominative appear, the Pronoun agreeing 
 with the Verb must generally be understood as the Sub- 
 ject. 
 
 Obs. 2. If an Adjective appear in the Nominative, but no Substantive, 
 a Substantive with which it agrees is generally supplied in 
 English : usually man or men, if the Adjective is Mascu- 
 line ; thing or things, if it is Neuter. 
 
 TL Find the Adjuncts of the Subject, if any. 
 
 IV. Find the Adjuncts of the Verb, seeing first if it has 
 an Adverb. 
 
 Obs. In order to find its other Adjuncts, see whether the Verb is 
 Copulative or not. If Copulative, the chief Adjunct will 
 be a Predicate Substantive or Adjective. If not Copulative, 
 the Adjuncts, if any, will be some of those above-mentioned 
 (c). See § 101. 
 
 V. Having done this, construe into English first the 
 Subject with its agreeing Adjective, and their Ad- 
 juncts ; then the Verb with its Adverb ; then its 
 other Adjuncts. 
 
 Note. Generally a Simple Sentence contains only one Verb of a Proper 
 Mood : a Compound Sentence contains two or more such Verbs. 
 But, when a Verb is followed by an Accusative and Infinitive, 
 the Sentence is compound. 
 
 Obs. A Vocative Case, with its Adjuncts, may be construed at the be- 
 ginning of the Sentence, or in some other convenient place. 
 
 § 100. Observe the following Rules for Parsing the words of 
 a Sentence, whether in writing or by mouth. State 
 what Part of Speech any word is, and mention, if 
 
 {Its Case — Number — Nom.Sing. — Geni- 
 tive Termination — Declension — Gender 
 — Word it agrees with or is governed by. 
 
 Give the Rule for its Gender, if desired, from the Accidence : 
 and the Rule for its agreement or government, from the 
 Syntax. 
 
 Decline it, if desired, through both Numbers. 
 
 Obs. It is useful, with a Substantive, to decline the Adjective 
 Pronoun /news, in order to show the Gender. Thus, when 
 required to decline ager, afield, say — 
 
84 FIRST RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 
 
 
 Siyig. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Ager meus, my field 
 
 Agri mei, my fields 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Agri mei, of my field 
 
 Agrorum meorum, of my B leldx 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Agro meo, to my field 
 
 Agris meis, to my fields 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Agrum meura, my field 
 
 Agros meos, my fields 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Ager mi, my field 
 
 Agri mei, my fields 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Agro meo, by my field 
 
 Agris meis, by my fields 
 
 And in like manner — 
 
 Mensa mea, my table. Opus meum, my work, &c. &c. 
 
 fits Case — Gender — Number — Nom. 
 (2) An Adjective,-! Sing.— What declined like?— What it 
 ^ agrees with ? 
 
 Decline it, if required. 
 
 {Its Person — Tense — Mood — Voice — 
 Verb it comes from — Kind of Verb — 
 Conjugation — What Nom. it agrees 
 with? 
 Conjugate it, if required, according to § 44. 
 
 Give the Rule, if required, for its Perfect and Supine ; and the 
 Syntax Rule for its construction. 
 
 {Tense — Voice — Verb it comes from — 
 Kind of Verb — Conjugation — What go- 
 verned by ? 
 
 cs „ . \ Verb it comes from, &c, &c. 
 
 Diipme, J ' ' 
 
 Conjugate and give Rules for b, and c. as for a. 
 
 ' Case — Gender — Number — Nom. Sing. 
 — Tense — Voice — Verb it comes from 
 — Kind of Verb — Conjugation — What 
 it agrees with? 
 Decline. Conjugate, and give Rules, as above, (2) (3) a, 
 
 14) Pronoun Re f^ nat Antecedent? — How it agrees 
 * ' i ,- < with its Antecedent? — What Case?— 
 
 lative, ^ Why? 
 
 Obs. Personal Pronouns follow the rules of Substantives Pos- 
 sessive those of Adjectives : Demonstrative Pronouns may 
 be used either as Substantives or Adjectives. 
 
 (5) Adverb, What word it qualifies ? 
 
 d. Participle, 
 
FIRST RULES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 85 
 
 (6) Preposition, What word it governs ? 
 
 Note. When the learner is somewhat advanced, he must also state, in 
 parsing, the derivation and composition of words, the govern- 
 ment of Moods, &c. &c. 
 
 Example. — It is required to construe and parse the words : 
 Ad firmandum corpus multum conducit tempestiva animi 
 remissio, quae negligi non potest impune. 
 
 1. These words contain two connected simple sentences, or 
 
 one compound sentence. 
 
 (1) Verb of first sentence is conducit (Third Pers. Sing.> 
 
 (2) Subject Nom. of first sentence is remissio. 
 
 (3) Adjuncts to the Subject are, 
 
 a. Agreeing Adjective, tempestiva. 
 
 b. Genitive Case, animi. 
 
 (4) Adjuncts to the Verb are, 
 
 a. Adverb, multum. 
 
 b. Preposition with Case, ad firmandum corpus 
 
 (1) Verb of second sentence is potest. 
 
 (2) Subject Nomin. of second sentence is quae. 
 
 (3) Adjuncts to the Subject quae, none. 
 
 (4) Adjuncts to the verb are, 
 
 a. Adverb, non. 
 
 b. Infinitive, negligi. 
 
 c. Adverb, impune. 
 
 2. Construe the words in this order : 
 
 Tempestiva remissio | animi, | quae | non potest | negligi 
 Seasonable relaxation of-mind, which can-not be-omilted 
 
 impune, | conducit multum | ad firmandum corpus. 
 with-impunity, conduces much to strengthening the-body 
 
 3. Parse thus, taking the words in order of construing : 
 
 (1.) Tempestiva. Adjective. Nom. Fern. Sing, from tempestivus 
 like bonus. Agrees with remissio by Rule 
 § 93. A. I. 
 
 (2.) Remissio. Substantive. Nom. Sing. Third Decl. Fern. 
 
 (onis). Subject of the Verb conducit. Rule 
 for its Gender % 73. (a) (2). 
 
S6 
 
 FIRST BUXES OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING. 
 
 (3.) Animi. 
 
 (4.) Quae. 
 
 (5.) Non. 
 
 '6.) Potest. 
 
 <7. ) NegligL 
 
 (8.) Impune. 
 (9.) Conducit. 
 
 (10.) Multum. 
 
 (11.) Ad. 
 
 (12.) Firmandum, 
 
 ( I % ) Corpus. 
 
 We. 
 
 Substantive. Gen. Sing, from animus (i) mind. 
 Second Decl. Masc. Governed by remissio by 
 Rule § 93. B. 7. Rule for Gender, § 72. 
 
 Relative Pronoun. Agrees with Antecedent re- 
 missio, being Fem. Sing. Third Pers. Rule, 
 § 93. III. Nominative to the Verb potest. 
 
 Adverb. Qualifies the Verb potest. 
 
 Verb. Third Pers. Pres. Indie. Act. from the 
 Irregular Neuter Verb possum (potes, &c. ), 
 § 61. Agrees with its Nom. quae by Rule 
 f 93. II. 
 
 Verb. Pres. Infin. Pass, from the Transitive 
 Verb negligo (is), I-neglect. Third Conj. Is 
 governed by the Verb potest by Rule § 97. F. 
 I. 1. Conjugate negligo, negligis, neglexi, &c. 
 Rule for Preterperfect and Supine, § 91. 4. N. 
 § 82. (6). 
 
 Adverb Qualifies the Verb negligi (or po- 
 test). 
 
 Verb. Third Pers. Pres. Indie. Act. from the 
 Neuter Verb conduco (is), I-conduce. Third 
 Conj. Agrees with its Nominative Case remis- 
 sio by Rule § 93. II. Conjugate conduco, 
 conducis, conduxi, &c. Rule for Preterperfect 
 and Supine, § 82. (&). 
 
 Adverb. Qualifies the Verb conducit. 
 Preposition. Governs the Accus. Case corpus. 
 
 Participle. Ace. Neut. Sing, from firmandus, 
 Part. Gerundive Pass, from the Transitive Verb 
 firmo (as); I- strengthen ; First Conj. Agrees 
 with corpus by Rule § 97. I. 7. 
 
 Substantive. Ace. Sing, from corpus (oris). 
 Third Decl. Neut. Governed by ad, by Rule 
 § 94. V. 8. Rule for Gender, § 75. (c). 
 
 Each rule, when required, must be repeated at full : each Sub- 
 stantive, when required, be declined with meus ; and each 
 Verb bt conjugated according to § 44. 
 
SYNTAXIS, SIVE SENTENT1ARUM 
 CONSTRUCTIO. 
 
 PAES I. 
 DE SIMPLICI SENTENTIA. 
 
 § 101. PnEFATORf Excursion. 
 
 Syntax teaches the correct arrangement of words in sentences, 'lhe 
 simplest sentence is the Proposition or Enuntiation of a single thought : 
 as, homo est mortalis, man is mortal. The simplest form of Sentence 
 has three members : 
 
 1. Subjectum, the Subject; that is, the person, thing, or notion 
 
 concerning which something is predicated, or declared. 
 
 2. Prcedicatum, the Predicate; that which is predicated (prcedicatur'u 
 
 or declared, concerning the Subject. 
 
 3. Copula, or the Link, which shows the connection between the 
 
 Subject and its Predicate, and so constructs the sentence. 
 
 (1) The Subject must be a Substantive, or that whicb 
 
 possesses the force of a Substantive : as homo, man i 
 ego, I ; Gal/us, a Gaul ; err are, to err ; tu, thou. 
 
 (2) The Predicate, when distinct from the Copula, must 
 
 be a Substantive, Adjective, Participle, or Adjectival 
 Pronoun ; as, animal, an animal ; mortalis, mortal ; 
 victus, conquered ; noster, ours : or a Preposition with 
 its case (equivalent to a noun) ; as sine vitiis, pro 
 consule. 
 
 (3) The Copula, when distinct from the Predicate, is generally 
 
 some finite form of the Verb of being, sum. 
 Examples of Simple Sentences in which the three members are distinct: — 
 
 SUBJECT. COPULA. PREDICATE. 
 
 1. Homines sunt animalia. 
 
 Men are animals. 
 
 2 Ego sum mortalis. 
 
 I am mortal. 
 
 3. GaUi erant victi. 
 
 The Gauls were .conquered. 
 
 4 Errare est nostrum. 
 
 To err is ours 
 
S8 b^NTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 SUBJECT. COPULA.. PREDICATE. 
 
 5. Tu ..... es pro co?i*iue. 
 
 Th(»u art Proconaui. 
 
 But, in general, the Predicate and Copula are blended together in one 
 finite Predicative Verb, which is then called the Predicate : as, 
 
 SUBJECT. PREDICATE. 
 
 Ego disc-o. 
 
 I learn (am learning). 
 
 Homines spira-nt. 
 
 Men breathe (are breathing). 
 
 Here, strictly speaking, the crude Forms of the Verbs (disc-, spira-) are 
 the Predicates, and the Endings (-o, -ni), are the Copulas. And, when 
 the Subject is understood from the Ending, a single Verb may be a 
 complete sentence. Thus, the famous despatch of Caesar, Veni, vidi, 
 vici (I came, I saw, I conquered), contains three distinct sentences, 
 each consisting of one word only. 
 Obs. 1. When an Adjective qualifies a Substantive without being joined 
 to it by a Copula, it is said (attribui, attributum esse) to be an 
 Attributive or Epithet. Thus, in the sentence, Vtr bonus 
 laudatur (a good man is praised), bonus is an Epithet ; but in 
 Vir est bonus (the man is good), bonus is the Predicate. 
 Obs. 2. The Infinitive, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, are called 
 Verbum Infinitum : all the other forms of the Verb, any of 
 which can make a complete sentence, are called Verbum 
 Finitum. 
 Obs. 3. Objectum, the Object, is that person or thing upon which an 
 action is directed : as, Pnrentes amant liber os, where liber os is 
 the Object. Sometimes there are two Objects, a nearer and a 
 remoter : as, Pater librum filio dot ; where librum is the nearer 
 Object, filio the remoter. 
 Obs. 4. Copulative Verbs are those which couple a Subject and a Nominal 
 Predicate. Of these Verbs sum is the chisf : but others also 
 have a Copulative use, as forem, fio, existo, evado, maneo, audio, 
 nascor, videor ; and Passive Verbs of making, naming, declar- 
 ing, choosing, thinking, finding, fyc. : as efficior, appellor^ vocor, 
 nuncupor, dicor, feror, declaror, creor, designor, eligor, inscribor, 
 existimor, putor, credor, agnoscor, habeor, invenior, reperior, §*c. 
 
 DE CONCORDANTIIS. 
 
 CONCORDANTIA PRIMA. 
 
 Adjectivi cum Substantivo. 
 
 § 102. Regula Generate. — Adjectiva, Participia, et Prono- 
 mina, sive attributa sive praedicata, cum Substaii- 
 tivis suis genere, numtro, et casu concordant : ut> 
 
8ENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 89 
 
 Donee erisfelix, multos numerabis amicos ; 
 Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus opes. — Oytdius. 
 
 Obs. 1. Substantivum per ellipsin intelligitur : ut, 
 
 Labor em plerique fugiunt. (supple homines.) — Cicero. 
 Comix a Icevd canit, corvus a dextrd. (supple manu.) — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 2. Neutra Adjectiva Substantive-rum vice fungunturt 
 ut, 
 Omnium rerum mors est extremum. — Cic. 
 Honestum et utile pugnare aliquando videntur. — ClO. 
 Verecundd laxamus seria mensd. — Persius. 
 
 CONCORDANTIA SECUNDA. 
 
 Verbi cum Nominativo Suhjecti. 
 
 § 103. R. G. — Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominativo 
 numero et persona : ut, 
 
 Omnia vitia contra naturam puynant. — Seneca. 
 Sera nimis vita est crastina. — Martialis. 
 
 Obs. Aliquando Infinitivus, vel continuata Locutio, vel Advcr- 
 bium cum Genitivo, pro Nominativo ponitur : ut, 
 Non est mentiri meum. — Terentius. 
 
 Incertum estqudm longa nostrum cujusque vita futura sit. — Cic. 
 Parum in eo putabatur esse animi. — Cic. 
 
 A. DE ELLIPSI NOMINATIVI. 
 
 § 104. Obs. 1. Nominativus Pronominum raro exprimitur : ut, 
 
 Nitimur in vetitum semper cupimusque negata. — Ov 
 ( Obs. ) Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut, 
 
 Ego reges ejeci : vos tyrannos introducitis. — Crc 
 
 Obs. 2. Dicendi, narrandi, et appellandi Verba tertia? per- 
 sonam pluralis Nominativum homines saepe habent 
 intellectum : ut, 
 
 Quod oiunt, auribus teneo lupum. — Ter. 
 
 Obs. 3. Impersonalia Nominativum nop habent expres- 
 sum : ut, 
 Tmdet ipsum vehementerque pamilet. — Cic. 
 
 ( Oc* ) Multa vero, quae Impersonalia vocantur, Nominativura 
 aUquem habent intellectum : ut, 
 
 Jam advesperascit. ("supple dies.) — Cic. 
 
90 STNTAX1S, SIVE 
 
 B. DE ELLIP'SI VERBI. 
 § 105. Obs. 1. Person® praesentis Verbi sum ssepe intelliguntur : ut, 
 Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum. (supple est.) — Cic. 
 Obs. 2. Infinitivus interdum Nominative- postponitur : ut, 
 
 Turn pius ZEneas humeris abscindere vestem. — Virg. 
 
 (Obs.) Plerumque autem Infinitivus Accusativo postponitur, 
 praecedente Verbo finito : ut, 
 
 Tradunt Homerum ccecum fuisse. — Cic. 
 
 CONCORD ANTIA TERTIA. 
 
 Relativi cum Antecedents 
 
 § 106. R. G. — Relativum cum Antecedente concordat 
 genere, numero, et persona : casu autem construi- 
 tur cum sua sententia : ut, 
 
 Ea est jucundissima amicitia, quam similitude* 
 morum conjugavit. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 1. Si Sententia pro Antecedente ponitur, Relativum est 
 in neutro genere : ut, 
 
 In tempore ad earn veni, quod rerum omnium est 
 primum. — Ter. 
 
 Obs. 2. Interdum Antecedens in possessivo Pronomine in- 
 ciuditur : ut, 
 
 Omnes laudare for tunas meas 
 Qui natum haberem tali ingenio pr&ditum. (sci- 
 licet, fortunas mei qui.) — Ter. 
 
 § 107. Nota. — Relativum, Qui, quae, quod, plerumque consider ari 
 debet tan quam positum inter duos casus unius Substan- 
 tivi, sive expresses sive suppressos : cum antecedente 
 conveniet in genere et numero : cum sequente etiam in 
 casu, sicut Adjectivum cum Substantivo. 
 Obs. 1 . Ambo Casus interdum exprimuntur : ut, 
 
 Erant itinera duo, quibus itineribus exire possent. — C jksar. 
 Obs. 2. Plerumque supprimitur Casus posterior : ut, 
 Animum rege, qui, nisi paret, 
 Imperat. (scilicet qui animus. ) — Horati as. 
 
 Ifc**. 3. Interdum prior : ut, 
 
 Sic tibi dent nympha qua levet uwla sitim (scil. undam qua 
 unrfn. ) — Ov. 
 
SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT1O. 91 
 
 Ob*. 4. Interdum uterque : ut, 
 
 Sunt quibus in satird videor nimis acer. (scil. homines 
 quibus hominibus. ) — Hor. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTUM CONCORDANT! ARUM. 
 
 A. DE SYNESI. 
 
 § 108. Synesis est ea constructionis ratio, quae ad sensum voeabu 
 lorum, non ad formam, spectat. 
 
 R. G. I. — Substantivum, forma sed non sensu singulare, saepe 
 habet Verbum, Adjectivum, vel Relativum plurale : ut, 
 
 Pars epulis onerant mensas. — Virgllius. 
 
 Clamor inale populi, mirantium quid rei esset. — Livius. 
 
 Ccesar equitatum pravnittit, qui hostes observent — C^es. 
 
 R G. II. — Substantivum, forma sed non sensu neutrum vel femi- 
 ninum, interdum habet Adjectivum aut Relativum diversi 
 generis: ut, 
 
 Capita conjurationis securi percussi sunt. — Liv. 
 Ubi est is scelus, qui me perdidit ? — Ter. 
 
 Subeunt Tegecea juventus 
 Auxilio tardi. — Statius. 
 
 b. DE PLURIBUS NOM1NIBUS IN SUBJECTO. 
 
 § 109. R. G. I. — Duo vel plura Nomina singularia conjuncta 
 habent plerumque Adjectivum, Verbum, vel Relativum 
 plurale : ut, 
 
 Veneno absumpti sunt Hannibal et PMlopozmen. — Liv. 
 
 $ U 0. R. G. II. — Si Nomina ilia singularia diversarum sunt 
 personarum vel generum, Verbum plurale cum Nomina- 
 tivo dignioris personam, Adjectivum vero vel Relativum 
 cum Substantivo dignioris generis, fere concordat. 
 
 (a) Prima persona dignior est quam secunda, secunda quarn 
 
 tertia : ut, 
 
 Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. — Cic. 
 
 (b) In rebus animatis dignius est masculinum genus quam 
 
 femininum: ut, 
 
 Pater mini et mater rnortui sunt — Ter. 
 
 (c) In rebus vero inanimis Adjectivum vel Relativum sae- 
 
 pissime erit in neutro genere : ut, 
 
 Divitice, decus, gloria, in oculis sita sunt. — Saljlustius. 
 
92 SYNTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 ( Obs. ) Verbum haud raro cum proximo Substantivo concordat *. ut, 
 Religio et fides anteponatur amicitiai. — Cir. 
 Convicta est Messalina et Silius. — Tacitus. 
 
 C. DE CONSTRUCTIONS VERBORUM 
 COPULATIVORUM. 
 
 § 11 L R. G. — Verba Copulativa, sive finiti modi, sive mfiniti, 
 eundem habent utrinque casum : ut, 
 
 Si spes est expectatio boni, mali expectationem esse 
 
 necesse est metum. — Cic. 
 Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus. — Hor 
 Regius agnoscor per rata signa puer. — Ov. 
 Vobis licet esse beatis. — Hob. 
 § 112. Obs. 1. Verbum, inter duos Nominativos positum, interdum 
 cum posteriore solo concordat : ut, 
 Amantium irce amoris integratio est. — Ter. 
 Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda. — Cic. 
 Obs. 2. Relativum, inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatum 
 cum posteriore solo seepe concordat : ut, 
 Animal plenum rationis, quern vocamus hominem. — Cic. 
 Thebce, quod Bceotice caput est. — Liv. 
 
 D. DE APPOSITIONE. 
 
 § 113. R. G. — Substantivo, Pronomini, et interdum Sentential 
 apponi potest Substantivum ejusdem rei in eodem casu : ut, 
 Effodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum. — Ov. 
 Nos consules desumus. — Cic. 
 Cogitet orator em institui, rem arduam. — Cic. 
 Afot — Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt, alterum 
 in Genitivo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Recubans sub tegmine fagi. — Virg. 
 
 DE RECTTONE CASUUM, 
 
 ACCUSATIVUS. 
 
 § 114. Accusativus est casus propioris Objecti. 
 
 R % G. I. — Verba Transitiva regunt Accusativum propioris 
 Objecti: ut, 
 
 Sperne voluptates. — Hor. 
 Imprimis verier are Deum. — VlEG. 
 Percontatorem fugito. — Hor. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONST RUCTIO. 93 
 
 Obs. 1. Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva Accusativurn admit- 
 tunt suaa operationis : ut, 
 
 Duram servit servitutem. — Plautus. 
 Claudius aleam lusit. — Suetonius. 
 § 115. Obs. 2. Verba Transitiva, quae in Voce Passiva Copulativa 
 {hint, dupKcem habent Accusativum, unum Objec- 
 tivum, alterum Praadicativum : ut, 
 
 Ciceronem populus consulem declaravit. — Cic. 
 Hannibal Philippum hostem reddidit Romanis. — Nepos. 
 § 116. Obs 3. Verba qusedam rogandi et docendi duplicem habent 
 Accusativum, unum personam, alterum verb rei : ut, 
 
 Pacem te poscimus omnes. — Virg. 
 Quid nunc te, asine, litter as doceam f — Cic. 
 Et interdum celo : ut, 
 
 Ea ne me celet consuefeci Jilium. — Ter. 
 
 ( Obs. ) Eadem verba in Passiva Voce retinent Accusativum rei : ut, 
 
 Is primus rogatus est sententiam. — Liv. 
 Motus doceri gaudet Ionicos. — Hor. 
 
 § 117. Obs. 4. Accusativus Respectus Graeco more subjicitur turn 
 Verbis Neutris et Passivis turn Adjectivis : ut, 
 
 Micat auribus et tremit artus. — Virg. 
 
 Inficitur teneras tota rubore genas. — Tibullus. 
 
 G er manor um femina nudce sunt brachia ac lacertos. — Tac. 
 § 118. B. G. II. — Accusativum regunt hae Praepositiones : 
 
 Ante, apud, ad, adversus, 
 Circum, circa, citra, cis, 
 Contra, inter, erga, extra, 
 Infra, intra, juxta, ob, 
 Penes, pone, post, et prater, I 
 
 Prope, propter, per, secundum, 
 Sup?-a, versus, ultra, trans ; 
 His, super, subter, addito, 
 Et in, sub, si fit motio. 
 
 § 119. R. G. — Vocativus, Appellati Casus, regitur ab Inter- 
 jectione, sive expressa, sive intellecta : ut, 
 
 O Sol pulcher, O laudande. — Hor. 
 Alme Sol. — Hor. 
 Fill vel OfilL — Ter. 
 
 Not. — Interjectiones en et ecce regunt Accusativum et Xomiria- 
 tivum ; o, ah, lieu, hem, proh, Accusativum, Nominativum, et 
 Vocativum : ut, 
 
 En miserum hominem. ! — Cic. 
 
 Ecce nova turba atque rixa ! — Cic. 
 
 Heu miserande puer ! — Vtrg. 
 
 Heu vanitas humana ! — Plinius. 
 
 Pro h Deum atque hnminum Jidew ! — Cic. 
 
94- SYXTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 Obe. Dativum regunt hei et v<b : ut, 
 
 Hex misero mihi I — Tfr. 
 V<b tibiy causidice ! — Mart. 
 
 DATIYUS. 
 
 § 120. Dativus est Casus remotioris Object!. Interdum 
 Agentem, interdum Propositum signiikat. 
 
 A. DATIVUS OBJECTI. 
 
 R. G. I. — Omnia fere Adjectiva et Verba, item Ad verbis 
 et Substantiva, regunt Dativum remotioris Objecti, 
 cujus causa est aut fit aliquid: ut, 
 
 Non solum nobis divites esse volumus. — Cic. 
 
 Mihi istic nee seritur nee metitur. — Plaut. 
 
 Numa virgines Vesta legit — Lit. 
 
 Urbi pater est urbique maritus. — Lucanus. 
 
 Tibi luditur. — Pers. 
 
 Obs. 1. Ita sum possessive significans Dativum possidentis 
 habet: ut, 
 Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca. — Virg. 
 Obs. 2. Dativus Pronominis abundat eleganter : ut, 
 Quid mihi Celsus agit? — Hor. 
 Suo sibi gladio hunc jugulo. — Ter. 
 
 § 121. R. G. II. — Dativum regunt plurima Adjectiva, 
 Adverbia, et Verba, interdum etiam Substantiva, a 
 quibus indicatur 
 
 Commodum, communication 
 Comparatio, consecratio, 
 Congruentia, consuetudo, 
 Auxilium et aptitudo, 
 Benignitas, vicinitas, 
 Jucunditas, affinitas, 
 
 Traditio, venia, demonstration 
 Promissio, fides, et narratio 
 Obsequium, imperium, 
 Et quicquid his contrarium ; 
 Cum nubo, vaco : cetera 
 Sub prima stabunt reguia. 
 
 {}) Adjectiva : ut, 
 
 Patrice sit idoneus, utilis agris. — Juvenali8. 
 
 Nilfuit unquam sic impar sibi. — Hor. 
 
 Est jinitimus oratori poeta. — Cic. 
 
 Turba gravis paci placidceque inimica quieti. — Lucan. 
 
 Homini fidelissimi sunt equus et canis. — Plin. 
 
 Omnibus supplex. — Cic. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 95 
 
 (2) Adverbia: ut, 
 
 Congruenter natures vivendum est. — Cic. 
 Improbo et inerti nemini bene esse potest. — Cic. 
 
 (3) Verba : 
 
 (a) Transitiva : ut, 
 
 Cultures patientem commodat aurem. — Hor. 
 Pr essentia confer prceteritis. — Lucretius. 
 Hunc lucum tibi dedico, Priape. — Catullus. 
 Quod alii donat sibi detrahit. — S. Clemens. 
 Hoc mihi confirmavit et persuasit — Cic. 
 Nobis spondet for tuna salutem. — Virg. 
 
 (b) Intransitiva : ut, 
 
 Neve mihi noceat, quod vobis semper, Anhivi^ 
 
 Profuit ingenium. — Ov. 
 
 Philosophia medetur animis. — Cic. 
 
 Tibifavemus. — Cic. 
 
 Irascor tib i. — C atull. 
 
 Victrix causa deis placuit, sed victa Catoni. — Lucan. 
 
 Parce pio generi. — Virg. 
 
 Anguis Sullce apparuit immolanti. — Cic. 
 
 O formose puer, nimium ne crede colori. — Virg. 
 
 Imperat aut servit collecta pecunia cuique. — Hoe. 
 
 Placitone etiam pugnabis amori ? — Virg. 
 
 Venus nupsit Vulcano. — Cic. 
 
 Philosophies semper vaco. — Cic. 
 
 (4) Substantiva: ut, 
 
 Nulla fides regni sociis. — Lucan. 
 
 Justitia est obtemperatio legibus et institutis. — Cic. 
 
 § 122. Obs. 1. JEqualis, proprius, communis, par, alienus, 
 
 Dissimilis, similis, dispar, consors, sociusque, 
 Conscius, affinis, sacer, (emulus, atque supersts8 y 
 Pluraque, nunc voluere Dativum, nuncGenitivum. 
 
 ut, Media simillima veris sunt. — Liv. 
 Deos esse similes tui putas ? — Plaut. 
 Propria est nobis mentis agitatio et solertia. — Cic 
 Proprium est oratoris ornate dicere. — Cic. 
 
 ( Oba,) Eadem fere Adjectiva, item Verba et Substantiva ejusdera 
 signification^ sequitur etiam Praepositio cam suo casu ■ 
 ut, 
 
yb SYNTAX lb, SIY3 
 
 Jit inter se cequales et pares sunt. — Cic. 
 
 Mate sunt locupletibus cum plebe communia. — Cic. 
 
 Homo sum : humani nihil a me alienum puto. — Ter. 
 
 Homini cum Deo similitudo est. — Cic. 
 
 Senortes cum Carnutibus consilia communi caver e. — C*s. 
 
 § 123. Obs. 2. Ex Adjectivis qua; affectionem animi denotant, 
 multa capiunt Proposition es in, erga, adversus, 
 cum Accusativo : ut, 
 
 Acer in hostem. — Hon. 
 Benignus erga te fui. — Pj.aut. 
 
 Obs. 8. Natus, aptus, utilis, cum aliis Adjectivis commodi et 
 congruentia, Accusativo saape junguntur cum 
 Prsapositione ad .- ut, 
 Ad laudem et ad decus nati surnus. — Cic. 
 Thracibus promptus est ad mortem animus. — Tac 
 
 § 124. Obs. 4. Delecto atque juvo, jubeo, rego, leedo, guberno, et alia 
 quaedam Verba, Accusativo contra regulam jun- 
 guntur: ut, 
 
 Multos castra juvant — Hon. 
 
 Tu regere imperiopopulos,Romane,memento. — Virg. 
 
 Obs. 5. Temper o et moderor nunc Dativum nunc Accusati- 
 vum habent : ut, 
 Privignis mulier temperat innocens. — Hon. 
 Tempered ora fronts. — Hor. 
 Hie moderatur equos qui non moderabitur irce. — Hor. 
 
 § 125. R. G. III. — Dativum ferme regunt Verba com- 
 posita cum Adverbiis bene, satis % male ; et cum 
 Praepositionibus, praesertim his : — 
 
 Ad, ante, ab, Sub, super, ob, 
 
 In, inter, de, Con, post, et pr&. 
 
 (1) Verba Transitiva: ut, 
 
 Gigantes bellum diis intulerunt. — Cic. 
 Andtum ova gallinis scepe supponimus. — CiO. 
 Deus animum prcefecit corpori. — Cic. 
 
 (2) Verba In transitiva : ut, 
 
 Ceteris satisfacio semper; mini nunquam. — Cm. 
 Sicilia quondam Italice adhcesit. — Justintts. 
 Vir mihi semper abest. — Ov~. 
 Impendent hominibvs varia genera mortis. — Cic. 
 Squamis intermicat aurum. — Claudianus. 
 Lucumo superfuit patri. — Liv. 
 Vitia nobis sub virtutum nomine obrcpnnt. — Sex 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTION 97 
 
 Obs. Muita ex his variant constructionem : ut, 
 
 Hehetii reliquos Gallos virtute prcecedunt. — Cjm. 
 In amore hcec insunt vilia. — Ter. 
 
 B. DATIVUS AGENTIS. 
 
 § 1 26. JR. G. — Dativus Agentis sequitur Verbalia in hilis, 
 et Gerundivum in dus\ interdum Participia per- 
 fecta ; raro Verba Passiva : ut, 
 Multis ille bonis flebilis occidit. — Hor. 
 Rpstat Chremes qui mihi exorandits est. — Ter. 
 Magnus civis obit etformidatus Othoni. — Juv. 
 Barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor ulli 
 — Ov. 
 
 Obs. Verba et Participia Passiva plerumque habent AbJa- 
 tivuni Agentis cum Prgepositione a vel ab : ut, 
 
 Laudator ab his, culpatur ab Mis. — Hor. 
 Mors Crassi est a multis defleta. — Cic. 
 
 0. DATIVUS PROPOSITI. 
 
 § 127. R.G. — Dativus Propositi additur Verbo sum et 
 multis aliis, vel pro Nominativo vel pro Accusa- 
 tive : ut, 
 
 Exemplo est magni formica laboris. — Hor. 
 Nucleum amisi ; reliquit pignori putamina, 
 — Plaut. 
 
 Obs. Ssepe etiam duplex admittitur Dativus, alter Objecti, alter 
 autem Propositi : ut, 
 
 JSxiiio est avidum mare nautis. — Hor. 
 
 Quod aliis vitio vertis, tici laudi ne duxeris. — Sen 
 
 GENITIVUS. 
 § 128. Genitivus vel Subjectivus est, vel Objective. 
 
 A. Subjectivus : ut, 
 
 Crassi defensio. ^scil. oratio qua Crassus defendit.) 
 
 B. Objectivus: ut, 
 
 Defensio Gabinii. (scil. oratio qua defensus est Go 
 binius.) 
 
 H 
 
98 8YNTAXIS. SIVE 
 
 Interdum uterque Genitivus ab eodem Substantivo 
 pendet : ut, 
 
 Repentina erat Crass? defensio Gabinii. (scil. oratio 
 
 qua Crassus Gabinium defendit.) — Cic. 
 Sic metus hostium, amor Dei, et simiiia, duplici sensu 
 dici possunt. 
 
 § 129. A. Genitivus Subjectivus est in primis Auctoris 
 et Possessoris ; item Qualitatis, et Distributions. 
 
 R, G. I. — Genitivus Auctoris et Possessoris sequitur omnia 
 fere Substantiva, necnon Verba sum, facto, fio, per 
 ellipsin Substantivi : ut, 
 
 Poh/cleti signa plane perfecta sunt. — CiC. 
 
 Singulorum opes sunt divitice civitatis. — Cic. 
 
 Omnia, qua? mulieris fuerunt, virifiunt. — Cic. 
 
 Scipio Hispaniam Romanai ditionis fecit — Liv. 
 
 | ISO. Obs. 1. Est Impersonate praeponitur Genitivo, si intelligitur 
 Indoles, indicium, Munus aut qfficium. 
 
 ut, Cujusvis hominis est errare. — Cic. 
 
 Improbi hominis est mendacio fatter e. — Cic. 
 Honoris amplissimi est miseros defendere. — Cic. 
 Est adolescentis majores natu vereri. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 2. Fit etiam ellipsis aliorum Nominum ante Geniti- 
 vum : ut, 
 Hectoris Andromache, (supple uxor.) — Vikg. 
 Deiphobe Glauci. (supple filial) — Virg. 
 Ventum erat ad Vesta, (supple templum.) — Hor. 
 Hujns video Byrrhiam. (supple servum.) — Ter. 
 
 J 131. Obs. 3. Genitivi mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, objective tantum 
 usurpantur : subjective ponuntur Possessiva meus, 
 tuns, suus, noster, vester : ut, 
 
 Si tibi cur a mei, sit tibi cur a tui. — Ov. 
 
 Quonam nost?H tibi cura recessit ? — Stat. 
 
 Venatum puer ire parat, mea maxima cura. — Virg. 
 
 Nicias vehementer tud sui memorid delectatur — Cic. 
 
 CQfo. I.) Genitivus Personalis in Possessivo inclusus recipit 
 alteram Genitivum sibi concordantem vel appo- 
 situm : ut, 
 liespublica mea unius opera salva erat. — Cic. 
 Meum solius peccatum corrigi non potest. — Cic. 
 Anes foetus adultos suce ipsorumfiduciaspermittunt. — Quint. 
 
 Pk'flxtros vidisti flentis ocellos Ov. 
 
 Studium tuum adolescentis perspexi. — — Cic. 
 {Obi. 2.) Nostri, vestri, o.»j active, nostrum, "estrum, parti tiv£ 
 ponuntur. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 99 
 
 § 132 R. G. II. — Genitivus Qualitatis sequitur Substau- 
 tiva et Verba Copulativa : ut, 
 
 Ingenui vultus puer ingenuique pudorh. — Juv. 
 Claudius erat somni brevissimL — Suetcxnius. 
 Obs. Qualitas etiam in Ablativo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Senex promissd barbd, horrenti capillo. — Pltn. 
 
 § 133. R, G. III. — Vocabula Parti tiva, Numeralia, Compa- 
 rativa et Superlativa, regunt Genitivum rei dis- 
 tributse. 
 Sot. — Adjectivum vel Pronomen plerumque erit in eodem genere 
 cum Genitivo : Genitivus erit in Plurali Numero, nisi sit 
 nomen collectivum. 
 
 ]. Adjectiva et Pronomina Partitiva : 
 
 Hie, is, Me, qui, et quis, 
 Tot, quot ; cum Compositis ; 
 Et si quod aliud Adjectivum 
 Acquirit sensum partitivum : 
 
 Alius, alter, uter, ullus, 
 Plerique, pauci, multi, nullus, 
 Solus, atque singuli, 
 Ceteri, et reliqui ; 
 
 ut, Virtutum in alia, alius excellit. — CiC. 
 
 Multce harum arborum med manu sunt satm. — CiC. 
 
 Elephanto belluarum nulla est prudentior. — CiC. 
 
 Stultorum quisnam beatus ? — CiC. 
 
 Utroque vestrum delector. — CiC. 
 
 Lecti juvenum. — Stat. 
 
 Sequimur te, sancte deorum. — ViRG. 
 
 2. Numeralia, sive Cardinalia, sive Ordinalia, item princeps> 
 
 medius : ut, 
 
 Homini uni animantium luctus est datus. — Plin. 
 Sulla centum viginti suorum amisit. — Eutropius. 
 Sicilia prima omnium nationum provincia est appeU 
 
 lata. — CiC. 
 Nunc juvenum princeps, deinde future senum, — Ov, 
 Roma regionum Italia media est. — Liv. 
 
 3. Comparativa et Superlativa : ut, 
 
 Major Neronum. — Hor. 
 
 Gallorum fortissimi sunt Belga?. — CLes. 
 
 4. Adverbia Superlativa : ut, 
 
 Hoc ad te minime omnium pertinet — CiC. 
 
 5. Substantiva Partitiva et partitive posita : ut, 
 
 Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. — Plin 
 Piscium femince majores quam mares, — Pun. 
 
100 SYNTAXIS, 8IVK 
 
 § 134. Obs. 1. — Distributionem etiam efficiunt Fraepositiones ex, tn, 
 
 inter, ante, de : ut, 
 
 Nihil ex his, quae videmus, manet — Sen. 
 
 Thales sapientissimus in septemfuit. — Cic. 
 
 Inter Scythice amnes amcenissimus Borysthenes. — Mela. 
 
 Ante omnes Turnus pulcherrimus. — Virg. 
 
 Una de multisfuit in parentem 
 Splendide mendax. — Hor. 
 
 % 1S5. Obs. 2. — Hi Genitivi, gentium, terrarum, aliique, sequuntur 
 Adverbia localia, hue, eb, quo, ubi, similia : ut, 
 
 Migrandum aliqub terrarum arbitror. — Cic. 
 Vir bonus, ubicumque erit gentium, a nobis diligetur. — Cic 
 Perseus perfugium sibi nusquam gentium esse ait. — Liv. 
 Huccine rerum venimus? — Pers. 
 
 § 136. R. G. IV. — Substantiva, Adverbia, item Neutra 
 Adjectiva et Pronomina, Quart titatem significantia, 
 regunt Genitivum rei demensae : ut, 
 
 Justitia nihil expetit prcemii. — Cic. 
 Satis eloquentice, sapientice parum. — Sall, 
 Aliquid pristini roboris conservat. — Cic. 
 Dimidium facti qui bene ccepit habet. — Hon. 
 Quantum nummorum, tantumfidei. — Juv. 
 
 § 137. B. R. G. I. — Genitivum Objectivum regunt multa 
 Substantiva, in quibus transitiva quaedam vis est : ut 
 
 Insitus est menti cognitionis amor. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Hie Genitivus aliquando Prgepositionis cum casu vicein 
 occupat: ut, 
 
 Bellum Helvetiorum. (scil. cum Helvetiis.) — CiES. 
 
 § 138. R. G. II. Genitivum Objectivum regunt Verbalia in 
 ax, Participia quaedam adjective posita, et Adjectiva 
 significantia 
 
 Et qua3 contrario sensu 
 
 stant ; 
 Poetae multa alia dant : 
 
 Notitiam, curam, et cupiditatem, 
 Memoriam, metum, crimen, po- 
 testatem, 
 
 ut, Tempus edax rerum. — Ov. 
 
 Animus alieni appetens, sui profusus. — Sall, 
 Nescia mens hominum estfati. — Virg. 
 Omnes immemorem beneficii oderunt. — ClC. 
 Ira est impotens sui. — Sen 
 
SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT1O. 101 
 
 Fraterni sanguinis insons. — Ov. 
 O sen studiorum. — Hor. 
 
 § 139. R. G. III. — Verba qusedam accusandi, convincendi, 
 absolvendi, damna?idi, regunt, cum Accusativo per- 
 sons, Genitivum rei : ut, 
 
 Cicero Verrem avaritice arguit — CiC. 
 Condemnamus haruspices stidtitice. — CiC. 
 Ne quern innocentem capitis arcessas. — CiC. 
 
 Obs. 1. Pro hoc Genitivo ponitur Praapositio, prsesertim de % 
 cum suo casu : ut, 
 
 Accusatur inter sicarios et de veneficiis. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 2. Sine Praepositione usurpantur hi Ablativi, crimine, 
 lege, scelere, capite, et alii nonnulli : ut, 
 Themistocles crimine proditionis absens damnatus est. — Nep 
 Legibus ambitus interrogatus pcenas dedit. — Cic. 
 Fulviwn capita anquirendum subclamant. — Liv. 
 
 Obs. 3. Similiter Verba monendi, cum Accusativo personae, 
 regunt Genitivum rei : ut, 
 
 Res adversce admonent nos religionum. — Liv. 
 
 (Obs.) Vel Ablativum cum Pra?positione de : ut, 
 
 Terentiam de testamento ?noueatis. — Cir. 
 
 § 140. R. G.IY. — Me?nini, recordor, remi?iiscor / obliviscor 9 
 nunc Genitivum regunt, nunc Accusativum : ut, 
 Jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. — Mart. 
 Dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos. — ViRG. 
 
 § 141. R. G, V. — Miser eor, miseresco, Genitivo junguntur; 
 mweror, commiseror, Accusativo : ut, 
 Nil nostri miserere. — Virg. 
 Arcadii, quceso, miserescite regis. — ViRG. 
 Agesilaus commiseratus est fortunam Grcecice. 
 — Nep. 
 
 § 1 42. Not 1.— Genitivus interdum ponitur post Verba desinendi, potiendi^ 
 regnandi • ut, 
 Desine mollium tandem quereiarum. — Hor. 
 
 Romani signorum et armorum potiti sunt Sall. 
 
 Daunus agrestium regnavit populorum. —- Hor. 
 ffaf. e 2. — Rariores sunt Genitivi Causae, Respectus, Propina" 
 tionis: ut, 
 Laudabat letijuvenem. — SiL. 
 Animi pendeo. — Cic. 
 Da noctis media (supple poexdwt ). — Hor. 
 
(02 SYNTAXIS, SIVB 
 
 ABLATIVUS. 
 
 § 1 43. Ablativus est Casus qui circumstantia actionis definit 
 
 R. G.I. — Adjectiva, Verba, etaliquando Substantiva, admlt- 
 tunt Ablativum significantem rei aut actionis cau- 
 sam, vel instrumentum, vel rnodum, vel materiam, 
 vel limitationem qualemcunque. 
 
 § 144. A. Ablativus Causes sequitur Adjectiva, Verba, et 
 praesertim Participia : ut, 
 Cceptis immanibus effera Dido. — Virg. 
 Oderunt peccare mali formidine poence. — Hon. 
 Animus pravis cupidinibus captus, — Sall. 
 
 § 145. B. Ablativus Instrument! sequitur Verba : ut, 
 Dente lupus, cornu taurus petit. — Hor. 
 Hi jaculis, Mi certant defender e saxis. — Virg. 
 
 § 146. C. Ablativus Modi plerumque sequitur Verba : ut, 
 Injuria fit duobus modis, vi aut fraude. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Persaepe capit Praepositionem cum : ut, 
 
 Magna cum curd atque diligentid scripsit. — Cic 
 Cum venid f actio, quisquis es, ista leg as. — Ov. 
 
 § 147. D. (a) Ablativus Materle sequitur Verba constru- 
 endi, consistendi, et similia : ut, 
 
 Animo constamus et corpore. — Cic. 
 
 Obs, Vel cum Praepositione ex : ut, 
 
 Beata vita constat ex rectis actionibus. — Sen. 
 
 (b) Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, potior, Ablativum 
 regunt : ut, 
 
 Fungar vice cotis. — Hor. 
 Cum victoria posset uti, frui maluit. — Florus. 
 Numidce ferina came vescebantur. — Sall. 
 Auro vi potitur. — Virg. 
 
 0~bs. Haec Verba antiquitiis Accusativum habebant : ut, 
 Functus est officium boni viri. — Ter. 
 
 § 148. (c.) Adjectiva et Verba, quae ad copiam egestatem\t\ 
 pertinent, Ablativum regunt; multa etiam Ge- 
 uitivum: ut, 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. W6 
 
 Amor et melle etfelle est fecundissimus. — Plaut. 
 Numquam animus motu vacuus est. — CiC. 
 Turpe est diffluere luxurid. — CiC. 
 Vacare culpa maximum est solatium. — CiC. 
 Dives opum, dives pictai vestis et auri. — Virg. 
 Mancipiis locuples eget a?ris Cappadocum rex, 
 
 — Hor. 
 Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. — Hor. 
 Ha res vitre me saturant. — Plaut. 
 
 (d) Opus et usus Ablativum regunt : ut, 
 
 Ubi res adsunt, quid opus est verbis? — Sall. 
 Usus estfilio viginti minis. — Plaut. 
 
 (e) Dignus, indignus, pr&ditus, fretus, item Verbum 
 
 dignor, Ablativum regunt : ut, 
 Dignum laude virum Musa vetat mori. — Hor. 
 Lentulus est singulari modes tid praditus. — CiC. 
 Haud equidem tali me dignor honor e. — Virg. 
 
 $ 149. E. Ablativus Limitations late patet. 
 
 (a) Ablativus Respectus jungitur prsesertim Adjectivis, 
 item Verbis et Substantivis : ut, 
 
 Ennius ingenio maximus, arte rudis. — Ov. 
 Oculis captifodere cubilia talpa. — ViRG. 
 Agesilaus fuit claudus altero pede. — Nep. 
 Et corde et genibus tremit. — Hor. 
 Quid hoc homine fades? — Cic. 
 
 § 150. Obs. Hue referuntur Ablativi illi, domo, natione, numero y 
 similes ; item estate et natu : ut, 
 Domo Carthaginienses sunt. — Plaut. 
 Mardonius natione Medus. — Nep. 
 
 Non grandis natu est, sed tamenjam atate provectus. — Cic 
 Ennius fuit major natu quarn Plautus et N&vius. — Cic. 
 
 § 15 1. (b) Ablativus Pretii sequitur Verba et Adjectiva 
 signifieantia emptionem, venditionem, vel cesli- 
 mationem: ut, 
 
 Ego spem pretio non emo. — Ter. 
 
 Plurimus auro venit honos. — Propertius. 
 
 Multorum sanguine victoria stetit. — Liv. 
 
 Quod non opus est, asse carum est. — bEN. 
 
104 SYNTAXIS, S1VE 
 
 Obs. 1 Per Ellipsin usurpantur, omissa vocepretio, hi Ablativi, 
 vili, parvo, minimo, nimio, mag~io, plurimo, duplo, et 
 dimidio : ut, 
 
 Parvo fames constat, mag~io fastidium. — Sen. 
 
 Obs. 2. JEstimatio rei plerumque Genitivum habet, prsesertim 
 ellipticos illos, magni, parvi, minimi, pluris, atque plu- 
 rimi: ut, 
 Sapiens dolor em nihili facit. — Cic. 
 Voluptatem virtus minimi facit, — Cic. 
 Pluris est oculatus testis unus, quam auriti decern. — Plaut. 
 ( Obs.) Tam Pretium quam ^Estimationem significant, pluris, minoris, 
 tanti, quanta maximi : ut, 
 
 Emit hortos tanti, quanti Pytktus voluit. — Cic. 
 
 $ 152. (c) Ablativus Differentiae jungitur Adjectivis, Adver- 
 biis, et Verbis comparative et superlative sig- 
 nificationis: ut, 
 
 Sol multis partibus major est quam luna. — Cic* 
 A Cynicis tunica distantia dogmata, — Hor. 
 Obs. In primis Ablativi elliptic! : 
 
 Altero, hoc, eo, quo, Dimidio, duplo, quanto, tanto % 
 
 Nihilo et nimio, Paullo,multo, aliquanto: 
 
 ut, Eo gravior est dolor, quo culpa major, — Cic. 
 Tanto pessimus omnium poeta, 
 Quanto tu optimus omnium pair 'onus. — Catul. 
 Nihilo aliter sum atque fui. — Ter. 
 
 § 153. (d) Ablativus Comparationis regitur a Comparativis, 
 sive Adjectivis, sive Adverbiis. 
 
 Nota. — Hie Ablativus ponitur pro Conjunetione quam cum 
 Nominativo vel Accusative 
 
 (1) Pro quam cum Nominativo . ut, 
 
 Nihil est amabilius virtute. — Cic. 
 
 Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. — Hor. 
 
 (2) Pro quam cum Accusativo : ut, 
 
 Puto mortem dedecore leviorem. — Cic. 
 Neminem Lycurgo utiliorem Lacedamon genuit. — 
 Valerius Maximus. 
 Obs. 1. Quam duobus Comparativis eleganter interponitur : lit, 
 
 Triumphus Camilli clarior erat quam gratior. — Liv 
 Obs. 2. Quam eleganter omittitur post plus, arnplius, minus : ut, 
 Plus quingentos colaphos infregit mihi. — Ter. 
 
 6*8. 3. Comparationi inserviunt etiam Prepositiones ardt, prcecer, 
 supra, pra; ut, 
 
SENTENTIARTJM CONSTRUCTIO. 105 
 
 Pygmalion, scelere ante alios immanior omnes. — Virq. 
 Crux prceter ceteras altior. — Suet. 
 
 § 154. R. G. II. — Ablativum regunt hae Prsepositiones . 
 
 A, ab, absque, coram, de, 
 Palam, clam, cum,ex, et e, 
 Sine, tenus, pro, et prce : 
 
 His subter, super, addito, 
 Et in, sub, si fit statio. 
 
 Obs. 1. Praepositio in Compositione eundem nonnunquam Ca- 
 sum regit, quern et extra Compositionem regebat : ut, 
 
 Detrudunt naves scopulo. — Virg. 
 Te nunc attoquor, Africane. — Cic. 
 
 Obs, 2. Eleganter iteratur eadem Praepositio : ut, 
 E corpore excedit animus. — Cic. 
 
 ( 06*. ) Vel importatur nova : ut, 
 
 Alto defiuxit ab athere tabes. — Lucan. 
 
 Obs 3. Verba discedendi, separandi, arcendi, removendi, et similiai 
 omissa quoque Praepositione, regunt Ablativum : ut, 
 
 Cedes coemptis saltibus et domo. — Hor. 
 
 Populus Atheniensis Phocionem patrid pepulit. — !Nef, 
 
 (06*.) Hue refer Ablativum post Verba et Participia Originis: ut, 
 Atreus Tantalo prognatus, Pelope natus. — Cic. 
 Sate sanguine divum. — VlRG. 
 
 Obs. 4. Tenus vel Genitivum pluralem vel Ablativum regit, et 
 post suum Casum ponitur : ut, 
 
 Crurum tenus a mento palearia pendent — Virg. 
 Antiochus Tauro tenus regnare jussus est. — Cic. 
 Obs. 5. Cum ita subjungitur casibus Pronominum Personalium, 
 et plerumque Relativi, ut ex duobus vocibus una fiat * 
 ut, mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum 
 pro quocum, quibuscum. 
 
 A. DE ABLATIVO ABSOLUTO. 
 
 § 155. JR. G. — Substantivum et Participium conjunctim ponuntu> 
 in Ablativo, quern Absolutum vocant : ut, 
 Regibus exactis consules creati sunt. — Liv. 
 Ccesare venturo, Phosphor e, redde diem. — Mart. 
 Pereunte obsequio imperium etiam intercidit. — Tac. 
 
 Obs. 1. Absolute etiam ponitur Substantivum cum Substantivo vel Ad- 
 jective, ubi intelligitur Participium existendi : ut, 
 Nil desperandum est, Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. — Hor. 
 Jamque cinis, vivis fratribus, Hector erat. — Ov. 
 
106 SYNTAX IS, SIVE 
 
 Obs. 2. Aliquando cum Ablativo Participii absolute ponitur continuata 
 Locutio pro Ablativo Substantivi : ut, 
 
 Excepto qudd non simul esses, cetera lotus. — Ho a. 
 
 DE CONSTRUCTION*] TEMPORIS. 
 
 § 156. It. G. I. — Definitio Temporis in Ablativo ponitur, si 
 rogatur quando vel intra quantum tempus : ut, 
 
 Hieme omnia bella conquiescunt. — Cic. 
 Quicquid est, biduo sciemus. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. I. In definiendo Tempore multus est Praspositionum usus : ut, 
 Sol binas in singulis annis reversiones facit. — Cic. 
 De die. (id est. ante finem diei.) — Hor. 
 De node, (id est, ante finem noctis.) — jIor. 
 De multa node, (id est, multo ante finem nodis.) — Cic. 
 Sub vesperum. (id est, appropinquante vespero.) — Cj&s. 
 Diem ex die expecto. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 2. Quanto tempore abhinc, ant$ 9 vel pdst, interdum per Ablati- 
 vum, interdum per Accusativum dicitur : ut, 
 
 Comitiajam abhinc triginta diebus erant habita. — Cic. 
 Hoc factum est ferrne abhinc biennium. — Plaut. 
 
 R G. II. — Duratio temporis, ubi rogatur quamdiu, frequentiiis 
 in Accusativo ponitur, rarius in Ablativo : ut, 
 
 Pericles quadraginta annos pra^fuit Athenis. — Cic. 
 Imperium Assyrii mille trecentis annis tenner e. — Just. 
 
 DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS LOCI ET SPATIL 
 
 157. A. R. G. I. — Locus, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in 
 Ablativo, vel sine JPraepositione, vel longe frequentius cum 
 Praepositione in : ut, 
 
 Ibam forte Via Sacra, — Hor. 
 In Lemno uxor em ducit. — Ter. 
 
 Obt. 1. Oppidi nomen, in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in Ablativo, 
 modo sit vel tertian Declinationis, vel pluralis Nuineri : ut. 
 
 Alexander Babylone mortuus est. — Cic. 
 Philippus Neapoli est, Lentulus Puteolis. — Cic. 
 
 Ob§. 2. Sed in Genitivo ponitur, si et Declinationis est primae vel 
 secundag, et singularis Numeri : ut, 
 
 Quid Romce faciam ? mentiri nescio. — Juv. 
 /* habitat Mileti. — Ter 
 
SENTENTIAKUM CONSTRUCTIO. 107 
 
 § 158. R. G II. — Loci Nomen a Praepositione fere regitur ] >st 
 Yerbum niotus : ut 
 
 Profectus est in Galliam. — Cjes. 
 Ab Europdpetis Asiam. — Curtius. 
 Obs. 1. Oppidi nomen, ad quod itur, in Accusativo sine Praepositione 
 fere ponitur : ut, 
 
 Regulus Carthaginem rediit. — Cic. 
 Obs. 2. Oppidi nomen, a quo itur, in Ablativo sine Praepositione fere* 
 ponitur : ut, 
 
 Demaratus fugit Corintho. — Cic. 
 Obs. 3. Sed et Oppida ssepe capiunt, et alia Nomina omittunt, Praepo- 
 sitionem post Verba motus : ut, 
 
 A Brundisio nulla fama venerat, — Cic. 
 
 Pars Scythiam et rapidum Cretce veniemu* Oaxen.-—\iRG. 
 
 § 1 b9. Obs. 4. Humus, domus, et rus oppidorum constructionem lmi- 
 tantur: ut, 
 
 Cadmus spargit humi, mortalia semina, dentes. — Ov. 
 Parvi sunt forts arma, nisi est consilium domi. — Cic. 
 He domum saturce, venit Hesperus, ite capellce. — Virg. 
 Video rure redeuntem senem. — Ter. 
 
 { 160. B. R. G. I. — Spatium Distantiae frequentiiis in Accusa- 
 tivo, interdum in Ablativo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Aberam ab Amano iter unius diei. — Cic. 
 ^Esculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab 
 Epidauro distat. — Liv. 
 R. G. II. — Spatium Progressions in Accusativo ponitur : ut, 
 
 Millia turn pransi tria repimus. — Hon. 
 R. G. III. — Spatium Dimensionis frequentissime in Accu- 
 sativo, interdum in Ablativo, interdum in Genitivo poni- 
 tur : ut, 
 
 Erant muri Baby lords ducenos pedes alti. — Plin. 
 Longum sesquipede, latum pede. — Plin. 
 Areas latas pedum denum f actio. — Columella* 
 
 DE CONSTEUCTIONE VERBORUM 
 IMPERSONALIUM. 
 
 § 161 R. G. I. — Libet, licet, liquet, et pleraque Impersonulia, 
 regunt Dativum : ut, 
 
 Ne libeat tibi quod non licet. — Cic. 
 SiBvis inter se convemt ursis. — Juv. 
 
108 SYNTAX1S, SIYK 
 
 R. G. II. — Piget, pudet, pamitet, tcedet atque miseret, regunt 
 Accusativum Personae, cum Genitivo Rei, vel cum In- 
 finitive-: ut, 
 Miseret te aliorum : tui te nee miseret, nee pudet. — Plaut 
 Me civitatis morum piget tcedetque. — Sale. 
 Eos partim scelerum, partim iueptiarum pcenitet. — Cic. 
 Quern pcenitet peccasse, pcene est innocens. — Sen. 
 
 R. G. III. — Delectat,juvat, decet, dedecet, impersonaliter posita, 
 Accusativum cum Infinitivo postulant : ut, 
 
 Orator em irasci minime decet. — Cic. 
 
 Me juvatin prima coluisse Heliconajuventd. — Prop. 
 
 R. G. IV. — Oportet vel Accusativum cum Infinitivo regit, vel 
 Nominativum cum Subjunctivo, Conjunctione ut omissa: 
 ut, 
 
 Legem brevem esse oportet. — Cic. 
 
 Me ipsum ames oportet, non mea. — Cic. 
 
 R. G. V. — Pertinet, attinet, Praepositionem ad cum Accusa 
 tivo sumunt : ut, 
 
 Ad rempublicam pertinet, me conservari. — Cic. 
 Profundat, per dot, per eat, nihil ad me attinet. — Tee. 
 
 R. G. VI. — Interest et refert Genitivum admittunt : ut, 
 
 Interest omnium recte facer e. — Cic. 
 
 Refert compositionis, quae quibus anteponas. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. 1. Cum his Verbis junguntur, loco Pronominum Personalium 
 Ablativi feminini, mea, tud,sud, nostra, vestrd, subaudita voce 
 re : ut, 
 
 Et tud et mea interest te valere. — Cic. 
 Quid rtfert mea, cui serviam ? — Ph^drus. 
 
 Obs. 2. Adduntur his Verbis Genitivi iEstimationis, tanti, quanty 
 mogni, parvi, pluris : ut, 
 
 Utriusque nostrum magni interest* ut te videam. — Cic. 
 
 Hoc non pluris rtfert, qudm si imbrem in cribrumgeras.- — Pla UT. 
 
 A T o/. 1. — Verba Neutra in Passiva Voce impersonaliter usurpantur pro 
 quibuslibet personis, Ablativo personae cum Praepositione ah 
 vel expresso vel intellecto : ut, 
 
 Ah omnibus reclamatum est. (scil. omnes reclamdrunt.) — Cic. 
 Quid agitur? statur. (scil. statur a nobis, sive stamus.) — Tbju 
 
 TfoL 2. — Ctepit, debet, desinit, potest, solet, incipit, Infinitivis Impersou&- 
 lium praeposita, ipsa fiunt Impersonalia : ut, 
 
 JPigere eumfacti ccepit. — Just. 
 
 Ptrveniri ad summa, nisi ex principiis, non potest. — Quint. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 100 
 
 DE CONSTRUCTIONE VERBORUM PASSIVORUM. 
 
 § 162. R, G. — Activa sententia fere omuls ita in Passivam con* 
 verti potest, ut Nominativus Activae sententiae fiat in 
 Passiva Ablativus Agentis. 
 
 A. Si Activae sentential Verbuni Aecusativum habet propioris 
 
 Objecti, Verbum in Passiva personale erit, Accusativo 
 Activae in Nominativum Passivae transeunte : ut, 
 
 Act. Egregie consul rem gessit. 
 
 Pass. Egregie ab consule res gesta est — Liv. 
 
 B. Sin minus, Verbum Passivae impersonale erit, et vel sine 
 
 easu stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quern in Activa* 
 regebat : ut, 
 
 Act. Hostes eonstanter pugnabant. 
 
 Pass. Ab hostibus eonstanter pugnabatur. — Cjes. 
 
 Act. Medicines nos indigemus. — Cic. 
 Pass. Medicines a nobis indigetur. 
 
 Act. Mihi isti nocere non possunt 
 
 Pass. Mihi ab istis noceri non potest — Cic. 
 
 Act. Litibus etjurgiis supersedere vos cequum est. 
 Pass. Litibus et jurgiis supersederi a vobis aquum 
 est — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Ubi nihil ambigui esse potest, supprimitur Ablativus Agentis 
 post Impersonalia Pussiva : ut, 
 
 Itur in antiquam silvam. — Virg. 
 
 Non potest jucunde vivi, nisi cum virtute vivatur. — Cic. 
 
 Not. 1. — Hinc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi, atque ab 
 Activis,praeterquam unum Aecusativum propioris Objecti. 
 Exempla pete supra : B. 
 
 Not* 2. — Vapuh, veneo, exulo, liceo, fio y cum aliis quibusdam, vi PassivA 
 construuntur : ut, 
 
 Testis ab reo fustibus vaptdavit. — Quintilianus. 
 Malo a cive spoliari, qudm ab hoste venire. — Quint. 
 Torqueoi', infesto ne vir ab hoste cadat, — Ov 
 
 DE CONSTRUCTIONE PARTICIPIORUM. 
 
 { 163. R. G. — Participia, quae Verbi Adjectiva sunt, cum Sub- 
 stantivis attribuuntur, turn etiam regunt casus Verborum 
 a quibus oriuntur, Activa Activorum,Deponentia Pepo- 
 nentium, Passiva Passivorum. 
 
110 SYNTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 L( Obs. 1.) Participii Praeteriti usus in Verbis Passivis atque in De 
 ponentibus accurate distinguendus est: in Passivis 
 enim Active usurpari nunquam potest : in Deponentibus 
 plerisque solum Active usurpatur : ex Deponentibus 
 tamen Transitivis raulta sunt, quorum Participia Prae 
 terita tam Passive quam Active significant. 
 
 ( Obi. 2. ) Ccenatus, pransus, Jisus, juratus, et ausus, 
 Gavisusy solitus, ceu Deponentia recte 
 Construimus, licet Activis orientia Verbis ; 
 His etiam exosus, pertasus, et adde perosus. 
 
 (06c*. 3.) Participium in dus Passive semper significat.J 
 
 Ut, Cernimus ire suis parentia finibus astra. — Manilius. 
 Virgo compositos ostentatura capillos. — Ausomus. 
 Nubiferi rnontes et saxa minantia cihlo. — Silius. 
 Nil oriturum alias, nil ortum tale fatemur. — Hon 
 Duces functos virtute canemus. — Hor. 
 Ausi omnes immane nefas, ausoque potiti. — Virg. 
 Omnia ei qucesita, meditata, evigilata erant — Gelljus 
 Male parta male dilabuntur. — Cic. 
 Paridem solitus contendere contra. — Virg. 
 Oczdos exosa viriles. — Ov. 
 Pueris sententias ediscendas damns. — Sen. 
 Vita data est utenda, datur sine fomore nobis 
 Mutua, nee certo persoluenda die. — Ov. 
 
 DE INFINITTVO SUBSTANTIVE POSITO, ET DE 
 CONSTRUCTIONIBUS GERUNDIORUM, GERUN- 
 DIVI, ET SUPINORUM. 
 
 § 164. Infinitivus cum Gerundiis et Supinis Substantivum Verbi 
 efficit. 
 
 It, G. I. — Infinitivus Nominativi vel Accusativi loco ssepe 
 ponitur: ut, 
 
 Innidere non cadit in sapientem. — Cic. 
 Dulce et decorum est pro patria mori. — Hor 
 Velle suum cuique est. — Pers. 
 Mori nemo sapiens miserum dixerit. — Cic. 
 Multum interest inter dare et accipere. — Sen. 
 
 f 165. R. G.TL. — Gerundia pro casibus Infinitivi ponuntur, et 
 ipsa regunt casus suorum Verborum ; sed sine casu 
 frequentius apparent. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTHUCTIO. 1 1 J 
 
 A- Pro Accusative) Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in dum post 
 Praepositiones ad, inter ; rarius post ob, in, ante : ut, 
 Breve tempus satis est longum ad bene vivendum. — Cic. 
 Mores puerorum se inter ludendum detegunt. — Quint. 
 
 E Pro Genitivo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in di post 
 Adjectiva Genitivum regentia, et post multa Substan- 
 tia : ut, 
 
 Epaminondas studiosus erat audiendi. — Nep. 
 Cupidus sum satisfaciendi reipublicce. — Cic. 
 Thucydides omnes dicendi artiftcio vincit. — Cic. 
 Scribendi rede sapere est et principium et funs. — Hor. 
 
 C. Pro Dativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in do post Ad- 
 jectiva Commodi et Congruentise, item post Verba 
 nonnulla: ut, 
 
 Crassus disserendo par esse non potuit. — Cic. 
 Epidicum operant queer endo dabo. — Plaut. 
 
 I). Pro Ablativo Infinitivi ponitur Gerundium in do Causam, 
 Instrumentum, aut Modum significans, vel cum Prae- 
 positionibus ab, de, ex, in, cum : ut, 
 
 Nihil agendo homines male facer e discunt — Colum. 
 P. Scipio Latine loquendo cuivis erat par. — Cic. 
 Jovem ajuvando nominamus. — Cic. 
 Multa de bene beateque vivendo a Platone disputata sunt. 
 — Cic. 
 § 166. Not. — Gerundia Active significant : si vero Transitiva sunt, 
 eorum constructio Passive repraesentari potest, imo 
 frequentius reprassentatur, per Participium in dus, quod 
 inde Gerundivi nomen accipit. 
 
 R. G. III. — Gerundiva constructio ejusmodi est, ut Substan- 
 tivum in Gerundii casum trahatur, cum quo concor- 
 det Gerundivum : ut, 
 
 E terra ignem elicimus ad colendos agros. — Cic. 
 Occasio videbatur rerum novandarum,. — Liv. 
 M.Antonius fuit triumvir reipublicoe constituenda*. — Nei-. 
 Exercenda est memoria ediscendis veterum scriptis. — Cic. 
 Brutus in liberandd patrid est interfectus. — Cic. 
 
 j| 167. R. G. IV. — Ad Necessitatem Passive significandam Ge- 
 rundivum in Neutro Genere impersonaliter ■ adhibetur 
 ita, ut, cum Dativo vel Ablativo Agentis, sive expresso 
 give intellecto, sui etiam Verbi constructunem habeat : ut, 
 
 Suo cuique judicio utendum est. — Cic. 
 
 Civium bonis est a vobis consulendum. — Cic. 
 
 Orandum est ut sit mens sana in cor pore sauo. — Juv. 
 
 Eudoxus opinatur, Chaldceis minimi esse credendum. — Cic. 
 
112 SYNTAX IS, S1VE 
 
 Obs. In Verbis Transltivis rarior est Impersonalis cocstructio, 3st 
 tamen ubi obviam fit : ut, 
 
 JEternas quoniam poenas in morte timendum. — Lucr. 
 
 Gerundivum enim ipsum, Adjective positum, suapte vi Necessi- 
 tatem exprimit ; ut, 
 
 Deus et diligendus est et timendus. — Tertullianus. 
 Agnoscenda et amplectenda sunt beneficiadivina. — S. Cyprian us. 
 
 § 168. R. G. V. — Supinum in wm, vi Activa praeditum, sui Verbi 
 casum regit; postponitur autem, ut Accusativus, Verbis 
 motum significantibus, ad Actionis finem indicandam : 
 ut, 
 
 Ast ego non Graiis servitum matribus ibo. — Virg. 
 Coriolanusin Volscos exsulatum abut. — Liv. 
 Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsa. — Ov. 
 Scitatum oracula Phcebi mittimus. — Virg. 
 
 Obs. Ex Supino in iim et Impersonali Infinitivo iri conficitur Futu- 
 rum Infinitivi Passivi : ut, 
 
 Audierat non datum iri filio suo vxorem. — Ter. 
 
 R. G. VI. — Supinum in u, vi Passiva praeditum, postponitur, 
 ut Ablativus Respect lis, turn multis Adjectivis, turn Sub- 
 stantivis/a.9, nefas, opus : ut, 
 
 Nil dictufcedum visuque hcec limina tangat 
 
 Intra qua puer est. — Juv. 
 
 Ecce (nefas visu) serpens altaribus exit. — Ov. 
 
 Sot. — Supina formam habent Substantivorum Quartae Declinationis 
 
 DE ADJECTIVORUM USU. 
 
 5 1 69. (a) Primus et extremus, postremus et ultimus, imus, 
 Intimus et medius, sic summus et inftmus, atque 
 Ceterus et reliquus, partitive attribuuntur : 
 
 ut, Prima luce summus mons a Labieno tenebatur. — Ga:9, 
 
 (b) Neutra Adjectiva utriusque Numeri ponuntur inter dum 
 Adverbialiter, praesertim apud poetas : ut, 
 
 Serviet aternum, qui parvo nesciet uti. — Hor. 
 Asper, acerba tuens, retro redit. — Virg. 
 
 (p) Adjectivum saepe ita attribuitur, ut AnglicS per Adver- 
 bium reddi necesse sit : 
 
 Turn tu insiste audax muris. — Liv. 
 Cabtris se pavidus tenebat. — Liv. 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 113 
 
 $ 170. Superlativum ita usurpatur, ut non modo altissimum omnium 
 gradum, sed etiam praealtum quemcunque designet : ut, 
 Ego sum miserior quam tu, quae es miserrima. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Pronomen quisque Superlativo distribuendo adhibetur : ut, 
 Epicureos doctissimus quisque conteninit. — Cic. 
 Maxima cuique fortunes minimi credendum est. — Liv. 
 
 DE NUMERALIUM USU. 
 
 | 171. A. Cardinalia. 
 
 (a) Unus non, nisi cum Emphasi, ponitur : ut, 
 Matronce annum, ut parentem, Brutum luxerunt. — Liv. 
 Amicitia? vis est in eo, ut unus quasi animus fiat ej 
 
 pluribus. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Unus saepe vim habet Superlativam, sa?pe Superlativo 
 rum vim auget : ut, 
 
 Demosthenes unus eminet inter omnes oratores Cic 
 
 P. Niffidius, unus omnium doctissimus. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Mille nunc Substantive, nunc Adjective, usurpatur 
 
 millia Substantive tantiim : ut, 
 Amplius mille hominum cecidit. — Nep. 
 Mille greges illi. — Ov. 
 Qualtuor millia hominum Capitolium occupavere. — Liv 
 
 B. Ordinalia in Temporum Rationibus usurpantur : ut, 
 
 Plato uno et octogesimo anno scribens mortuus est. — Cic. 
 Octavus annus est ex quo Britanniam vicistis. — Tac. 
 
 Obs. 1. Ad Ordinalia distribuenda usurpatur quisque : ut, 
 Quinto quoque anno Sicilia tota censetur. — Cic. 
 
 Ohs. 2. Alter nunc ut secundus nunc ut unus e duobus ponitur : ut, 
 Alter ab undecimo turn me jam ceperat annus. — Virg 
 Quidquid negat alter, et alter. — Hor. 
 
 C Distributiva efficiunt ut, quod fiat, cuique e pluribus, vel 
 a quoque, vel quoque tempore factum esse appareat : ut, 
 Militibus quini viceni denarii dati sunt. — Liv. 
 Verberibus mulcant, sexageni singulos. — Tac. 
 Ursa? pariunt plurimum quinos. — Plin. 
 
 |"72. 1). (a) As Romanus, sive Libra, antiquissimis temporibus 
 seneus erat : unde Genitivus ceris elliptice ponitur ali- 
 quando, Assibus omissis : ut, 
 
 Miliibus ceris quinquaginta census est. — Liv 
 
 I 
 
114 SYNTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 (b) Nummus Romanus, qui antiquissime binos Asses cum 
 
 Semisse continebat, nine Sestertius (semis-tertius) voca- 
 tus, Siglum habebat HS, corruption ex IIS (2^) : nt, 
 
 Tiberius populo trecenos nummos viritim dedit. — Suet. 
 Pretium constitutum est in singulos modiosHS terni. — Cic. 
 
 (c) Sestertium continebat mille Sestertios, et ipsuru interdum 
 
 Siglo HS design atur : ut, 
 
 Ducena sestertia singulis dedit. — Tac. 
 Candidati HS quingena deposuerunt. — Cic. 
 
 Obs. Adverbia Numeral ia, decies et quae majora sunt, ubi numerum 
 Sestertiorum definiunt, suppleri sibi volunt centena mittia: ut, 
 Vicies HS( Sestertii, Sestertium), id est, 2,000,000 Nummiim. 
 Ter et quudrayies HS - 4,300,000 Nummiim. 
 
 DE PRONOMINUM USU. 
 
 I 1 73. A. Personalia et Possessiva. 
 
 (a) Pronomina Pluralia, nos, noster, pro Singularibus ego^ 
 
 meus, saspe ponuntur : ut, 
 
 Nbris 7ios, inquit, docti surrms. — Hob. 
 
 Ad nostra me studia referam literarum. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Sui et suus Reflexiva sunt, et referuntur ad Subjectura 
 
 tertiae Persona : ut, 
 
 Senatui pojndus moderandi sui potestatem tradidit. — Cic. 
 Themistocles domicilium Magnesia sibi constituit. — Nep. 
 Sentit animus se vi sud, non aliend, moveri. — Cic. 
 Homerum Colophmiii civem esse dicunt suum. — Cic. 
 
 Ob*. 1. Referri possunt Reflexiva ad Objectum, si ipsa Subjecto 
 appendent, si Subjectum prima? est aut secundae Per- 
 sonam, si denique nullus ambiguitati locus est ; quod 
 ubi fit, Objecto plerumque postponitur Reflexivum : ut, 
 
 Scipionem impellit ostentatio sui. — Cms. 
 
 Ccesarem sua natura mitiorem facit. — Cic 
 
 Apibus fructum restituo suum. — PhjED. 
 
 Suis jlammis delete Fidenas. — Liv. 
 
 Malta sunt civibus inter se communia. — Cic. 
 ( Obs.) Sed Pronominis quisque casibus Reflexivum praeponitur : ut, 
 Sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam. — Nep. 
 Longius aut propiiis mors sua quemque manet. — Propfrt. 
 Ob*, 2. Referuntur etiam Reflexiva ad Personam inderinitam : ut, 
 Subsequitur coecus Amor sui. — Hor. 
 Deforme est de se prcedicare. — Cic. 
 Difficile est sua vitia ndssc. — Cic. 
 
8ENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 
 
 115 
 
 Obe. 3. Ubi Reflexivo non est locus, usurpatur Demonstrativum, 
 pra>sertim is .• ut, 
 
 Aranti Quintio nuntiatum est eum dictatorem factum — Cic. 
 Condiunt JEgyptii mortuos et eos domi servant. — Cic 
 Chilius te rogat, et ego ejus rogatu. — Cic. 
 Obs. 4. Pro Reflexivi casibus, si in his futura est ambiguitas, Pro- 
 nominis ipse casus obliqui ponuntur : ut, 
 
 Ca'.sar milites incusavit, cur de sua virtute aut de ipsius 
 diligentid desperarent. — Cms, 
 
 174. B. (a) Pronomina Demonstrativa ita fere distinguenda sunt 
 
 is est de <juo mentio facta est ; hie mihi propior ; iste 
 alteri propior : ille qui ab utroque remotus est. 
 Obs. 1. Iste cum contemptu quodam saepe dicitur: ut, 
 Quid sibi isti miseri volunt? — Cic. 
 
 Errare malo cum Platone, qudm cum istis vera sentire. Cir 
 06s. 2. Itte famam aut dignitatem nonnunquam innuit : ut, 
 
 Veneramini ilium Jovem., custodem hujus urbis. — Cic. 
 Obs. 3. Cum hie et iUe ad duo anteposita respiciunt, hie refertur ad id 
 quod vel posterius in sententia, vel prius est in animo 
 narrantis ; ille ad id quod vel prius in sententia, vel pos- 
 terius est in animo narrantis : ut, 
 
 Idem et docenti et discenti propositum esse debet, ut ille pro- 
 
 desse velit, hie proficere. — Sen. 
 Melior est certa pax qudm sperata victoria ; hac in tud, 
 ilia in deorum manu est. — Liv. 
 
 1 75. (b) Ipse est omnium Personarum, et vim auget cum Sub- 
 
 stantivorum, turn Pronominum, quibus apponi solet : ut, 
 Ipse Pater dextrd molitur fulmina. — Virg. 
 Tarde nosmet ipsos cognoscimus. — Cic. 
 Sibi ipsa improbitas cogit fieri injuriam. — Syrus. 
 Me ipse consolor. (Id est, nemo alius me consolatur 
 
 verum ego ; ubi emphasis est in Subjecto.) — Cic. 
 Me ipsum consolor. (Id est, neminem alium ego consolor 
 verum me; ubi emphasis est in Objecto.) 
 Obs. 1. Ipse pro ultrd vel sponte sua ponitur aliquando: ut, 
 
 Ipsce veniunt ad mulctra capellce. — Virg. 
 Obs 2. Ipse praestantissimam Personam interdum significat : ut, 
 
 Pythagorei responderesolebant ; Ipse dixit (scil. Pythagoras). — Cic. 
 01*. 3. Ipse tempori exacte definiendo adhibetur : ut, 
 Aihenis decern ipsos dies fui. — Cic. 
 Nunc ipsum sine te esse non possum. — Cic. 
 C. Pronomina Interrogativa sunt quis, quisnam, substantive 
 usurpata ; qui, quinam, adjective : ut, 
 Quid praclarum non idem arduum ? — Cic. 
 O qui tuarum, corve, pennarum est nitor ? — Ph^d. 
 Qu&fuerit in republica tempestas quis nescit f — Cic. 
 
116 SYNTAX 15, SIVE 
 
 § 1 76. D. Indefinita, quis et qui, sequuntur plerumque Particulas 
 quales sunt ne, si, .rive, nisi, qui, quo, quam, quum, wide, ubi, 
 ut, an, num. Aliquis et aliqui ponuntur vel sine Parti- 
 culis, vel cum Particulis, sensu minus indefinito quam 
 quis et qui; ut significetur is, quern existere credimus, 
 sed nondum novimus : ut, 
 
 Oppida cospertmt munire et ponere leges, 
 Ne quis fur esset, neu latro, neu quis adulter. — Hon 
 Si mala condiderit in quern quis carmina,jus est. — Hor. 
 Semper aliqui anquirendi sunt quos diligamus. — Cic. 
 Si super est aliquis post funera senswt. — Ov. 
 
 5 177. Obs. 1. Aliquis interdum pro eximio ponitur : ut, 
 Sese aliquem credit. — Pers. 
 
 Obs. 2. Quidam definitius est quam aliquis; ut significetur is, quern 
 novimus quidem, sed non nominamus : ut, 
 
 Accurrit quidam, notus mihi nomine tantiim. — Hor. 
 {Obs.) Hinc cum contemptu ponitur aliquando : ut, 
 
 Habitant hie qucedam mulieres pavperculce. — Ter 
 
 DE CONJUNCTIONIBUS SOCIATIVIS ET 
 DISSOCIATIVIS. 
 
 § 178. Conjunctiones Sociativae et Dissociativae similes Casus, 
 Modos, et Tempora connectunt • ut, 
 
 Miratur portas, strepitumque, et strata viarum. — Virg. 
 Virtus nee eripi nee surripi potest. — Cic. 
 Amicitia conveniens est ad res vel secundas vel adversas, 
 — Cic. 
 
 Nisi alia Constructions ratio intercedat : ut, 
 
 Pompeius Dyrrachii, Apollonian, omnibusque oppidis maritimii 
 kiemare const ituit. — C^es. 
 Obs. 1. Conjunctiones Sociativae per Asyndeton omittuntur: ut, 
 
 Ex cupiditatibus odia,dissidia, seditiones, bella nascuntur. — Cic. 
 Obs. 2. Comparationi inserviunt ac, atque, interdum et, que, ut, post 
 Adjectiva vel Adverbia Similitudinis et Dissimilitudinis • 
 Par, dispar, alius, similis* diversus, et idem, 
 Proinde, perinde, pro eo, contra, contrarius, aqud, 
 Queis aliter, pariter, juxta. secus adde, simulque .• 
 Ut, Dissimulatio est, quum alia dicuntur ac sentias. — Cic. 
 Obitum filice tuai pro eo ac debui yraviter tuli. — Cic. 
 Omnia ferd contra ac dicta sunt evenere. — Cic. 
 Pro civium salute ceque ac pro med laboravi. — Cic. 
 Simul atone natum ani*nal est, gaudet voluptate. — ClC 
 
SENTENTIAKUM CONSTRUCTIO. 117 
 
 DE VEKBI TEMPORIBUS ET MODIS. 
 
 $ 179. I. Omnis Actio in Tempore ponitur, vel Praesenti, vel 
 Praeterito, vel Futuro : ita verb, ut vel altera temporal i 
 relatione careat, vel habeat alteram relationem tern- 
 poralem. 
 
 A. Tempora Verbalia, quae altera temporali relatione carent 
 
 (Aorista, Indefinita, sive Absoluta), sunt : 
 
 a. Praesens Aoristum, scribo, Anglice / write. 
 
 b. Praeteritum Aoristum, scripsi, — I wrote. 
 
 c. Futurum Aoristum, scribam, — / shall ivrit& 
 
 B. Tempora Verbalia, quae habent alteram relationem tempo- 
 
 ralem (Relativa) sunt : 
 
 Praesenti, scribo, Anglice / am writing. 
 „ , Praeterita, scripsi, — I have written. 
 
 cum Relatione J^putura, scripturus sum,— I am about to write. 
 
 _ I ( 1 J X KC3UH1) Ol// IW, «»UKB*W A. \Allt, n/l liniyi 
 
 a) Praesens J (2) Praeterita, scn/m, — I have written. 
 
 cum Relatione ^ (3 ) putura, scripturus sum,— I am about to 
 
 . f(l) Praesenti, scribebam, — I was writing. 
 
 (b) Praeteritum 1 (< 2 ) Prxteritk, scripseram, — I had written. 
 
 cum Relatione J.^ p utur ^ scripturus fui, — I was about to 
 
 I was about to write. 
 
 f(l) Praesenti, scribam, — I shall be writing. 
 
 < y c) buturum J (2) Praeterita, scri/mro, — I shall have written. 
 
 1(3) 
 
 P . . < (2) Praeterita, scr/pero, 
 
 '•* Futura, scripturus ero, — I shall be about to write. 
 
 Obs. 1. Temporum Passivorum siinilis est ratio. 
 
 Obs. 2. Tempus historicum in primis est Praeteritum Aoristum. Mul- 
 tus autem in historia usus est Praeteritorumllelativorum (b ). 
 Praesens etiam historice usurpatur, ut legentium oculis 
 quasi pingatur actio : ut, 
 
 Dimisso senatu, decemviri prodeunt in concionem, abdicant* 
 que se magistratu, ingenti hominum latitia. — Liv. 
 
 Ubs. 3. In epistolis Romani Praeterito fere utebantur, ubi nos Praesenti 
 utimur : ut, 
 
 Res, quum hac scribebam, erat in summo discrimine. — Cic 
 Obs. 4. Perfectum elcganter exprimit quae cito vel more fiunt : ut, 
 Terra tremit : fvgere ferce. — Virg. 
 Qui studet optatam cursu contingere met am 
 Malta tulit fecitqve puer. — Hor. 
 
 II. Ex Mbdis, 
 
 A. Indicativus enuntiat absolute. 
 
 B. Imperativus imperat vel hortatur. 
 
 Obs. 1. Ne prohibitiva Imperativo vel Subjunctive juughur: ut, 
 A* qua meis esto dictis mora. — Vmo. 
 Ac confer as culftam in me. — Tek. 
 
118 SYNTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 Qb*. 2. Pro Imperativo eleganter ponitur Futurum Simplex : ut, 
 Non verbum verbo curabis reddere. — Hon. 
 Si quid acciderit novi, fades ut sciam. — Cic. 
 
 C. Conjunctivi triplex usus est . 
 
 (a) Fotentialis ; qui speciem habet vel conditionalem, vel 
 permissivam, vel dubitativam : ut, 
 
 Id arbitror apprime in vita esse utile, ut ne quid nimis : 
 Ita sine invidid laudem invenias, et amicos pares. — Ter. 
 Si sine pace tua atque invito numine Troes 
 Italian i pet i ere, luant peccata, neque illos 
 Juveris auxiho. — Virg. 
 JEloquar an sileam ? — Ov. 
 
 Obs 1. Peculiaris usus est Perfecti Potentialis, ut affirmet, neget, 
 aut vetet cum urbanitate et moderatione quadam : ut, 
 Bruti judicium, puce tua dixerim, longe antepono tuo. — Cic. 
 Nil ego contulcrim jucundo sanus amico. — Hor. 
 
 Obs. 2. Eleganter usurpari solet Futurum Perfectum pro Simplifn 
 Futuro: ut, 
 Ah, si pergis, abiero. — Ter. 
 Hoc mihi gratissimum feceris. — Cic. 
 
 (I) Optativus; vel sine Particula, vel post Particulas iu; s 
 utinam, O si, si, ut pro utinam : ut, 
 
 Valeant cives meU sint incolumes, sint beati ! — Cic. 
 
 Ita vivam ut maximos sumptus facio ! — Cic. 
 
 Ne sim salvus si aliter scribo ac sentio ! — Cic. 
 
 Utinam minus vita? cupidi fuisseriius. — Cic. 
 
 O mihi prceteritos referat si Jupiter annos ! — Virg. 
 
 Ut ilium, dii dea>quc. perdant ! — Ter. 
 (c) Subjunctivus proprie dictus, quia Verbis et Particuli* 
 subjungitur. 
 
 D. Superius dictum est (§ 164.) Infinitivum quasi Substantivum 
 
 Verbi esse, quod vel subjective vel objective stare posset. 
 Jam verb Simplex Infinitivus 
 
 (a) Subjective jungitur Verbis Impersonalibus : ut, 
 
 Juvat ire sub umbras. — Virg. 
 
 Non cuivis homini contingit udire Corinthum. — IIor. 
 
 Libet semper discere. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Objective sequitur multa Verba, et in primis 
 
 (1) Verba Voluntatis, volo, nolo, malo, aveo, cupio y &c. 
 
 (2) Verba Potential, Officii, et Consuetudinis, possum, quco^ 
 
 Jtequeo, debeo, soleo, consuesco, &c. 
 
SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT10. 119 
 
 (3) Verba Actionis incipienim, continuandae, vel depo- 
 nendae, ccepi, mediior, statuo, disco, ds>ceo, conor % 
 pei go. desino, &c, ut, 
 
 bolent diu cogitare qui magna volunt gerere. — Cic. 
 
 Misere cupis, inquit, abire. — Hor. 
 
 Socrates parens philosophies jure did potest. — Cic 
 
 liitueri solem adversum nequimus. — Cic. 
 
 Suos quisque debet tueri. — Cic. 
 
 Oallinas saginare Deliaci ccepere. — Plin. 
 
 Statui res gestas Romanorum perscribere. — Saul. 
 
 Scipiones Saguntum pergunt ire. — Liv. 
 
 Vena? et arterial micare non desinunt. — Cic. 
 
 Quid sitfuturum eras, fuge qua?rere. — Hor. 
 
 (•)) Pracdicative sequitur Verba Passiva multa, quibus in 
 Activa subjun^itur Accusativus cum Infinitivo, videor, 
 credor, putor, existimor, dicor, feror, narror, trador 
 menwror, &c. : ut, 
 
 Videor pios errare per lucos. — Hor. 
 Verus patriot dicer is esse pater. — Mart. 
 Aristides unus omnium justissimus fuisse traditur. — 
 Cic. 
 
 Ohi. 1 Post Adjectiva vel Poeticus est Infinitivus, vel Argentea?, quatu 
 vocant, JEtatis : ut, 
 
 Et cantare pares et respondere paraii. — Virg. 
 Cerens in vitium jlecti, monitoribus asper. — Hor. 
 Agricola fuit peritus obsequi Tac. 
 
 Obi. l 2. Futuri Infinitivi, cum Activi, turn Passivi, circumlocutiosaepefit 
 per fore ut, futurum esse ut y cum Subjunctivo : ut, 
 
 Spero fore ut in cozlum migremus Cic. 
 
 Dixit futurum esse ut balnea incalescerent. — Tac. 
 Pompeius dixerat, fore uti exercitus Ccesaris pelleretur. — 
 
 CiES. 
 
 Ous. 8. Infinitivus Historicus locum habet in gravi narratione : ut, 
 
 Turn verd ingenti sono caelum strepere, et inter horrendos 
 fragores micare ignes. — Liv. 
 
 Oba 4. Pro Infinitivo Praesentis eleganter usurpatur Infinitivus Per- 
 fecti; ut, 
 
 Commisiste cave qua mox mutare Jahore* Hok. 
 
 QutexMe ertt meiiits. — i^iv. 
 
120 SYNTAXIS, S1VE 
 
 PARS II. 
 DE COMPOSITA SENTENTIA. 
 
 § 180. Prefatory Excursion. 
 
 f, Oratio Recta means any statement, command, or question directly pi t. 
 Oratio Obliqua means any statement, command, or question indirectly 
 
 put, depending on some verb which stands in Oratio Recta, 
 Thus, Valeo, An valet? Vale, are Oratio Recta: while Scin* me valere? 
 Nescio an valeat, Curaut valeas, contain Oratio ObJiqua ; me valere 
 depending on the Oratio Recta scin ; an valeat on nescio ; ut valeas 
 on cura. 
 IT. A Compound Sentence consists of two or more Simple Sentences 
 connected together ; of which one is the Principal, the others either 
 (A) Coordinate, or (B) Subordinate. 
 
 A. A Coordinate Sentence is one which does not depend in construction 
 
 upon the Principal Sentence. Coordinate Sentences are introduced 
 by such particles as et, que, nsc ; aut, vel ; sed, autem ; nam, enim ; 
 igitur, itaque ; deinde, denique ; &c: as, Gyges a nullo videbatur / iyse 
 autem omnia videbat. — Cic. 
 
 B. A Subordinate Sentence is one which depends in construction on the 
 
 Principal Sentence. Subordinate Sentences are of three kinds • — 
 (1) Substantival: (2) Adverbial: (3) Adjectival. 
 1 ) A Substantival Sentence is one which stands, like a Substantive, as 
 Subject, Object, or in Apposition. Substantival Sentences belong to 
 Oratio Obliqua, and are of three kinds: (a) Oblique Enuntiation: 
 (b) Oblique Petition : (c) Oblique Interrogation, 
 (a) The Oblique, or Indirect Enuntiation, is formed generally by the 
 Accusative with Infinitive Mood, sometimes by ut with Subjunctive, 
 or quod with Indicative or Subjunctive Mood. Thus, Amicitia, nisi 
 inter bonos, esse non potest, is a Direct Enuntiation : whilst Verum 
 est, amicitiam, nisi inter bonos, esse non posse, is a Compound Sen- 
 tence, containing the Direct Enunciation, Verum est, and the 
 Oblique Enunciation, amicitiam, nisi inter bonos, esse non posse ; 
 which is Substantival, being he Subject of the Verb est, and 
 having verum for its Predicate. So, Invidia glorut comes eM, is a 
 Direct Enunciation ; but Est hoc commune vitium, ut invidia glories 
 comes sit, is a Compound Sentence, containing the Oblique 
 "Smmtiation, ut invidia gloria comes sit, in Apposition to hoc, the 
 Subject of est, of wnich commune vitium is the Predicate. Again, 
 Calet ignis is a Direct Enuntiation : Sentimus calere ignem a Com- 
 pound Sentence, having the Direct Enuntiation sentimus, and 
 the Oblique, calere ignem, which is the Object of sentimus. 
 (fc)The Oblique Petition is formed by the Subjunctive Mood, with 
 
SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTS). J 21 
 
 or without the Conjunction ut or ne, or by the Infinitive; following 
 Verbs of desire, command, endeavour, &c. Thus Mane in sententid 
 is a Direct Petition, which may be expressed in a Compound Sen- 
 tence by Oro ut maneas in sententid, Oro maneas in sententid, or 
 Oro te manere in sententid. 
 
 (t) The Oblique Interrogation is formed by dependent Interrogatives, 
 whether Pronouns or Particles, governing a Subjunctive Mood. 
 Thus Quis est? is a Direct Interrogation: but Nescio quis sit, 
 incertum est quis sit, are Compound Sentences, containing the 
 Oblique Interrogation, quis sit, which is the Object of nescio, and 
 the Subject of est. 
 
 (2) An Adverbial Sentence is one which qualifies the Principal Sen- 
 tence like an Adverb, answering the questions, how, why, when, &c. 
 Adverbial Sentences are formed by Conjunctions, and are: (a) Con- 
 secutive (so that); (b) Final (in order that); (c) Causal (because 
 since); (d) Temporal (when, while, until, §"c. ); (e) Conditional 
 (if, unless); (/) Concessive (although, whereas); (g) Comparative 
 (as if, as though, $*c. ). 
 
 (S) An Adjectival Sentence is one which qualifies the Principal Sen- 
 tence like an Adjective or Epithet. It is formed by the Relative 
 Pronoun qui, or by a Relative Particle. 
 
 The Relative Pronoun qui qua. quod (with its Particles) has 
 great influence in Latin Construction. It is of all persons, and 
 may be used compendiously as a substitute for the union of a Con- 
 junction with a Personal Pronoun. Hence it forms Coordinate 
 Sentences when used for et ego, et tu, et is, &c. ; for ego autem, tu 
 autem, is autem, &c. ; for ego igitur, tu igitur, is igitur, See. ; for ego 
 enim, tu enim, is enim, &c. And it forms Subordinate Sentences 
 when used for ut ego, ut tu, ut is, &c. ; for quia ego, quia tu, quia is, 
 &c. ; for si ego, si tu, si is, &c. ; for etsi ego, etsi tu, etsi is, &c. 
 
 Note. — It is to be observed that Subordinate Sentences may have others 
 
 subordinate to them, in relation to which they are therefore principal 
 
 clauses. From what has been said of Substantival Sentences, it appears 
 
 that such principal clauses of Oratio Obliqua are, mostly, either in 
 
 the Infinitive or in the Subjunctive Mood. Its subordinate clauses 
 
 generally take the Subjunctive ; as may be seen in the subjoined 
 
 example : — • 
 
 Oratio Recta.— Ars earum rerum est, qua sciuntur ; oratoris autem omnis 
 
 actio opinnmibus, non scientid continetur : nam et 
 
 apud eos dicimus, qui nesciunt, et cu dicimus, qua 
 
 nescimus ipsi. — Cic. 
 
 Oratio Obliqua. — (Antonius apud Ciceronem docet :) Artem earum rerun- 
 esse, qua sciantur ; oratoris autem omnem actionem 
 opinione, non scientid, contineri : quia et apud ecs dicat, 
 qui nesciant, et ipse dicat, quod nesciat. — Quint. 
 
 Oratio Recta may be virtually oblique, when it contains the statement 
 of an opinion or thought. Thus, the sentence, Themistocles noctu 
 ambulabat, quod somnum capere non posset, implies that Themistocles 
 alleged inability to sleep as the reason wby he walked by night 
 
122 SYNTAX13, SIVE 
 
 DE SENTENTIIS SUBSTANTIVALIBUS. 
 
 § 181 (A) Enuntiatio Obliqua. 
 
 JR. G. — Infinitivus cum Accusative- sui Subjecti 
 
 (a) Subjective jungitur Copulae est et Verbis Impersonalibus: ut* 
 
 Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum. — Cic. 
 
 Omnibus bonis expedit salvam esse rempublicam. — Cic. 
 
 Constat leges ad salutem civium inventas esse. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Objective jungitur multis Verbis, in quibus inest sen- 
 
 tiendi aut declarandi vis : ut, 
 
 Pompeios desedisse terrce motu audivimus. — Sen. 
 Xenophanes ait lunam habitari. — Cic. 
 
 (c) Appositionem facit aliquando : ut, 
 
 Mud temere dictum, sapiejites omnes esse bonos. — Cic. 
 Obs. 1. Pro hoc Infinitivo saepe ponitur ut cum Subjunctivo : ul 
 Reliquum est ut officiis certemus inter nos. — Cic. 
 Expedit ut civitutes sua jura habeant. — Just. 
 Mud mea refert, te ut videam. — Cic. 
 Saepe qudd cum Indicativo, ni poscatur Subjunctivus : ut, 
 
 Gratum est qudd patrics civem populoque dedisti. — Juv. 
 Hoc prcestamus maximd feris, qudd loquimur. — Cic. 
 Mitto qudd omnes meas tempestates subieris. — Cic. 
 ( Obs. ) Oportet et necesse est, Subjunctivum regentia, ut omittunt ut, 
 Philosophies servias oportet, ut liber sis. — Cic. 
 Virtus voluptatis aditus intercludat necesse est. — Cic 
 Obs. 2. Sperandi et pollicendi Verba malunt Infinitivum Futuri : ut, 
 Sperabam id me assccuturum. — Cic. 
 Pollicebatur pecuniam se esse redditurum. — Cic. 
 Obs. 3. Post metuendi formulas regunt Subjunctivum ne et ut pre 
 ne non : ut, 
 
 Verendum est ne fames in urbe sit. — Cic. 
 O puer % ut sis vitalis metuo. — Hon. 
 Obn. 4. Indignationem notat Infinitivus Interrogans : ut, 
 Mene incepto desistere victam ? — Vikg. 
 Vel ejus vice ut cum Subjunctivo : ut, 
 Te ut ulta resfrangat ? — Cic. 
 
 § 182. (B) Petitio Obliqua. 
 
 JR. G. — Optandi, rogandi, liortandi^ tmperandi, permiitendu eu- 
 randi, enitendi, efficiendi, similibusque formulis additur 
 Subjunctivus cum Conjunctionibus ut, ne, vel omissfi 
 aliquando Conjunctione : 
 (a) Subjective : ut, 
 
 Pottulatur ab amico ut sit sincerus. — Cic. 
 Cavendum est ne assentatori patefacias aures* — Cic. 
 Hcbc omnia frcetermittas licet. — Cic. 
 
SENTENT1AEUM CONSTRUCTIO. 123 
 
 (b) Objective : ut, 
 
 lmmortalia ne speres monet annus, — Hob. 
 
 Potes efficere ut male moriar, ne moriar non potes. — Plin 
 
 Sine te exorem, mi pater. — Ter. 
 
 (c) Per Appositionem : ut, 
 
 Hoc te rogo, ne demittas animum. — Cic. 
 Vetus est lex ilia, ut idem amid velint. — Cic. 
 Obs. Post multa ex his Verbis aeque placet Infinitiva constructio: ut. 
 Pompeius rem ad arma deduci studebat. — CiBS. 
 Jubet nos Pythius Apollo noscere nosmet ipsos. — ■ Cic. 
 
 1 83. (C) Interrogatio Obliqua. 
 
 It G. — Pronominibus et Particulis interrogandi, subordinate 
 positis, Subjunctivus additur : 
 
 (a) Subjective : ut, 
 
 In beneficio videndum est, quando et cui et quemadmo- 
 dum et quare demus. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Objective : ut, 
 
 Tu quotus esse velis r escribe. — Hor. 
 
 Quis est, quin cernat, quanta vis sit in sensibus f — Cic. 
 
 (c) Per Appositionem : ut, 
 
 Ipse quis sit, utrum sit, an non sit, id quoque nescit. 
 
 Catull. 
 
 Not Talia sunt : 
 
 Quis, quantus, qualis, qui, quot, quotus, unde, vbi, quando, 
 Qudm, quamobrem, quare, cur, quomodd, num, n€, ut, an, utrum. 
 
 DE SENTENTIIS ADVERBIALIBUS. 
 
 184. (A) Consecutivse Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. — Ut, ut non, ut nihil, ut nullus, ut nemo, consecutive 
 sensu, Subjunctivum postulant. 
 
 (a) Post Demonstrativa sic, ita, eo, tarn, adeo, tot, tantus, tans, 
 
 is, hie, hue : ut, 
 
 Quis tarn demens est ut sua voluntate m&reat? — Cic. 
 Titus ita facilis fuit ut nulli quidquam negaret. — Evtr. 
 Tantus terror fuit ut egredi nemo sit ausus. — Nep. 
 Decori vis ea est ut ah honesto non queat separari. — Cic. 
 
 (b) Suppresso Demonstrativo : ut, 
 
 Arboribus consita Italia est, ut tota pomarium videatur. 
 — Varro. 
 
 (c) Post Comparatlvum et qudm : ut, 
 
 laocrates majore ingenio est qudm ut cum Lysid compart" 
 tur. — Cic. 
 
1 24 SYNIaXIS, S1VE 
 
 Obs. Tantum abest duas sententias sibi subordinatas habet> primam 
 Substantival em, alteram Adverbialem : ut, 
 
 Tantum abest ut nostra miremur, ut nobis non tathjaciat 
 ipse Demosthenes. — Cic. 
 
 § 185. (B) Finales Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. — Ut, ne, ut ne, finali sensu, Subjunctivum postulant : ut, 
 Utjugulent homines, surgunt de node latrones. — Juv. 
 Legum idcirco servi sumus, utliberi esse possimus. — Cic. 
 Ne vana urbis magnitudo sit, Romulus asylum aperit. — Liv. 
 Scipio rus abiit, ne ad causarn dicendam adesset. — Cic. 
 Exercenda est animadoersio ut ne quid temere agamus. 
 — Cic. 
 
 5 186. (C) Causales Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. I. — Quum, causali sensu, Subjunctivum pier unique 
 regit ; sed interdum Indicativum : ut, 
 
 Quce quum ita sint, in alia omnia abeo. — Cic. 
 
 Quum in Matii familiar itaiem venisti, gaudeo. — Cic. 
 
 R. G.U. — Quod, qv undo, rpaa, quaudoquidem, quoniam, siquU 
 demque, causali sensu, Indicative- gaudent, nisi opus sit 
 Subjunctive : ut, 
 
 Adsunt propterea quod officium sequuntur. — Cic 
 
 lucent, quia periculum metuunt. — Cic. 
 
 Dicite, quandoqnidem in molli consedimus herbd. — ViRG. 
 
 Quoniam jam nox est^ discedite. — Liv. 
 
 § 67. (D) Temporales Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. I. — Quum, quando, quoties, simul, ut, simul atque, ubi 
 postquam, temporales, Indicativo gaudent : quum saepe 
 Subjunctivo, post et ante Tempus Praeteritum : ut, 
 Tua res agitur, paries quum proximus ardet. — Hon. 
 Ut veni coram, non sum permulta locitus. — Hob. 
 Miserum estfodere, ubi sitis fauces tenet. — Plaut. 
 Zenonem, quum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. — Cic. 
 Deccssit Agesilaus, quum in portum venisset. — Nep. 
 R. G. TL* — Dum, donee, quoad, antequam, priusquam, pro 
 sententia loci, nunc Indicativum, nunc Subjunctivum 
 eapiunt : ut, 
 
 HomihtiS) dum docent, discunt. — Sen. 
 Expectate dum consul fiat Kreso. — Liv. 
 Cato, quoad vixit, virt.utum laude crevit. — Nep. 
 Opprrire quoad scire possis, quid tibi agendum sit. — Cic 
 Anteipmm opprimit lux, erumpamus. — Liv. 
 Providentia est, per quum animus aliquid videt> antequam 
 factum sit. — C>c. 
 
SENTENTIARUM C0NSTRUCT10. 125 
 
 §188. (E) Conditionales Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. I. — Si, nisi, ubi conditio, ut incerta, proponitur, Con- 
 junctivo praeinittuntur ; alias, Indicativo : ut, 
 
 Si vales, bene est. — Cic. 
 
 Sincerum est nisi vas, quodcunque infundis acescit. — Hor. 
 
 Si quod erat grande vas, lesti offer ebant. — Cic. 
 
 Si noles sanus, curves hydropicus. — Hor. 
 
 Sume, catelle : negat : si non des, optet. — Hor. 
 
 Siforet in terris, rider et Democritus. — Hor. 
 
 Si id scissem, nunquam hue tulissem pedem. — Ter. 
 
 Si Atheniensis esses, clarus nunquam fuisses. — Cic. 
 JR. G. II. — Modb, dum, dummodo, modb ut, conditional! sensu, 
 Subjunctivum regunt : ut, 
 
 Manent ingenia senibus, modb permaneatindustria. — Cic. 
 
 Caligula jactabat illud: Oderint dum metuant. — Suet. 
 
 Scies, modb ut tacere possu. — Ter. 
 
 | 189. (F) Concessivae Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. I. — Etsi, tametsi, etiamsi, pro re nata nunc Indicativuni 
 nunc Conjunctivum capiunt : ut, 
 
 Etsi culpa tenemur, scelere liberati sumus. — Cic. 
 Obtundis, tametsi intelligo. — Ter. 
 
 Etiamsi non is esset Ca?sar qui est, tamen ornandus 
 videretur. — Cic. 
 R. G. II. — Quamquam, utut, Indicativo gaudent : ut, 
 Quanquam festinas, non est mora longa. — Hor. 
 Utut erga me est meritus, mihi cordi est tamen. — Peaut 
 R. G. III. — Quamvis, quantumvis, licet, ut, quum, ne, con- 
 cessivo sensu, Subjunctivum regunt: ut, 
 
 Quod turpe est, quamvis lateat, nonjiet honestum. — Cic. 
 Licet vitium sit ambitio, causa virtutum est. — Sen. 
 Ut desint vires, tamen est laudandu voluntas. — Ov. 
 Phocionfuit pauper, quum divitissimus esse posset. — Nep. 
 Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est. — Cic. 
 Obs. 1. Quamvis cum Indicativo reperitur apud historicos et 
 poetas : ut, 
 
 Quamvis ingenio non valet, arte valet. — Ov. 
 Obs. 2. Eleganter excidunt Conjunctiones si, etsi : ut, 
 
 Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, Icare, haberes. — Virg 
 Naturam expellas furcd, tamen usque recurret. — Hon. 
 
 § 190. (G) Comparativas Sententiae. 
 
 R. G. — Comparativae Parti culae quasi, tanouam, cm, velut, 
 cum similibus, Subjunctivum regunt : ut, 
 
 Parvi primo ortujacent, tanqwim sine animo sint. — Cic. 
 Turn verb attoniti, ceu templo irrumperet hostu 
 Exsiluere patres. — Su, 
 
126 STNTAXIS, S1VE 
 
 DE SENTENTIIS ADJECTIVALIBUS. 
 
 $ 191.12. G. L — Relativum, qui qua quod, Indicativo jungitur, 
 nisi opus sit Subjunctivo : ut, 
 
 Quis fuit, horrendos primus qui protulit enses ? — O v. 
 Obs. Itidem Correlati va qualis, quantus, quot ; et Universalia quis* 
 quis, quicunque, quotcumque, cum similibus. 
 
 § 192. R. G. II. — Qui, causali sensu, Subjunctivo gaudet : ut, 
 Miser et tui me, qui hunc facias inimicum tibi. — Tee. 
 Obs. Ita non quo, pro non quod: ut, 
 
 Non quo quenquam plus amem eo feci. — Ter. 
 Not. — Similiter construitur non quin pro non quia non. 
 $ 193 JR. G. III. — Qui, concessivo sensu, Subjunctivo gaudet : ut, 
 Egomet, qui leviter Gracas Uteras attigissem, tamen 
 Athenis commoratus sum. — Cic. 
 
 § 194. i?. G. IV. — Qui, finali sensu, Subjunctivum regit : ut, 
 
 Litteras misi, quibus et placarem eum et mouerem. — Cic. 
 Obs. Hinc quo pro ut eo Subjunctivum regit : ut, 
 Ager novatur, quo melrores fetus edat. — Cic. 
 § 195. R. G. V. — Qui, consecutivo sensu, Subjunctivum regit : 
 (a) Post Demonstrativa, talis, is pro talis, tantus, tarn, adeo, 
 similia : ut, 
 
 Non is sum qui his rebiis delecter. — Cic. 
 Nihil tanti est quo vendamus libertatem. — Cic. 
 (li) Omisso Demonstrativo : ut, 
 
 Audies ex me quod non omnes probent. — ^Cic. 
 
 (c) Post Comparativum et qudm : ut, 
 
 Majora deliquerant qudm quibus ignosci posset. — Lit 
 
 (d) Post dignus, indignus, idoneus, aptus : ut, 
 
 Dignus est qui imperet. — Cic. 
 
 (e) Ubicunque significat talis ut : sic enim construitur 
 
 (1) Post est, sunt, invenio, reperio, habeo, similia : ut, 
 
 Est qui vinci possit. — Hon. 
 
 Inventus est quiflammis imponeret manum. — Liv. 
 
 Habes qui assideat, f omenta paret. — Hon. 
 
 (2) Post aliquis, pauci, multi, solus, similia, indefinite po 
 
 sita: ut, 
 
 Estaliquid quod non oporteat, etiamsi licet — Cic. 
 Solus es, Cai Casar, cujus in victoria nemo ceciderii 
 nisi armatus. — Cic . 
 
SENTENT1ARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 127 
 
 (8) Post nemo, nihil, nullus, similia, item post Interrogative 
 negationem expectantia : ut, 
 
 Nihil est quod tarn deceat qudm constantia. — Cic. 
 Quis estquinon oderit protervam pueritiam ? — Cic. 
 Ohs. Relativse Particulae quo, qua, quomodo, quare, ubi, unde, cur t 
 cum similibus, iisdem fere regulis, quibus Relativum qui 
 qucB quod, Indicativum vel Subjunctivum postulant : ut, 
 Perge quo ccepisti. — Cic. 
 Digna res est ubi nervos intendas. — Ter. 
 Erat nihil cur properato opus esset, — Cic. 
 
 196- Not. 1. Quominus, post Verba quae quid impedimenti continent, 
 Subjunctivum regit inceptaa, sed impeditse actionis : ut, 
 Senectus non impedit quominus litteris utamur — Cic. 
 Non recusavit quomiuus pcenam subiret. — Nep. 
 Per Afranium stetit quominus dimicaretur. — C^es. 
 ( Obs. ) Ne post eadem Verba prohibet actionem : ut, 
 
 Pontus erat vetitus ne mergeret aiquore terram. — Manil. 
 Sulpicius intercesserat ne exules reducerentur. — Cic- 
 Not. 2. Quin (qui-ne, qui-ne) Subjunctivum regit : 
 (a) Pro qui non post Negativa et Interrogativa : ut, 
 
 Nihil est quin male narrando possit depravari. — Teb. 
 Nullum intermisi diem quin scriberem. — Cic. 
 Quisfundum colit, quin sues habeat? — Varro. 
 (6) Pro qubd non, ut non, post negationem vel interrogationem 
 dubitationis, abstinentice, impedimenti, causa, et similium : ut, 
 Non dubito quin fuerint ante Homerum poeta. — Cic. 
 Nee requies quin mox pomis exuberet annus. — Virg. 
 Facere non possum quin quotidie ad te mittam. — Cic. 
 Prorsus nihil abest quin sim miserrimus. — Cic. 
 Quin ad diem decedam nulla causa est. — Cic. 
 Quis dubitet quin in virtute divitiat positce sint ? — Cic. 
 Quid est causes quin decemviri cohniam in Janiculum 
 possint deducere ? — Liv. 
 
 DE ALUS QUIBUSDAM PARTICULIS. 
 
 J 197 (A) Nedum Subjunctivo jungitur : ut, 
 
 Mortalia facta peribunt, 
 Nedum sermonum stet honos et gratia vivax. — Hon. 
 (B) Ne . . . quidem negativam vim auget, interposita inter 
 ne et quidem ea parte sentential, in qua fit emphasis : 
 (a) Praecedente Verbo cum altera Negativa : ut, 
 Non prcetereundum est ne id quidem. — Cic 
 
i^8 STNTAXIS, SIVE 
 
 (b) Sequente Verbo sine altera Negativa ut, 
 
 Ne ad Catonem quidem provocabo. — Cic 
 C. (a) Ne, an, interrogativae particulae, dubitanter interro- 
 gant : num responsionem expectat negativani : nonne t 
 annon affirmativam : ut, 
 
 Qualis est tua mens ? potesne dicer e ? — Cic. 
 An tu me tristem esse putas ? — Plaut. 
 Num negare audes ? — Cic. 
 Canis nonne similis lupo est? — Cic. 
 (b) In Duplici Interrogatiune sunt ha? varietates . 
 1. Utrum sequente an; ut, 
 
 Hcec utrum abundantis an egentis signa sunt? — 
 Cic. 
 
 2. Num sequente an : ut, 
 
 Num duas habetis patrias an est ilia patria com- 
 munis? — Cic. 
 
 3. Ne sequente an : ut, 
 
 Romamne venio an hie maneo an Arpinum 
 fugio? — Cic. 
 
 4. Particula omissa, sequente an aut ne : ut 
 
 Interrogatur tria pauca sint anne multa ? — Cic. 
 Quceram justum sit necne po'ema ? — Hor. 
 
 DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS ORATIONIS OBLIQUJE. 
 
 $ 198.72. G.I. — Sententia, quae subordinatnr Orationi Obliquae, 
 sive Relativo sive Conjunctione intercedente, Subjun- 
 ctivum exigit : ut, 
 
 Ais, quoniam sit natura mortalis, immortalem etiam esse 
 
 oportere. — Cic. 
 Scito me, postquam in urbem venerim, redisse cum libris 
 
 in gratiam. — Cic . 
 Fateor me oratoren\ ft modb sim, ex Academic spatiis 
 
 exstitisse. — Cic. 
 Simile veri est, non ex iisdem semper populis exercitue 
 
 scriptos, quanquam eadem semper gens helium in- 
 
 tulerit. — Liv. 
 Sapientissimum esse dicunt eum, cui, quod opus sit, ipn 
 
 veniat in mentem ; propius accedere ilium, qui alterius 
 
 bene inventis obtemperet. — Cic. 
 Caesar ad me scripsit, gratissimum sibi esse quod 
 
 quieverim. — Cic. 
 
SENTENT1ARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 129 
 
 199. R. G. II. — Sententla Subordinata, qua 1 opinionem cujuspiam 
 
 vel cogitationem indicat, sive Relativo sive Conjunetione 
 interoedente, Subjunctivum exigit : ut, 
 Laudat Africanum Pancetius quod fucrit abstinent. — Cic . 
 Alium rogantes regem miser e ud Jovem, 
 Inutilis quoniam esset quifuerat dat.us. — Ph^dr. 
 Sapiens non dubitat, si ita melius sit, migrare de vita. — 
 
 Cic. 
 Darius ejus pontis, dum ipse abesset, custodes reliquit. 
 
 — Nep. 
 Etsi nihil habeat in se gloria, cur expetatur, tamen virtu* 
 
 tern tanquam umbra sequitur. — Cic. 
 In Hispauia prorogatum veteribus imperatoribus est 
 
 imperium cum exercitibus quos haberent. — Liv. 
 Quum abessem, quotiescupque patria in mentem veniret, 
 
 ha'C omnia occurrebant, colles, campique, et Tiberis, et 
 
 hoc ccelum, sub quo natus educatusque essem. — Liv. 
 
 200. It. G. III. — Relativum vel Conjunctio, quum subordinatur 
 
 Subjunctive-, Subjunctivum regit : ut, 
 
 Tanta est caritas patria, ut vestris eliam legionibus sane* 
 tus essem, quod earn a me servatam esse meminissent. 
 —Cic. 
 Equidem illnd molior, ut mihi Ca>sar concedat, ut absim 
 quum aliquid in senatu contra Cna?um agatur. — Cic. 
 Erat in Hortensio memoria tanta, ut, qua secum corn* 
 mentatus esset, ea sine scripto verbis eisdem redderet, 
 quibus cogitavisset. — Cic. 
 Net. — Oratio Obliqua longe excurrit apud Historicos ; Enuntia- 
 tiones in prim is, tuni etiam his adspersae Petitiones lnterro- 
 gationesque : ut, 
 
 Orat Tarquhrius Veientes, ne se extorrem egentem ex tanto modd 
 regno cum Liberia adolescentibus ante oculos suos perire tiuerent : 
 ados peregre in regnum Romam accitos ; se regem, augentem 
 hello Romanum imperium, a proximis scelerald conjuration* 
 pulsum : . . . patriam se regnumqne suum repetere, et per- 
 sequi ingratos cives velle : ferrent opem, adjuvarctt ; suag 
 quoque veteres ivjurias ultum irent, toties cocsas itgiones, agrum 
 ademptum. — Liv. 
 Docebat Casar, quum veteres qudmque justce causes necessitn- 
 dinis ipsis cum sEduis intercederent ; qnre senatus consulta, 
 q7/oties, qudmque honorijica in eos facta essent ; ut omni 
 tempore totius Gallia principatum JEdui tcnuissent, prius 
 etiam qudm nostram amicitiam appctissetit : populi Roman* 
 kanc esse cousuetudinem, ut socio?, atque amicos nun modd sui 
 nihil deperdere, sed gratia, dignitate, honort an«.liores vel it 
 j$»e : quod verd ad amicitiam populi Romani attxdissent, id 
 iio eripi quis pati posset ? — Cm&. 
 
130 
 
 PROSODIA COMPENDIUM. 
 
 § 201. De Syllabarum quantitate disserit, 
 Et de Metrorum legibus, Prosodia. 
 
 DE SYLLABARUM QUANTITATE, 
 
 DEFINITIONES. 
 
 1. Mensura Tempus eloquendae est sjllabae: 
 Quod et vocatur Quantitas. 
 
 Obs. Vocalis observetur : in vocalium 
 
 Stat quantitate syllabarum quantitas. 
 
 2 Longx (-) brevisque (v..) Temporis notas habes. 
 Obs. 1. Singulis longis brevibusque binis 
 Par est eademque potestas. 
 
 Obs. 2. Communis audit ilia, quas interdum brevis, 
 Et rursus eadem longa vocalis sonat. 
 
 Xot. — If non babetur consonans, nullamque vim 
 Exercet in Prosodia. 
 
 REGULiE QUANTITATIS GENERALES. 
 
 $ 202. R. G, I. — Omnis Diphthongus contractaque Syllaba longa 
 est: 
 
 Ut praes, heu, gaudens : coago fit cogo, nihil nil ; 
 Pro bovibus bobus ; momentum pro movimentum. 
 Obs. At tu vocali prdeeuntem corripies prce. 
 
 § 203. R. G. II. — Dant Derivatis proprium Primaria tempus : 
 Sic saliceta salix, pumum pomaria format. 
 Obs. Fit tamen in multis aliter : sic dret arena, 
 
 Sic humanus hdmo est ; sic lucet parva lucerna. 
 R. G. III. — Nee non Simplicium tempus Composta sequuntur 
 A puto sic reputo, sic a mhnor immemor exstat. 
 Obs. Sunt excepta tamen : sic nubo pronuba format. 
 
 | 20 1 R. G. IV. — Prsevia vocali vocalis corripitur : ceil 
 Principium^ prohibe : 
 Obs. 1 Sed rnulta hinc excipe Gra?ca : ut, 
 
 CAuonis, jEngas, Clio, MyrtOus, Enyo, 
 
COMPENDIUM. 131 
 
 Obs, 2. A longam Primas priscus Genitivus habebit t 
 Terrdi, auldi ; sic format Quinta, diei : 
 Scribe tamen rei atque rei, jidei atque Jidei. 
 
 Obs. 3. Longa Vocativo est penultima vocis in aiits, 
 Aut eius ; Cdi, Pompei, hac lege sonantur. 
 
 Obs. 4. IVerbifio longa est, nisi cum comes est er -, 
 " Omnia nunc flent, fieri qua posse negabam. " 
 
 Obs. 5. I dat communem Genitivus in ius : ut Me 
 Illlus illlusque facit : sic ius iusque 
 Totus et unus habent, ipse isteque, nullus et ullus: 
 Alterius semper breviat ; producit alius. 
 
 Obs. 6. Nunc Diana feras agitat, nunc dia Diana. 
 Sic She vel She ; sed semper dicimus eheu. 
 
 § 205. R. G. V. — Longa situ vocalis erit, quam bina sequetui 
 Consona ; sic, pallor trlstis : seu voce in eadera 
 J subit, x, aut z ; sic, Ajax, axis, Amazon. 
 
 Obs, Excipe quadrijugus, bijugus, quae corripiunt i. 
 
 Not. — Vocalis, vi curta sua, communis erit, si 
 
 Consona postponens liquidam sibi muta sequetur : 
 Sic recte lugubre melos vel lugubre dices : 
 Duplex sive duplex, Tecmessam sive T&cmessam. 
 
 ' Obs. 1 . ) N post g longam dat semper ; ut agnus et Ignis. 
 
 Nee minus m post g ; tegmen quod monstrat et agmev* 
 
 (Obs. 2.) Syllaba si liquidam diviserit altera muta, 
 
 Longa prior semper : quod sub-ruit, db-lue, monstrant 
 
 § 206. R. G. VI. — Perfecti brevis est geminati syllaba prima : 
 
 XJt,pepuli, duiici, picpugi, cecidi, atque cecidi, 
 
 R. G. VII. — Efficiunt primam Perfecta disyllaba longam, 
 Ut, vidi, tegi, movique. Sed excipis octo : 
 Bibi, dedi, fui, fxdi, 
 Steti, stilt, tuli, scidi, 
 
 G. VIII. — Primam producuntque disyllaba rite Supina, 
 Ut, visum, lotum, motumque. Sed excipis octo : 
 Hum, citum, datum, litum, 
 Rdtum, rutum, solum, situm. 
 
 DE QUANT1TATE SYLLABARUM FINALIUM. 
 
 § 207. R. I. — Pleraque produces Monosyllaba, qualia me, ver* 
 Obs. Corripiuntur in I, 6, d, t, ut, vel, sub, id, it, stdt : 
 
 Es cum compositis, ut adit : qui, ve, quumque rogat, n#, 
 F&c, nic, an, in, fir, pei; ter, vir, cdr, quis, 6i*» is et ei». 
 
132 PROSODLE 
 
 § 208 R. II. — Producuntur in A; ceu frustra, inirdque, pardauA. 
 
 Obs. Sed casus rectos et quartos excipe : quales, 
 
 Carmind Musd canit ; resonant Amaryllidd sylvae. 
 Atque vocativos plerosque, ut Orestd, Thyettd : 
 Ejd, itd particulas, cumque his quid, quae breviant a. 
 
 § 209. R. III. — Corripiuntur in E : ceu lege Hmete care^e* 
 
 Obs. E longam Prima? casus Quintaeque requirunt, 
 Ut Thisbe, specie : quae derivantur ab ill is, 
 Ut quart! atque hodie : contractaque, qualia Tempe": 
 Verba in eo primi numeri Mandantia, ut audi? : 
 (Sed cave sive cave scribendi est aqua potestas) 
 Ex Adjectivis Adverbia ducta Secundae, 
 Ut rnisere: jungantur ohe, fermeqxie, fergque. 
 
 § 210. R. IV. — Producuntur in /: ceu did, o?'Mq\xe, dollqxx^ 
 Obs. Attamen hinc multos Graecorum deme Dativos 
 Atque Vocativos, ut Thyrsidi, Phyllidi, Chlori: 
 Sicubi, necubi deme, nisi et quasi, queis brevis est i, 
 (At mihi, ubi, tibi, ibi, sibi, communem taciunt i.) 
 
 § 211. R. V. — Producuntur in O: ceu virgo, uUrdqne, juvoque 
 
 Obs. At putd finalem, scio, nescid, corripiunt O : 
 
 Adde modo et composta, dud, octd, egd, queis citd junge. 
 O proprium claudens nomen communis habetur, 
 Ut Matho, (sed longa est in Graecis semper, ut Argd). 
 Quaedam Flaccus habet communia, plurima Naso, 
 Plura poetarum corruptior addidit aetas. 
 
 R. VI. — Producuntur in U : sic tu, dictuque, diuque. 
 
 R. VII. — Corripiuntur in Y: sic dant cheljj, Tiphy, poe^ai. 
 
 212. jR. VIII. — In C producuntur, ut illic (excipe donee). 
 
 R. IX. — Corripe in L, D, T : sic Hannibal, Mud, amavit. 
 
 R. X. — Corripiuntur in N: ceu culmen. 
 
 (At excipe Graeca 
 Multa, ut HymSn, AcrOn, vocali praedita longa.) 
 
 R. XL — Corripiuntur in R : ceu calcar, amabitur, Hector. 
 Obs. Graeca tamen, crater, cether, producis, et aSr. 
 
 § 213. R, XII. — Producuntur in As : ut terras 
 
 (Excipe Graeca 
 Queis Genitivus -ddis, ceu Pallas : et excipe casus 
 Crescentum quartos, ceu lampadds : his ands adde. 
 
COMPENDIUM. 133 
 
 R. XIII. — Producuntur in Es, ut sedes atque rideres* 
 Obs. Excipienda tamen qua? Gragci corripiunt ; ut 
 Troadtis : excipias etiam penes, excipiasque 
 Crescentis brevis est penultima queis Genitivi, 
 Ut seges (at paries semper producitur, atque 
 Pes cum compositis : abies, arie'sque, Ceresque). 
 
 § 214. R. XIV. Corripiuntur in Is : ceu diceris } utilis, enxls. 
 Obs. Obliqui casus plurales excipiuntur, 
 
 Ut terrls, vobls : etiam persona secunda 
 In primo numero Quartas Prassentis, ut audi* : 
 Composita a vis, sis : malls, nollsque, vellsque. 
 (Sed ris Pra?teriti et persona secunda Futuri 
 Activae Vocis recte communis habetur ; 
 Feceris, addideris, tuleris. ) Et nomina produc 
 Crescentis longa est penultima queis Genitivi, 
 Ut Samnls : itidem Simols, gratlsque, forlsque. 
 
 | 215. R. XV. — Producuntur in Os : ut ventos atque sacei-dds. 
 Obs. Corripienda tamen quag Grasci corripiunt, ut 
 
 Phasidds, Argds, epds. Sic compos et impds, ds, exds. 
 
 R. XVI. — Corripiuntur in Us : ceu tempus, amamits, et intus. 
 
 Obs. Hinc Quartae casus contractos excipe, ut artus: 
 Longaque crescentis penultima queis Genitivi, 
 Ut tellus incusque, juventus atque senectus : 
 Producta a Graecis, ut Sapphus atque Melampus, 
 Atque piis cunctis venerandum nomen Iesiis. 
 
 H. XVII. — Corripiuntur in Ys : chelys ut, chlamys, Othry^ 
 Erinnys. 
 
 Not. — Ducit ab Auctorum scriptis ea syllaba tempus, 
 Regula quam longam nulla brevemve facit. 
 
 DE METEORUM LEGIBUS. 
 
 DEFINITIONES. 
 
 § 216. 1. In proferendis syllabis Arsin voca 
 
 Elation em vocis (huic Ictus comes) ; 
 Thesisque contra vocis est depressio. 
 Pes syllabarum est certa consecutio : 
 Pedumque certa consecutio Rhythmus: ^ 
 Apud poetas Versus est nomen Rhythmi : 
 Certumque Versuum ordinem Carmen voca 
 Metrum\e : et audit certa pars Versus Metrum. 
 
 § 2 17 2. Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus : u - 
 Quod si longa brevi praecesserit, ille Trochavis : - ^ 
 Pyrrhichius brevibus voluit consistere binis : ^ w 
 
134 PROSODLE 
 
 Spondeus binis voluit consistere longis : — 
 JPactylus efficitur longa brevibusque duabus : - s> u 
 Postque breves binas Anapcestus simplice longa : ^ w - 
 Tribrachyn hue brevibus formatum subjice ternis. o v 
 
 Mot. 1 . — Quern Thesis incipiat, dices ascendere Rhythmum : 
 Quale tuus specimen versus, Iambe, dabit : 
 Coeperit ex Arsi contra, descendere dices ; 
 Dactyle, tu talem, tuque, Trochae, facis. 
 
 Sot 2. — Metrum in Dactylico carmine singuli, 
 At bini in reliquis constituunt pedes. 
 
 tht. 3. — Complendis metris cui syllaba deficit una, 
 
 Hie Versus Catalecticus audit. 
 Complendis metris cui deerit syllaba duplex, 
 
 Ille Brachycatalecticus audit. 
 Syllaba cui superest completis unica metris, 
 
 Versus Hypercatalecticus audit. 
 Cui nihil aut deest aut superest, teres atque rotundus 
 
 Versus is Acatalecticus audit. 
 
 DE SCANSIONE ET FIGURIS SCANSION! S. 
 
 § 218. Scansio, | quam varija con|cinnant | arte Fi|gurse, 
 D istr ibu | it Ver | sum | pro rati | one Pe | dum. 
 
 A. Vocalem elidit Synalcepha in limite vocis, 
 Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; 
 
 Phyllid? am! \ an? ali\as : nam \ me dis\cedere \Jlevit 
 (pro Phyllida, amo, ante.) 
 Obs. 1. Interdum legem Synaloepha? infringit Hiatus : 
 
 Ter sunt j cona\tl im\ponere \ Pelio \ Ossam. 
 Obs. 2. Heu, 0, et ah nunquam vocalis proxima delet. 
 
 B. Ecthlipsis Vocalem atque m de limite trudit, 
 Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; 
 
 O cu\ras homirf | O quant' \ est in \ refais in\ane. 
 (pro hominum, quantum.) 
 
 § 219. C. Syllaba de binis conflata Synceresis audit, 
 
 Ut monstrant deest, dein, aureos, alvearia, Thesei. 
 
 Obs. Apud poetas jura consonantium 
 Subinde sumit / vel U: 
 
 " Fluviorum rex Eridanus. Labat ariete mums. 
 Genua tremunt. Pectunt et tenuia veUera Seres." 
 
 D. Una sed in binas divisa Dicer esis audit . 
 
 Quod tibi Naiades monstrant llavique Suevi ; 
 Obs. Ponitur U pro V : siliias, soluitque videbis* 
 
COMPENDIUM. [f5.3 
 
 § 220 E. Ante pedum finem Ccesura vocabula iinit * 
 
 " Lumina, labentem || ccelo |j qua ducitis annum." — Yirg 
 Ohs. Quam fecit natura brevem, vocalis in Arsi 
 
 Longa fit interdum, Caesura Ictuque faventc : 
 " Pectoribus || inhians spirantia consulit exta." 
 F. Secernit vocemque pedemque Dialysis una : 
 
 " Lumina || labentem ccelo qua? || ducitis || annum." 
 Not. — Ultima communis censetur syllaba versus. 
 
 DE VERSIBUS DACTYLICIS. 
 
 I. DE HEXAMETRO SIVE SENARIO DACTYLICO 
 
 1 221. Hexameter pedibus senis concluditur: horum 
 Dactylus est quintus : sexta statione locatur 
 Spondeus ; reliquisque locis reperitur utervis. 
 Ohs. 1. Quintaj sede lo|cat re|rum gravidas spon|deam. 
 Obs. 2. Hexametrum Caesura solet distinguere, qua pes 
 Tertius aut quartus [| sese || discernit in Arsi. 
 ( Obs. 1.) Post Thesin interdum Caesura est unica Versus ; 
 
 " Impiger, iracundus, \\ inexorabilis, acer." — Hon. 
 (Obs. 2.) Damnaris versum, Caesura qui vacet omni. 
 Obs. 3. Emcit Hexametri de more disyllaba finem 
 Sive tvi syllaba vox, raro polysyllaba, raro, 
 Altera ni praeeat, claudit monosyllaba versum. 
 Obs. 4. Ultima perraro sorbetur syllaba versus : 
 
 Quod quum contingit, turn versus Hyperm&ter audit i 
 " Omnia j Mercuri\o simi\lis y vo\cemque co\loremque, 
 Et cri\nes fla\vos et \membra de\cora ju\vent<B." — Vtrv* 
 
 11. DE PENTAMETRO DACTYLICO. 
 
 § 222. Pentameter partes binas habet : utraque binis 
 Procedit pedibus, sequitur quos syllaba longa. 
 Primam pro lubitu Spondeus, Dactylus, intrant : 
 Dactylicis tantum pedibus pars altera gaudet. 
 Obs. 1. Pentametri primam partem Caesura secunda 
 
 Separat: atque loco Synalccpha excluditur illo. 
 M Quamvis\ ingeni\o || non valet, \ arte va\let." 
 Obs. 2. Pentametri format de more disyllaba finem. 
 ( Obs.) Est licet ad finem, si fit Synalcepha, remitti ■ 
 " Invi\tis ocu\lis \ litter a j lecta tu\a esA" 
 Vel si vox anteit monosyllaba, qualis in ilio . 
 Prcemia \ si studi\o \\ consequor \ ista % sat j est. 
 Obs. 3. Ne partis primae sit vox monosyllaba finis, 
 Ni vox prascedat monosyllaba, qualis in iilo : 
 
 " Magna ta\men spes | est || in boni\tate De\i.'* 
 Vel vox interdum brevibus confecta duabus : 
 H<zc pr<B\stat sine \ vi ] \ scev^a tre\menda Jq\vi* 
 
136 PROSODliK 
 
 IIL DE CARMINE HEROICO ET DE CARMINE 
 ELEGIACO. 
 
 § 223. Hexametris gaudet solis Heroica Musa : 
 
 Hexametros Elegi Pentametrosque ligant 
 Obs. Disticha perfectum malunt includere sensunr. ; 
 Nee simplieis sententiae 
 Constructionem distichis scindi placet. 
 
 § 224. HEXAMETRI DACTYLICI 
 
 (QUI ET VERSUS MEMORIALES SUNT DE VOCUM DIFFERENTIA^. 
 
 Cantat acanthis avis, sed floret acanthus in agris. 
 In siliiis deer est : equus deer Olympia vincit. 
 Qui fert arma humerus, armo dux fertur equino. 
 Mel vaga condit apis : deus est iEgyptius Apis. 
 Vexat asilus equos ; miseros excepit asylum. 
 Qui sculpit, ccelat, qui servat condita, celaL 
 Voce canes ; due ej a cartes, nisi tempora canes. 
 Tenduntur nexi casses ; nitct aerea cassis. 
 Casside cinge caput : capiuntur cassibus apri. 
 Cedo facit cessi ; cecidi cado ; ccedo cecldi. 
 Clava ferit : claims firmat ; clavisque recludit. 
 Fert ancilla cdlum ; penetrat res humida colum. 
 Rusticus arva culit, sed colat turbida vina. 
 Cominus ense feris; jacta cadis eminus hasta. 
 Ut placeas comiti, mores comes indue comes. 
 Comoedi scenam, comedones quaerite ccenam. 
 Consule doctores ; sic tu tibi consulis ipsi. 
 Bellandi cupido nocuit sua saepe cupido. 
 Carmina dicuntur. Domino dum templa dicanhtr. 
 Solvere diffidit, nodum qui diffidit ense. 
 Uxorem duett vir ; nubit sponsa marito. 
 Educat hie catulos, ut mox educat in a^ros. 
 Si tibi non est ces, es inops, et pinguia non es. 
 Fallit saepe /return placido nimis aequore /return. 
 Fructus arboribus, /ruges nascuntur in agris. 
 Sol nubes /ugat, et/ugit irreparabile tempus. 
 Ales hirundo volat ; nat hirudo ; vernat arundo. 
 Per quod quis peccat, per idem mox plectitur idem* 
 Difficilis labor est, cujus sub pond ere labor. 
 Frons pueri est levis, levis autem lingua puellae. 
 In silvis lepores, in verbis quaere lepores. 
 Non licet asse mihi, qui me non asse licetur. 
 Mdlo ego mala mea bona quam mala frangere iniila» 
 Merx venity mercesque venit quaesita labore. 
 Mulcet amante nianu, dum mulget Sylvia vaccaiu- 
 
. COMPENDIUM. 137 
 
 Carus eris Domino, miserls si miseris aurum. 
 Nitere, parve puer, cupies quicumque nitere. 
 Oblita quse fuco rubet, est obllta deeovi. 
 Occidit ille dolo turpi, quern occidit amicus. 
 Opperior Caium qui pullo operitur amictu. 
 Os (oris) mandat, sed os (ossis) manditur ore. 
 Uxoris par ere et pdrere, pdrare mariti e?t. 
 Pdrentes pueri faciunt gaudere pdrentes. 
 Ni pendere voles, non debita pendere noles. 
 Lude pild : pllum torquetur : pita columna est. 
 Pro reti et regione pldga est ; pro verbere pldga. 
 Sunt cives urbis populus ; est populus arbor. 
 Si vitare potes, ne plus duo pocula potes. 
 Prora prior, puppis pars postera, et ima carina. 
 Trlbula grana terunt ; tribuli nocuere novali. 
 Spondet vas (yadis), at vas (vasis) continet escam. 
 Vas caput, at nummos tantum prces praestat amitife. 
 Si transire velis maris undas, utere velis. 
 
 ELEGORUM EXEMPLA 
 
 (qui et versus memoriales sunt). 
 
 Fide, sed ante vide : qui fidit, nee bene vidit, 
 
 Fallitur : ipse vide ne capi&re fide. 
 For/ice sartores, tonsores forpice gaudent ; 
 
 At faber ignitum forcipe prensat opus. 
 Consortes fortuna eadem, socios labor idem, 
 
 Unum collegas efficit officium : 
 A*"- caros faciunt schola, ludus, mensa, sodales . 
 
 Sulcu& agri lira est : dat lyra tacta modos. 
 Ne sit securus, qui non est tutus ab hoste ; 
 
 Ad flumen ripas, ad mare littus habes. 
 Sunt aetate series ; veteres vixere priores : 
 
 Quod non est simulo dissimuloque quod est. 
 Ungula conculcat ; lacerat, tenet, arripit unguis ; 
 
 Ulva tenax stagno nascitur, alga mari. 
 Vallamus proprie castra, at sepimus ovile, 
 
 Hasta teres dici, sphaera rotunda potest. 
 Quod scriptum est dele, sed flammam exstingue lucernas ; 
 
 Lingua cibum gustat, qui bene cunque sapit. 
 Est in carne cutis, detracta e corpore pellis ; 
 
 Tergum pandit homo ; bellua tergus habet. 
 Pistor habet furnum ; fornace hypocausta calescunt : 
 
 Hsec nota Grammatici non mihi nota fuit. 
 Anne novi quid habes ? Alium pete : nil ego novi. 
 
 Quod minime refert garrulus ille refert. 
 Si qua forte sedes, atque est tibi commoda sede*> 
 
 ilia sede sede; fors nova tuta parum est. 
 
TRANSLATIONS 
 
 or THE 
 
 LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 §17. 
 
 Poema, a poem, n. 
 
 Mare, a sea, n. 
 
 Leo, a lion, m. 
 
 Natio, a nation, f. 
 
 Caro, flesh, f. 
 
 Ordo, order, m. 
 
 Virgo, a virgin, f. 
 
 Homo, a man, c. 
 
 Nemo, no man, c. 
 
 Turbo, a whirlwind, m. 
 
 Ligo, a spade, m. 
 
 Maeedo, a Macedonian, m. 
 
 Lac, milk, n. Sol, the sun, m. 
 
 Mel, honey, n. Fel, gall, n. 
 
 Ren, fAe kidney, m. 
 
 Sindon, ^/me /men, f. 
 
 Halcyon, a kingfisher, f. 
 
 Lumen, light, n. 
 
 Pecten, a com6, m. 
 
 Calcar, a spur, n. 
 
 Jubar, a sunbeam, n. 
 
 Par, a pair, n. Far, meu/, n. 
 
 Career, a prison, m. 
 
 Ver, spring, n. 
 
 Pater, a father, m. 
 
 Imber, a shower, m. 
 
 Itgr, a journey, n. 
 
 LatSr, a oncA, m. 
 
 Honor, honour, m. 
 
 Arbor, a free, f. 
 
 iEquor, a smooth surface (s°a), n. 
 
 Mann or, marble (sea), n. 
 
 Cor, the heart, n. 
 
 FulgQr, lightning, n. 
 
 Kbtir, toorjr, n. 
 
 leciir, the Utxct, XL 
 
 .'Etas, age, f. 
 
 Vas, a vessel, t*, 
 
 Vas, a surety, m. 
 
 Mas, a wa/e, m. 
 
 As, a pound, m. 
 
 Gigas, a giant, m. 
 
 Elephas, an elephant, m. 
 
 Adamas, adamant, m. 
 
 Nubes, a c/onc/, f. 
 
 Miles, a soldier, c. 
 
 Hospes, a Aoa£, or guest, c. 
 
 Satelles, a body-guard, c 
 
 Merges, a sheaf, f. 
 
 Seges, standing corn, f. 
 
 Interpres, an interpreter, c. 
 
 Teges, a ?na£, f. Quies, resf. £ 
 
 Obses, a hostage, c. 
 
 Prase's, a president, c. 
 
 Pes, a foot, m. Merces, Air«i, t 
 
 Heres, an heir, c. 
 
 iEs, copper, n. 
 
 Prass, a surety, m. 
 
 Avis, a 6z>rf, f. 
 
 Amnis, a river, m. 
 
 Lapis, a stone, m. 
 
 Cassis, a helmet, f. 
 
 Tigris, a <t^er, c. 
 
 Cinis, ashes, m. 
 
 Pulvis, dust, m. Lis, rtn/fl, £ 
 
 Samnis, a Samnite, m. 
 
 Quiris, a Roman, m, 
 
 Dls, Pluto, m. 
 
 Sanguis, WooJ, m. 
 
 Gils, a dormouse, m. 
 
 Dos, a dowry, f 
 
 Cos, a whetstone, f. 
 
 Sacerdos, a priest, or priestess, a 
 
 Flos, a flower, m. 
 
TRANSLATIONS OF THE LATIN RULES, ETC. 
 
 139 
 
 Os. a mouthy n. 
 
 Custoa, a guardian, c. 
 
 Bos, an ox, c. 
 
 Os, a bone, n. 
 
 Virtus, virtue, f. 
 
 Servitus, slavery, £ 
 
 Juventus, youth, f. 
 
 Senectus, old age, f. 
 
 Sal us, safety, f. 
 
 Paliis, a marsh, f. 
 
 Incus, an anvil, f. 
 
 Peciis, a beast, f. 
 
 Tellus, earth, £ 
 
 Rvis, the country, n. 
 
 Mus, a mouse, m. 
 
 Grus, a crane, f. Sus, a swine, c. 
 
 Vulnus, a wound, n. 
 
 Tempus, time, n. 
 
 Pecus, cattle, n. 
 
 Laus, praise, f. 
 
 Fraus, deceit, £ Puis, pulse, f. 
 
 Frons, a 6rou>, f. 
 
 Pars, a part, f. Frons. a 7ea/, f. 
 
 Glans, an acorn, f. 
 
 Trabs, a beam, £ 
 
 Stirps, a trunk, £ 
 
 Hiems, winter, £ 
 
 Calebs, a bachelor, m. 
 
 Municeps, a burgess, £ 
 
 Princeps, a cfo'e/, c. 
 
 A uceps, a fowler, c. 
 
 Caput, a head, n. 
 
 Pax, peace, f. Fax, a torch, f. 
 
 Judex, a judge, c. 
 
 Vindex, a/i avenger, c. 
 
 Index, an informer, c. 
 
 Ilex, scarlet oak, f. 
 
 Carex, sedge, £ Vibex, a wea/, f. 
 
 Vervex, a wether, m. 
 
 Nex, rfea^A, f. Lex, £ait', £ 
 
 Grex, a flock, m. 
 
 Remex, a rower, m. 
 
 Senex, aw old person, c. 
 
 Supellex, furniture, f. 
 
 Cornix, a crow, f. 
 
 Calix, a cup, m. 
 
 Fornix, aw arch, m. 
 
 Strix, a screech owl, i. 
 
 Nix, snow, £ Vox, « voice, f 
 
 Nox, night, £ 
 
 Nux, a walnut-tree, f. 
 
 Lux, 7^/jf, f. 
 
 Conjux, a spouse, c. 
 
 Phryx, a Phrygian, m 
 
 Lynx, a /t/wx, in 
 
 Arx, a citadel, £ 
 
 § 21. (Dant) The following nouns make (im pro em) im 
 instead of em (Accusativo) in the Accusative case ; (i pro e) 
 and i instead of e (in Ablativo) in the Ablative: buris, a 
 ploughtail ; cucumis, a cucumber; amussis, a carpenter's 
 rule; ravis, hoarseness; sitis, thirst; vis, force ; (et) and 
 tussis, a cough ; (et) and (flumina) names of Rivers (qua? 
 claudit is) which end in is ; (ut) as Albis, the Elbe ; Liris, 
 the Garigliano ; Tiberis, the Tiber.* (Sumunt) The follow- 
 ing take (im vel em) either im or em (Accusativo) in the 
 Accusative case, (i vel e) and either i or e (in Ablativo) in 
 the Ablative : neptis, a grand-daughter ; febris, a fever ; 
 messis, a harvest; clavis, a key; puppis, a ship's stern; 
 pelvis, a pan ; restis, a rope ; navis, a ship ; securis, an 
 axe ; turris, a tower ; (adde his) add to these, sementis, 
 seed-time; (atque) and strigilis, a flesh-brush.^ 
 
 * Also some nouns of Greek origin in is ; as, Syrtis, Charybdis, poesis. 
 
 •f The following nouns sometimes have Abl. Sing, in i : amnis, anguis, 
 avis, civis, classis, finis, fustis, ignis, unguis, imber, supellex. Notica 
 ruri, in the country ; vesperi, at eventide 
 
140 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 (Neutra) Neuter Nouns (quae exeunt) which end (in a/, 
 ar, e,) in al, ar, and e, (gaudent) prefer (fingere) to form 
 (t Singularis Ablativi) i in the Ablative Singular, (ia Plu- 
 ralis Nominativi) and ia in the .Nominative Plural. (His 
 excepta sunt) From these are excepted (in ar) the following 
 in ar : baccar, a kind of plant ; nectar, nectar ; jubar, a 
 Sunbeam ; far, corn or meal, 
 
 (Quaa efferunt) Those which form {ium pro urn) ium 
 instead of um (Plurali Genitivo) in the Genitive case Plural 
 (sunt) are, 1. (i formantia Ablativo) Nouns forming i in the 
 Ablative Singular ; 2. (non crescentia Genitivo) Nouns not 
 increasing in the Genitive case ; 3. (pleraque) most Nouns 
 (in x vel s) ending in x or s (positis post consonantem) fol- 
 lowing a consonant*; 4. (cum aliis Monosyllabis) with othei- 
 Nouns of One Syllable ; mas, a male ; mus, a mouse ; nix, 
 snow ; nox, night ; os, gen. ossis, a bone; cos, a whetstone; 
 sal, salt ; sol, the sun ; cor, the heart ; pax, peace ; glis, a 
 dormouse ; lis, strife ; (et) and dos, a dowry, (His excipi- 
 enda sunt) From these must be excepted (quae urn libenter 
 efFerunt) the following, which prefer to form um : vates, a 
 prophet, prophetess, poet, or poetess ; senex, an old man ; 
 pater, a father ; panis, bread; (et) and accipiter, a hawk; 
 (et) and canis, a dog ; frater, a brother ; mater, a mother ; 
 juvenis, a youth; (et saepius) and generally apis, a bee; 
 volucris, a bird.\ 
 
 § 70. (Viri) Names of Men, (Populi) names of Peoples, 
 (et) and (Divi) names of Gods, (Venti) names of Winds, 
 (Menses) names of Months, (Montes) names of Mountains, 
 
 * Many nouns in ns either take or reject I in Gen. PL, as, parens, 
 parentium, or parentum. So all Present Participles. 
 
 Nouns in as atis, is itis, ax acis, ix, icis, often form Gen. PL in ium ; 
 as civitas, civitatium. 
 
 Several monosyllables and other noun? of this Declension fluctuate in 
 the formation of the Gen. PL, and the student must observe the usage 
 of writers. 
 
 ■)• All Adjectives following the 3d OccL form Ace Sing. Masc. in em. 
 Parisyllabic adjectives form Abl. Sing, in i; as, tristis, tristi ; impari- 
 syllables in i or e ; and of these, Participles and Comparatives prefer e ; 
 others i, except a few which take e ; as dives, pauper, sospes, superstes. 
 Adjectives of this Declension form Nom. PL Neut. in m, except the 
 Comparatives, and vetus, Vetera. And those which form Nom. in ia 
 form Gen. PL in mm, except celer, dives, inops, pauper, and some others. 
 Memor, uber, degener, have no Neut. PL, and form Gen. PL in .tin. 
 
LATIN RULES aND EXAMPLES. 141 
 
 (Rivi) names of Rivers, (sunt) are (Generis Masculini) of 
 the Masculine Gender. (Plan tee) Names of Plants, (Divae) 
 names of Goddesses, (Feminae) names of Women, (Terras) 
 names of Countries, (Urbes) names of Cities, (Insula) names 
 Of Islands, (sunt, are (Generis Feminini) of the Feminine 
 Gender. * (Yox indeelinabilis) Any undeclined Word (est) 
 is (Neutrius Generis) of the Neuter Gender. (Sunt) The 
 following are (Communis Generis) of the Common Gender : 
 civis, a citizen; hostis, an enemy ; juvenis, a young person ; 
 testis, a witness ; judex, a judge ; artifex, an artizan ; auctor, 
 an author ; exsul, an exile ; opifex, an artificer ; comes, a 
 companion ; heres, an heir ; hospes, a guest or host; dux, 
 a leader ; obses, a hostage ; interpres, an interpreter ; con - 
 jux, a husband or wife ; incola, an inhabitant ; sacerdos, a 
 priest or priestess ; vindex, an avenger ; adolescens, a young 
 man or woman ; infans, an infant ; index, an informer ; 
 parens, a parent ; praesul, a president ; par, a mate ; custos, 
 a guardian; municeps, a burgess; satelles, a body-guard ; 
 bos, an ox or cow ; miles, a soldier ; vates, a seer or poet ; 
 augur, a soothsayer; grus, a f>rane ; canis, a dog ; tigris, a 
 tiger ; serpens, a serpent : sus, a swin<> ; (jungimus) we add 
 dama, a deer; talpa, a rnole.\ 
 
 § 71. (^ et t) Words ending in a and e (sunt) are 
 (Feminina) Feminine ; (as et es) words ending in as and es 
 (sunt) are (Masculina) Masculine. 
 
 (Masculorum nomina in a) The names of Males ending in a 
 (sunt) are (Masculina) Masculine : (ut) as, nauta or navita, 
 a sailor ; verna, a slave born in his master's house ; (et) and 
 poeta, a poet ; scurra, a buffoon ; scriba, a notary ; (et) and 
 propheta, a prophet. 
 
 * Winds follow the Gender of ventus, months of mensis, mountains ol 
 mons, rivers of fluvius, plants of arbor. Some rivers are Fern., as Styx, 
 Lethe, Allia. Many names of Mountains are Fern., asOssa, (Eta, iEtna, 
 Ilhodope, Alpes, &c. ; some Neuter, as Soracte, Pel ion. Some names 
 of Plants are Masculine, as oleaster, a wild olive ; some Neuter, as siler, 
 a withy. Some names of Cities are Masculine, as Sulmo, Selinus ; and 
 those in ;', as Delphi, Veii ; some Neuter, as Tibur, Anxur, Tarentum, 
 Preneste. 
 
 f Those names of Animals which are found in only one gender are. 
 called Epiccena ; and the words mas or femina must be used when it is 
 necessary to distinguish the sex : as Masc. passer, a sparrow ; passer fe- 
 mina, a hen-sparrow; Fern, vulpes, a fox ; vulpes mas or mascula, a dog- 
 fax. 
 
142 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 § 72. {Us et er) The terminations us and er belong 
 (Masculinis) to Masculine Nouns ; {urn) the termination um 
 (tribuitur) is assigned (Neutris) to Neuter Nouns. 
 
 (In us) The following Nouns in us (Feminina sunt) are 
 Feminine : alvus, the belly ; arctus, the Bear constellation ; 
 carbasus, canvass ; colus, a distaff; humus, the ground ; me- 
 thodus, a method* Virus, poison ; pelagus, the sea; (Neutra) 
 are Neuter. Vulgus, the common people, (fere sit) may 
 generally be (Neutrum) Neuter : (subinde) now and then (fit 
 (Masculum) it is made Masculine. 
 
 § 73. (Masculis) Among Masculine words (inseritur) is 
 placed (quod claudit o, or, os, vel er) any Noun which ends 
 in o, or, os, or er ; (et) and (Nomen) any Noun (desinens in 
 es) ending in es, (si) if (flectit casus impares) it forms im- 
 parisyllabic cases [that is, if it increases in the Genitive 
 case Singular], 
 
 (Ula) Those Nouns (quae desinunt in do et go) which 
 end in do and go (Feminina sunt) are Feminine ; (sed) but 
 (manent) the following remain (Masculina) Masculine : cardo, 
 a hinge ; ligo, a spade ; ordo, order ; (atque) and margo, a 
 margin, 
 
 (In io) Nouns in io (sunt) are (Feminina) Feminine : 
 (ilia) those (tantum) only (Masculina) are Masculine, (quae) 
 which (vel spectabis) you may either see (oculis) with your 
 eyes (vel tu tractabis) or you may touch (manibus) with your 
 hands, f 
 
 Caro, gen. c&rms, flesh (mavult) prefers (addere se) to be 
 added (Femininis) to Nouns feminine. 
 
 (Pauca in or) A few Nouns in or (sunt Neutra) are 
 Neuter : aequor, the level of the sea or of a plain ; ador, 
 parched corn ; marmor, marble, or the smooth sea ; cor, the 
 heart. Arbor, a tree, (est Femininum) is Feminine. 
 
 Cos, a whetstone, (et) and dos, a dowry, (sunt Feminina) 
 are Feminine: (utrumque os) the two words, os ossis, a 
 bone ; and os oris, a mouth ; (Neutra) are Neuter, i 
 
 (Multa in er) Many Nouns in er (sunt) are (Neutra) 
 Neuter : verber, a stripe ; siler, a withy ; acer, a maple ; 
 ver, spring ; tuber, a wen ; uber, a teat ; (et) and cadaver, 
 
 * Also, vannus, a winnowing -fan, is fem. 
 
 f As papilio, a butterfly ; scipio, a staff. Numerals in io are masc 
 ■s ternio, senio. 
 
 % The Greek words chaos, epos, melos, are Neuter. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 143 
 
 a carcass; piper, pepper ; iter, a journey ; (et)and papave*, 
 a poppy, 
 
 (JEs), brass or copper^ (est neutrum) is neuter ; (sex in es) 
 six Nouns in es (quae) which (flectunt casus impares) form 
 imparisyllabie cases (sunt) are (Feminina) Feminine : compes, 
 a fetter ; teges, a matj merces, reward, hire; merges, a 
 cornsheaf ; quies, rest ; seges, standing corn.* 
 
 § 74. (Inseras Femininis) You must place among Femi 
 nine words (quae claudunt is, x, aus, et as) those which end 
 in is, x, aus, and as, (s cum consonante nexa) in s imme- 
 diately following a consonant, (es aequaliter inflexa) and es 
 forming parisyllabic cases [that is, not increasing in the 
 Genitive case Singular]. 
 
 (Multa) Many Nouns (quae claudit is) which end in is 
 (sunt) are (Masculini Generis) of the Masculine Gender : 
 amnis, a river; axis, an axle ; callis, a path ; collis, a hill; 
 caulis, a stalk; cucumis, a cucumber; (et) and follis, o 
 leathern bag or bellows ; fascis, a bundle ; funis, a rope , 
 fustis, a cudgel; finis, an end or boundary; ignis, fire; 
 orbis, a circle ; (atque) and crinis, hair ; panis, bread , 
 piscis, a fish ; postis, a doorpost; ensis, a sword; sentis. 
 a bramble ; corbis, a basket ; torquis, a chain ; mensis, a 
 month; torris, a firebrand ; unguis, a nail or talon; (et) 
 and canalis, a conduit ; vectis, a lever ; vermis, a worm ; (et J 
 and sodalis, an intimate companion ; cassis, a net ; cinis, 
 ashes ; glis, a dormouse ; (et) and anguis, a snake ; lapis, a 
 stone ; pulvis, dust ; (atque^ and sanguis, blood, f 
 
 (Pleraque) Most Nouns (quae claudit ex) which end in x 
 ^Masculina sunt) are Masculine, (ut) asgrex, a flock; (sed) 
 but (manent) the following remain (Feminina) Feminine ; 
 nex, death ; supellex, furniture ; ilex, the scarlet oak ; carex, 
 sedge; lex, a law. If. 
 
 (In ix) The following in ix (Masculina sunt) are Mascu- 
 line : fornix, an arch or vault ; phoenix, the fabulous bird 
 so called; (et) and calix, a cup.§ 
 
 (In as) The following words in as (Masculina sunt) are 
 
 * Ales, a bird, is Common. 
 
 f Anguis, callis, corbis, cinis, pulvis, torqiis, are sometimes Feminine. 
 Casses, nets, is Masculine ; cassis, idis, helmet, Feminine. 
 
 { Faex, forfex, forpex, vibex, are Feminine. Cortex, imbrex , obex, 
 pumex, rumex, silex, are sometimes Feminine. 
 
 § Bombyx, onyx, are Masculine ; also the parts of the As in i, a- 
 quincunx. 
 
144 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 Masculine : vas, vadis, a personal surety ; gigas, a giant ; 
 elephas, an elephant ; as, assis, a Roman coin and weight ; 
 mas, a male ; (et) and adamas, adamant ; (Neutra) the fol- 
 lowing are Neuter ; vas, vasis, a vessel ; nefas, si?i ; fas, right. 
 
 ( Adde) Add (Masculinis) to Masculine words : mons, a 
 mountain ; fons, a fountain ; (et) and torrens, a torrent ; 
 gryps, a griffin ; (et) and pons, a bridge ; rudens, a cable ; 
 hydrops, dropsy; dens, a tooth; (et) and bidens, a two- 
 pronged fork ; oriens, the east ; occidens, the west ; (et) and 
 tridens, a trident* 
 
 (In *s) The following in es (Masculina sunt) are Mascu- 
 line ; verres, a boar-pig ; (et) and acinaces, a scimitar. 
 
 § 75. (Neutra claudunt) Neuter words of the 3d declen- 
 sion end in a (et) and e, ar, ur, us, c, I, n, (et) and t. 
 
 (In ur) The following words in ur (Masculina sunt) are 
 Masculine : furfur, bran ; turtur, a turtle-dove ; vultur, a 
 vulture ; fur, a thief 
 
 (In us) The following in us (Masculina sunt) are Mascu 
 line : lepus, Gen. leporis, a hare ; (et) and mus, a mouse. 
 
 (In us) The following in us (Feminina sunt) are Femi- 
 nine: virtus, virtue; (atque) and servitus, slavery ; juven- 
 tus, youth; incus, an anvil; (atque) and palus, a marsh; 
 senectus, old age ; tellus, earth; (atque) and salus, health; 
 (quibus u) in which u (manet longa) remains long (in transitu 
 Genitivi) in passing to the Genitive case. 
 
 (Et) Also pecus, Gen. pecudis, a beast, (est) is (Feminini 
 Generis) of the Feminine Gender. 
 
 (In I) The following in / (Mascula sunt) ar3 Masculine : 
 mugil, a sea-mullet; consul, a consul; sal, salt; sol, the 
 sun ; (atque) and pugil, a pugilist. 
 
 (Masculina sunt) The following are Masculine: ren, a 
 kidney ; splen, the spleen ; pecten, a comb ; delphin, a dol- 
 phin ; attagen, a woodcock. 
 
 (In on) The following in on (Feminina sunt) are Femi- 
 nine : Gorgon, a Gorgon ; sindon, muslin ; halcyon, a king- 
 fisher. 
 
 § 76. (In Quarta) In the Fourth Declension (tribuimus 
 us) we assign the termination us (Masculis) to Nouns Mas- 
 culine ; (Neutris u) the termination u to Nouns Neuter. 
 
 (Quartae in us) The following of the Fourth Declension in 
 us (Feminina sunt) are Feminine : domus, a house ; porticua, 
 
 * The parts of the As in ns are Masculine ; as, triens, quadrans. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 145 
 
 a porch ; acus, a needle ; Idus, the Ides in a Roman month ; 
 (atque) and manus, a hand ; tribus, a tribe ; nurus, a daugh- 
 ter-in-law ; socrus, a mother-in-law ; anus, an old woman, 
 
 § 77. (Inseres Femininis) You will place anion » Femi- 
 nine words (Nomina Quintae) Nouns of the Fifth Declension 
 (in es) ending in es. 
 
 • Dies, a day, (est) is (in Singulo) in the Singular Number 
 (mas) Masculine (vel) or (Femininum) Feminine ; (in Plurali 
 Numero) in the Plural Number (semper) always (Masculi- 
 num) Masculine. 
 
 § 78. (Singularis Numerus) The Singular Number 
 (deest) is wanting (multis Nominibus) to many Nouns : (ut) 
 as, manes, the spirits of the dead ; loculi, a purse ; penates, 
 household deities; cunse, a cradle; thermae, warm baths; 
 nugae, trifles ; grates, thanks ; arma, arms ; viscera, bowels ; 
 magalia, cottages ; (cum deum Festis) with Festivals of the 
 gods, (ut) as, Floralia, the festival of Flora.* 
 
 * The following is a further list of Substantives wanting the Singular 
 Number: — 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Mince, threats. 
 Minutiae, details. 
 
 Angustiae, straits. 
 Argutiae, refinements. 
 Bigae, a chariot and pair. 
 Clitel las, panniers. 
 Deliciae, deliqht, daintiness. 
 Divitiae, riches. 
 Epulae, a feast. 
 Excubiae, a night watch, 
 Exequiae, a funeral. 
 Exuviae, spoils. 
 Facetiae, pleasantries, 
 Feriae, a holiday. 
 Habenae, reins. 
 Induciae, a truce. 
 Inferiae, offerings to the dead. 
 Insidiae, an ambush. 
 Lapidicinae, a stone quarry. 
 
 Nundinae, market-day. 
 Nuptiae, a bridal. 
 Phalerae, horse-trappings. 
 Prestigiae, jugglery. 
 Primitiae, first-fruits. 
 Quisquiliae, rubbish. 
 Reliquiae, remnants. 
 Salebrae, roughnesses. 
 Salinae, a salt- work. 
 Scalae, a staircase. 
 Scopse, a besom. 
 Tenebrae, darkness. 
 Tricae, intricacies, trifles. 
 Valvae, folding-doors. 
 Vindiciae, a claim, defence. 
 
 Also Calendae, the Calends ; Nonae, the Nones of a month ; Athenae. 
 Thebae, Syracusae, with other towns. 
 
 Can cell i, a lattice, 
 Cani, white hairs. 
 Codicilli, writing tablets. 
 Fasti, annals. 
 Fori, the hatches. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 (a) Masculine. 
 
 Inferi, the Gods below. 
 Liber i, children. 
 Posteri, posterity, 
 Superi, the Gods above. 
 
146 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 (Multa) Many Substantives (quae) which (carent Plnrali) 
 are destitute of a Plural Number (apparent) appear (lecti- 
 tantibus) to students. * 
 
 (Nonnulli Casus) Some Cases (absunt his) are wanting to 
 these Nouns : fas, right; frugis, fruit ; dapis, a feast; opis, 
 help ; vis, force ; (et) and (multa) many Nouns (praeter 
 hrec) besides these (apparent) appear, (quae) which (carent* 
 are destitute of (Casibus nonnullis) some Cases.f 
 
 (6) Neuter. 
 
 Lamenta, lamentations, 
 Munia, duties. 
 Prascordia, the midriff. 
 Tesqua, wild places. 
 
 Bellaria, dainties. 
 
 Crepundia, toys. 
 
 Cunabula, a cradle. 
 
 Exta, entrails. 
 
 J usta, funeral offerings. 
 
 Also names of People and Places, as Volsci, Delphi, Leuctra, &e 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 (a) Masculine and Feminine. 
 
 Fores, a door. 
 Lemures, goblins. 
 Majores, ancestors. 
 Minores, posterity. 
 Proceres, nobles. 
 
 Antes, the rows of vines. 
 
 Cervices, the neck (also sing, in 
 
 poetry). 
 Ccelites, the Gods above. 
 Fides, a lute (also sing, in poetry). 
 
 Also names of People, Places, &c, as Brigantes, Cyclades, &c 
 
 (6) Neuter. 
 Brevia, shallows. Mcenia, city walls. 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 Artus, limbs. Idus, the Ides. 
 
 * Among the many words which are not used in the Plural Number, 
 notice: — (1) Materialia: as, aurum, gold ; argentum, silver; lac, milk t 
 sanguis, blood. (2) Abstracta : as, letum, death; senectus, old age; 
 fames, h unger ; pietas, piety. (3) Collectiva : as, vulgus, the common 
 people ; supellex, furniture. (4) And the following : aer, the atmosphere ; 
 osther, the sky ; humus, the ground; pontus, pelagus, the sea; tellus, earth ; 
 arvurn. time ; ver, spring ; vesper, evening. 
 
 f Nouns defective in Case are numerous Those having only one case 
 in a Number are called Monoptota ; those having two, Diptota ; three, 
 Triptota, &c. 
 
 (1) Many Nouns have only the Nom. and Accus. in one or both 
 Numbers : — 
 
 (a) Greek Neuters in os in Sing, and Plur., as melos, mele. 
 
 (6) Fas, nefas, instar, nihil, necesse, opus (need), in Sing, only, having 
 no Plur. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. H7 
 
 (Quae efferunt) Those which form (Numerum Pluralem) 
 the Plural Number (in a vel i) in a or i (sunt) are : frenum, 
 a bit ; carbasus, canvas; (et) and locus, a place* ; rastrum, 
 a rake; sibilus, a hiss; (et) and jocus, a jest\ ; Tartarus, 
 hell, (fit) becomes (in Plurali) in the Plural Number Tartara 5 
 ( et) and coelum, heaven, coeli. 
 
 (Quaedam) Some Substantives (abundant Casibus) are 
 
 (c) Rura, mella, farra, tura, murmura, metus, situs, spes, &c, in Plur., 
 which form Sing, fully. 
 
 (2) Many Verbals of the Fourth Decl. are used in Dat. Sing, or 
 Abl. Sing, only ; as, Dat. despicatui, derisui, ostentui, &c ; Abl. injussu, 
 rogatu, permissu, promptu, procinctu, natu, &c. 
 
 (3) Various words are used in single Cases with an adverbial force ; as, 
 Abl. noctu, gratis, ingratiis, fortuitu, &c. : Accus. infitias (ire), to deny ; 
 (ad) incitas (redigere), to reduce to extremity; venum (tradere), to offer 
 for sale ,• suppetias (ferre), to lend succours : Gen. dicis (causa), for form' $ 
 sake ; nauci (facere), to hold cheap, &c. 
 
 (4) Observe especially the following Defectives: — 
 
 (Ambages, a circuit) has Abl. Sing, and full Plur. 
 
 Astus, cunning, Nom. and Abl. Sing-, Nom. and Ace. Plur. 
 
 (Cassis, a net), Ace. Abl. Sing, (both rare), full Plur. 
 
 (Compes, a fetter), Abl. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 ( Daps, a feast), has all but Nom. Sing., full Plur 
 
 ( Ditio, sway), has all but Nom. Sing., no Plur. 
 
 (Faux, a jaw), Abl. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 Fors, chance, Nom. Abl. Sing., no Plur. 
 
 (Frux, fruit), has all but Nom. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 Grates, thanks, Nom. Ace. Plur. 
 
 Inquies, restlessness, Nom. Sing. 
 
 (Juger, an acre), Abl. Sing., Dat. Abl. Plur. ; other forms from ju« 
 gerum, i. 
 
 Mane, morning, Nom. Ace. Abl. Sing., no Plur. 
 
 Nemo, nobody, Gen. nullius, Dat. nemini, Ace. oeminem, Abl 
 nullo. 
 
 (Obex, a bolt), Abl. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 (Ops, help), Gen. Ace. Abl. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 Pondo, pounds, indeclin. Plur. 
 
 ( Prex, prayer), Abl. Sing., full Plur. 
 
 ( Repetundae, sc. pecuniae, extortion), Gen. Abl. Plur. 
 
 ( Spons, inclination), Abl. Sing. 
 
 ( Verber, a stripe), Gen. Abl. Sing., full Tlur. 
 
 Gen. vicis, Ace. vicem, Abl. vice, change, no Nom. S., full Plur. 
 
 Vis, force, Nom. Ace. Abl. Sing., full Plur., vires, virium, &c. 
 
 Frugi, the old Dat. of frux, is used Adjectively ; as, homo fruglf ar 
 honest man. So nequam, worthless, is of all cases. 
 
 * Loca, spots; loci, spots or places in books, topics, 
 f Ostrea, an oyster ; PI. ostreae and ostrea 
 
148 
 
 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 redundant in Cases: (ut) as, domus, a house; laurus, a 
 laurel; CEdipus, CEdipus.^ 
 
 * Declension of Domus : — 
 
 Plural 
 
 domus. 
 
 dorauura or domorum. 
 
 domibus. 
 
 domus or domos. 
 
 domibus. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. Domus. 
 
 Gen. Domus. 
 
 Dat. Domui. 
 
 Ace. Domum. 
 
 Abl. Domu or domo. i 
 
 The Gen. Domi is used to signify at home ; as, domi me», at my home. 
 
 Laurus, cupressus, colus, ficus, pinus, follow the 2d Declension, but 
 
 also take from the 4th the Cases in us and u; CEdipus, Gen. CEdipodis 
 
 and (Edipi. There are many Substantives with a two-fold Declension; 
 
 as, juventa and juventus ; vespera and vesper, eri (which forms Abl. ves- 
 
 pero, vespere, or vesperi) ; duritia and durities, &c. Many Adjectives 
 
 have also double forms, as bijugus and bijugis. 
 
 Vas makes Gen. PI. vasorum, Dat. vasis. So anciliorum from ancile, 
 a shield. Greek Nouns in ma, Gen. tisj have Dat. PI. lis ; as, poema, 
 Dat. PI. poematis. 
 
 The following Substantives change their signification in the Plural 
 Number : — 
 
 Sing, 
 
 iEdes, a temple ; 
 
 Aqua, water ; 
 
 A ux ilium, help ; 
 
 Bonum, a good ; 
 
 Career, a prison ; 
 
 Castrum, a fort ; 
 
 Cera, wax ; 
 
 Comitium, the Assembly-place ; 
 
 Copia, plenty ; 
 
 Epulum, a sacred feast ; 
 
 Facultas, a faculty ; 
 
 Finis, an end ; 
 
 Fortuna, fortune ; 
 
 Gratia, favour ; 
 
 Hortus, a garden ; 
 
 Impedimentum, a hindrance; 
 
 Littera, a letter of the alphabet ; 
 
 Ludus, play ; 
 
 Lustrum, a term of five years ; 
 
 Natal is, a birth-day ; 
 
 Opera, exertion ; 
 
 Opis (Gen.), help ; 
 
 Pars, a portion ; 
 
 Rostrum, a beak -, 
 
 Sal, salt; 
 Tabula, a bvuid i 
 
 Plur. 
 
 sedes, a house. 
 
 aq use, medicinal springs. 
 
 auxilia, auxiliary forces , 
 
 bona, goods, effects. 
 
 carceres, a starting-place. i 
 
 castra, a camp 
 
 cerae, a waxen tablet 
 
 Comitia, the Assembly at Rome 
 
 copiae, forces. 
 
 epulce, a banquet. 
 
 facultates, means. 
 
 fines, boundaries. 
 
 fortunse, the gifts of fortune, a for- 
 tune. 
 
 gratia?, thanks. 
 
 horti, a pleasure-garden. 
 
 impedimenta, baggage. 
 
 litterse, an epistle, or literature. 
 
 ludi, public games. 
 
 lustra, lairs of wild beasts. 
 
 natal es, origin. 
 
 operae, workmen. 
 
 opes, power, wealth. 
 
 partes, a part in a play. 
 
 rostra, the pulpit for speaking in the 
 Roman forum (adorned with the 
 beaks of captured ships), 
 
 sales, wit. 
 
 tabulae, writing tablet*. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 149 
 
 § 79.* (Verborum prima conjugatio) the first conjuga- 
 tion of verbs, (cui o, as, are, terrainatio) the termination of 
 which is o, as, are, (fit avi in Perfecto) becomes in the Pre- 
 terperfect Tense avi ; (subjicit atum Supino) and makes its 
 Supine end in atum. 
 
 (Hinc excipienda sunt) From this rule must be excepted 
 (quae efferunt) verbs which form (ui itum) ui in the Preter- 
 perfect, and itum in the Supine. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 crepo, / utter a sound i 
 
 crepui, 
 
 crepituin. 
 
 cubo, I lie down; 
 
 cubui, 
 
 cubitum. 
 
 sono, /sound; 
 
 sonui, 
 
 sonitum. 
 
 domo, / tame ; 
 
 domui, 
 
 domitum. 
 
 veto, F forbid; 
 
 vetui, 
 
 vetitum. 
 
 tono, / thunder ; 
 
 tonui, 
 
 tonitum. 
 
 Seco, / cut ; 
 
 secui, 
 
 sectum. 
 
 frico, 1 rub ; 
 
 fricui, 
 
 frictum. 
 
 Juvo, I help ; 
 
 juvi, 
 
 jutum. 
 
 lavo, / wash ; 
 
 lavi, 
 
 lotum ; 
 
 (et vindicat) and it takes also lavatum. 
 Do, I give ; d&di, datum. 
 
 sto, I stand; steti, statum. 
 
 Mico, / glitter, (dat Perfectum micui) makes its Preterperfect 
 
 micui ; Plico, I fold ; (dat Perfectum plicui) makes its Preterperfect 
 
 plicui ; (Mico fert) mico takes (nullum supinum) no supine; 
 
 {atum dat vel itum Plico) Plico makes plicatum or plicitum. 
 
 § 80. (Verborum altera conjugatio) the second conjuga- 
 tion of Verbs, (cui eo, es, ere, terminatio) the termination of 
 which is eo, es, ere, (fit uiin Perfecto) becomes in the Preter- 
 perfect Tense ui, (subjicit itum Supino) and makes its Supine 
 end in itum. 
 
 (Hinc excipienda sunt) From this rule must be excepted 
 (quae efferunt) Verbs which form (evi, etum) evi in the Pre- 
 terperfect, and etum in the Supine ; (ut) as, 
 
 Present. Preterp. Supine, 
 
 neo, / spin ; nevi, netum. 
 
 deleo, / blot out ; delevi, deletum. 
 ( Adde his) Add to these : — 
 
 fleo, / weep ; flevi, fletum. 
 
 pleo, I Jill ; plevi, pletum. 
 
 oleo, I grow i olevi, oletum.j" 
 (cum Compositis) with their compounds. 
 
 * Translate et, atque, ac, and ; dat, facit, format, efficit, makes; bus- 
 sipit, vindicat, takes ; fit, becomes; stat, stands. 
 
 f Aboleo, Sup. abolitum : adoleo (or adolesco), Sup. adult tun* 
 
150 
 
 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 (His) In the following, (Perfectum) the Preterperfect 
 Tense (stat in di) stands in di ; (sum Supinum terminat) the 
 Supine ends in sum : 
 
 Present, 
 prandeo, I dine ; 
 sgdeo, I sit ; 
 
 Preterp. 
 prandi, 
 sedi, 
 
 Supine, 
 pransum, 
 sessum. 
 
 video, / see ; 
 
 vidi, 
 
 visum. 
 
 (Sed) But, 
 
 spondeo, I promise ; 
 tondeo, /shears 
 
 spopondi, 
 totondi, 
 
 sponsum. 
 tonsum. 
 
 mordeo, 7 bite ; 
 
 mSmordi, 
 
 morsum. 
 
 pendeo, I hang ; 
 
 pependi, 
 
 pensum. 
 
 (His) In the following (Perfectum) the Preterperfect 
 Tense (fit) is formed (in si) in si, (sum Supinum exigit) the 
 Supine requires sum : , 
 
 Present. 
 
 jubeo, I command ; 
 
 muiceo, / soothe ; 
 (Itidemque) and similarly, 
 
 mulgeo, I milk ; 
 
 tergeo, 7 wipe ; 
 
 ardeo, 7 burn ; 
 
 rideo, 7 laugh; 
 
 suadeo, 7 persuade ; 
 
 maneo, 7 remain ; 
 
 baereo, 7 stick ; 
 (Sic et) So also, 
 
 algeo, 7 am chill ; 
 
 fulgeo, 7 shine ; 
 (Item) also, 
 
 urgeo, I push ; 
 
 (Sed) But (his) in 
 wanting. 
 
 (Dant si et turn) These two make the Preterperfect in si, 
 and the supine in turn : 
 
 Preterp. 
 jussi, 
 mulsi, 
 
 Supine, 
 jussum. 
 mulsum. 
 
 mulsi, 
 tersi, 
 
 mulsum. 
 tersum. 
 
 arsi, 
 
 arsum. 
 
 risi, 
 
 risum. 
 
 suasi, 
 
 suasum. 
 
 mansi, 
 haesi, 
 
 mansum. 
 hsesum. 
 
 alsi, 
 fulsi, 
 
 
 
 these (Supinum) the Supine (deficit) is 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Indulgeo, I indulge; 
 
 indulsi, 
 
 indultum. 
 
 torqueo, 7 twist / 
 
 torsi, 
 
 tortum. 
 
 Sed (But), 
 
 
 
 Augeo, I increase; 
 
 auxi, 
 
 auctum. 
 
 frigeo, lam cold; 
 
 frixi, 
 
 
 
 lugeo, I mourn} ^ make ^. 
 luceo, 7 shine J v ' 
 
 (Sed) But (non generant) these three latter do not form (Su- 
 pinum) a Supine. 
 
 (Haec) The following (volunt) will have (vi suffici) vi to 
 be added (Perfecto) to the Preterperfect Tense, (turn Supino) 
 and turn to the Supine : — 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 151 
 
 Present 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine 
 
 Cilveo, I beware ; 
 
 cavi, 
 
 cautum 
 
 faveo, 1 favour ; 
 
 favi, 
 
 fa u turn. 
 
 foveo, / cherish ; 
 
 fovi, 
 
 fotum. 
 
 moveo, / move ; 
 
 movi, 
 
 motum. 
 
 voveo, / vow i 
 
 vovi, 
 
 votum. \ 
 
 (His) In the following (ui stat) ui stands (in Perfecto) in 
 the Preterperfect Tense, (turn Supinum terminat) turn is the 
 termination of the Supine : 
 
 Present, 
 doceo, / teach ; 
 
 Preterp. 
 docui, 
 
 Supine, 
 doctum. 
 
 inisceo, / mingle ; 
 
 miscui, 
 
 mistum. 
 
 sorbeo, / suck in ; 
 
 sorbui f, 
 
 sorptum 
 
 teneo, / hold ; 
 
 tenui, 
 
 tentum. 
 
 torreo, 1 roast ; 
 
 torrui, 
 
 tostum. 
 
 (His) In the following (Praeteritum) the Preterperfect 
 (scribitur) is written (Passive) Passively, (Prsesens) the Pre* 
 sent (Active) Actively : 
 
 Present Preterp. Supine. 
 
 audeo, / dare ; ausus sum. 
 
 ga u deo, I rejoice ; gavisus sum. 
 
 soleo, / am wont ; solitus sum. 
 
 § 81. (Verborum tertia conjugatio) the third conjugation 
 of Verbs, (cui o, is, ere, terminatio) the termination of which 
 is o, is, ere, (dat Perfectum) makes its Preterperfect Tense 
 (variae formae) of diverse form ; (turn vel sum) turn or sum 
 (stat) stands (Supino) in the Supine. 
 
 § 82. (Bo, po, habent) Bo and po have (psi additum 
 Perfecto) psi to end the Preterperfect, (ptum Supino) and 
 ptum the Supine : (ut) as, 
 
 Present, 
 nubo, / marry ; 
 
 Preterp. 
 nupsi, 
 
 Supine. 
 nuptum.J 
 
 (Tamen) But, 
 
 
 
 Present, 
 rumpo, / break ; 
 bibo, / drink ; 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 rupi, 
 
 bibi. 
 
 Supine, 
 ruptum. 
 bibitum. 
 
 strepo, / roar / 
 
 strepui, 
 
 strepitum. 
 
 (Sic declino co, go, ho, quo) I thus decline co,go, ho, quo ; 
 (xi Perfecto) xi in the Preterperfect ; (ctum Supino) ctum in 
 the Supine : (ut) as, 
 
 * Paveo, pavi ; ferveo, ferbui. 
 
 f Also sorpsi. 
 
 J Lambu. / lick, Iambi : cumbo, 1 lie down, cubui, cubitum. 
 
TRANSLATIONS OF TEE 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 (luco, Head; 
 
 duxi, 
 
 ductum. 
 
 sugo, I suck ; 
 
 suxi, 
 
 suctum. 
 
 rego, / rule ; 
 
 rexi, 
 
 rectum. 
 
 veho, / carry ; 
 
 vexi, 
 
 vectum 
 
 (^cojubet) Sco desires (vi subjici) vi to end (Perfecto) 
 Preterperfect, (turn Supino) and turn its Supine : (ut) as, 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 cresco, / grow ; 
 
 crevi, 
 
 cretum. 
 
 suesco, / am habituated ; 
 
 suevi, 
 
 suetum. 
 
 quiesco, / rest ; 
 
 quievi, 
 
 quietum. 
 
 nosco, / know ; 
 
 lovi, 
 
 notum. * 
 
 pasco, I feed; 
 
 pavi, 
 
 pastum. 
 
 compesco, I restrain! 
 
 compescui. 
 
 
 
 posco, I require ; 
 
 poposci. 
 
 
 
 disco. I learn ; 
 
 didici. 
 
 
 
 Ico, I strike ; 
 
 ici, 
 
 ictum. 
 
 vinco, / conquer ; 
 
 vlci, 
 
 victum. 
 
 linquo, I leave ; 
 
 llqui, 
 
 lictum. 
 
 Parco, / spare ; 
 
 peperci, f 
 
 parsum. 
 
 Spargo, / sprinkle ; 
 
 sparsi, 
 
 sparsum. 
 
 mergo, I dip ; 
 
 mersi, 
 
 mersum. 
 
 tergo, I wipe ; 
 
 tersi, 
 
 tersum. 
 
 Ago, I do; 
 
 egi, 
 
 actum. 
 
 frango, / break ; 
 
 fregi, 
 
 fractum. 
 
 tango, I touch ; 
 
 tetfgi, 
 
 tactum. 
 
 pango, I covenant ; 
 
 peplgi, 
 
 pactum ; 
 
 (sed Composta) but its Compounds make -pegi, -pactum. 
 
 p ungo, I prick ; 
 
 pupugi4 
 
 punctual. 
 
 jungo, I join ; 
 
 junxi, 
 
 junctum. 
 
 lego, / read or gather ; 
 
 legi, 
 
 lectum ; 
 
 (compositum) when 
 
 compounded (saepe lexi dat) it often forms 
 
 lexi.§ 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Figo, I fix; 
 
 fixi, 
 
 fixum. 
 
 fingo, I frame; 
 
 finxi, 
 
 fictum. 
 
 pingo, I paint ; 
 
 pinxi, 
 
 pictum. 
 
 stringo, 1 tie ; 
 
 strinxi, 
 
 strictum. 
 
 (Do jubet) Do requires (si suffici) si to be joined (Perfecto) 
 to its Preterperfect, (sum Supino) and sum to its Supine : 
 
 * Of its compounds, agnosco makes Sup. agnitum ; cognosco, cog- 
 nitum. 
 
 f Comparco, comparsi. 
 
 J Compounds of pungo make Preterp. punxl. 
 
 § Of the compounds of lego, / gather, diligo forms dilexi ; intelligo 
 inttllexi ; negligo, neglexi. The others form legi, as colligo collegi ; wo 
 do the compounds of lego, / read, as perlego, perlegi. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 153 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 la-do, / hurt ; 
 
 laesi, 
 
 lsesum. 
 
 (Verum) But, 
 
 
 
 cedo, I yield ; 
 
 cessi, 
 
 cessum. 
 
 (Sic) So, 
 
 
 
 illido, 7" beat on ; 
 
 illisi, 
 
 illisum. 
 
 divido, / divide ; 
 
 divisi, 
 
 divisum. 
 
 (Flecte) Form (vertendo) by changing {do in di) do into 
 di (quas exeunt) those which end (in ando, endo) in ando 
 endo. * 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 pendo, / weigh ; 
 
 pependi, 
 
 pensum. 
 
 tendo. / stretch ; 
 
 tetendi, 
 
 tensum. 
 
 (tamen) but, 
 
 
 
 findo, / cleave i 
 
 Hdi, 
 
 fissum. 
 
 icindo, / cut ; 
 
 scidi, 
 
 scissum, 
 
 fun do, / pnur ; 
 
 fudi, 
 
 fusum. 
 
 tundo, / hammer ; 
 
 tutudi, 
 
 tusum. 
 
 cudo, I fashion ; 
 
 cudi, 
 
 cusum. 
 
 cado, I fall ; 
 
 cecidi, 
 
 casum. 
 
 ca*do, I beat or kill; 
 
 cecldi, 
 
 caesum. 
 
 edo, I eat; 
 
 edi, 
 
 esum. 
 
 Abdo, 1 hide ; addo, / add; condo, I store up ; credo, / 
 trust ; obdo, I block up ; perdo, / lose ; reddo, / restore ; 
 edo, / utter ; prodo, i* betray ; trado, / deliver ; vendo, / 
 sell ; dedo, I give up ; (quae) which (composta sunt a do) are 
 compounded of do, / give ; {-didi 9 -ditum, efferunt) form 
 didi, -ditum : (ut) as, 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 edo, 
 
 edidi, 
 
 editum. 
 
 dedo, 
 
 dedidi, 
 
 deditum. 
 
 flecto, I bend; 
 
 flexi, 
 
 flexum. 
 
 necto, I twine; 
 
 nexi, 
 
 nexum. 
 
 pecto, / comb ; 
 
 pexif, 
 
 pexum. 
 
 peto, / seek ; 
 
 petivi, 
 
 petitum. 
 
 meto, / mow ; 
 
 messui, 
 
 messum. 
 
 mitto, / send ; 
 
 misi, 
 
 missum. 
 
 verto, / turn ; 
 
 verti, 
 
 versum. J 
 
 (Verbum) A verb (quod fit a sisto) which is formed from 
 sisto (sufficit -stiti Perfecto) joins to its Preterperfect -stiti. 
 
 § 83. {So, sivi, situm, fit) So makes sivi, situm ; (sic 
 formatur) thus is formed : — 
 
 • As scando, scandi, scansum ; defendo, defendi, defensum. 
 f Also, nexui, pexui. 
 j Sterto, / more, stertui. 
 
154 
 
 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 arcesso, / send for ; 
 
 arcessivi, 
 
 arcessitum. 
 
 lacesso, / provoke ; 
 
 lacessivi, 
 
 lacessitura. 
 
 viso, I visit ; 
 
 visi, 
 
 
 
 pinso, I pound; 
 
 pinsui, 
 
 pistum. * 
 
 § 84. Texo, / weave, (stat) stands (unura in xo) the 
 only verb in xo, (quod vindicat) which takes texui, textum. 
 
 § 85. Lo, lui, turn : (sic flectitur) thus is formed 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 Consulo, / consult i consului, 
 
 occulo, I hide ; occului, 
 (Sed) But, 
 
 coio, I cultivate ; colui, 
 
 molo, I grind ; molui, 
 
 Supine. 
 consultum. 
 occultum. 
 
 cultum. 
 molitura. 
 
 (A cello verba cellui) Verbs compounded from cello, 
 impel, make cellui: (sed) but (conjugabis) you will form, 
 
 Present, 
 percello, I strike ; 
 pello, / drive ; 
 vello, / pluck ; 
 fadlo, / deceive ; 
 psallo, / sing or play ; 
 sallo, / salt ; 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 perculi, 
 
 peptili, 
 
 velli and vulsi, 
 
 fefelli, 
 
 psalli, 
 
 Supine, 
 perculsum. 
 pulsum. 
 vulsum. 
 falsum. 
 
 sal sum. 
 
 Tollo, / raise, (formatum) formed in the Preterperfect 
 sustuli, (fit) becomes (in Supino) in the Supine sublatum. 
 (Mo, mux, mitum fit) mo forms mui> mitum ; (ut) as, 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 fremo, / bellow ; fremui, 
 
 gemo, I groan ; gemui, 
 
 tremo, / tremble ; tremui, 
 
 (Supino carens) Which has no supine. 
 
 como, / deck ; comsi, 
 
 promo, I prodttti} promsi, 
 
 (Sic flectuntur) So are formed, 
 
 sumo, I take; sumsi, 
 
 demo, I take away; demsi, 
 
 (Sed) But, 
 
 emo, / buy ; emi, 
 
 premo, I press ; pressi, 
 
 Supine, 
 fremitum. 
 gemitum. 
 
 comtum. 
 promtum. 
 
 sumtum. 
 demtum. 
 
 emtum. 
 pressum. 
 
 (Latini) Latin writers (saepe ponunt p) often interpose p 
 (inter met* vel I) between m and s or t (Sic fiunt) Thus 
 are formed sumpsi, dempsi, demptum, comptum, promptum, 
 sumptum, emptum, &c. 
 
 * Also pinsum. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 
 
 155 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Preterp. 
 
 
 Supine - 
 
 Cano, 1 sing; 
 
 
 cecini, 
 
 
 cantum ; 
 
 (composita) its compounds make ■ 
 
 ■cinui, -centum. 
 
 pono, I place ; 
 
 
 posui, 
 
 
 posituro* 
 
 gigno, 1 beget ; 
 
 
 genui, 
 
 
 genitum. 
 
 temno, / despise ; 
 
 
 temsi, or 
 
 tempsi, 
 
 tern turn. 
 
 sterno, I strew ; 
 
 
 stravi, 
 
 
 stratum. 
 
 sperno, / despise ; 
 
 
 sprevi, 
 
 
 spretum. 
 
 cerno, / discern ; 
 
 
 crevi, 
 
 
 cretum. 
 
 Jino, I anoint ; 
 
 
 levi, 
 
 
 l*tum. 
 
 si no, / allow ; 
 
 
 sivi, 
 
 
 sltum. 
 
 verro, / brush / 
 
 
 verri, 
 
 
 versum. 
 
 curro, I run ; 
 
 
 cucurri, 
 
 
 cursum. 
 
 quaero, 1 seek ; 
 
 
 quaesivi, 
 
 
 quassitum. 
 
 tero, / rub ; 
 
 
 trivi, 
 
 
 tritum. 
 
 uro, / burn ; 
 
 
 ussi, 
 
 
 ustum. 
 
 gero, / cany on ; 
 
 
 gessi, 
 
 
 gestum. 
 
 fero, / bear , 
 
 
 tuli, 
 
 
 latum. 
 
 sero, / sow, or plant 
 
 
 sevi, 
 
 
 satum. 
 
 Sero (dat) makes 
 
 serui, 
 
 sertum, (si stat) if it 
 
 stands (cum vi nee* 
 
 teridi) with the 
 
 meaning of joining. 
 
 
 86. 
 
 Facio, / make ; 
 
 
 feci, 
 
 
 factum. 
 
 jacio, / cast ; 
 
 
 jeci, 
 
 
 jactum. 
 
 (Dant a lacio) Compounds of 
 
 lacio, / lice ; make lexi, 
 
 (Et a specio) and compounds of 
 
 spexi, 
 
 specio, / spy ; 
 
 fodio, / dig ; 
 fugio, I fly; 
 capio, / take ; 
 rapio, I snatch ; 
 pario, / bring forth ; 
 cupio, 1 desire ; 
 quatio, I shake ; 
 
 fodi, 
 
 fugi, 
 
 oepi T> 
 
 rapui, 
 
 peperi, 
 
 cupivi, 
 
 lectum.* 
 
 spectum. 
 
 fossum. 
 
 fugitum. 
 
 captum. 
 
 raptum. 
 
 partum.f 
 
 cupitum. 
 
 quassum. 
 
 (Sed) But (in Compositis) in the Compounds (dat) it forms 
 
 § 87. (Uo format) Uo forms ui, utum: (ut) as, 
 
 Present, 
 tribuo, I afford; 
 
 Preterp. 
 tnbui, 
 
 Supine. 
 tributum.J 
 
 ( Vo inflectit) Vo forms vi and utum : (ut) as, 
 
 solvo, / loose, or pay ; 
 volvo, / roll ; 
 
 solvi, 
 volvi, 
 
 solutum. 
 
 volutum. 
 
 * As allicio, allexi : but elicio, elicui, elicitum. 
 
 j- Fut. Part, pariturus. 
 
 J ltuo, Sup. riitum ; Fut. Part, niiturus. 
 
156 
 
 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 (Tamen) but, 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Preterp 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Fluo, I flow; 
 
 fluxi, 
 
 fluxum. 
 
 struo, I build ; 
 
 struxi, 
 
 structum. 
 
 vivo, / live ; 
 
 vixi, 
 
 victum. 
 
 stinguo, I quench; 
 
 stinxi, 
 
 stinctum. 
 
 § 88. (Verborum quarta conjugatio) the fourth conjuga- 
 tion of Verbs, (cui io, is, ire, terminatio) the termination of 
 which is io, is, ire, (fit) becomes (in Perfecto) in the Preter- 
 perfect Tense ivi, (Supino itum sufficit) and makes its Su- 
 pine end in Itum. 
 
 Present. Preterp. Supine. 
 
 Sancio, / ratify ; sanxi, sanctum : 
 
 (nee respuit) nor does it reject sancivi, sancitum. 
 
 vincio, I bind; 
 
 vinxi, 
 
 vinctum 
 
 fulcio, I prop ; 
 
 fulsi, 
 
 fultum. 
 
 sarcio, 1 darn ; 
 
 sarsi, 
 
 sartum. 
 
 farcio, I stuff ; 
 
 farsi, 
 
 fartum. 
 
 amicio, I clothe; 
 
 arnicui, 
 
 amictura. 
 
 salio, / dance ; 
 
 salui or salii, 
 
 sal turn. 
 
 At (but) 
 
 
 
 singultio, I sob ; 
 
 singultivi, 
 
 singultum. 
 
 sepelio, / bury ; 
 
 sepelivi, 
 
 sepultum. 
 
 venio, / come ; 
 
 veni, 
 
 ventura, 
 
 veneo, / am soldf ; 
 
 venii, 
 
 _ 
 
 sepio, I fence in ; 
 
 sepsi. 
 
 septum. 
 
 aperio, / open ; 
 
 aperui, 
 
 apertum. 
 
 comperio, I find out ; 
 
 comperi, 
 
 compertum, 
 
 reperio, I find ; 
 
 repperi, 
 
 repertura. 
 
 haurio, / drain ; 
 
 hausi, 
 
 haustum. 
 
 sentio, I perceive ; 
 
 sensi, 
 
 sen sum. 
 
 § 89. (Flexeris) You must form (Deponentia) Deponent 
 Verbs (ex regulis) according to the rules (Activorum) of 
 Active Verbs : (nam) for (Praeteritum Passivum) the Pre- 
 terperfect Passive (est) is (Derivativum) a Derivative 
 (Supini) of the Supine. 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 (1.) Reor, / think ; ratus sum 
 
 misereor, I pity ; misertus sum.} 
 
 fateor, / confess ; fassus sum : 
 
 (flecte sis) form (-fessus in Compcsitis) -fessus in the Compounds. 
 
 (2.) Labor, I fall; lapsus sum. 
 
 utor, J use ; usus sum. 
 
 * Only known in its compounds distinguo, extinguo. 
 "f Veneo is from venuin-eo, as vendo from venum-do. 
 i Also miseritus sum, 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 157 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 loquor, / speak ; locutus sum. 
 
 9equor, I follow ; secutus sum. 
 
 nitor, / strive , nisus, or nixus, sum. 
 
 irascor, / am angry ; iratus sum. 
 
 queror, / complain ; questus sum. 
 
 gradior, / step ; gressus sum. 
 
 patior, / suffer ; passus sum : 
 
 (et) and (-pessus in Compositis) ~pessus in its Compounds 
 
 ulciscor, / avenge ; ultus sum. 
 
 apiscor, / acquire ; aptus sum. 
 (Sed) but 
 
 adipiscor, /acquire; adeptus sum. 
 
 proficiscor, / go ; profectus sum. 
 
 expergiscor, I awake ; experrectus sum. 
 
 obliviscor, I forget ; oblitus sum. 
 
 comminiscor, 1 imagine ; commentus sum. * 
 (Sed) but 
 
 nanciscor, I find ; nactus sum. 
 
 paciscor, / covenant ; pactus sum. 
 
 morior, I die ; mortuus sum.f 
 
 nascor, / am born ; natus sum. 
 
 orior, / arise ; ortus sum. J 
 
 (Queis Futura) The Future Participles of which last three Verbs 
 
 are moriturus, nasciturus, oriturus. 
 
 (Quarta?) of the fourth conjugation, 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 Metior, / measure , mensus sum. 
 
 ordior, / begin ; orsus sum. 
 At (but) 
 
 experior, I try ; expertus sum. 
 
 opperior, I wait for; oppertus sum. 
 
 § 90. (Flexeris) You must conjugate (Inceptiva) Incep- 
 tive Verbs (ducta a Verbis) derived from Verbs (ut Primi- 
 tiva) as their Primitives ; (sic) thus 
 
 Present. Preterp. 
 
 exardesco, I begin to blaze; exarsi (from ex, ardeo). 
 
 obsolesco, I grow out of date; obsolevi (from obs, oleo). 
 
 tremisco, / begin to tremble ; tremui (from tremo). 
 
 rescisco, / begin to know ; rescivi (from scio). 
 
 * Comminiscor, and reminiscor (which has no Supine), are Conr 
 pounds of an obsolete verb meniscor. 
 
 f Morior, Infin. mori, and sometimes moriri. 
 
 J Orior is partly declined after the 3d Conjugation, partly after the 
 4th. Pres. Orior, ore'ris, oritur, orimur, &c. But Infin. Oriri -, Imperf. 
 Conj. Orirer. 
 
 So Potior, / obtain. Pres. Potior, potiris and potens, potltur and 
 potltur, &c. Imperf. Subj. Potirer and poterer, potireris and potSreris, 
 &c. Preterp. Potitus sum. Infin. Potiri. 
 
158 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 {Ui terminus) Ui is the termination (Perfecto) to the 
 Preter perfect (factorum) of those formed (ex Nominibus) 
 from Nouns : (sic) thus, 
 
 Present. # Preterp. 
 
 evanesco, / vanish ; evanui (from e, vanus). 
 
 consanesco, I get well ; consanui (from cum, sanus). 
 
 (Plurima) Very many (carent Supinis) have no Supines ; 
 (multis) in many (Perfecta) Preterperfects (non apparent) do 
 not appear.* 
 
 (tiexeris) you must form (Impersonalia) Impersoxial 
 Verbs (ex regulis) according to the rules (Personalium) of 
 Personals. 
 
 Present. Preterp 
 
 pudet, it shames ; puduit.f 
 
 poenitet, it repents ; poenituit. 
 
 But, 
 
 miseret, it affects with pity; misertum est.f 
 
 libet, it pleases ; § libuit and libitum est. 
 
 ta?det, it wearies , pertaesum est and tanluit. 
 
 piget, it irks ; pigitum est and piguit.|| 
 
 (In operibus Latinis) in Latin works (apparent) ap- 
 pear (lectitantibus) to readers (multa Verba) many Verbs 
 
 • The following are the only Inceptive Verbs which have Supines : — 
 Abolesco, adolesco, obsolesco, exolesco, coalesco, congelasco, exar- 
 desco, concupisco,convalesco, indolesco, obdormisco, inveterasco, 
 scisco, revivisco. 
 The following have neither Supine nor Preterperfect : — 
 
 <3£gresco, arboresco, albesco, ditesco, dulcesco, grandesco, hebesco, 
 herbesco, ignesco, incurvesco, juvenesco, mitesco, mollesco, 
 pinguesco, plumesco, puerasco, silvesco, sterilesco, tenerasco, 
 fatisco, augesco. hisco, labasco, renidesco. 
 Most of the others have Preterperfects, but no Supines, 
 "f Or puditum est. 
 J Or miseritum est. 
 
 § Also written lubet. Its compound is collibet, collibuit, and collibi- 
 tum est. 
 
 || Add also licet, it is lawful, licuit and licitum est. 
 Pudet and licet have the Active Future Participles, puditurus, lici- 
 turus. Pudet, piget, pcenitet, have Gerunds and Passive Participles in 
 dus, pudendi, &c, pigendi, &c, poenitendi, &c. 
 
 Many Verbs have the 3d Person Singular used impersonally : as, de- 
 lectat and juvat, it delights ; constat, it is acknowledged ; praestat, it is 
 better ; restat, it remains ; apparet, it appears ; accidit, contingit, it hap- 
 pens ; sufficit, it is enough ; even it, it comes to pass ; expedit, it is expedient ; 
 tonat, it thunders / pluit, it rains ; a/^' numerous others. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 159 
 
 (quag carent Supinis) which have no Supines, (multa quae 
 Perfecto) and many which have no Preterperfect. * 
 
 § 91. (Converteris) You must change {a in e) a into e 
 (horum in Compositis) in the Compounds of the following 
 Verbs : arceo, / exclude ; carpo, / crop ; damno, / condemn ; 
 Jacto, I entice ; fatiscor, / am weary ; fallo, 1 deceive ; farcio, 
 / stuff; jacto, / toss or boast; gradior, / step ; patior, 1 
 suffer ; partior, / divide ; tracto, / treat ; pario, / bring 
 forth; patro, I perform \ (atque) and cando, I inflame ; 
 sacro, / devote ; spargo, / sprinkle ; (atque) and scando, 1 
 climb, f 
 
 (Converteris) You must change (a in i) a into i (horum 
 in Compositis) in the compounds of the following Verbs : 
 ago, / act ; cado, / fall ; cano, / sing ; frango, / break ; 
 habeo, I have ; lateo, I lie hid ; fateor, I confess ; pango, 1 
 
 * The Verbs which have no Supines are : — 
 
 The Compounds of nuo and gruo (as abnuo, injjruo) ; the Compounds 
 of cado (except occido); Neuter Verbs in -veo, as paveo ; Neuter Verbs in 
 -eo, -ui (except caleo, careo, doleo, jaceo, lateo, mereo, noceo, oleo, pareo, 
 placeo, taceo, valeo); also, algeo, timeo, urgeo, lugeo, fulgeo, frigeo, 
 turgeo, luceo, strideo, ango, clango, disco, posco, compesco, dego, lambo, 
 niico, refello, metuo, psallo, respuo, tremo, sapio, gestio, ineptio, and 
 some others. 
 
 The Verbs which have neither Preterperfect nor Supines, besides the 
 Inceptives, are : — 
 
 Desiderativa in -urio (except parturio, esurio) ; also, asgreo, flaveo, 
 caneo, hebeo, scateo, liveo, renideo, polleo, vegeo, humeo, aveo, lacteo, 
 moereo, ambigo, furo, ferio, labo, vergo, plecto, vado, reminiscor. diffiteor, 
 lingor, medeor, vescor, liquor, liquet, and some others 
 f Arceo : comp. coerceo, exerceo. 
 
 Carpo . . decerpo, excerpo, discerpo. 
 
 Damno . . condemno. 
 
 Lacto . . delecto, oblecto. 
 
 Fatiscor . . defetiscor. 
 
 Fallo . . refello. 
 
 Farcio . . confercio, differcio, infercio, refercio. 
 
 Jacto . . disjecto, objecto, &c. 
 
 Gradior . . aggredior, congredior, egredior, ingredior, praB- 
 gredior, progredior, trausgredior, digredior. 
 
 Patior . . perpetior. 
 
 Partior . . dispertior, impertior. 
 
 Tracto . . attrecto, contrecto, detrecto, obtrecto. 
 
 Patro . . impetro, perpetro. 
 
 Cando . . accendo, incendo, succendo. 
 
 Sacro . . consecro, desecro, exsecro, obsecro. 
 
 Spargo . adspergo, conspergo, dispergo, inspergo, respcrgo, 
 
 Soando . • adscendo, conscendo, descendo, transcendo. 
 
160 
 
 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 fasten ; salio, T dance or leap ; statuo, I decree ; (atque) and 
 tango, / touch ; capio, / take ; rapio, / snatch ; sapio, / am 
 wise; facio, I do ; jacio, / cast; lacio, / entice ; placeo, 1 
 please ; taceo, / am silent. * 
 
 (Excepta) The following are excepted : perago, I perform ; 
 perplaceo, I please thoroughly ; (et) and facio, I do, (mistunj 
 cum Adverbiis) compounded with Adverbs. 
 
 (Convertito) Change {a in u) a into u (ex) in Verbs 
 compounded of calco, / tread ; salto, / dance ; quatio, 1 
 &hake.\ 
 
 (Converteris) You must change (e in i\ e into i (horum in 
 
 * Ago : comp. abigo, adigo, exigo, transigo, ambigo. But cir- 
 
 cumago, perago, satago : (-egi, -actum). 
 Cado --. . accldo, concido, decido, excido, incido, occld< 
 
 procido : (-cidi, -casum). 
 Cano . • accino, concino, occino, praecino, recino. succino 
 
 (cinui, -centum). 
 Frango . . confringo, diflfringo, effringo, infringo, perfringo, 
 
 pra3fTingo, refiringo : (-fregi, -fractum). 
 Habeo . . adhibeo, exhibeo, inhibeo, perhibeo, prohibeo. But 
 
 posthabeo. 
 Lateo • . deliteo. 
 
 Fateor . confiteor, profiteor, diffiteor: (-fessus). 
 
 Pango . compingo, impingo, oppingo: (-pegi, -pactum). 
 
 But repango. 
 Salio . adsilio. So circumsilio, desilio, dissilio, exsilio, 
 
 insilio, praesilio, prosilio, resilio, subsilio, tran- 
 
 silio : (-silui or -silii, -sultum). 
 Statuo . . constituo, destituo, instituo, restituo, substituo. 
 Tango • . attingo, contingo, pertingo : (-tigi, -tactum). 
 Capio . • accipio, concipio, decipio, excipio, incipio, percipio 
 
 praecipio, recipio, suscipio: (-cepi, -ceptum). 
 Rapio • abripio, arripio, corripio, deripio, diripio, eripio, 
 
 praeripio, proripio, surripio : (-ripui, -reptum). 
 Sapio . . desipio, resipisco. 
 Facio • . afficio, conficio, deficio, efficio, inficio, perficio, 
 
 prasficio, proficio, reficio, sufficio : (-feci, -fecturo). 
 
 But benefacio, malefacio : (feci, factum). 
 Jacio . • abjicio, adjicio, conjicio, disjicio, ejicio, injicio, oh- 
 
 jicio, projicio, rejicio, subjicio, transjicio ; (-j-icif 
 
 jectum). 
 Lacio • . allicio, elicio, illicio, pellicio. 
 Placeo . • displiceo. But perplaceo, complaceo. 
 Taceo . . conticeo, reticeo. 
 f" Calco : comp. conculco, inculco, proculco. 
 Salto . . adsulto, exsulto, insulto, resulto. 
 Quatio . . decutio, discutio, excutio, incutio, percutio, recutio, 
 
 succutio : (-cussi, -cussum). 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 161 
 
 Compositis) in the Compounds of the following Verbs : egeo, 
 I want ; teneo, / hold ; (atque) and emo, I buy ; specio, / 
 tpy ; sedeo, / sit ; (atque) and premo, / press ; (adde) add 
 dedi, / gave ; (atque) and lego, / gather ; (adde) add steti, 
 I stood ; (atque) and rego, 1 rule* 
 
 (Sunt excepta) The following are excepted: relego, 1 
 read again ; perlego, / read through ; (et) and praelego, 1 
 read publicly, 
 
 (Si) If (mutato Simplici) the Simple Verb being changed 
 (Composti Praesens) the Present Tense of the Compound 
 Verb (sumsit i) has taken i, (sumet e) it will take e (in Per- 
 fecto) in the Preterperfect, (si) if (valet) it is able (fingered 
 to make the vowel (longam) long : (sic) thus, 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Preterp, 
 
 deficio, I fail ; 
 
 
 defeci. 
 
 projicio, I throw ; 
 
 
 projeci. 
 
 conspicio, I behold; 
 
 
 conspexi. 
 
 dirigo, I direct ; 
 
 
 direxi. 
 
 pergo (per-rego), / 
 
 proceed ; 
 
 perrexi. 
 
 surgo (sus-rego), / 
 
 rise ; 
 
 surrexi. 
 
 porrigo (pro- rego), 
 
 I stretch ; 
 
 porrexi. f 
 
 (Composta) The Compounds (a) fromqugero, I seek ; caedo, 
 I beat or kill; (et) and (a) from laedo, / hurt; (mutant) 
 change {ce in i) ce into i. f 
 
 * Egeo : comp. indigeo. 
 
 Teneo . . attineo, contineo, detineo, distineo, obtineo, per- 
 
 tineo, retineo, sustineo : (-tinui, -tentum). 
 
 Emo . . adimo, dirimo, eximo, interimo, perimo, redimo : 
 
 (-emi, -emtum). But coemo, demo (for de-imo). 
 
 Specio . . adspicio, conspicio, despicio, dispicio, inspicio, per 
 
 spicio, prospicio, respicio, suspicio: (-spexi, 
 
 -spectum). 
 
 Sedeo . assideo, consideo, desideo, dissideo, insideo, obsideo, 
 
 prsesidco, resideo : (-sedi, -sessum). 
 Premo . . comprimo, deprimo, exprimo, imprimo, opprimo, 
 perprimo, reprimo,supprimo : (-pressi, -pressum). 
 Lego, I\ . colligo, deligo, diligo, eligo, intelligo, negligo, se- 
 
 gather J ligo. The Compounds of Lego, / ready keep e. 
 
 Rego . . corrigo, dirigo, erigo, &c. : (rexi, -rectum), 
 
 f This rule applies only where the Simple Verb has e in the Stem- 
 syllable of the Preterperfect, as in the examples given. When the Stem- 
 vowel is not lengthened in the Preterperfect, i is kept, as continui : also 
 when the Stem-vowel of the Simple Preterperfect is not e, as illisi. 
 
 J Queero : comp. acquiro, conquiro, disquiro, exquiro, inquiro, per- 
 quiro. 
 Caedo . . accido, concido, decido, excido, incldo, occlfic, 
 prarcldo, recldo, succldo. 
 
 M 
 
162 TRANSLATIONS OF TlxSL 
 
 Plaudo, I applaud, (convertit) changes au in o) au into 
 o : claudo, I shut, (commutat) changes {au in u) au into u : 
 obedio, / obey, (solummodo) only (ex audio) compounded 
 from audio, I hear, (dat au in e) changes au into e.* 
 
 (Reduplicatio) The Reduplication (Simplicis)of the Simple 
 Verb (exibit) will disappear (a Compositis) from the Com- 
 pounds : (sic) thus (a) from pello, I drive away, pepuli, (fit) 
 comes im pello, / impel, impuli. 
 
 (Sed) But (Composta) the Compounds (a) from disco, 1 
 learn ; posco, / require ; do, 1 give ; (et) and (a) from sto, 
 / stand ; (servant) keep the Reduplication, f 
 
 § 92. (Praepositio cum) The Preposition cum (fit con-) 
 becomes con- (quando stat compositum) when it appears in 
 Composition. 
 
 Ambi, re, se, sus, (et) and dis (stant tantum) appear only 
 (in Compositis) in Compounds.! 
 
 (Praepositio) A Preposition (saspe mutat) often changes 
 (terminantem consonantem) its final consonant (sic) in such 
 a way (ut fiat) that it may become (similis) assimilated (con- 
 sonanti Simplicis) to the first consonant of the Simple Verb . 
 (ut) as, 
 
 ad-fero (fit) becomes affero. obpeto becomes oppeto 
 
 in-lino . . illino. 
 
 (Convertite) Change (n in m)n into m (ante b vel ante p) 
 before b or p: (ut) as, 
 
 con-bibo (fit) becomes combibo in-plico becomes implico. 
 
 (Alia aliae transferunt) Other Prepositions make other 
 changes (quae) which (longa sunt relatu) are long to recount. 
 
 Laedo . . allido, collldo, elldo, illicit). 
 
 (The 1 of these Compounds remains in the Preterperfect ; as, acquis! vi, 
 occTdi, elisi. ) 
 
 * Plaudo : comp. complodo, explodo, supplodo. But applaudo. 
 Claudo . . concludo, discludo, excludo, includo, intercludo, 
 
 occludo, praecludo, recludo (-clusi, -clusum). 
 f Disco : comp. addisco, condisco, dedisco, edisco ; Preterp. -didici. 
 Posco . . deposco, exposco, reposco ; Preterp. -poposci. 
 
 Sto . . adsto, consto, exsto, insto, praesto ; Preterp. -stlti : 
 
 circumsto, supersto ; Preterp. -steti. 
 % Ambi, around, about ; re, again, back ; se, apart ; dis, in different 
 jHirts or ways. Some grammarians think sus to be put for subs, under ; 
 others form it from susum, for sursum, up ; which is more suitable to the 
 sense of the words in which it is found, though the Participle sublatu*. 
 from sustuli, affords an argument for the first opinion. 
 
LVTIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 163 
 
 (Do) I give (hoc unum) this single thing (notandum) to be 
 remarked * : 
 
 ab-fero (fit) becomes aufero. ab-fugio becomes aufugio. 
 
 * The following are the changes of Prepositions in Composition : — - 
 
 ( 1 ) A, ab, abs, from. A, before m and v ; as, amitto, averto. Abs, 
 before c and t ; as, abscedo, absterreo : shortened into as before p, as 
 aspello, asporto. Ab, before other letters. But note, aufero, aufugio. 
 
 (2) Ad, to. Unchanged before vowels, and before h,j, m, v ; as, adeo, 
 adhibeo, adjungo, admiror, advoco. Becomes ac before qu; as, acquiro. 
 Assimilated before the other consonants ; as, accedo, attero : but may 
 remain unchanged before most of them; as, adfero or affero, adsumo or 
 assume 
 
 (3) Con, for cum, with. Becomes com- before 6, m, p; as, com- 
 bibo, commoveo, compoho. Assimilated before I, r ; as, colludo, 
 corrumpo. Becomes co before vowels and h ; as, coaiesco, cohasreo ; 
 except comedo. Unchanged before the other consonants ; as, concutio, 
 tonvoco. Observe cognosco. 
 
 (4) E, ex, out of. Ex, before vowels, and before c,p, q, 8, t; as, exeo, 
 excludo, expungo, exquiro, exsculpo, extraho. Assimilated before/; as, 
 efrundo. E before the other consonants ; as, educo, eniteo. 
 
 (5) In, in, into, towards, against, upon. Becomes im before b, m, p ; 
 as, imbibo, immitto, impello. Assimilated before I and r ; as, illudo, 
 irruo. Unchanged before other letters; as, ineo, incumbo. Observe 
 ignosco. 
 
 (6) Ob, over-against. Assimilated before c,f, g, p ; as, occurro, oflfero, 
 oggannio, oppono : unchanged before other letters. But note obsolesco, 
 ostendo. 
 
 (7) Sub, under (secretly). Assimilated before c, f, g, m, p, r ; as, 
 succumbo, sufficio, suggero, summoveo, suppono, surripio : but some- 
 times remains unchanged before these letters ; as, subrideo, subruo. Un- 
 changed before vowels and the other consonants ; as, subeo, subtraho. 
 
 (8) Trans, across, beyond. Becomes tra in a few Verbs; as, trado, 
 trano. Tran before s ; as, tran-scribo. Unchanged before other letters. 
 
 (9) Ambi, around, about. Becomes amb before vowels ; as, ambeo 
 Am before/?; as, amplector. An before c, q,f; as, anquiro, anfractus, 
 
 (10) Dis, di, in different parts or ways. Dis before c, p, q, s, t ; as, 
 discumbo, displiceo, disquiro, disseco, distraho. Assimilated before/; 
 as, differo. Before j sometimes dis ; as, disjicio : sometimes di ; as, 
 dijudico. Before other consonants, di ; as, dimoveo. But disrumpo and 
 dimmpo. 
 
 (11) Re, again, back. Unchanged before consonants; as, requiro. 
 Becomes red before vowels ; as, redarguo. Buttman considers red the 
 original form of this preposition (as also sed of se, prod of pro) ; whence 
 reddo for re-do ; re-cidit for red-cldit ; rettuli, reppuli, repperi, for red- 
 tuli, red-puli, red-peri. 
 
 (12) Ante, before ; circum, around j de,from, (down) ; inter, among, be- 
 tween ; per, through ; prae, before ,• pro, for, instead of (forward) ; post, 
 after .• praeter, beside ; subter, beneath ; super, above ; se, apart ; sus, up, are 
 unchanged in Composition. Except the following instances : anticipo, 
 circuit, intelligo, pellicio, pelluceo. pejero. Note prodeo and prodigo for 
 pro-eo and pro-ago. 
 
164 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 § 93. A. I. Adjectives, Participles, and Pronouno, agree with 
 their Substantives in-gender, number, and case : as, No friend will* 
 go to lost wealth. 
 
 The- Substantive is- understood by Ellipse*: as. Most shun toil 
 (Supply men.) 
 
 Neuter Adjectives perform the-office of- Substantives : as, Death 
 is last of-all things. 
 
 II. A-finite Verb agrees with its-Nominative-Case in-number 
 and person : as, All vices war against nature. 
 
 Sometimes an-Infinitive, or some Phrase, is-put for the-Nomina- 
 tive : as, To-lie is not mine, — How long life is going-to-be, is un- 
 certain. 
 
 The-Nominative of- Pronouns is-expressed seldom : as, We-lean 
 always towards the -forbidden, and we-desire things-denied. 
 
 Unless it-avail for- distinction or emphasis : as, / expelled kings ; 
 ye bring-in tyrants. 
 
 Impersonal- Verbs have not a-Nominative expressed : as, lt-irks 
 and earnestly repents himself. 
 
 The-Persons of-the-Verb sum (I am) often are-understood • as, 
 Nothing (is)-good except what (is)-honourable. 
 
 The-Infinitive sometimes is-put-after the-Nominative : as, Then 
 pious JEneas began-to-tear-off the-robe from-his-shoulders. 
 
 But the-Infinitive generally is-put-after the- Accusative, a-finite 
 Verb going-before : as, Men-report (hat-Homer was blind. 
 
 III. The-Relative agrees with its-antecedent f in-gender, num- 
 ber, and person, but in-case it-is-construed with its-own sentence * 
 as, That is the-pleasantest friendship, which resemblance of-characters 
 has- coupled. 
 
 B. A-Substantive, Singular in form but not in-meaning, often has 
 a- Verb, an-Adjective, or a-Relative, plural : as, Part load the-tables 
 with -viands. — The-Tegeatan youth come-up slow to-the- succour. 
 
 Two or more singular Nouns generally have an-Adjective, Verb, 
 or Relative, plural : as, Hannibal and Philopwmen were tuken-ojf 
 by-poison. 
 
 The-plural Verb agrees generally with the-Nominative of-the- 
 worthier Person : but the- Adjective or Relative with the-Noun of- 
 the-worthier Gender. 
 
 The-First Person is worthier than the-Second, the- Second thaD 
 the-Third : as, If thou and Tullia are-well t I and Cicero are-well. 
 
 In things having-life the-Masculine Gender is worthier than the- 
 Feminine : as, My (literally, to-me) father and mother are dead. 
 
 * Ellipsis (ellipse) is a Figure of Syntax which leaves out some word 
 or words belonging to the regular construction of the Sentence. 
 
 f The Antecedent of the Relative is that word or those words to which 
 the Relative is referred. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 165 
 
 But in things without-life, the-Adjective or Relative wili-bs 
 most-frequently in the-Neuter Gender : as, Riches, honour, glory, 
 are placed within your-view. (literally, eyes,) 
 
 Copulative Verbs*, sum (I-am) fio (I-become) videor (I-seem) 
 vocor (I-am-called), with the-like, whether of-a- Finite or Infinitive 
 Mood, have the-same case on-either-side : as, A-long syllable placed-' 
 after a-short, is-called Iambus. — I-am-acknowledged a-royal boy by 
 established tokens. — It-is-allowed you to-be happy ! 
 
 A- Verb, placed between two Nominatives, sometimes agrees 
 with the-latter alone : as, The-quarrels of -lovers are the-renewal 
 of-love. 
 
 A-Relative placed between two Substantives of-the-same thingf, 
 often agrees with the-lattei alone : as, Thebes, which is the-capital 
 of-Bosotia. 
 
 To-a- Substantive, Pronoun, and sometimes to- a- Sentence, 
 a-Substantive of-the-same thing J may be-put-in- Apposition in 
 the-same case : as, Riches, incentives of-evils, are-dug-out (of the 
 earth). — We consuls are-wanting. — Let-him-refiect (that) an-orator 
 is -being -formed, a-dijjicult matter. 
 
 When two Substantives of-different things come -together, one 
 is -put in the- Genitive- Case : as, Reclining under the-cover of-a- 
 beech-tree. 
 
 § 94. C. I. Verbs Transitive govern an-Accusative of-the- 
 nearer Object : as, Despise pleasures. — In-the-frst-place, worship 
 God. 
 
 Some Neuter and Passive Verbs admit an-Accusative of-their- 
 own operation §: as, He-serves a-hard slavery. — Claudius played 
 hazard. 
 
 Some Verbs, especially those of-asking and teaching, have a- 
 double Accusative : as, We-all demand of -thee peace. — Why now 
 should- 1 -teach thee letters, O-ass ? 
 
 Most of these- Verbs keep the-Accusative of-the-thing in the- 
 Passive Voice : as, She-delights to-be-taught Ionic movements. 
 
 The-Accusative of-respect in-the-Greek manner is-placed-after 
 Neuter and Passive Verbs as-well as Adjectives : as, He-quivers 
 with-his-ears and trembles in-his-limbs.—(She is) all dyed with- 
 redness in-her-tender cheeks. — They -are naked as-to-their arms. 
 
 * See § 101. 
 
 j That is, which are both used to define the same person or thing \ 
 as, Animal and hominem : Thebae and caput. 
 
 $ By a Substantive of the same thing is meant one which expresses 
 the same person or thing in another character or by another title, for the 
 purpose of definition or explanation. 
 
 § Called the Cognate Accusative 
 
166 TKANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 These Prepositions govern an-Accusative : Ante (before), apud 
 (at, with, among), ad (to, at), adversus (over-against, towards), cir- 
 curn (around), circa (around, about), citra, cis (on-the-near-side-of), 
 contra (against, over-against), inter (between, among), erga 
 (towards), extra (out-of), infra (beneath), intra (within), juxta 
 (near), ob (on- account -of, before), penes (in-the-power-of), pone 
 (behind), post (behind, after, since) prater (beside, beyond, 
 except), prope (near), propter (bn-account-Of, nigh), per (through, 
 by), secundum (after, along, according to), supra (above), versus 
 (towards), ultra (beyond), trans (across). To-these add super 
 (above, over), subter (beneath), and in (into, towards, to, upon, 
 against, &c), sub (under, about) if motion takes-place. 
 
 II. The-Vocative, the-Case of-one-called, is-governed by an- 
 Interjection either expressed or understood : as, Son, or, O Son. 
 
 The- Interjections en and ecce (lo!) govern the- Accusative and 
 the-Nominative ; O, ah, heu, hem, proh (alas), the Accusative, the- 
 Nominative, and the- Vocative : as, Lo a-wretched man! — Lo a-neio 
 disturbance and quarrel! — Alas pitiable boy! — Alas {for) human 
 emptiness! — Thc-honour of -gods and men forfend! — Holy Jupiter 
 forfend ! 
 
 Hex and vce (alas!) govern a-Dative : as, Alas me wretched! — 
 Woe-to-thee, pleader ! 
 
 III. Almost all Adjectives and Verbs, also Adverbs and Sub- 
 stantives, govern a-Dative of-the-remoter Object, for-the-sake of- 
 which something is or is-done : as, We-wish to-be rich not only for* 
 our selves. — For-me in-yon-place (there-is) neither sowing nor reap* 
 mg. — Numa chose virgins for- Vesta. — For-the-ciiy he-is a father, 
 and for-the-city a- husband. 
 
 Accordingly sum signifying possessively has a-Dative of-the-pos- 
 sessor: as, For there-is to-me (i. e. I have) a-f other at-home; there* 
 is (i. e. I have) a-cruel stepmother. 
 
 Very-many Adjectives, Adverbs, and Verbs govern a-Dative, 
 sometimes even Substantives, by which is-signified advantage, 
 communication, comparison, consecration, agreement, habit, help, 
 and fitness, kindness, nearness, pleasantness, affinity, delivery, 
 indulgence, demonstration, promise, trust, and narration, compli- 
 ance, command, and whatever (is) contrary to-these ; together with 
 nubo (I -marry), vaco (I-am-at-leisure-for) : other- instances will- 
 stand under the-First Rule : as, LeUhim-be serviceable to-his- 
 country, useful to-the-felds. — A-poet is bordering -on an-orator. — 
 A-multitude burdensome to peace, and hostile to-quiet rest. — 
 It-is proper-to-live agreeably to-nature. ^-He-lends a-patient ear 
 to- cultivation. — What he-gives to-another, he 'takes -from himself. — 
 (He) assured this to-me, and persuaded (me of it). — Fortune 
 guarantees safety to-us. — Philosophy heals minds. — We-favonr 
 thee. — I-am-wrath-with thee.—The-coruiueriug side pkwff-d the~ 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. lf>7 
 
 Oods, but the-conqnered (pleased) Cato. — Spare a-pious race. — 
 A snake appeared to- Sulla sacrificing. — O beautiful boy, trust not 
 too-much to-complexion. — Amassed money rules or serves each-man. 
 — Wilt-thou-combat even a-love which- has-pleased ? — Venus mar- 
 ried Vulcan. — I-give-my -leisure always to-philosophy . — (There is) 
 no trusting to-partners of -sovereignty. 
 
 Communis (common), similis (like), proprius (peculiar), par 
 (equal), and alienus (foreign), and more-Adjectives, sometimes 
 prefer a-Dative, sometimes a-Genitive : as, Middle-things are Hkest 
 to-true. — Thiukesl-lhou (that) the- Gods are like thyself f — Activity 
 of-mind is natural to-us. — To-speak ornamentally is the-property 
 of-an-orator. 
 
 Delecto (I-delight) ; juvo (I-help or please) ; jubeo (I-order) ; 
 rego (I-rule) ; Icedo (I-hurt) ; guberno (I-govern) ; are-joined to-an- 
 Aecusative contrary- to the-rule : as, The-camp pleases many. — Thou, 
 O- Roman, remember to-rule the-nations with-thy-sway. 
 
 Tempero and mnderor (I govern or restrain) hare a-Dative or 
 an- Accusative : as, 2'his-person restrains horses, who (will) not 
 restrain his-anger. 
 
 Verbs compounded with the- Adverbs bene (well), satis 
 (enough), male (ill), and with Prepositions, especially these, ad, 
 ante, ab, in, iider, de, sub, super, ob, con, post, and pra>, generally 
 govern a-Dative : as, I-satisfy the-rest always ; never myself (mihi 
 ipsi). — Sicily formerly was -contiguous to- Italy. — The-giants waged 
 war upon- the- Gods. — ( We) often put-under hens the-eggs of -ducks. 
 
 Many of these vary their-construction : as, The-Hrlretii surpass 
 the-remaining Gaids in-valour. — These faults exist in love. 
 
 The-Dative of-the- Agent follows Verbal-Adjectives in bilis, and 
 the -Gerundive in dus ; sometimes Perfect Participles, rarely Passive 
 Verbs ; as, He died lamented by -many good-men. — Chr ernes 
 remains, who is to-be- entreated by-me. — A-great citizen died and 
 dreaded by-Otho.—Here I am a-barbarian, because I-am-undemtood 
 not by-any-one. 
 
 Passive Verbs and Participles generally have an-Ablative of-the- 
 Agent with the-Preposition a or ab : as He-is-praised by these, he- 
 is-blumed by those. — The-death of-Crassus was bewailed by many. 
 
 The-Dative of-the-purpose is-added to-the-Verb sum. and many 
 others, either for a-Nominative or for an- Accusative : as, The-antis 
 for-a-pattem of -great toil. — I-have-lost the-kernel : he-has-left the- 
 shclls for -pawn. 
 
 Often a-double Dative is-admitted; as, The-greedy sea is a- 
 destruction to-sailors. 
 
 IV. The-Genitive of-the-possessor follows almost all Substan- 
 tives, likewise the-Verbs sum (I-am) ; facio (I-make) ; fio (I- 
 become) ; by the-Ellipse of- -Substantive ' as, The-propertiea of- 
 
168 TRANSLATIONS OP THE 
 
 individuals are the-riches of-the-st.te. — All-things which were thc- 
 womaris become the mans, — Scipio made Spain of- Roman do- 
 minion. 
 
 Est Impersonal is-put-before a- Genitive, if nature, token, office 
 or duty, is- understood : as, It-is (the-nature) of -any man to-err.— 
 It-is (the-ioken) qf-a-dishonest man to-deceive by-a-lie. — It-is (the* 
 duty) of-a-young-man to-reverence (his) elders (majores natu). 
 
 An-Ellipse of-other Nouns also happens before a-Genitive : as, 
 Hectors Andromache, (supply wife.) — Glaucus's Deiphobe. (supply 
 daughter,) — We-had-come to Vesta's, (supply temple.) — I-see this* 
 mans Byrrhia. (supply slave.) 
 
 The-Personal Genitive concealed in the-Possessive Pronoun takes 
 another Genitive agreeing-with itself: as, The -commonwealth wan 
 preserved by -the -exertion of -me alone. — You-saw the-eyes of -me 
 weeping. 
 
 The-Genitive of- Quality follows Substantives : as, A-boy of-in* 
 genuous countenance and ingenuous modesty. Quality is-put also in 
 the-Ablative : as, An-old-man with-long beard, with-rough hair. 
 
 Partitive words, Numerals, Comparatives, and Superlatives, 
 govern a-Genitive, with-vvhich they-agree in-gender : as, Many of* 
 these trees were planted by-my own hand. — I-am-charmed with-each 
 of -you. — We -follow thee, holy -one of -gods. — Sulla lost a-hundred 
 and-twenty of-his-men. — The-elder of-the-Neroes. — Bravest of-the- 
 Gauls. — Of -mortals nobody is-wise at-all hours. — Least of -all. 
 
 These Genitives, gentium, terrarum, and others, follow the- 
 A^dverbs of-Place, hue (hither), eb (thither), quo (whither), ubi 
 <where) and-the-like : as, I-think we-must-rnigrate to-some-quarter 
 tf-the-world. 
 
 Adverbs and Substantives signifying Quantity, also Neuter 
 Adjectives and Pronouns, govern a-Genitive : as, Enough of -eh* 
 quence, too-little of- wisdom. — Justice requires no reward. — He-pre- 
 serves something of-his-ancient strength. — As-much of-credit as of* 
 money. 
 
 (These) govern a-Genitive : — Verbal- Adjectives in ax, some 
 Participles put Adjectively, and Adjectives signifying knowledge, 
 care, and desire, memory, fear, crimination, power, and those- 
 which stand in-a-contrary sense ; the-poets give many others : as, 
 Time devour er of -things. — A-mind covetous of -another 1 s-property, 
 lavish of-his-own. — The mind of -men is ignorant of -fate. — All-men 
 hate one-forgetful of-a-benefit. — Innocent of-a-brother's blood. — 
 Anger is without- control of-itself. — O late in-your-studies. 
 
 Certain Verbs of-accusing, acquitting, condemning, reminding^ 
 govern a-Genitive of-the-thing : as, We-condemn soothsayers (as 
 guilty) of-folly. — Adverse circumstances remind us of-religiou*- 
 duties. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 169 
 
 Memini (I-remember), recorder, reminiscor (I-recollect), ob» 
 liviscor (I-forget), govern sometimes a-Genitive, sometimes an- 
 Accusative-case : as, God commands thee to-remember death.— 
 Dying he-remembers sweet Argi. 
 
 Misereor, miseresco (I-pity), are-joined to-a-Genitive ; as, Thou* 
 pitiest us not-at-all. 
 
 V. Adjectives, Verbs, and sometimes Substantives, admit an- 
 Ablative signifying the-causc, or instrument, or manner, or material, 
 or respect, or any-soever limitation : as, Dido wild with- horrid pur- 
 poses. — The-bad hate to- sin from- fear of-punishment. — These strive 
 to-defend with-javelins, those with-stones. — Wrong is-done in-two 
 manners, by-violence or deceit — We-consist of -soul and body. — 
 Ennius mightiest in-genius, untrained in-art. — Mardonius, a-Mede 
 by -nation. — He -is not aged, but yet already advanced in-life. 
 
 Fungor (I- discharge), fruor (I-enjoy), utor (I-use), vescor 
 (I-eat), govern an- Ablative, potior (I-gain), an- Ablative or a-Geni- 
 tive : as, I-will-discharge the-office of -a- whetstone. — When he-was- 
 able to-use his-victory, he-chose-rather to-enjoy (it). — The-Numi~ 
 dians feed-on wild flesh. — He-gains the-gold by -force. — The- Romans 
 gained the- standards. 
 
 Adjectives and Verbs which relate to plenty or want govern 
 an- Ablative, many also a-Genitive; as, Love is very-fruitful 
 both in-honey and gall. — The-soul is never void of -motion. — It-is 
 thameful to-be-dissolved in-luxury. — To-be-free from-blame is a* 
 very -great comfort. — Rich in-wealth, rich in- embroidered furniture 
 owl gold. — The-king of-the-Cappadocians, wealthy in-slaves, wants 
 money. — These things sate me of -life. 
 
 Opus and usus (need) govern an-Ablative : as, Where facts 
 are-at-hand, what need is-there qf-words ? — My-son has need of- 
 twenty minas. 
 
 The- Adjectives, dignus (worthy), indignus (unworthy), prcedi* 
 tus (endued), fretus (relying), contentus (contented), also the Verb 
 dignor (I-deem-worthy), govern an-Ablative : as, The- Muse forbids 
 ihe-man worthy of -praise to-die. — Lentulus is endued with-uncommon 
 modesty. — I-indeea deem not myself worthy of such an-honour. 
 
 The- Ablative of- Price follows Verbs and Adjectives, signifying 
 purchase, sale, or valuation . as, / buy not hope at-a-price. — Many 
 an-honour is-sold for-gold. — The-victory cost the-blood of -many. — 
 What is not needful, is dear at-a-penny. 
 
 These Ablatives, vili, parvo, minimo (for a-little), nimio (for- 
 too-much), magno, plurimo (for-a-great-price), duplo (for-twice- 
 as-much), and dimidio (for-half ), are-used by Ellipse, the-word 
 pretio being-understood : as, Hunger costs little, daintiness a-great" 
 deal 
 
 The-value of-a-thing generally has a-Genitive, especially those 
 
170 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 elliptical (Genitives), magni, parvi, minimi, pluris, and plurimi: 
 as, A-wise-man deems pain of-uo-account. — Virtue holds pleasure 
 of -very -little-worth. — One eye-witness is of-more value than ten 
 hearsay- (witnesses) , 
 
 Pluris, minoris, tanti, quanti, maximi, signify price as-well-as 
 value : as, He-bought the pleasure- garden at-as-large-a-price as 
 Pythius wished. 
 
 The-Ablative of Difference is-joined to-Adjectives, Adverbs, 
 and Verbs of Comparative and Superlative meaning : as, The-sun 
 is by -many times larger than the-mo on.— Doctrines differing from 
 the Cynics by a coat. 
 
 Especially the-elliptic Ablatives : altero (by-as-much-more), hoc 
 (by-tkis-much), eo (by-that-much), quo (by-how-much), nihilo (by- 
 nothing), and nimio (by-too-much), dunidio (by-half), duplo (by- 
 twice-as-much), quanto (by-how-much), tanto (by-so-much), paullo 
 (by-a-little), multo (by-much), aliqvunlo (by-a-good-deal) : as, 
 Regret is so-much heavier as the-fault is greater. — By-so-much the- 
 worst poet of -all as thou (art) the-best patron of -all. 
 
 The-Ablative of-Comparison is-governed by Comparatives, 
 whether Adjectives or Adverbs: as, Silver is poorer than- gold, gold 
 than-virtues.— T-think death lighter than-disgrace. 
 
 Qudm is-omitted elegantly after plus, amplius, minus : as, He* 
 inflicted on-me more (than) five-hundred blows. 
 
 These Prepositions govern an- Ablative : a, ab (abs) (from, 
 after, by, on-the-slde-of), absque (without), coram (in-the-presence- 
 of), de (from, of, concerning), palam (in-the-sight-of, with-the- 
 knowledge-of), clam (without-the-knowledge-of), cum (together- 
 with, with), ex, e (out-of, of, after, agreeably-to, on-the-side-of), 
 sine (without), terms (as-far-as), pro (before, for, according-to), 
 pr& (before, owing-to) : to-these add, subter (under), super (upon, 
 concerning), and in (in, upon, among), sub (under, just-at) if 
 station occurs. 
 
 A-Preposition in Composition sometimes governs the-same Case 
 which it-governed also out-of Composition : as, They -thrust- off the* 
 ships from-the-rock. — Now I-address thee, O-Africanus. 
 
 Verbs oi'-departing, separating, repelling, removing, and the-like, 
 govern an-Ablative, even omitting the- Preposition : as, Thou-wilU 
 retire from-thy- wide-purchased parks and mansion. — The- Athenian 
 people drove Phocion from-his-country. 
 
 To-this-Rule refer the-Ablative after Verbs and Participles 
 of-origin, such-as are natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, ortus 
 (born, sprung, descended): as, Atreus grandson of*Tantalus, son 
 of- Pelops. — O-thou-sprung from-the-blood of- Gods. 
 
 Tenus governs either a-Genitive Plural or an-Ablative, and is- 
 placed after its Case : as, The- dewlaps hang from the-chin as-far-as 
 the-lcgs. — Antiochus was commanded to-reign as-far-as Taurus. 
 
 Cum is joined to-the-Cases of-Personal Pronouns, and usually 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 171 
 
 of-the-Relative, so that of-two words one is-formed : as, mecum, 
 tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum or quocum, quibuscum. 
 
 A-Substantive and a-Participle are-placed together in the-Abla- 
 tive, which they-call Absolute : as. Kings having-been-expelled con- 
 fids were appointed. — Ccesar being-on-the-point-of -coming, O-mortf 
 trig-star, restore the-day^ — Obedience failing, government also falls. 
 
 A- Substantive is-put also absolutely with a-Substantive or Ad- 
 jective, where the-Participle of-being is-understood : as, Nothing 
 must-be -despaired, Teucer being-leader and Teucer omen-giver. — 
 And now Hector was dust, his-brothers being-alive. 
 
 § 95. D. I. Definition of- time is-put in the- Ablative, if (the ques- 
 tion) when or within what time, is-asked : as, All wars rest in-* 
 winter. — Whatever befalls, we-shall-know in-two-day s. 
 
 The-use of-Prepositions in defining time is frequent : as, The- 
 sun makes two-turns in each year. — De die (that is, before the-clo.se 
 of-day). — De node (that is, before the-close of-night). — De multa 
 nocte (that is, long before the-close of-night). — Sub vesperum (that 
 is, on-the-approach-of evening). — I-wait day after day. 
 
 How-long a-time ago, before, or after, is stated sometimes by the- 
 Ablative, sometimes by the- Accusative : as, The-assembly had-been 
 held already thirty days ago. — This was done almost two-years ago. 
 
 Duration of-time, when (the question) how-long is asked, is-put 
 most -commonly in the- Accusative, less-usually in the- Ablative : as, 
 Pericles presided-over Athens forty years. — The- Assyrians held 
 empire one-thousand three-hundred years. 
 
 II. The Place in which something is or is-done is-put in the- 
 Ablative, either without a-Preposition or far more-commonly with 
 the- Preposition in : as, By-chance I-was-walking in-the-Sacred 
 Road. — He-marries a-wife in Lemnos. 
 
 The-name of-a-Town, in which something is or is-done, is-put in 
 the- Ablative, provided it-be either of- the-third Declension or of-the- 
 Plural Number : as, Alexander died at-Babylon. — Philippus is at- 
 Naples, Lentulus at-Pozzuoli — Bred at- Thebes or at-Argi. 
 
 But it-is-put in the-Genitive, if it-is both of-the-first or second 
 Declension, and of- the -singular Number : as, What can-I-do at* 
 Rome ? I-know-not (how) to-tell-a-lie. — He dwells at-Milctus. 
 
 The-name of-a-Place is-governed generally by a-Preposition 
 after a-Verb of-Motion : as, He-marched into Gaul. — From Europe 
 you-seek Asia. 
 
 The-name of-a-Town, to which one-goes, is-put in the- Accusative 
 usually without a-Preposition : as, Regulus returned to- Carthage. 
 
 The-name of-a-Town, from which one-goes, is-put in the- Ablative 
 usually without a-Preposition : as, Demaratus fled from- Corinth. 
 
 But both Towns often take, and other Nouns reject a-Preposition 
 after Verbs of- motion : as, No rumour had- come from Brundisium 
 —Part-of-us will-come to-Scythia and Crete 's rapid Oaxes, 
 
172 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 Humus, domus, and ?'us imitate the-construction of-towns : as, 
 Cadmus scatters on-the-ground the-teeth, mortal seeds. — Arms 
 abroad are of -little-worthy unless there-is safe-counsel at-home. — 
 Go home full, evening comes, go, she-goats. — I-see the-old-man 
 returning from- (he-country. 
 
 III. The- Space of-Distance is-put more -commonly in the- Accusa- 
 tive, sometimes in the-Ablative : as, I-was-distant from Amanus one 
 day's journey. — The-temple of -Aesculapius is- distant from Epidau- 
 rus five thousand paces (i. e. five Roman miles). 
 
 The- Space of- Progression is-put in the- Accusative : as, Then 
 having-dined we-crawl three miles. 
 
 The- Space of-Dimension is-put most-commonly in the- Accusa- 
 tive, sometimes in the-Ablative, sometimes in the-Genitive : as, 
 The-walls of Babylon were 200 feet high. — A-foot-and-a- half long, 
 a- foot wide. — Make floors 10 feet broad. 
 
 • § 96. E. I. Libet (it-pleaseth), licet (it-is-lawful), liquet (it-is- 
 clear), and most Impersonal- Verbs, govern a-Dative : as, {Let) not 
 (that) please thee which (is) not lawful. — Savage bears agree among 
 themselves, (lit. it-is-agreed to-savage bears.) 
 
 Piget (it-irketh), pudet (it-shameth), panritet (it-repenteth), tcedet 
 (it-wearieth), and miseret (it-pitieth), govern an- Accusative of- 
 the-person, with a- Genitive of-the-thing, or with an-Infinitive : as, 
 Thou pitiest others; for-thyself thou (hast) neither pity nor shame 
 (lit. It-pitieth nor shameth thee.) — i" am -sorrowed and wearied of- 
 ihi-morals of-the-state. — It-repenteth them partly of-their-crimes, 
 partly of -their- follies. — (He) whom it-repenteth to-have-sinned is 
 almost innocent. 
 
 Delectat (it-delighteth),/^^ (it-pleaseth), decet (it-beseemeth), 
 dedecet (it-misbeseemeth), oportet (it-behoveth), take an- Accu- 
 sative : as, It-delighteth me to-have-cultivated Helicon in earliest 
 youth. — Least-of-all does-it-beseem an-orator to-be-angry. — It- 
 behoveth a-law to-be brief. 
 
 Pertiuet, attinet (it-belongeth, relateth, or concerneth), take the- 
 Preposition ad with an-Accusative : as, It-concerneth the-common- 
 dvealth, that- 1 be -preserved. — Let-him-squander, waste, be-ruined, 
 it-concerneth me nought. 
 
 Interest (it-imports or concerns), refert (it-matters or concerns), 
 admit a-Genitive : as, It-imports all-men to-act rightly. — It-matters- 
 in composition, what-things you-place -before what. 
 
 With these Verbs are- joined instead of-Personal Pronouns, the- 
 Feminine Ablatives : mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestrd, the word re 
 being-understood : as, It-concerns both me and thee (that) thou be- 
 well. — What matters-it to-me, whom I-am-a-slave-to ? 
 
 To-these Verbs are-added the-Genitives of-value, tanti, quanti, 
 tnagni, parvi, pluris : as, It-concerns both of -us greatly that I- 
 should-see you. — This avails not more than if-you- should- carry 
 water to a-sieve 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 173 
 
 Neuter Verbs are-used Impersonally in the-Passive Voice for any 
 persons : as, A-shout-of-dissent-was-uttered by all (that is to say, alt 
 shouted- dissent). — What is-doing ? there -is- a- standing still (that is 
 to say, there-is-a-standing-still by us, or we-stand-still). 
 
 II. Almost every Active Sentence maybe-changed into a-Passive 
 (sentence), so that the Nominative of- the- Active Sentence shall- 
 become in the-Passive an-Ablative of-the-Agent. 
 
 (A.) If the-Verb of-the- Active Sentence has an-Accusative of- 
 the-nearer Object, the-Verb in-the-Passive will-be Personal ; the- 
 Accusative of-the-Actiye passing into the-Nominative of-the 
 Passive : as, 
 
 Act. The-consul ?nanaged tke-affair admirably. 
 
 Pass. The-affair was-managed admirably by (he-consul. 
 
 (B.) If not, the-Verb of- the-Passive-Sentence will-be Impersonal, 
 and either will-stand without a-case, or will-govern the-same case 
 which it-governed in the-Active : as, 
 
 Act. The -enemy fought steadily. 
 
 Pass. (There was) steady fighting by the-enemy. 
 
 Act. We need medicine. 
 
 Pass. There-is-a-need by us of -medicine. 
 
 Where there-can be no ambiguity, the-Ablative of-the-Agent is- 
 euppressed after Passive Impersonals : as, We-go (itur a nobis) 
 into an-ancient forest. 
 
 Hence it-appears that-the-same Cases are-governed by Passive 
 Verbs as by Active, except only the- Accusative of-the-nearer Object. 
 
 Vapulo (I am beaten), veneo (I am sold), exulo (I am banished), 
 liceo (I am bid for),^ (I am made), with some other- Verbs, are- 
 construed in-a-Passive sense : as, The-witness was-beaten with-a- 
 stick by the-defendant. — I-had-rather be-plundered by a- citizen than 
 be-sold by an-enemy. — I-am-tortured lest my-husband fall by an* 
 incensed enemy. 
 
 § 97. F.I. The-Tnfinitive with the-Gerunds and Supines maK.es 
 the- Substantive of- the-Verb. 
 
 The-Infinitive is-joined to-many Verbs and Participles, and in- 
 poetry to- Adjectives : as, To-envy occurs not to a-wise-man. — /- 
 seem to-wander through holy groves. — They-use to-think long who 
 wish to-perform great-things. — Both well-matched to-stng, and ready 
 to-answer. 
 
 For the- Accusative of-the-Infinitive the- Gerund in dum is-put 
 after Prepositions : as, A- short time is long enough for living well. 
 — The-characters of-boys reveal themselves in playing. 
 
 For the-Genitive the-Gerund in di is-put after Adjectives and 
 Substantives : as, I-am-desirous of -satisfying the-repvMic. — Thur- 
 cydides surpasses all in-shill of -language. 
 
174 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 For the-Dative tlie-Gerund in do is-put after some Adjectives 
 and Verbs : as, Crassus could not be a-match for-the-argument. 
 
 For the- Ablative the-Gerund in do is-put signifying Cause* 
 Instrument, or Manner, or with the-Prepositions, ab, de, ex, in, 
 mm : as, By-doing nothing men learn to-do ill. — Jove we-name 
 from helping. 
 
 Gerunds (have) an- Active signification ; but if they-are Transi- 
 tive, their construction may be-represented passively, indeed (is) 
 oftener represented, by the-Participie in dus, which thence receives 
 the -name of- Gerundive. 
 
 The-Gerundive Construction isof-this-kind, that the- Substantive 
 is-drawn into the-Case of-the-Gerund, with which (Case) the- Ge- 
 rundive must-agree : as, We-extract from-the- earth fire for agri- 
 culture. — It-seemed an- opportunity for-making a-revolution. 
 
 For signifying Necessity Passively, the-Gerundive is-used Imper- 
 sonally in the-Neuter Gender : as, You must consult for-the-pro- 
 perties of -the- citizens. — (We) must pray that (there) be a-sound 
 mind in a-sound body. 
 
 II. The-Supine in um, like an- Accusative, is-put-after Verbs sig- 
 nifying motion : as, They-come to-see, they-come that they-may-be- 
 seen themselves. — We-send to-learn-of the-oracles of-Phcebus. 
 
 The-Supine in u is-put, like an-Ablative of respect, both (after) 
 many Adjectives, and also (after) the-Substantives, fas, nefas, opus: 
 as, (Let) nothing shameful to-be-spoken and seen approach these 
 doors, within which is a-boy. — Lot ill-omened sight, a-serpent 
 issues-from Ihe-altars. 
 
 III. Participles, Gerunds, and the- Supine in um, govern the- 
 Cases of-their Verbs : as, All having-dared monstrous wickedness 
 and having -achieved (heir-daring. 
 
 § 98. G. Neuter Adjectives of-each Number sometimes arc- 
 put Adverbially, especially by poets : as, He-will-be-a- slave for- 
 ever, who cannot enjoy a-little. — He-returns backward fierce, looking 
 sourly. 
 
 Conjunctions Sociative and Dissociative connect like Cases, 
 Moods, and Tenses : as, He admires the-gates, and the-bustle, and 
 the-pavement of -the- streets. — Virtue can neither be-snatched nor 
 stolen-away. Unless a- different principle of-construction interfere. 
 
 H. Ne the-prohibitive Conjunction is-joined to-an-Imperative 
 or Subjunctive Mood : as, Let-there be no delay (in performing) 
 my commands. — Lay not the-blame on me. 
 
 These-Conjunctions require the-Subjunctive : ut (that) &c. 
 
 These Conjunctions take the-Subjunctive or Indicative accord- 
 ing-to the circumstances : quum (when) &c. 
 
 These Conjunctions generally take the-Indicative, unless 
 the-nature of-the-passage require the Subjunctive : quod (that, 
 because) &c 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 175 
 
 Qvamris is-found with the-Indicative in historians and poets: 
 as, Although he-prevails not hy 'genius, he-prevails by-art. 
 
 The Relative, qui qua quod, governs the-Subjunctive, when it- 
 signifies because, although, in- order -that, or such-that ; as, / pity 
 you, because you-make this-man your foe. — I-seut a-letter by -which 
 (I-might) both pacify and admonish him. — He-is one-who maybe 
 conquered. — Who is-tkere that hates not saucy boyhood. 
 
 The-Subjunctive is-joined to-Pronouns and Particles of-interro- 
 gation, when-put subordinately* : as, He-knows-uot even this, who 
 himself is, whether he -is, or is not. 
 
 Such- Interrogatives are: quis (who or what), quantus (how great), 
 qualis (of -what sort), qui (who or what), quot (how many), quotus 
 (which in order of number), wide (whence), ubi (where or when), 
 quando (when), qudm (how), quamobrem (wherefore), quare (where- 
 fore), cur (why), quomodo (how), num, ne (whether), ut (how) an 
 (whether), utrum (whether). 
 
 A-Relative or Conjunction, when it-is-subordinated* to-an- 
 Infinitive or Subjunctive, governs a-Subjunctive : as, Casar wrote 
 to me, that-it-was very -agreeable to-him that I-have-been quiet. — I- 
 am-striving that Casar may-allow me to-be absent, when anything 
 is-moved against Cnceus in the-senate. 
 
 A-Conjunction is-understood sometimes : as, It-behoves (that) 
 you-devote -yourself to-philosophy . (supply ut.) — I-will inquire (whe- 
 ther) a-poem be complete or not. (supply utrum.) — O- Icarus, thou* 
 shouldst-have a-share in so-great a- work, did- grief allow, (supply W, 
 if.) — Though-you drive- out nature with-a-fork, it-will-retuni con- 
 tinually, (supply etsi.) 
 
 § 201. ((Prosodia) Prosody (disserit) treats (de quantitate) con- 
 cerning the-quantity (syllabarum) of-syllables, (et) and (de legi- 
 bus) concerning the-laws (metrorum) of-metres 
 
 1. (Tempus) Time (est) is (inensura) the-measure (eloquend© 
 syllaba?) of-uttering a-syllabie : (quod) which (et) also (vocatur) 
 is-called Quantitas (quantity). 
 
 (Vocalis observetur) Let-the v - vowel be-observed ; (quantitaa 
 syllabarum) the-quantity of-syllables (stat) depends (in quan- 
 titate vocalium) on the-quantity of- the- vowels. 
 
 2. (Habes) you-have (notas) these-marks (longi Temporis) of- 
 long Time [ - ], (brevisque) and of-short-Time [J]. 
 
 (Singulis longis) One long-Time (brevibusque binis) and two 
 short (est) have (par eademque potestas) one and the same power. 
 
 (Ilia vucalis) That vowel, (quae) which (sonat) sounds (in- 
 terdum) sometimes (brevis) short, (et rursus) and again (eadem) 
 likewise (longa) long, (audit) is called (communis) common. 
 
 (H) The-letter-/i (non habetur) is-not reckoned (consonans) a- 
 
 * These expressions must be explained by the Master from the Larger 
 Syntax. 
 
176 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 Consonant, (exercetque) and exercises (nullam vim) no power (in 
 Prosodia) in Prosody. 
 
 § 202. (Omnis diphthongus) Every diphthong (contractaque 
 syllaba) and contracted syllable (longa est) is long : (ut) as (press) 
 a-surety, (hen) alas, (gaudens) rejoicing : (coago) I-compel (fit 
 cogo) becomes cogo, (nihil) nothing (nil) becomes-mZ ,• (bobus) to- 
 oxen (pro bovibus) is-put-for bovibus ; (momentum) an- impulse (pro 
 movimentum) for movimentum. 
 
 (At) But (tu corripies pra) you will-shorten prce (prceeuntem 
 vocali) going-before a-vowel. 
 
 § 203. (Primaria) Primitives (dant) give (proprium tempus) 
 their-own quantity (Derivatis) to-their-derivatives : (sic) thus 
 (salix) a-willow (format) forms (saliceta) willow -grounds, (pomum) 
 an-apple (pomaria) orchards. 
 
 (Tamen) Yet (in multis) in many-instances (fit aliter) it- 
 happens otherwise : (sic) thus (arena arel) sand is-dry ; (sic) thus 
 (homo est humanus) man is human; (sic) thus (parva lucerna lucet) 
 a-little candle shines. 
 
 (Nee non) Moreover (Composta) Compound-words (sequuntur) 
 follow (tempus Simplicium) the-quantity of- their- Simples : (sic) 
 thus (reputo) I-consider (exstat) comes (a puto) from puto, I-think, 
 (sic) thus (immemor) unmindful (a mhnor) from memor, mindful. 
 
 (Tamen) Yet (sunt excepta) there-are exceptions : (sic) thus 
 (nubo) I marry (format pronuba) forms pronuba, a bridesmaid. 
 
 § 204. (Vocalis) A-vowel (prajvia vocali) going-before a-vowel 
 (corripitur) is-shortened : (ceu) as, (principium) a-beginning ; 
 (j)? % ohibe) forbid. 
 
 (Sed) But (hinc excipe) except from-this-rule (multa Graca) 
 many Greek-words : as, Chaonis, JEneas, Clio, Myrtous, Enyo. 
 
 (Priscus Genitivus) The-old Genitive (Primae) of-the-first- 
 declension (habebit) will- have (a longam) longa: (terrain auldi) 
 as-terrdi, of-earth, auldi, of-a-hall : (sic) thus (Quinta) the 5th 
 Declension (format diei) makes diei, of-a-day : (tamen) but (scribe) 
 write (rei atque rex) ret and rift, of-a-thing , (fidei atque Jidei) 
 fidei and^dett, of- faith. 
 
 (Penultima) The last-syllable-but-one (Vocativo) of-the- Voca- 
 tive-Case (vocis) of-a-word (in aius aut eius) ending in aius or 
 eius (longa est) is long : (hac lege) by-this rule (sonantur) are- 
 sounded (Cdi) O-Caius, (Pompei) O-Pompeius. 
 
 (I verbi jtfo) The-z of- the- verb fio, I-become, (longa est) is long, 
 (nisi) except (cum comes est er) when er follows it : (omnia nunc 
 fient) all-things will-happen now (fieri quce posse negabam) which 
 I-said could (not) happen. 
 
 (Genitivus in ius) A-Genitive-Case in ius (i dat communem) 
 makes i common : (ut) as (ille) he (illitis illinsque facit) makes 
 illius and illlus : (sic) so (totns) whole, (et) and (unus) one, (ipse) 
 self, (que) and (iste) that, (nullus) none, (ct) and (ullus) any 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 177 
 
 (habent ius tusque) have lus and rus (in the Genitive) : (alterius) 
 the-Genitive alterius (semper breviat) always shortens i, (producit 
 alius) the-Genitive alius lengthens-it. 
 
 (Nunc Diana) Sometimes Diana (feras agitat) chases beasts, 
 (nunc) sometimes (dla Diana) divine Diana : (sic) thus (dicimus) 
 we- say (ohe vel 6 he) ohe or ohe, oh ! (sed semper eheu) but always 
 eheu, alas. 
 
 § 205. (Vocalis) Any-vowel (erit) will-be (longa situ) long by- 
 Position, (quam) which (bina consona) two-consonants (sequetur) 
 shall-follow ; (ceu) as (pallor tristis) sad paleness : (quam) or- 
 which (voce in eadem) in the-same word (j subit) j follows (x aut 
 z) or x or z: (sic) thus, (Ajax) Ajax, (axis) an- axle, (Amazon) 
 an -Amazon. 
 
 (Excipe) except (quadrijugus) yoked- with-four-horses, (bijugus) 
 yoked-with-two-horses, (quae corripiunt i) which shorten the-z. 
 
 (Vocalis) A-vowel (vi curta sua) short by-its-own power (com- 
 munis erit) will- be common, (si) if (consona muta) a- mute con- 
 sonant (postponens liquidam sibi) with a liquid after it (sequetur) 
 shall-follow : (sic) thus (recte dices) you-will rightly say (lugubre 
 melos) a-mournful melody (vel lugubre) or lugubre : (duplex) 
 double (sive duplex) or duplex : (Tecmessam) Tecmessa (sive 
 Tecmessam) or Tecmessam. 
 
 (N post g) Gn (semper dat longam) always makes a-long- 
 sy liable, (ut) as (dgnus) a-lamb (et) and (Ignis) fire : (nee minus) 
 and likewise (m post g) gm ; (quod) which (tegmen) a-covering 
 (et) and (agmen) a-troop (monstrat) shews. 
 
 (Si) If (altera syllaba) another syllable (diviserit) shall -have- 
 divided (liquidam muta) the-liquid from-the-mute, (prior) the- 
 former-syllable (longa semper) is-always long ; (quod) which (sub- 
 mit) he-undermines, (ab-lue) wash-away, (monstrant) shew. 
 
 § 206. (Syllaba prima) The-first syllable (Praeteriti geminati) 
 of-a-reduplicated Preterperfect (brevis est) is short : (ut) as 
 (pepuli) I-have- driven- away, (didici) I-have-learnt, (pupugi) I- 
 have-pricked, (cecidi) I-have-fallen, (atque) and (cecldi) I-have- 
 beaten. 
 
 (Perfecta disyllaba) Preterperfects of-two-syllables (efficiunt) 
 make (primam longam) tbe-first-syllable long : (ut) as, (vidi) I- 
 have-seen, (legi) I-have-read, (que) and (movi) I-have-moved : 
 sed) but (excipis octo) you-except eight: (bibi) I-have -drunk, 
 (dedi) I-have-given, (fui) I-have-been, (fidi) I-have-cleft, (xteti) 
 T-have-stood, (stiti) I-have -stopped, (tuli) I-have-borne, (scidi) I- 
 have-cut. 
 
 (Que) also (Supina disyllaba) Suj)ines of-two-syllables (rite 
 producunt) properly lengthen (primain) their-first-syllable : (ut) 
 as (visum) to see, (lotum) to-wash, (que) and (motum) to-move : 
 (sed excipis octo) but you-except eight: (citum) to-rouse, (datum) 
 
 N 
 
178 TRANSLATIONS OP THK 
 
 to-give, (itum) to-go, (litum) to-smear, (ratum) to-think, (rutum) 
 to-throw-down, (satum) to-sow, (situm) to-allow. 
 
 § 207. (Produces) You-will-lengthen (pleraque monosyllaba) 
 most words-of-one-syllable, (qualia) such-as (me) me, (ver) spring 
 
 (In /, 6, d, £,) Words-of-one-syllable ending-in I, b, d, t, (corri- 
 piuntur) are shortened : (ut) as (vel) even, (sub) under, (id) that, 
 (et) and (stat) he-stands : (es) thou-art (cum compositis) with its- 
 compounds, (ut) as (ades) thou-art -present ; (que) and, (ve) or, 
 (quumque rogat, ne) and ne when it-is-interrogative : (fac) make, 
 (nee) neither, (an) or, (in) in, (fer) bear, (per) through, (ter) 
 thrice, (vir) a- man, (cor) a-heart, (quis) who? (bis) twice, (if) he, 
 (et cis) and cis on-this-side-of. 
 
 § 208. (In A) Words-ending-in A (producuntur) are-made- 
 long : as, (frustra) in- vain, (que) and (intra) within, (que) and 
 (para) prepare. 
 
 (Sed excipe) But except (casus rectos) Nominative Cases (et 
 quartos) and Accusatives : (quales) such as (musa) the-muse (car- 
 mina canit) sings songs : (silvae) the-woods (resonant Amaryllida) 
 resound Amaryllis : (atque) and (Vocativos plerosque) most Voca- 
 tives, (ut) as (Oresta) O-Orestes, (Thyesta) O-Thyestes: (parti- 
 culas) the particles (eja) ho! (ita) so, (cumque his) and with these 
 (quia) because : (quae breviant a) which shorten a. 
 
 § 209. (Corripiuntur in E) Words-in E are-made-short : (ceu) 
 as (lege timete carere) fear to-be-without law. 
 
 (Casus) The-Cases (Primae Quintaeque) of-the-first and fifth- 
 declension (requirunt e longam) require e long : (ut) as, (Thisbe) 
 Thisbe, (specie) by-appearance : (quae derivantur ab illis) and- 
 words- which are- derived from them : (ut) as (quare) wherefore, 
 (atque) and (hodie) to-day ; (contractaque) and contracted-words 
 ^qualia) such-as (Tempe) Tempe : (Verba in eo) Verbs of- the 
 second-conjugation (mandantia) in-the-Imperative-Mood (primi 
 numeri) Singular Number : (ut) as (aude) dare-thou : [(sed) but 
 (scribendi est aequa potestas) we may equally write (cave sive cave) 
 cave or cave, beware] : (Adverbia) Adverbs (ducta) derived (ex 
 Adjectivis secundae) from Adjectives of- the-second- declension, 
 (ut) as (misere) wretchedly: (jungantur) let-there-be-added 
 (ohe) oh! (que) and (ferme) generally (que) and (fere) com- 
 monly. 
 
 § 210. (Producuntur in I) Words-in I are -made-long, (ceu) as 
 (diet) to be said, (que) and (prbi) to-a-circle, (que) and (doli) 
 deceits. 
 
 (Attamen) But (deme hinc) except from-this-rule (multos Da- 
 tivos) many Datives (atque Vocativos) and Vocatives (Graeco- 
 rum) of the Greeks: (ut) as (Thyrsidi) to-Thyrsis, (Phyllidi) to- 
 Phyllis, (Chlori) O-Chloris : (deme) except (sicubi) if-any- where, 
 (nccubi) lest-any-where, (nisi) unless, (et) and (quasi) as-if, (queii 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 179 
 
 brevis est i) which have i short. [(At) But (mihi) to-me, (ubi) 
 where, (tibi) to-thee, (ibi) there, (sibi) to-himself, (communem 
 faciunt i) make i common.] 
 
 § 211. (Producuntur in O) Words-in O are-long; (ceu) as 
 virgo) a-virgin, (que) and (ultro) spontaneously, (que) and (juvo) 
 l-help. 
 
 (At) But (puto) I-think, (scio) I-know, (nescio) I-know-not, 
 (corripiunt finalem O) shorten final O. (Adde) add (modb) only 
 (et composta) and its-compounds, (duo) two, (octo) eight, (ego) I, 
 (queis) to which (junge) join (citb) quickly. (O proprium clau- 
 dens nomen) at-the-end-of a-proper name (communis habetur) 
 is-reckoned common, (ut) as (Matho) Matho : (sed) but (in 
 Graecis) in Greek-names (longa est semper) it-is always long ; (ut) 
 as (Argo) the-ship-Argo. (Flaccus) Horace (habet) has (quag- 
 dam communia) certain-words common, (Naso) Ovid (plurima) 
 very-many : (corruptior aetas) a-more-corrupt generation (poeta- 
 rum) of-poets (addidit) added (plura) more-instances. 
 
 (Producuntur in U) Words-in U are-long, (sic) thus (tu) thou, 
 (que) and (dictu) to-be-said, (que) and (diu) long. 
 
 (Corripiuntur in Y) "Words-in Y are short ; (sic) thus (pontes 
 dant) poets have (chely) O-lute, (Tiphy) O-Tiphys. 
 
 § 212. (In C producuntur) Words-in C are-long, (ut) as (illic) 
 there : (excipe) except (donee) until. 
 
 (Corripe in Z, Z), T,) shorten words-in L, D, T ; (sic) thus 
 (Hannibal) Hannibal, (illud) that, (amavit) he -loved. 
 
 (Corripiuntur in N) Words-in N are-short : (ceu) as (culmen) a 
 summit. (At excipe) But except (Grseca muita) many Greek- 
 words (vocali praedita longa) possessing a-long vowel, (ut) as, 
 (Hymen) Hymen, (Acrori) Acron. 
 
 (Corripiuntur in R) Words-in R are-short: (ceu) as (calcar) a 
 spur, (amabitur) he-will-be-loved, {Hector) Hector. 
 
 (Tamen) But (producis) you-lengthen (Graeca) the Greek- 
 words : as (crater) a bowl, (ather) the sky, (aer) the atmosphere. 
 
 §213. (Producuntur in As) Words-in As are long: (ut) as 
 (terras) lands. (Excipe) Except (Graeca) Greek-words (queis 
 Genitivus adis) which have a Genitive in-ek/is, (ceu) as (Pallas) 
 Minerva : (et excipe) except too (casus quartos) accusatives (cre- 
 scentum) of-nouns-incr easing, (ceu) as (lampadas) torches ; (hi 
 adde) add to-these (anas) a-duck. 
 
 (Producuntur in JEs) Words in Es are-long ; (ut) as (sedes) a- 
 seat, (et) and (videres) you-might-see. (Excipienda tamen) But 
 we-must-except (quae Graeci corripiunt) words- which the- Greeks 
 shorten; (ut) as (Troades) Trojan-women : (excipias etiam) ex- 
 cept also (penes) in-the-power-of, (excipiasque) and except (queis 
 brevis est) nouns-which have short (penultima) the-last-syllable- 
 but-one (crescentis Genitivi) of-an-increasing Genitive, (ut) as 
 (seges) standing-corn : (at) but (paries) a-house-wall (semper pro- 
 
180 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 ducitur) is-always lengthened, (atque) and (pes) a-foot (cum com 
 positis) with-its-compounds : (que) and [abies) a-tir-tree, (que) 
 and (aries) a- ram, (que) and (Ceres) Ceres. 
 
 §214. (Corripluntur in Is) Words in Is are-short; (ceu) as 
 (diceris) thou-art-said, (utilis) useful, (ensis) a-sword. 
 
 (Obliqui casus plurales) The-oblique-cases plural (excipiuntur) 
 are-excepted, (ut) as (terris) by-lands, (vobis) to-you : (etiam) 
 also (persona secunda in primo numero) the-second-person singular 
 (Praesentis) Present-tense (Quartae) of-the-Fourth-conjugation, 
 (ut) as (audis) thou-hearest : (composita a »w, sis) the-compounds 
 of vis thou-wilt, sis thou-mayst-be ; (malis) thou-mayest-prefer, 
 (que) and (nolis) thou-mayst-refuse, (que) and (velis) thou-mayst- 
 wish. \_(Sed ris) but ris (persona secunda) the-second person- 
 singular (Prseteriti et Futuri) of-the-Preterperfect and Future 
 (Aetivae vocis) of the Active voice (recte communis habetur) is- 
 properly held common; (as) (fecei'is) thou-mayst-have-done, (ad- 
 dideris) thou-mayst-have-added, (tuleris) thou shalt have borne] 
 (At produc nomina) But lengthen nouns (queis longa est) which 
 have long (penultima) the-penultimate (crescentis Genitivi) of-an- 
 increasing Genitive, (ut) as (Samnis) a-Samnite : (itidem) likewise 
 (Simois) the-Simois, (que) and (gratis) freely, (que) and (/oris) 
 abroad. 
 
 § 215. (Producuntur in Os) Words-in Os are-long, (ut) as 
 (ventos) winds (atque) and (sacerdos) a-priest. 
 
 (Corripienua tamen) But we-must-shorten (quae<Graeci cor- 
 ripiunt) words-which the- Greeks shorten, (ut) as, (Phasidos) of- 
 the-Phasis, (Argos) Argos, (epos) an-epic-poem : (sic) so (compos) 
 master-of, (et) and (impos) powerless, (os) a bone, (exos) bone- 
 less. 
 
 (Corripiuntur in Us) Words-in Us are-short : (ceu) as (tempus) 
 time, (amamus) we-love, (et) and (intus) within. 
 
 (Hinc excipe) Except from-this-rule (casus contractos) the- 
 contracted cases (quartae) of-the-fourth-declension, (ut) as (artus) 
 limbs : (queisque longa est) and nouns- which have long (penul- 
 tima) the-penultimate (crescentis Genitivi) of- an -increasing- Geni- 
 tive : (ut) as (tellus) earth, (que) and (incus) an-anvil, (juventus) 
 youth, (atque) and (senectus) old-age : (productaa Graecis) words- 
 lengthened by the-Greeks, (ut) as (Sapphus) of- Sappho, (atque) 
 and (Melampus) Melampus, (atque) and (Iesus) Jesus, (nomen) a- 
 name (venerandum) to-be-adored (piis cunctis) by-all pious- 
 persons. 
 
 (Corripiuntur in Ys) Words in Ys are-short : (ut) as, (chelys) 
 a-lute, (chlaniys) a mantle, (Othrys) mount-Othrys, (Erinnys) a- 
 Fury. 
 
 Not. (Ea syllaba) That syllable (quam) which (regula nulla) no 
 rule(facit) makes (longam brevemve) long or short, (ducit tempus) 
 derives its-quantity Cab auctorum scriptis) from-the-writings of- 
 *uWiors. 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 18l 
 
 § 216. 1. Call a-raising of-the-voice in uttering syllables, Arsis, 
 ^Ictus accompanies this) ; and on-the>other-hand a-dropping of-the- 
 voice is (called) Thesis. A-Foot is a-certain succession of-syllables, 
 and Rhythm a-certain succession of-Feet. In-the-works-of poets 
 the-name of-Rhy thm is a- Verse : and a-certain order of-Verses 
 call Measure or Metre : also a-certain part of-a- Verse is-called 
 Metre. 
 
 § 217. 2. A-long syllable following a-short is called Iambus 
 (^ -) : but if a-long-syllable goes-before a-short-one, that (is) a- 
 Trochee (- ^) : a-Pyrrhich will consist of- two short-syllables (v, v,) : 
 ^-Spondee will consist of-two long-syllables (--) : a,-Dactyl is- 
 formed by-a-long and two short-syllables (~w) : and sm-Anapcesl 
 by-one long after two short-syllables (w-). Add to-these a- Tri- 
 brach formed by- three short-syllables, (y ^ ^). 
 
 You-will-say that-a-Rhy thm, which a-Thesis begins, is-ascending ; 
 a-specimen of-which-kind thy verse, O-Iambus, will-give. On-the- 
 other-hand, if-it-begins with Arsis, you-will-say it-is- descending ; 
 thou-makest such, O-Dactyl, and thou, O-Trochee. 
 
 One foot makes a-metre in Dactylic verse, and two-feet in others 
 
 That verse which wants one syllable for-completing its-metres, 
 is-called Catalectic. That which wants two syllables for-completing 
 its metres is-called Br achy catalectic. A-verse which (has) one syl- 
 lable over, when-its-metres are-complete, is-called Hyper catalectic. 
 That Verse, which has-nothing wanting or too-much, being-smooth 
 and round, is-called Acatalectic. 
 
 § 218. Scansion, which Figures adjust by- various art, distributes 
 a- Verse according to-feet. 
 
 A. Synalcepha (Elision) cuts- off a- Vowel at the-end of-a-word, if 
 there-shall-be a-vowel at the-beginning of- the- following word : (as) 
 I-love Phyllis before other-women : for she-wept that-I was-depart~ 
 ing. 
 
 Sometimes Hiatus violates the-law of-Synaloepha : (as) Thrice 
 they -endeavoured to-place Ossa on-Pelion. 
 
 A-following vowel never elides lieu, O, and ah (alas !). 
 
 Ecthlipsis cuts off a-vowel and m from the-end, if there-shall-be 
 a-vowel at the-beginning of-the-following word : (as) O the-cares 
 of -men, O what-great emptiness there-is in things. 
 
 § 219. C. One-syllable wrought out-of two is-called Synceresis, 
 as deest (it is wanting), dein (next), aureos (golden), alvearia 
 (hives), Thesei (of Theseus) show. 
 
 In-the-works-of poets I and U sometimes take the-privileges of- 
 consonants : (as) Eridanus king of -rivers. The-wall totters from- 
 the-battering-ram. Knees tremble. And Serians comb light fleeces. 
 
 D. But one-syllable divided into two is-called Diceresis, which 
 Naiades and yellow-haired Suevi show to-you. 
 
 U is-put for V . you-will-see siliias (woods) and solicit (he-hatli 
 loosed). 
 
182 TRANSLATIONS OF THE 
 
 § 220. E. Ctesura ends words before the-end of-feet : (as) Ye> 
 Lights which lead in- heaven the-gliding year. 
 
 A-vowel, which nature has-made short, sometimes is-made long 
 in Arsis, Caesura and Ictus helping: (as) Poring -over the-brea.sU 
 he-consults the-palpitating entrails" 
 
 F. Dialysis (Incision) separates both a-word and foot at-once * 
 (as) Ye- Lights which lead in- heaven the-gliding year. 
 
 Not. The-last syllable of-a-verse is-held common. 
 
 § 221. The-Hexameter is-formed by-six feet : of- these the-fifth 
 is a-dactyl : a-spondee is-put in-the-sixth place: andeither-of-the- 
 two is-found in-the-other places. 
 
 Gravity of-topics stations a-spondee in-the-fifth place. 
 
 Caesura is-wont to-divide an- Hexameter, where the- third or 
 fourth foot is separated at an-Arsis. 
 
 Sometimes the-only Caesura of-a-verse is after a-Thesis : (as) 
 " Active, passionate, inexorable, force." 
 
 You-will-condemn a-verse which is-without any Caesura. 
 
 A-word of-two-syllables or of-three-syllables, by custom, makes 
 tiie-termination of-an- Hexameter, seldom a-word-of-more-than- 
 two-syllables, seldom a-word-of-one-syllable, unless another go- 
 before, closes the-verse. 
 
 The-last syllable of-a-verse (is) seldom absorbed : when this hap- 
 pens, the-verse (is) then called Hypermeter : (as) In-all-things 
 like Mercury, both in-voice and complexion, and yellow locks, and 
 graceful limbs of -youth. 
 
 § 222. The- Pentameter has two parts : each commences with-two 
 feet, which a-long syllable follows. A- Spondee and Dactyl enter 
 the-first-part as-you-choose : the-second part rejoices only in- 
 dactylic feet. 
 
 Caesura separates the-first partof-a-Pentameterfrom-the-second: 
 and Synalcepha is-excluded from that place: (as) Although he- 
 prevails not in-genius, he-prevails in-art. 
 
 A-word-of-two-syllables makes by custom the-end of-a-Penta- 
 meter. 
 
 Est may-be thrown to the-end, if Synalcepha takes place : (as) 
 Thy letter was read with-unwilling eyes. Or if a-word of-one-syl- 
 lable goes-before, as in this : If I-obtain those rewards by-my-zeal, 
 it-is enough. 
 
 Let-not a-word of-one-sy liable be the-end of- the-first part, 
 unless a-word of-one syllable go-before, as in this : Yet there- 
 is great hope in the- goodness of- God. Or sometimes a-word formed 
 of-two short-syllables : (as) She secures to-Jupiter the -formidable 
 sceptre without force. 
 
 § 223. The- Hermc Muse rejoices in-Hexameters alone : Elegiet 
 join -together Hexameters and Pentameters. 
 
 Elegiac- Distichs prefer containing a-complete sense : nor is-it- 
 
LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 183 
 
 £Ood for-the-construction of-a-simple sentence to-be-divided into 
 (separate) distichs. 
 
 § 224. The goldfinch is a singing bird, but the acanthus blooms 
 in the fields. The maple is in the woods ; the spirited horse gains 
 an Olympic victory. The chief who carries arms on his shoulders 
 is carried on the horse's flank. The wandering bee stores honey : 
 Apis is an ^Egyptian god. The gad-fly harasses horses ; an asylum 
 is wont to receive the wretched. He who engraves carves ; he 
 who keeps things hidden conceals. You will sing with your voice : 
 he ! lead dogs, unless you are white on the temples. Twined nets 
 are set : the brazen helmet shines. Surround your head with the 
 helmet : boars are caught by nets. Cedo (I yield) makes cessi 
 (Preterperfect), cado (I fall) cecidi, ccedo (I beat) cecldi. A club 
 strikes ; a nail holds firm, and a key opens. A maid carries a 
 distaff, moist matter penetrates a strainer. The farmer tills fields, 
 but strains thick wines. You strike close with a sword ; you fall 
 by a spear thrown from a distance. That you may please a com- 
 panion, put on, as a companion, affable manners. Comedians, seek 
 the stage ; messmates, seek supper. Consult teachers, so you con- 
 sult for yourself. Often has his own desire injured the man 
 desirous of war. Songs are recited, while temples are being dedi- 
 cated to the Lord. He trusted not to untie, who severed the knot 
 with a sword. This man trains dogs to take them out soon against 
 boars. If you have not money, you are destitute, and eat not 
 delicacies. The sea often deceives one who relies too much on the 
 clear surface. Fruits grow on trees, corn in the fields. The sun 
 chases the clouds, and irrecoverable time flies. The swallow is a 
 chirping bird : the leech swims, the reed is green in spring. By 
 what a man sins, by the same the same man is soon punished. It 
 is a difficult labour under the weight of which I sink. A boy's 
 forehead is smooth, but a girl's tongue light. Seek hares in woods, 
 elegancies in words. He is not bid for by me at a penny, who bids 
 not for me at a penny. I had rather break with my jaw good 
 apples than bad. Merchandise is sold, and reward comes gained 
 oy toil. Sylvia strokes with loving hand, while she milks her cow. 
 You will be dear to the Lord, if you have sent gold to the wretched 
 Strive, little boy, whoever shalt desire to shine. She who is red, 
 besmeared with paint, is forgetful of decency. He fell by base 
 treachery, whom a friend killed. I wait for Caius, who is clad in 
 dark dress. A mouth commands, but a bone is eaten with the 
 mouth. It is a wife's part to bring forth and obey, a husband's to 
 procure. Obedient children make parents rejoice. If you do not 
 wish to be hanged, you will not refuse to pay your debts. Play 
 at ball : a javelin is hurled ; plla is a pillar. Plaga is for a net 
 and a country ; plaga for a blow. People are the citizens of a 
 city : poplar is a tree. If you can avoid, drink not more than two 
 cups. The prow is the front part (of a ship), the stern the hind 
 part, and the keel the lowest. Thrashing ^nachines bruise grain; 
 
184- TRANSLATIONS OF THE LATIN RULES. 
 
 burrs are wont to injure the fallow. A bail promises, but a vessel 
 contains food. A bail kindly assures the person, but a surety 
 money only. If you wish to cross the waters of the sea, use sails. 
 
 Trust, but first see ; he who trusts, and has not well seen, is de- 
 ceived : therefore see, lest you be inveigled by trust. Tailors 
 delight in shears, barbers in curling-irons : but a smith takes his 
 red-hot work with tongs. The same fortune makes partners ; the 
 same toil comrades ; the same duty colleagues : but school, play, 
 the table, make dear companions. Lira is the furrow of a field : 
 lyra (the lyre) touched utters notes. Let him not be secure, who 
 is not safe from the enemy : you have banks by a river, shore by 
 the sea. Men are old by time ; ancients lived formerly : I feign 
 what is not, and dissemble what is. A hoof tramples : a talon 
 tears, holds, clutches ; tenacious sedge grows in a pool, sea-weed 
 in the sea. We properly intrench a camp, but hedge in a sheep- 
 fold : a spear can be called rounded, a sphere round. Blot out 
 what is written, but quench the flame of the lamp : the tongue 
 tastes any food which has good flavour. The cuticle is on the flesh, 
 the skin drawn from the body : man spreads a back : a beast has 
 tergus (a back). A baker has an oven, stoves are warmed by a 
 furnace : this mark of the grammarian was not known to me. 
 Have you anything new ? Seek another : I know nothing. That 
 chatterer relates what matters very little. If perchance you sit 
 anywhere, and the seat is convenient to you, sit m that seat : per- 
 haps a new one is hardly safe. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 L GREEK NOUNS. 
 
 1. Greek Nouns of the First Declension in as, es, e. See § J 4., note. 
 
 2. Greek Nouns of the Second Declension in os,on. See § 15., note S. 
 
 S. Greek Nouns Heteroclite, fluctuating between the Second and Third 
 ^Declensions : — 
 
 (i} Sing. N. Pele-tis or Pel-eus 
 G. Pele-i or Pele-os 
 
 D. Pele-o 
 
 Ace. Pele-um or Pele-a 
 
 V. Peleii 
 Abl. Pele-o. 
 
 (6) Achill-eus or Achill-es 
 
 Achille-i, Achill-i, Achillas, 
 
 or Achille-os 
 Achill-i 
 Achill-em, Achill-en. or Actiil- 
 
 le-a 
 Achill-eu or Achili-e 
 Achill-e. 
 
 (c) Sing. N. 
 
 Thucydid-es 
 
 (d) Pericl-es 
 
 G. 
 
 Thucydid-is or Thu- 
 cydid-i 
 
 
 Pericl-is or Fericl-i 
 
 D. 
 
 Thucydid-i 
 
 
 Pericl-i 
 
 Ace 
 
 . Thucydid-em or 
 Thucydid-en 
 
 
 Pericl-em or Pericle-a 
 
 V. 
 
 Thucydid-e or Thu- 
 cydid-es 
 
 
 Pericl-es 
 
 Abl 
 
 . Thucydid-e. 
 
 
 Pericl-e. 
 
 4, Greek Nouns entirely of the Third Declension: — 
 
 »'*) Sing. N. Thal-es 
 
 
 
 
 G. Thal-is or Thalet-i 
 
 is 
 
 
 D. Thal-i or Thalet-i 
 
 
 
 Ace. Thal-em, Thai- 
 
 -en, 
 
 or Thai- eta 
 
 
 V. Thal-e or Thai 
 
 -es 
 
 
 
 Abl. Thal-e or Thalet-t 
 
 
 (b) Sing. N. 
 
 Ech-o 
 
 (c) Sapph-o 
 
 G. 
 
 Ech-us 
 
 
 Sapph-us or Sapphon-is 
 
 D. 
 
 Ech-o 
 
 
 Sapph-o or Sapphon-i 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ech-o 
 
 
 Sapph-o or Sapphor.-eca 
 
 V. 
 
 Ech-o 
 
 
 Sapph-o 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Echo 
 
 
 Sapph-o or Sapphon-g. 
 
186 APPENDIX 
 
 
 [d) Sing. N. Memn-on 
 
 « 
 
 JEth-er 
 
 G. Memnon-is 
 
 
 iEther-is 
 
 D. Memnon-i 
 
 
 iEther-i 
 
 Ace. Memnon-em or M«v 
 
 
 iEther-em or ^ther-a 
 
 mnon-a 
 
 
 
 Abl. Memnon-i*. 
 
 
 M\:\ev-%. 
 
 (/.)Sing. N. Thyrs-is 
 
 GO 
 
 Tiber-is (Roman word.) 
 
 G. Thyrsid-is or Thyr- 
 
 
 Tiber-is 
 
 sid-os 
 
 
 
 D. Thyrsid-1 
 
 
 Tiboi 
 
 Ace. Thyrs-in or Thyr- 
 
 
 Tiber-im 
 
 sid-a 
 
 
 
 V. Thyrs-1 
 
 
 Tiberis 
 
 Abl. Thyrsid-e. 
 
 
 Tiber-i 
 
 (it) Sing. N. Nere-is 
 
 (0 
 
 Erinn-ys 
 
 G. Nereid-is or Nere- 
 
 
 Erinny-is or Erin-ny-es. 
 
 id-os 
 
 
 
 D. Nereid-i 
 
 
 Erinny-i 
 
 Ace. Nereid-em or Ne- 
 
 
 Erinn-ym, Erinn-yn, or Erin- 
 
 reid-a. 
 
 
 ny-a 
 
 V. Nere-i 
 
 
 Erinn-y 
 
 Abl. Nereid-e. 
 
 
 Erinny-e. 
 
 Plur. N. Nereid-es 
 
 
 Erinny-es 
 
 G. Nereid-um. 
 
 
 Erinny-um 
 
 D. Nereid-ibus or Nereis- 
 
 in 
 
 Erinny-sin 
 
 Acc. Nereid-es or Nereid-as 
 
 
 Erinny-as 
 
 V. Nereid-es 
 
 
 Erinny-es 
 
 Abl. Nereid-ibus or Nerei-sin. 
 
 Erinny-<M • 
 
 IL PATRONYMICS. 
 
 Patronymics are Proper Names, which denote the descendant, by de- 
 rivation from the name of his father or ancestor. They are Masculine 
 or Feminine. Masculine Patronymics end in des of the First Declension . 
 Feminine, in is or as of the Third, or in ne of the First Declension. 
 
 A. Patronymics derived from Nouns of the Firat Declension in as, *<»:— • 
 
 (a) Masculine. 
 
 1. jEne-ades, son of 'JEne-us. 
 
 2. Laert-iades . . Laert-es. 
 
 (ft) Feminine. 
 
 1. iEne-is, daughter of ^ne-as. 
 
 2. Laert-ias . . Laert-es. 
 
APPENDIX. 187 
 
 w Pattonymics derived from Nouns ot the Second Declension : — 
 
 (a) Masculine. 
 
 1 . Tyndar-ides, son of Tyndar-us. 
 
 2. Thesti-ades . . Thesti-us. 
 (6) Feminine. 
 
 1 . Tyndar-is, daughter of Tyndar-us. 
 
 2. Thesti-as . . Thesti-us. 
 S. Neptun-ine . . Neptun-us. 
 4. Acrisi-one . . Acrisi-us. 
 
 0. Patronymics derived from Heteroclite Nouns in n .vs of the Second 
 ar.d Third Declensions: — 
 
 (a) Masculine. 
 
 Nel-ides, son of Nel-eus. 
 (6) Feminine. 
 
 1. Nel-eis, daughter of Nel-eus. 
 
 2. Peli-as . . Pel-eus. 
 
 D. Patronymics derived from Nouns of the Third Declension • — 
 
 (a) 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 
 
 1. Agenor-ides, son of Agenor. 
 
 
 2. Cecrop-ides 
 
 . Cecrop-s. 
 
 
 3. Mino-ides 
 
 . Mino-s. 
 
 
 4. Arsac-ides 
 
 Arsac-es. 
 
 
 6. Atlant-iades 
 
 Atlas. 
 
 
 6. Telamon-iades 
 
 . Telamon. 
 
 (*) 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 
 1. Agenor- is, daughter of Agenor. 
 
 
 2. Cecrop-is 
 
 Cecrop-s. 
 
 
 3. Mino-is 
 
 , . Mino-s. 
 
 
 4- Arsac-is 
 
 Arsac-es. 
 
 
 5. Atlant-is ^ 
 Atlant-ias j 
 
 Atlas. 
 
 
 6. Telamon-ias 
 
 Telamon. 
 
 Obs. Personal Names of both Genders are also derived from names of 
 places; as, Maeon-ides, Maeon-is, na'.ive of Mason- ia. 
 
 HI. KfcMlNINE FORMS CORRESPONDING TO 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 1. us . .a: as, 
 
 Masc. equ-us, a \uyrst. fern, equ-a, a mar*}. 
 
 2. er . . ra: as, 
 
 Masc. magist-er, a master. Fem. magist-ra, a mistress. 
 
 8. tor . . trix : as, 
 
 Masc. vic-tor, a conqueror. Fem. vic-trix, a conguer^ss. 
 
188 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 4. a 
 
 Masc. 
 
 . is: as, 
 Pers-a, a Persian. 
 
 Fein. Pers-is, a Peraiun unman. 
 
 5. i't . . issa: as, 
 
 Masc. Phoen-ix, a Phcenician. Fern. Phoen-issa, a Phoenician u 
 
 Add to these many particular forms : as, leo, a lion ; leren*. a lioness . 
 rex, a king ; regina, a queen : Cres, a Cretan ; Cressa, a Cretan woman : 
 Tros, a Trojan ; Troas, a Trojan woman : Thrax, a Thracian ; Thre'issa, 
 a Thracian woman ; Laco, a Lacedaamonian ; Lacaena, a Lacedemonian 
 "■ -nan: T :u '' " Libyan; Libyssa, a Libyan woman, Sec 
 
 Ubi, where 9 
 
 ibi, | 
 
 illic, V there. 
 
 istic, J 
 
 hie, here. 
 
 utrobique, in both places. 
 
 utrimque, on both sides. 
 
 ibidem, in the same place. 
 
 alibi, elseichere. 
 
 aJicubi, somewhere. 
 
 usquam, I , 
 
 \ > anywhere. 
 
 uspiam, J w 
 
 nusquam, , , 
 
 nnllibi, i Wmkm> 
 
 u^eu} wherei/0UWiIL 
 
 IV. ADVERBS. 
 
 L Adverbs of Place. 
 (1.) Rest in a Place. 
 
 ubiubi, 1 
 
 wheresoever- 
 
 (2.) 
 
 Quo, whither ? 
 eo, 
 
 thither. 
 
 eo, ") 
 illuc, Ithi 
 istuc, J 
 iuc, hither 
 modern, to I 
 ilio, to anc 
 I no, 
 
 diquo, >c 
 juopiaroj J 
 
 hue, hither. 
 
 eodem, to the same place. 
 
 alio, to another place. 
 
 quo, 
 
 aliquo, \-anywhitfter. 
 
 quopiaiBj 
 
 ubicumque, J 
 
 ubique, i , 
 
 l } everywhere. 
 passim, J * 
 
 prope, near. 
 
 procu I, far away. 
 
 intus, *| ... . 
 
 > within. 
 mtrinsecus, J 
 
 extrinsecus, "I 
 
 tons, 
 
 subtus, beneath*. 
 superne, above. 
 in feme, below. 
 praesto, at liand. 
 peregre, abroad. 
 
 Motion to a Place. 
 
 quoU^t,} "*"*" W,ria 
 
 lit rov is, whither of the two you wiH 
 
 J * l I J- whither soever. 
 
 quoe unique, J 
 
 intro, to with'n 
 
 foras, to without. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 189 
 
 (3.) Motion towards a Place (versus or versum). 
 
 Quorsum, whitherward ? 
 
 illorsum, thitherward. 
 
 horsum, hitherward. 
 
 aliorsurn, towards another quarter. 
 
 utraque versum, towards both quar- 
 ters. 
 
 aliquorsum, towards some quarter. 
 
 quaque versus, or -um, towards every 
 quarter. 
 
 introrsum, inwards. 
 
 deorsum, downward*. 
 
 sursum, upwards. 
 
 retrorsum, backwards, 
 
 prorsus, straightforward. 
 
 seorsum, sidewards. 
 
 adversum, V , . . 
 
 i y towards, aqai tst. 
 
 adversus, J w 
 
 dextrorsum, towards the right. 
 
 sinistrorsum, towards the left 
 
 (4.) Motion from a Place. 
 
 Unde, whence ? 
 inde, "1 
 illinc, > thence. 
 istinc, J 
 
 hinc, hence. 
 
 utrimque, from both sides. 
 
 indidem, from the same place. 
 
 aliunde, from elsewhere. 
 
 alicunde, from some place. 
 
 undique, "| , „ . . 
 
 ,. 1 > f)om all bides. 
 
 undique versum, J J 
 
 undevis, ~\from which side you 
 
 undelibet, J will. 
 
 undeunde, "1 - , . . , 
 
 j J- from whatever side. 
 
 undecumque, J f 
 
 eminus, from far. 
 
 cominus, from near, close. 
 
 funditus, from the ground, utterly 
 
 radicitus, "1 . , 
 .... } from the roots. 
 stirpitus, y 
 
 ccelitus, from heaven. 
 
 divinitus, from the gods. 
 
 Qua, which way? 
 
 iliac, \ihat way. 
 
 istac, J 
 
 hac, this way. 
 
 utraque, both ways, 
 
 eadem, the same way. 
 
 alia, another way. 
 
 aliqua, "1 
 
 j \ some way. 
 
 quadam, J * 
 
 Quando, when ? 
 
 nunc, "1 
 
 , s > now. 
 modo, J 
 
 hodie, to-day. 
 
 ' unc 'W 
 
 turn, J 
 
 neri, yesterday. 
 
 pridie, the day before. 
 
 (5.) Motion by a Way. 
 
 qualibet, } ^ch way you wtU. 
 
 utravis, which of the two ways yim 
 
 will. 
 
 \ which way soever. 
 quacumque, J y 
 
 recta, straight. 
 
 dextra, to the right. 
 
 sinistra, to the left. 
 
 ti. Adverbs of Time. 
 
 (1.) When? 
 
 dudum, "j 
 
 pridem, l some time bcuk. 
 
 jamdudum, J 
 
 nuper, lately. 
 
 nudiustertius, three days tinev. 
 
 ante hac, "\ 
 
 ante, \ heretofore. 
 
 antea J 
 
190 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 immediately, forthwith. 
 
 jamdiu, long since- 
 
 jam, now, presently. 
 
 jamjam, directly. 
 
 mox, "| 
 
 } soon 
 cito, J 
 
 statim, 
 
 confestim, 
 
 ilicet, 
 
 illico, 
 
 protinus, 
 
 eras, to-morrow. 
 
 postridie, the following day. 
 
 perendie, the day after to-morrow. 
 
 post, 
 
 postea, 
 
 posthac, V afterwards, hereafter. 
 
 postmodum, 
 
 postmodo, 
 
 nonnunquain, J 
 
 aliquando, I sometime*. 
 
 quandoque, J 
 
 quondam,"! jt . . v, 
 
 \. > some time ago or neroajter 
 
 interim, interea, meanwhile. 
 
 interdum, sometimes. 
 
 unquam, ever. 
 
 tandem, at length. 
 
 quandocumque, whensoever 
 
 alias, at another time. 
 
 vixdum, 1 
 
 , > not yet. 
 
 nondum, J 9 
 
 nunquam, never. 
 
 semper, always. 
 
 (2.) How long ? 
 
 Quamdiu, how long ? 
 
 diu, long. 
 
 aliquamdiu, "1 , ., r .. 
 
 ,. n > some length of time. 
 
 aliquamtisper, J 9 J 
 
 tamdiu, so long. 
 
 tantisper, so long. 
 
 adhuc, hitherto. 
 
 in perpetuum, fir ever. 
 
 Quoties, how often ? 
 toties, so often. 
 quotidie, daily. 
 quotannis, yearly. 
 aliquoties, several times. 
 identidem, repeatedly. 
 interdum, ~\ 
 subinde, J 
 denuo, afresh. 
 
 [ now and then. 
 
 (3.) How often? 
 
 rursus, "1 
 
 > again. 
 iterum, J v 
 
 plerumque, usually. 
 
 saepe, often. 
 
 crebro, frequently. 
 
 raro, seldom. 
 
 semel, once. 
 
 bis, twice. 
 
 &c. &c. see §31. 
 
 C. Adverbs of Order. 
 
 Primum, primd, in the first place. 
 
 deinde, in the second place. 
 
 deinceps, next. 
 
 porro, ~\ 
 
 5- moreover. 
 praeterea, J 
 
 insuper, moreover. 
 tertio, thirdly. 
 
 postrTmo, \M+h 
 
 D. Adverbs of Quality, Manner, and Degrzh. 
 
 (1.) Interrogative: as, cur, quare, quamobrem, why ? num, an, uhe~ 
 ther ? quomodo, how ? &c. 
 
 (2.) Qualitative : as, bene, well; male, ill; pulchre, beautifully fortiter 
 bravely ; sapienter, wisely ; with many others derived from Ao\jective8. 
 
APPENDIX. 19 J 
 
 (3.) Intensive: as, magnopere, maxime, very greatly ; magis, nutre ; 
 multum, much ; oppido, perquam, valde, very ; lon^e, by far ; poth>sim am, 
 prsecipue, praesertim, especially ; omnino, penitus, prorsus, wholly ; pot iiis, 
 rather ; satis, enough ; nimis, nimium, too much, &c. 
 
 (4.) Diminutive: as, parum, too little; ferme, fere, pene, prope, pro- 
 pemodum, aknost ; paullum, paullulum, very little , paullo, by a little ; 
 segre, vix, scarcely, &c. 
 
 (5.) Limitative: as, duntaxat, modo, tantummodc, solum, tantum, 
 only ; plerumque, generally, &c. 
 
 (6.) Modal: as, adeo, ita. sic, so ; itidem, similiter, in like manner ; 
 aliter, secus, otherwise, &c. 
 
 (7.) Graduative : as, paullatim, sensim, &c, by degrees. 
 
 (8.) Distributive: as, sigillatim, separatim, individually; partira, 
 partly ; viritim, man by man, &c. 
 
 (9.) Collective : as, pariter, simul, una, together* Sec. 
 
 (10.) Affirmative : as, certe, etiam, ita, nae, plane, profecto, sane, 
 utique, yes, truly, &c. 
 
 (11.) Negative: as, haud, non, not, no ; nequaquam, haudquaquam, 
 neutiquam, minime, by no means, &c. 
 
 (12.) Dubitative : as, fors, forsan, forsitan, fortasse, fortassis, perhaps / 
 forte, by chance, &c. 
 
 (13.) Asseverative : as, pol, edepol, by Pollux; hercule, mehercule, 
 by Hercules, &c. 
 
 (14.) Definitive : as, nempe, nimirum, scilicet, videlicet, tc iv'.t, &<\ 
 
 V. CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 A. Co-ORDINATIVE. 
 
 (1.) Sociative : et, que, atque, ac, and ; etiam, quoque, item, also, 
 neque, nee, nor ; et . . . et, both . . . and', neque . . . neque, neither . . . nor. 
 
 (2 ) Adversative: at, ast, sed, autem, verum, vero, but; tamen, yet; 
 attamen, verumtamen, but yet ; atqui, but indeed ; enimvero, verum enim- 
 vero, but in truth. 
 
 (3.) Dissociative : aut, vel, ve, or ; aut. . . aut, vel . . . vel, ve . . . ve, 
 either . , . or. 
 
 (4.) Causal: nam, namque, enim, etenim, for ; enimvero, for in truth. 
 
 (5.) Conclusive: eo, ideo, idcirco, propterea, on that account ; itaque, 
 ergo, igitur, therefore ; proinde, accordingly; quocirca, quamobrem, quare, 
 quapropter, wherefore. 
 
 B. SUBORDINATIVE. 
 
 (1.) Local: ubi, where; unde, whence j quo, whither ; qua, in which 
 direction; quatenus, how far. 
 
 (2.) Temporal: quum, quando, ut, ubi, when; dum, donee, whitst, 
 until; quoad, as long as, until ; priusquam, antequam, before; postquam, 
 ut, after, since ; simul atque, as soon as ; quoties, as often as. 
 
 (3.) Causal: quum, quoniam, quandoquidem, since; quia, quod, be- 
 cause ; quippe, for that. 
 
 (4.) Conditional: si, if; nisi, unless; sin, but if; dum, dumir via 
 provided that ; sive, or if; seu . . . sive, whether . . . or. 
 
192 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 (5.) Concessive: etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, quarr/quam, quamvis, ut, licet, 
 Mough. 
 
 (6.) Final: ut, in order that; quo, that; ne, that ... not, lest ; ne*e, 
 neu, and that . . . not, and lest ; quominus, but that, that . . . not. 
 
 (7.) Consecutive : ut, so that ; quin, but that ; ^er£ . . . wo£. 
 
 (8.) Comparative: ut, sicut, velut, ceu, as; tamquam, quasi, as if 
 
 (9.) Conclusive: cur, quamobrem, quare, why, wherefore. 
 
 (10.) Modal: quomodo, quemadmodum, quam, how, &c. 
 
 (J 1.) Optative : utinam, si, O si, would that. 
 
 VI. INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 (1.) Invocative : O! heus ! ohe ! eho ! ehodum 1 O! ho! eja, cornel 
 (2. ) Monstrative : en, ecee, lo ! 
 
 (3.) Admirative • O! au ! hui ! hem 1 ehem ! vah 1 atat ! papaB 
 ha! oh! 
 
 (4. ) Jubilative : io 1 evoe 1 hurra ! eu 1 euge ! bravo ! well-done ! 
 (5.) Lamentative : hei ! heu 1 eheu ! ah ! vae ! proh ! alas, woe's me I 
 
 VII. ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 TnE Orthography of the Latin language is very unsettled, on account 
 of the uncertain etymology of many words, and the changes which took 
 place from time to time in the manner of speaking and writing. 
 
 The subjoined Table exhibits the preferable Orthography of some dis- 
 puted words : — 
 
 Write 
 
 
 Write 
 
 
 vaiietudo rather than valitudo. 
 
 lacrima 
 
 rather than lacryma. 
 
 genitrix ; 
 
 genetrix. 
 
 caecus 
 
 . . ccecus. 
 
 deminutio . 
 
 diminutio. 
 
 maereo 
 
 . . mcereo. 
 
 ceteri 
 
 casteri. 
 
 sollers 
 
 . solers. 
 
 frenum • 
 
 fraenum. 
 
 sollennis 
 
 . . solemnis. 
 
 heres • 
 
 haeres. 
 
 Juppiter 
 
 . Jupiter. 
 
 levis • 
 
 Ic-evis. 
 
 quattuor 
 
 . quatuor. 
 
 prelum • 
 
 praelum. 
 
 rettuli 
 
 . retuli. 
 
 fecundus . 
 
 foecundus. 
 
 conjux 
 
 . conjunx. 
 
 femina 
 
 fnemina. 
 
 have 
 
 ave. 
 
 fetus 
 
 foetus. 
 
 ahenum 
 
 . aenum. 
 
 fenus • 
 
 fcenus. 
 
 exsul 
 
 . . exul. 
 
 suboles • 
 
 soboles. 
 
 letum 
 
 . lethum. 
 
 hiems • 
 
 , hyems. 
 
 sulfur 
 
 . sulphur 
 
 ocius • 
 
 , ocyus. 
 
 tus 
 
 . . thus. 
 
 si'iva • 
 
 sylva. 
 
 ancora 
 
 . anchora. 
 
 stilus 
 
 stylus. 
 
 vieesimus 
 
 . . vigesimua. 
 
 Sulla 
 
 Sylla. 
 
 Caius 
 
 Gaius. 
 
 satira • 
 
 datura. 
 
 Cnaeus 
 
 Gn«us. 
 
 elipeus • 
 
 clypeus. 
 
 obsonor 
 
 . op so nor. 
 
A1T1SNDIX 
 
 19S 
 
 VUL ON THE DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 Syllables, if possible, begin with a Consonant, and end with a Vowel. 
 Hence — 
 
 1. A Consonant between two Vowels belongs to the latter syllable; as, 
 pa-ter, a-ma-tur. 
 
 2. When two or three Consonants come between two Vowels, they all 
 belong to the latter syllable, if they can begin a Latin or Greek word ; as, 
 ma-gnus, a-gri, c-sca, pe-stis, astra, A-bdera, pu-blicus, Ara-chne, Pa-phlago, 
 rhy-thmus t seri-psU asthma : if not, they are divided between the two 
 syllables; as, an-nus, cur-ro tel-lus, an-te t pun-ctum, ar-ctus, jux-ta. 
 
 Obs. 1. A compounded word is divided into the words which compose 
 it ; as, ab-avus : unless the first element is a mutilated word, when it 
 follows the general rule ; as, a-ni-madverto. 
 
 Obs. 2. An euphonic letter between the Compounds belongs to the 
 former syllable ; as, neg-otium, prod- est. But see § 94. N. 2. (\ ' > 
 
 IX. SIGLAKIUM ROMANUM. 
 
 Abbreviations used in the Latin Language. 
 
 1. VkM NOMINA. 
 
 A. Aulus 
 
 C. Caius 
 Cn. Cnaeus 
 
 D. Decimus. 
 
 K. Ka>so 
 L. Lucius 
 M. Marcus 
 M'. Manius. 
 
 P. Publius 
 Q. Quint us 
 Ser. Servius 
 Sex. Sextus. 
 
 Sp. Spurius 
 T. Titus 
 Ti. Tiberius, 
 
 2. Titles. 
 
 Cos. ConEul. Coss. Consules or 
 
 Consulibus. 
 Cos. Des. Consul Designatus. 
 D. Divus. 
 Imp. lmperator. 
 P. C. Patres Conscripti. 
 
 P. M. Pontifex Maximus. 
 
 Proc. Proconsul. 
 
 S. P. Q. R. Senatus Populusque 
 
 Romanus. 
 Tr. Pl. Tribunus Plebis. 
 
 3. In Voting on Trials and Elections. 
 
 A. Absolve C. Condemno. 
 N. L. Non liquet. 
 
 A. P. Antiquam (legem) probo. 
 V. R. Uti rogas. 
 
 4. On Tombs. 
 
 F. C. Faciundum curavit. 
 H. C. E. Hie conditus est. 
 H. S. E. Hie situs est. 
 
 Ob. Obiit. 
 
 P. C. Poni cura7it 
 
 V. Vixit 
 
194 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 5. Miscellaneous. 
 
 A. U. C. Anno Urbis Conditse. 
 
 D. D. Dono dedit. 
 
 D. D. D. Dat, dicat, dedicat. 
 
 D. M. Diis Manibus. 
 
 D. O. M. Deo Optimo Maximo. 
 
 F. Filius. 
 
 F. F. F. Felix, faustum, fortunatum. 
 
 S. C. Senatus Consultum. 
 
 S. D. Salutem dicit. 
 
 S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit. 
 
 S. V. B. E. E. Q. V. Si vales, bene 
 
 est, ego quoque valeo. 
 Tr. Pot. Tribunicia Potestate 
 
 6. Modern. 
 
 A. B. Artium Baccalaureus. 
 
 A. C. Anno Christi. 
 
 A. D. Anno Domini. 
 
 A. M. Artium Magister. Anno 
 
 Mundi. 
 i, C. n. ante Christum natum. 
 
 p. C. n. post Christum natum. 
 C P. P. C. Collatis pecuniis poni 
 
 curaverunt. 
 Cet. Cetera. 
 
 Cf. Confer or Conferatur. 
 Coll. Collato or Collatis. 
 Cod. Codex. Codd. Codices. 
 D. Doctor. 
 
 Del. Dele or Deleatur. 
 Ed. Editio. Edd. Editiones. 
 Etc. Etcetera, 
 h. e. hoc. est. 
 I. C. Jesus Christus. 
 Ictus. Jurisconsultus, 
 i. e id est. 
 
 i. q. idem quod. 
 
 L. or Lib. Liber. 
 
 L. B. Lectori benevolo. 
 
 1. c. loco citato. 
 
 1. 1. loco laudato. 
 
 leg. lege or legatur. 
 
 LL. D. Legum Doctor. 
 
 M. D. Medicina? Doctor. 
 
 N. B. Nota bene. 
 
 N. T. Novum Testamentum. 
 
 Obs Observa or observetur. 
 
 P. S. Postscriptum. 
 
 S. T. P. Sanetae Theologiae Pro- 
 
 fessor. 
 sc. scilicet, 
 s. v. sub voce, 
 vid. vide or videatur. 
 viz. videlicet. 
 V. Cel. Vir celebernmus. 
 V. CI. Vir Clarissimus. 
 V. TV Vetus Testamentum 
 
 X. THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 
 
 (a) The Roman Calendar agrees with the English, except in the manner 
 of naming the days of the month. Every Roman month had three 
 chief days; Calendar (Calends), Nona? (Nones), Idus (Ides.) The 
 Calends were always the 1st day of the month : the Nones were on 
 the 5th: the Ides on the 18th ; except in March, May, July, and 
 October, in which month the Nones were on the 7th, the Ides on the 
 15th. . 
 
 Martins, October, cum Maio Julius, exstant, 
 Quindecima in queis Lux facit Idus, septima Nonas. 
 
 These three days, the Calends, Nones, and Ides, were taken as points, 
 from which the other days were counted backwards. That is, the 
 Romans did ••>♦ 9(*y, such and such a day after., -Sec, but such and such, 
 a day before the Calenas, or Nones, or Ides. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 195 
 
 N 1 
 
 | j 
 
 1 
 
 W 3 Martius, 
 
 Maius 'Januaruts, Augus- Aprilis, 
 
 Ilnius, Februarius, 28 
 
 o^i Julius, 
 
 Octo- tus. December, | September, No- 
 
 Days — in every 
 
 g J BER, 31 D 
 
 ays. | 31 Days. 
 
 VEMBER, 30 
 
 Days. 
 
 fourth Year 29. 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 iCalendis 
 
 1 
 
 Calendis 
 
 
 Calendis. 
 
 -| 
 
 >• Calendis. 
 
 
 2 ja.d. VI. 1 
 
 
 Ja.d.IV. T § 
 
 
 a.d. IV. 1 
 
 9 
 
 T3 
 
 ad. IV. "| m 
 
 
 3 ja.d. V. 
 
 3 
 
 pUdd. in. \ § 
 
 5 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 j 
 
 
 a.d. III. L g 
 
 
 4 la.d. IV. 
 
 '§ 
 
 $ Pridie J £ 
 
 
 Pridie 
 
 *m 
 
 Pridie J © 
 Nonis * 
 
 
 1 » 
 
 ad. III. 
 
 A 
 
 
 Nonis 
 
 
 Nonis 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 6 
 
 Pridie J 
 
 
 2 
 
 a.d. VIII. 1 
 
 
 > 
 
 a.d. VIII. "I 
 
 
 
 a.d VIII. 1 
 
 *n 
 
 7 
 
 Nonis 
 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 t| 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 us 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 ' ?" 
 
 8 
 
 a.d. VIII. "1 
 
 
 > r ' 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 H 
 
 3 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 9 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 . 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 ' 5 
 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 J 
 
 «• 
 
 a.d. V. Is 
 
 
 10 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 re 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 
 ' la.d. IV. i •= 
 
 
 11 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 3 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 12 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 
 C 
 
 B 
 
 Pridie 
 
 
 p 
 
 Pridie. 
 
 
 < 
 
 Pridie j , 
 
 
 13 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 Idibus j 
 
 
 Idibus 
 
 . 
 
 Idibus 
 
 14 
 
 Pridie 
 
 
 f* 
 
 a.d. XIX. I 
 
 ' 
 
 
 ad. XVIII.l 
 
 " 
 
 
 ad. XVI. " 
 
 ' 
 
 
 15 
 
 I dibu s 
 
 
 
 a.d. XVIII. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XVII. 
 
 
 g 
 
 ad. XV. 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 a.d. XVII.l 
 
 
 
 a.d. XVII 
 
 
 
 ad. XVI. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XIV. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 a.d. XVI. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XVI 
 
 
 hq 
 
 a.d. XV. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XIII. 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 a.d. XV. 
 
 
 > 
 
 a.d. XV. 
 
 
 • 
 
 a.d. XIV. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XII. 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 a.d. XIV. 
 
 
 a.d. XIV 
 
 
 ? 
 
 a.d. XIII. 
 
 
 i* 
 
 a.d. XI. 
 
 m 
 
 
 20 
 
 a.d. XIII. 
 
 
 
 a.d. XIII 
 
 
 
 a.d. XII. 
 
 9 
 
 z_ 
 
 a.d. X. 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 a.d. XII. 
 
 
 g 
 
 a.d. XII 
 
 9 
 > 1 
 
 
 a.d. XI. 
 
 "3 
 
 
 a.d. IX. 
 
 >l 
 
 22 
 
 a.d. XI. 
 
 9 
 
 a.d. XI. 
 
 ft 
 
 a.d. X. 
 
 L - 
 
 > 
 
 a.d. VIII. 
 
 3 
 
 r 
 
 23 
 
 a.d. X. 
 
 . 9 
 
 
 a.d. X. 
 
 
 a.d. IX. 
 
 « 
 
 q 
 
 a.d VII. 
 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 a.d. IX. 
 
 * 
 
 ' > 
 
 a.d. IX. 
 
 5 
 
 
 a.d. VIII. 
 
 U 
 
 n 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 a.d. VIII. 
 
 
 
 
 a.d. VIII. 
 
 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 a.d. VII. 
 
 
 «-. 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 
 
 1 27 
 
 ad. VI. 
 
 
 % 
 
 a.d. VI. 
 
 
 5 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 
 M 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 
 a.d. V. 
 
 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 
 » Pridie 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 ad. IV. 
 
 
 < 
 
 a.d. IV. 
 
 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 30 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 
 a.d. III. 
 
 
 
 Pridie 
 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 Pridie 
 
 
 
 Pridie 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 [In Leap-year, Feb. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 24th (a.d. VI. Cal. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mart.) was twice 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 reckoned, — hence 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 this day was called 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 DIES BISSE.XTUS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and leap-year it- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Self ANNUS BISSEX- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TUS] 
 
 f b) If we take the month of January as a sample, the first day was Calendcs 
 Januarice. The 2d must be reckoned backwards from the Nones, 
 which in January fell on the 5th, Nonce Januaricc. But in this reckoning 
 the day of the Nones itself must be included. Therefore our 4th of 
 January was the 2d day before the Nones, called pridie (ante) Notias 
 Januarias. The 3d of January was tertio {.ante) Nonas Januarias ; the 
 2d, quarto {ante) Nonas Januarias ; or, abbreviated, III. Non. Jan., 
 IV. Non. Jan. To obtain the Roman name for the 6th of January, we 
 must begin to count backwards from the Ides, which fell on the 1 3th, 
 Idus Jauuarice. Thus, the 1 2th was pridie Id. Jan. ; the Uth, III. Id. 
 Jan.; the 10th, IV. Id. Jan. &c ; the 6th was therefore VIII. Id. Jan. 
 To obtain the name for the 14th of January, we must, count back from 
 the Calends of the next month, February, Cakndte Februaria. Thus, 
 January 31st was pridie Cal. Feb. ,• January 30th, III. Cal. Feb. &c &c.; 
 January 14th was, therefore, XIX. Cal. Feb. 
 
196 APPENDIX. 
 
 (c) From these observations it appears that we may find the Roman 
 name for any given English day by the following rules : — 
 
 (1) If the given day is between the Calends and Nones of the Roman 
 month, subtract its English number from the English number of 
 the day on which the Nones fall, increased by one: the remainder 
 will give that number before the Nones by which the day is called 
 in Latin. 
 
 (2) Similarly, if the given day is between the Nones and Ides of the 
 Roman month, subtract its English number from the English number 
 of the day on which the Ides fall, increased by one : the remainder will 
 give that number before the Ides by which the day is called in Latin. 
 
 Thus, to find the Roman name for the 4th of June, the Nones of 
 June falling on the 5th, subtract 4 from 5 + 1, or 6 ; the remainder 
 Is 2 (pridie) ; therefore, the 4th of June is pridie Non. Jun. Again ; 
 to find the Roman name for the 10th of May, the Ides of May falling 
 on the 15th, subtract 10 from 15 + 1, or 16; the remainder being 6, 
 the 10th of May is called VI. Id. Mai. 
 
 (3) But, if the given day is between the Ides of the given month and 
 the Calends of the next, then subtract its English number from the 
 total number of days in the given month, increased by two ; the 
 remainder will give that number before the Calends of the next 
 month by which the day is called in Latin. 
 
 Thus, to find the Roman name for the 18th of August: subtract 
 18 from 31 + 2, or 33, the remainder is 15, and August 18th is called 
 XV. Cal. Sept. For April 21st, subtract 21 from 30 + 2, or 32, 
 there remains 11; and April 21st is called XI. Cal. Mai. For 
 February 25th, subtract 25 from 28+2, or 30, there remains 5; 
 and February 25 th is called V. Cal. Mart. 
 (rf) As regards Construction, Calendis, Nonis, Idikus are used as Abla- 
 tives of time ; and when tertio, quarto, &c, Calendas, &c, are used, 
 the words die ante are understood. But Cicero does not use these 
 Matter phrases : he writes (for instance) ante diem tertium Calendar 
 Jantt arias, or, abbreviated, a. d. II I. Cal. Jan. to express December 30th, 
 and so in every case. 
 
 Here the Preposition ante has, by a corruption of custom, quitted its 
 proper place before Calendas, to stand before diem which it does not 
 govern. So merely idiomatic is this mode of expression, that we find 
 it used in dependence on Prepositions ; as Consul Latinas in ante diem 
 tertium Idus Sextiles edixit. — Liv. De Quinto fiatre nuntii nobis tristes 
 venerant ex ante diem Non. Jun. usque ad pridie Cal. Sept. — Cic. 
 (e) The names of the months are Adjectives agreeing with mensis under- 
 stood : Januarius, Februarius, Martins, Aprilis, Mains, Junius, Julius, 
 (so called fiom Julius Csesar, but before his time Quintilis), Augustus 
 (so called from Augustus Caesar, but before his time Sextilis), Sep- 
 tember, October, November, December. With the words Calendas, Nonce, 
 ldus, they are always used attributively, never as Possessive Genitives ; 
 as, Natus est Augustus IX. Calendas Octobres. — Suet. Memoria te- 
 nent, me a. d. XIII. Calendas Januarias principem revocandce liberVdh 
 fuisse. — Cic. Capuam venire jussi sumus ad Nonas Februarias, — Cic 
 VII. Idus Maias cestaiis initium. — CoLUM 
 
appendix:. 197 
 
 XL COMPOUND NUMERALS. 
 
 <l. The General Rules for writing Compound Numbers, Cardinal, 
 Ordinal, and Distributive, are as follows : — 
 
 (1) In Compound Numbers less than 20, either the smaller number 
 without et precedes the larger, or the larger with et precedes the smaller : 
 as, Nos Tyndaritani in septemdecim populis Sicilies numeramur. — Cic. Oc- 
 tavo decimo atafis anno Cn. Pompeius, nono decimo Ccesar Octavianus civ ilia 
 
 be/la sustinuerunt. — Tac. Gallinis ova terna dena subjicito (Estate Plin. 
 
 Roscius fvndos decern et tres reliquit. — Cic. Licet dicere decimus et Sep- 
 timus pro septimus decimus. — Prisc. 
 
 (2) In Compound Numbers greater than 20, either the smaller num- 
 ber with et precedes the larger, or the larger without et precedes the 
 smaller : as, Romulus septem et triyinta reynavit annos. — Cic. Macedo 
 Alexander tertio et tricesimo anno mortem obiit. — Cic. Plinius scripsit sub 
 Nerone natural historiarum libros triyinta septem. — Plin. Denies triceni 
 bini viris attribuuntur. — Plin. 
 
 (3) In Compound Numbers above 100, the larger with or without et 
 generally precedes the smaller : as, Leontinus Goryias centum et septem 
 complevit annos. — Cic. Annum maynum esse voluerunt omnibus planetis 
 in eundem recurrentibus locum, quod Jit post duodecim millia nonyentos quin~ 
 quayinta quatuor annos. — Cic. Sercentesimum et quadrayesimum annum 
 urbs Roma ayebat, quum primum Cimbrorum audita sunt arma. — Tac 
 Ohjmpiade centesimd qnartd-decimd Lysippus fuit. — Plin. Aristidis 
 
 arbitrio quadrinyena et sexayena talenta quutannis Delum sunt collata. — 
 Nep. 
 
 (4) The Thousands are expressed either by prefixing the numerical 
 adverbs bis, ter, &c, to mille (a construction chiefly found in poetry), or 
 by prefixing the cardinal numbers to millia : as, duo millia, tria millia, &c. 
 
 Millia (better written milia), is generally followed by a Genitive, as 
 in example to § 171.(6); but, if smaller numbers intervene between 
 millia and the Substantive, the latter will often stand in the same case as 
 the Numeral : as, Tria millia et septinyenti pedites ierunt. — Liv. 
 
 (5) The Numbers above 100,000 are expressed by the Numeral Ad- 
 verbs joined to centum millia or centena millia, as stated in the following 
 passage : Non erat apud antiquos numerus ultra centum millia ; itaque et 
 hodie multiplicantur luce, ut decies centena millia aut sazpiiis dicantur. — 
 Plin. 
 
 b. Unus is often used in Compound Numbers for the Ordinal primus, 
 as in the first example to B. 
 
 c. The numbers compounded with 8 and 9 are commonly expressed by 
 a subtraction of duo and unus from the next multiple of 10: as, duodevi- 
 ginti (duodevicesimus), 18; undeviyinti (undevicesimus), 19; duodetriyinta 
 (duodetricesimus), 28; undetriyinta (undetricesimus), 29; &c. &c. : duo- 
 decentum (duodecentesimus ), 98 ; undtcentum {undecente$imus), 99. 
 
198 APPENDIX. 
 
 XII. ROMAN MONEY. 
 
 a. The As, or Libra, was originally the weight of a pound of 1 2 ounces 
 (uncice), hence called as libralis, and as grave. It was divided into parts 
 which were named according to their quotity, or number of ounces they 
 contained, as follows : — 
 
 Uncia = 1 
 
 oz 
 
 0r T5 
 
 of the As. 
 
 Septunx = 7 
 
 oz 
 
 or ^ of the As 
 
 Sextans = 2 
 
 
 or J 
 
 
 Bes = 8 
 
 
 orf 
 
 Quadrans = 3 
 
 
 or J 
 
 
 Dodrans = 9 
 
 
 or \ 
 
 Triens = 4 
 
 
 or » 
 
 
 Dextans =10 
 
 
 or § 
 
 Quincunx = 5 
 
 
 or T 5 3 
 
 
 Deunx =11 
 
 
 or\ 
 
 Se v mssis = 6 
 
 
 or I 
 
 
 
 
 
 The etymology of bes is doubtful (some suppose bis triens) : dodrans is 
 /or de-quadrans (As — \) : dextans for de-sextans (As — £) : deunx (As— 
 uncia). The Uncia was also subdivided : viz. 
 
 Sextula =- J of Uncia = ^ of As. 
 Scrupula *. 1 ' _- = ^ 
 Siliqua = T ^ — = T7 ^ 
 
 Semuncia = ^ of Uncia = ^ of As. 
 Duella = J — = 3 >s 
 Sicilicus = \ — pes ^ 
 
 Sescuncia or Sescunx = 1% uncia = £ quadrans = fa As. StsquiaUera 
 ratio = 1 : 1^ = 2 : 3. Of the divisions of the As, the uncia, sextans, 
 quadrans, triens, quincunx, semis, were represented by copper coins. 
 
 b. As was the Roman unit, and was used for any whole divided into 
 12 equal parts; which parts were called uncice. Hence it was applied to 
 measure length, capacity, &c, as well as weight : and " inch," or the 
 12th part of a foot, as well as " ounce," the 12th part of a lb., is derived 
 from uncia. It was also used to calculate interest. Thus (interest being 
 paid monthly at the rate of so much per 100 Asses): 
 
 Uncice usurce = T ^ per cent per month = 1 per cent per annum. 
 Sextantes = J — — =2 
 
 Quadrantes = \ — — = S 
 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 Asses usurai = I per cent per month = 12 per cent per annum. 
 Asses usura were also called centesimce ; and bince centesimal = 2 per 
 cent per month = 24 per cent; so quaterna centesimas = 48 per cent 
 per annum. Horace says : Quinas hie capiti mercedes exsecat (i. e. 
 quinas centesimas). (This man slices off 60 per cent from the capital ; 
 i. e. in lending a sum of money he deducts from it interest at the rate of 
 5 per cent per month = 60 per cent per annum.) The meaning of 
 unciarium foenus, which was the yearly interest legalised by the Twelve 
 Tables, has been disputed. In the Dictionary of Greek and Roman An- 
 tiquities, it is understood to mean 1 uncia per as m 8J per cent per 
 irnium. 
 
 c. Here* ex asse means heir to the whole estate. 
 Herts ex dvunce — heir to \\ of the estate. 
 Heres ex semisse, or j _ heir tQ . rf thp ^^ 
 Heres ex di\ mdia parte J ■ 
 
 &c. && 
 
APPENDIX. 199 
 
 d. Fractions might also be expressed by the Ordinals as Denominators 
 and the Cardinals for Numerators (above 1). Thus, £ is dimidia pars . 
 \ tertia pars, &c. ; | sexta pars or dimidia tertia ( ; ) x J) ; \ octava pars 01 
 dimidia quarta (\ x \), &c. So ^ was tertia septima (3 x j). Again, § is 
 either duce tertia, or duce partes, or dimidia et sexta (} + b = §)' And J is 
 tres quartce, or ires partes, or dimidia et quarta Q + £ = ^). 
 
 e. The Sestertius (Nummus), or sesterce, was a silver coin equal to 2$ 
 asses, and | of the deiiarius. Some derive its symbol HS from IIS (2 J), 
 others from LLS (Libra Libra semis'), which comes to the same thing. 
 
 The Sestertium ( = 1000 sestertii) was not a coin, but a sum, and is only 
 used in the Plural Number. 
 
 Some suppose that the Substantive joined with the Numeral Adverbs 
 decies, vicies, &c, is a Neuter Noun Sestertium, only used in the Singular, 
 and signifying 100,000 sesterces. Be this correct or not, the practical 
 rule for the student's guidance is as follows : — 
 
 (1) Sestertius, or Sestertii (Plur.) (often expressed by HS.) joined 
 with the Cardinal or Distributive Numbers, denotes so many nummi ses- 
 tertii (coins cal'ed sesterces) as in the examples cited § 172. (6). 
 
 (2) Sestertia, in the Plural (also often represented by HS.) joined 
 with the Cardinal or Distributive Numbers, denotes so many 1000 nummi 
 sestertii : as, in the examples cited (c). 
 
 (3) The Numeral Adverbs, joined with (or understanding) sestertii 
 (Gen. sing.), sestertium, nummum, or HS., denote so many 100,000 nummi 
 sestertii, as in the examples to Obs. When an amount, is described by 
 more than one of these Adverbs, they must be added together if the 
 larger Numeral stands first, but multiplied when the smaller is first ; 
 care being taken not to reckon the centena millia, which is under- 
 stood, more than once in the whole amount. Thus, mil/ies quingentie* 
 = 150,000,000 sesterces ; but qnaterdecies millies = 1 ,400,000,000 sesterces. 
 When the numbers are in cipher, it is often difficult to know whether 
 sestertii or sestertia are meant. A distinction is sometimes made by a 
 line over the Numeral. 
 
 Thus, HS.X = Sestertii decern. 
 H S. X = Sestertia decern, 
 H S. X = Sestertii decies. 
 Wurm gives the following rule : — When the Numbers are divided 
 into three classes by points, the right-hand division indicates units, the 
 second thousands, the left-hand hundreds of thousands. 
 
 Thus, III. XII. DC =5300,000+ 12,000 + 600 = 312,600 sesterces- 
 But these distinctions are not strictly observed in manuscripts. 
 
 XIII. METRES. 
 A. List of Feet. 
 
 (a) Of two Syllables — 
 v.^ Pyrrhichius : pat£r. I -w Trochaeus : ailrilf* 
 
 v* Iambus: dmdnt. I — Spond«us: lat&$, 
 
200 APPENDIX. 
 
 \0) Of three syllables — 
 
 * Creticus : dixSrnnt, 
 
 - Bacchius : regSbdnt. 
 
 «-» Antibacchius : rexusi. 
 
 - Molossus: dicebds. 
 
 w *4 *» Tribrachys . rSgttrti. 
 
 * ^ ^ Dactyl us : cdrpdrd. 
 
 v w - Anapaestus : animds. 
 
 w-^ Amphibrachys: latlnus. 
 
 (c) Of four syllables — 
 */ v-» w v Proceleusmaticus : hominibus, 
 -\j\j sj Paeon Primus : cbndidimus. 
 k/ - w» yj Pa?on Secundus : dmdbimus. 
 w w/ - v> Paeon Tertius : nemdrdlts. 
 v \j \j - Paeon Quartus : regimini. 
 \j \j — — Ionicus a Minore : metuentes. 
 
 — - vv Ionicus a Majore : terrebimiis, 
 w — w — Diiambus : protervitas. 
 
 — ^ - o Ditrochaeus : cfindidlsse, 
 
 — v v " Choriambus : uppdsitls. 
 v — ^ Antispastus : regebdmur. 
 
 V Epitritus Primus : dmdvlsti. 
 
 — vy — Epitritus Secundus : audiebds, 
 
 — - v - Epitritus Tertius : dudlverdnt. 
 
 w» Epitritus Quartus : rexissemus. 
 
 Dispondeus : suspexerdnt. 
 
 The Trochee is also called Choreus, the Cretic Amphimacer 
 
 B. Arsis. 
 
 As Arsis properly falls on a long syllable, in Iambic Metre it will fall 
 on the second syllables of the feet, in Dactylic and Trochaic on the first. 
 When a long syllable having Arsis is resolved into two short ones, the 
 Arsis falls on the first of these; hence, when a Tribrach is put for an 
 Iambus, the Arsis is on its second syllable ; when for a Trochee, on its 
 first. Caesura after Arsis is called strong ,- after Thesis weak. 
 
 C. Metrical Terms. 
 
 Two feet (Dipodia) make a metre in Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic 
 Verses, one foot in Dactylic and other Measures. 
 
 A Verse of one Metre is called Monometer, 
 
 — two — Dimeter, 
 
 — three — Trimeter. 
 
 — four — Tetrameter, 
 
 — five — Pentameter, 
 
 — six — Hexameter. &c. 
 
 Two feet and a syllable in Dactylic, Iambic, and Trochaic Verses are 
 called Penthemimeris, a Penthemimer : as, Arboribusque comes. — Beatus 
 tile. — Truditur dies. Three feet and a syllable are called Hephtliemimeris, 
 a Hephthemimer : as, Quid faciat latas segetes. — Locas sub ipsum funus.— 
 Truditur dies die. So Trihemimeris, one foot and a syllable ; Ennehemi- 
 rneris, four feet and a syllable. Anacrusis is a syllable in Thesis at the be- 
 ginning of certain kinds of verse. A Base is a Trochee (or Spondee 
 with Arsis on the first syllable) at the beginning of certain verses. 
 
APPENDIX. 201 
 
 D. Dactylic Hexameter. 
 
 a. The Dactylic Hexameter is also called Senarius from having sil 
 feet ( sent pedes) and Heroicus, because the deeds of Heroes were celebrated 
 in this measure by the oldest poets, Homer, Hesiod, &c, and afterwards 
 by their Latin imitators Ennius, Virgil, &c. 
 
 b. When a Spondee occurs in the 5th place (which is a rare licence, and 
 seldom to be imitated) a Dactyl generally precedes it : as, 
 
 Cara deum soboles, magnum Jovis incrementum. — Virg. 
 But not always : as, 
 
 Cum patribus populoque, Penatibus et magnis DU. 
 
 e. Such lines as these, being without Caesura, are bad and inadmissible t 
 Hastis campus longis circum splendet et horret. 
 Lumina dilabentem coelo ducitis annum. 
 Efficientia cernite dissociabile marmor. 
 
 d. The following rules are also to be borne in mind by the young com- 
 poser of Heroic Hexameters : — 
 
 ( 1 ) A Spondaic word, followed by a stop, and belonging in sense to the 
 
 preceding verse, seldom begins an Hexameter : as, 
 
 Spiramenta linunt, fucoque etjloribus oras 
 
 Explent, | collectumque haic ipsa ad munera gluten. — Viae 
 
 This may, however, be done for the sake of emphasis : as, 
 
 Extinctum Nymphce crudeli funere Daphnin 
 
 Flebant: \ vos coryli testes et fiumina Nymphis. — Virg. 
 
 (2) Dialysis after the 2d foot is very rare, and to be avoided : as, 
 
 Scilicet omnibus \ est labor impendendus, et omnes. — Virg. 
 Unless the 2d foot ends with a monosyllable or a pyrrhich : as, 
 
 Experiar, tu | deinde jubeto certet Amyntas. — Virg. 
 
 Ecce duas tibU \ Daphni, duas altaria Phcebo. — Virg. 
 The only common exception to this rule is when inter or intra forms 
 the 2d foot, followed by a monosyllabic pronoun : as, 
 
 Talibus inter se dictis ad tecta subibant. — Virg. 
 
 If an elided syllable follows the 2d foot, it is commonly followed by a 
 monosyllabic particle : as, 
 
 Turn durare solum \\ et discludere Nerea ponto.—VlRQ» 
 But not always, as, 
 
 Quin etiam patrid || excussos infesta per undas. — Virg. 
 
 (3) Verses with only weak Caesuras in the first four feet are rare, but 
 when occasionally introduced they contribute to the melody of the 
 versification : as, 
 
 Dicemus, Daphninque twim tollemus ad astra. 
 
 Daphnin || ad astra \\feremus 9 || amavit nos quoque Daphnis. — Virg. 
 
202 APPENDIX. 
 
 (4) The 3d foot may not consist of a single word. Such verses as tha 
 
 following art therefore bad : 
 
 Et liquidi simul ignes, his exordia primis. 
 
 Non aliter quam fervida qui freta remige findit. 
 The following exception occurs in Virgil : 
 
 Summa leves hinc nescio qua dulcedine lata. 
 But nescio quis was considered as equivalent to a single word, 
 
 (5) Verses without Caesura in the 3d foot are comparatively rare : as, 
 
 Eumenides, quibus anguineo redimita capillo. — Catull. 
 
 (6) A Verse, which has the strong Hephthemimeral Caesura without the 
 
 strong Penthemimeral, generally has the strong Trihemimeral : as, 
 
 Non unquam || gravis cere domum || mihi dextra redibat. — Virg. 
 rarely the weak Trihemimeral without a Penthemimeral : as, 
 
 Degeneremque || Neoptolemum || narrare memento. — Virg. 
 
 rarely the weak Penthemimeral without a Trihemimeral : as, 
 
 Orphei Calliopea || Lino || formosus Apollo. — Virg. 
 Armentarius Afer || agit || tectumque Laremque. — Virg. 
 
 rarely the two weak Caesuras together ; as, 
 
 Una Eurusque || Notusque || ruunt, || creberque procellis. — Virg, 
 
 (7) Dialysis with stop after the 3d foot is rare, and to be very sparingly 
 
 introduced : as, 
 
 Montibus audiri fragor : | et resonantia longd. — Virg. 
 
 (8) The strong Ennehemimeral Caesura (after the first syllable of the 5th 
 
 foot) is rare and harsh : as, 
 
 Nee saturare Jimo pingui pudeat || sola, neve. — Virg. 
 
 When the verse ends with a quadrisyllable word, forming an Ionic a 
 Minore, this Caesura is unavoidable : as, 
 
 Per connubia nostra, per inceptos \\ hymenceos. — Virg. 
 
 (9) Verses, in which the latter half makes a double rhyme to the former, 
 
 should be avoided : as, 
 
 Trajicit : i t verbis virtntem illude superbis. — Virg. 
 
 (10) The sound and rhythm of Verses may often be suited to the sense; 
 thus Virgil uses Spondees to express slowness and difficulty ; Dae* 
 tyls to mark rapidity and ease : as, 
 
 (a) Tlli inter sese magna vi brachia tollunt. — Virg. 
 Ter sunt conati imponere Pelio Ossan 
 Scilicet, atque Ossie frondosum involvere Olympum. — Vino. 
 
 (&) Quadrupedante putrem sonitu quatit ungula campum. — ViivO. 
 Sedfugit interea, fugit irrepn rabile tempus. — Virg. 
 jAibitvr et labetur in omne volubilis cecum. — Hor. 
 
APPENDIX. 203 
 
 A final Monosyllable often expresses ponderousness : as, 
 
 Sternitur exanimisqae tremens procumbit humi bos. — Vibg. 
 
 Crowded Elisions, especially Ecthlipses, give a harsh and rugged 
 sound to a Verse, and are sometimes used where the idea conveyed is of 
 that character : as in the well-known description of the Cyclops : 
 
 Monstrum horrendum, informe, tngens, cui lumen ademptum.— Virg. 
 
 Both the pauses, Caesura, and Dialysis, are often accommodated to the 
 sense with great effect and beauty. 
 
 E. Dactylic Pentameter. 
 
 a. A trisyllabic word at the end of the Pentameter is ungraceful, and 
 to be avoided, though sometimes found : as, 
 
 Abdita quce senis fata canit pedibus. — Tibull. 
 
 A quadrisyllable or quinquesyllabic termination is not sc ungraceful as 
 the trisyllabic, but it occurs seldom in Ovid, and is not generally proper 
 for imitation : as, 
 
 Maxima de nihilo nascitur historia. — Propebt. 
 Lis est cum forma magna pudicitice. — Ov. 
 
 b. The following additional rules for the Pentameter will be found ire- 
 ful by the young composer : — 
 
 (1 ) The first Penthemimer seldom ends with an Iambic word ; but when 
 
 it does, the 1st foot is usually a Spondee: as, 
 
 Pascebatque suas ipse senator oves. — Ov. 
 But not always : as, 
 
 Si tibi cura mei 9 sit tibi cura tut. — Ov. 
 
 (2) The first Penthemimer seldom begins with a spondaic word ; seldom 
 
 contains two spondees; and begins more frequently with a dactyl 
 than with a spondee. 
 
 (3) Elisions in the second Penthemimer are inelegant : before the final 
 
 disyllable an elision, such as in the following verse, is to be entirely 
 avoided : 
 
 Quis scit an hcec scevas t/gridas insula habet? — Ov. 
 
 (4) The final disyllabic word should be either a verb, a substantive, or a 
 
 pronoun (personal or possessive). An adverb is seldom placed 
 there ; an adjective or participle very seldom, unless as a predicate 
 or with a strong emphasis : as, 
 
 Hoc faciet positce te mihi, terra, levem. — Ov. 
 
 (5) The verse seldom ends with a short vowel : as, 
 
 Qualiter abjectd de nive manat aqua. — Ov 
 
204 APPENDIX. 
 
 (6) The Penthemimers may end with words that rhyme singly : as, 
 
 Hue ades, et nitidas casside solve comas. — Ov. 
 But the double or Leonine rhyme is to be avoided : as, 
 
 Qucerebant fiavos per nemus omne favos. — Ov. 
 
 (7) The word preceding the final disy liable should not be a monosyllable 
 
 F. The Elegiac Distich. 
 
 a. Sentences are not often carried on from one distich to another at 
 all : but when they are, there should be some kind of pause in the sense. 
 Attributives are not to be so separated from the words which they 
 qualify ; but verbs and other predicates are occasionally so divided from 
 their subjects. As, 
 
 Languor et immodici nullo sub vindice somni, 
 
 Aleaque, et multo temporu quassa mero, 
 Eripiunt omnes animo sine vulnere nervos : 
 
 Adjluit incautis insidiosu* amor. — Ov. 
 
 b. The following additional Rules for the Elegiac Distich may also be 
 useful : — 
 
 (1) The Elegiac Hexameter is much more restricted in its rhythms than 
 
 the Heroic. One of the Caesuras, strong or weak, in the 3d foot, 
 is almost always present : almost always, too, either the strong 
 Penthemimeral or the strong Hephthemimeral Ceesura. A Dia- 
 lysis at the end of the 2d foot, after a word of more than two 
 times, is bad. Ennehemimeral Caesuras (except after a mono- 
 syllable), spondees in the fifth place, terminations by a word of 
 more than three syllables, &c, must be avoided. 
 
 (2) A pause in the sense is found, oftener than not, at the close of the 
 
 Hexameter. Ovid very seldom intermixes the sense from the be- 
 ginning to the end of a distich : and when he does so, he takes care 
 to make the arrangement of words as neat and perspicuous as pos- 
 sible : as, 
 
 Roma, nisi immevsum vires promdsset in orbem, 
 Stramineis esset nunc quoque densa casis. — Ov. 
 
 (S) If the sense is carried on to the first word of the Pentameter, after 
 which is a pause, that word is usually a dactyl, often a trochee, 
 seldom a spondee or molossus, more rarely yet a choriambus. 
 
 (4) Elisions should be sparingly and never harshly used. It has been 
 observed that in the first 1000 lines of the Fasti there are cut off 
 only 4 final syllables in m, 7 long, and 39 short vowels, making a 
 total of 50, or an average of only one elision in 20 lines. And of 
 these 33 are before the word est. 
 
APPENDIX. 205 
 
 G. Otheu Metres used by Poets of the Augustan Age. 
 
 I SINGLE VERSES. 
 
 f Metres consisting of one sort of Rhythm (as the Heroic) are called 
 Monocola.) 
 
 a. Dactylic Rhythms. 
 
 (1) Dimeter Hypercatalecticus (Penthemimcr^ Archilochius Minor 
 consisting of two Dactyls and a syllable ; 
 
 1 2 
 
 •- \«» w I — V^ S^ I "■ 
 
 j4rbori\busqve co\m<B. — Hor. 
 
 (2) Tetrameter Alcmanius, having a Dactyl in the 3d and a Spondee 
 in the 4th foot. 
 
 12 3 4 
 
 -_~\z-\--\-- 
 
 Mobili\bus po\maria \ rivis. — Hor. 
 
 In the case of a Proper Name Horace has a Spondee in the 3d foot: a*. 
 
 Menso\rem cohi\bent, Ar\chyta. 
 
 b. Trochaic Rhythms. 
 
 (1) Dimeter Catalecticus ; three Trochees and a Syllable: 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 Non tra\ bes Ify\?netti\<B. — Hor. 
 
 (2) Alcaicus Enneasyllabus, or Trochaic Dimeter with Ananrusk; 
 
 Anacr 12 3 4 
 
 Per\\Jura | pvgna\ces A\chivos. — Hor. 
 In Horace, the fifth syllable is always long ; the first seldom short. 
 
 (3) The Tetrameter Catalectic was used by the Greek Tragic and 
 Comic Poets. The Latin Poem (of uncertain age and author) called 
 Pervigilium Veneris, is a Monocolon in this Metre ; of which the follow- 
 ing is the scheme : 
 
 12 3 4 5b 
 
 • \* | — s«» ! ~ sj II "* M 
 
 Cras a\met qui \nunquam a\mavit [} qvique a\mavit\ urtw a\meL 
 Dialysis after the 4th foot is essential in general. 
 
206 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 c. Iambic Rhythms. 
 (1) Dimeter Acatalecticus; 
 
 Forti | seque\mur pec\tore. — Hon. 
 Canidi\a tra\ctavit | dapes.\ — Hor. 
 
 (2) Trimeter Catalecticus : 
 2 
 
 -il--|-:h-h-|- 
 
 Med j reni\det in | domo J lacu\nar. — Hob. 
 Trahunt\que sic\cas ma\chince | canjnas. — Hor. 
 There is always a Penthemimeral Caesura. 
 
 (3) Trimeter Acatalecticus, or Senarius, which sometimes consists of 
 six Iambic feet (Hexapodia Iambica): as, 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 
 
 Suis J et ip\sa Ro\ma vi\ribvs | ruit. — Hor. 
 Gemel\le Cas\tor et \ gemel\le Cas\toris. — Catull. 
 But usually Spondees are admitted into the 1st, 3d, and 5th places; a 
 Tribrach may stand in any place but the last for an Iambus ; a Dactyl in 
 the 1st place, and an Anapaest in the 1st (rarely in the 5th), for a Spondee. 
 
 KJ — 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 \j — 
 
 — \J c» 
 •*/ \J — 
 
 
 -WW 
 
 
 v \j — 
 
 Pater\na ru\ra bo\bus ex\ercet | suis. — Hor. 
 
 Aliti\bus at\que cani\bus homi\cidam Hec\torem Hor. 
 
 Pavidum\que lepo\rem et ad\venam | laqueo [ gruem. — Hor. 
 
 A strong Penthemimeral or Hephthemimeral Cassura is necessary to the 
 harmony of the Verse. This Verse may form a Metrum Monocolon. 
 
 (4) Tetrameter Catalecticus Hipponacteus : as 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
 
 Depren\sa na\vis in | mart || vesa\nien\te ven\to. — Catull. 
 
 There is a Dialysis after the 4th foot. This Verse forms a Metrum 
 M wocolon, not used by Horace. 
 
 V5) Scazon, or Choliambus; which is an Iambic Trimeter with a 
 Spondee in the 6th, and an Iambus in the 5th, place : as, 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 
 
 Miser | Catul\!e, de\sinas \ inep\tire. — Catull. 
 
 Used as a Metrum Monocolon, but not by Horace. 
 
 Obs. The Comic Poets, Plautus and Terence, allowed themselves 
 great liberties in the construction of Trochaic and Iambic Verses, ad- 
 mitting Spondees, Dactyls, and Anapaests, in every place but the last, 
 
APPENDIX. 207 
 
 sometimes even Proceleusmatics ; with frequent Hiatus and other li- 
 cences : as. 
 
 (a) Juben' an\non ju\bes as\titui\ aulas, \ patinas | elui. — Plaut. 
 Ad te ad\venio\ spem, sa\lutem I consilium, auxili\um appe\tens. 
 
 — Ter. 
 (6) Hoc pater\ac domi\nus in\terest : \ hoc qui \facit y 
 Fatea | tur ne | scire im \peru \re li \ beris. — Ter. 
 
 The Iambic Trimeters of the fabulist Phsedrus resemble these, but take 
 fewer feet of three syllables and fewer licences. 
 
 d. Ionic Rhythms. 
 
 ( 1 ) Ionicus a minore Dimeter Acatalecticus. 
 
 1 2 
 
 sj v | ww — 
 
 Patruce ver\bera Ungues. — Hon. 
 
 (2) Ionicus a minore Tetrameter Acatalecticus. 
 
 12 3 4 
 
 |v — -I I 
 
 Miserarum est J neque amori J dare ludwn, \ neque dulci. — Hob. 
 
 e. Mixed Rhythms. 
 
 1. Logaoedic. The Logacedic Rhythm is that in which Dactyls are 
 followed by Trochees. An Anacrusis or a Base often begins it, and some 
 times a Choriambus is inserted, 
 
 (1) Adonius, consisting of Dactyl and Trochee (Dactylus simple:* 
 simpliciter Trochaicus) : 
 
 1 2 
 
 "\j \j I — \j 
 
 Risit A\pollo. — Hor. 
 
 (2) Aristophanius, consisting of Dactyl and two Trochees (Dactylus 
 simplex dupliciter Trochaicus) : 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 -Jwl-wJ — 
 Lydia | die per | omnes. — Hor. 
 After the Dactyl there is always Dialysis. 
 
 (3) Pherecrateus, consisting of an Adonius preceded by a Base, which, 
 in Horace, is always in Spondaic ; in Catullus, almost ilways Trochaic : 
 
 Base 1 2 
 
 : - B _, VW |- v 
 
 Vix du\ rare ca\rina. — Hor. 
 Lute\\umve pa\paver. — Catull. 
 
 (4) Glyconeus, consisting of Dactyl, Trochee, and Syllable ( Dactylus 
 simplex dupliciter Trochaicus Catalecticus); preceded by a Base, which, 
 in Horace, is almost always Spondaic: in Catullus, usually Trochaic . 
 
 Base 1 2 
 
 -311— -I— |- 
 
 Mater || sceva Cu\pidi\num. — Hor. 
 Tardat || ingenu\us pu\dor. — Catull* 
 
208 APPENDIX. 
 
 (5) Asclepiadeus Minor, consisting of a Choriambus preceded bv n 
 Spondaic Base, and followed by Dactylus simplex dupliciter Trocliaicus 
 Catalecticus : 
 
 Base 1 2 3 
 
 --|-vw-|-«v|-m|- 
 
 M<Bce\\nas atavis \ edite | regi\bus. — Hor. 
 
 Horace almost always has a Dialysis after the Choriambus. An 
 Elision rarely follows it : as, 
 
 Audi\\tam modere\re arbori\bus fi\dem. — Hor. 
 
 It is used as Metrum Monocolon. 
 
 (6) Asclepiadeus Major, which differs from A. Minor only in having 
 two successive Choriambic feet instead of one, 
 
 Base 1 2 3 4 
 
 __H 1 |_„ wl . w |_ 
 
 Base 
 Nullam || Vare sacra | vite prius | severis \ arbo\rem. — Hor. 
 
 Horace has a Dialysis after each Choriambus. This is used as Metrum 
 Monocolon. 
 
 (7) Alcaicus Decasyllabus, consisting of two Dactyls and two Trochees 
 (Dactylus duplex dupliciter Trochaicus) : 
 
 1 2 3 4 
 
 — vw | -v/v* } — w | -v^ 
 
 Nee vete\res agi\tantur j orni. — Hor. 
 If there is a Dialysis after the first dactyl, there should be none after 
 the second. Such a line as the following would be bad : 
 
 Omnia perfidus ille dixit. 
 A weak Caesura in the second dactyl is generally to be avoided : Horace 
 has few such verses as 
 
 O Thaliarche \\ merum diota. — Hor. 
 Me dehor ea || levesque malvoz. — Hor. 
 
 (8) Phalaecius Hendecasyllabus, consisting of a Dactyl and threw 
 Trochees (Dactylus simplex tripliciter Trochaicus) preceded by a Base 
 (usually Spondaic), is a Metrum Monocolon, not used by Horace. 
 
 Base 1 2 3 4 
 
 Soles | occide\re et re\dire \ possunt. — Catull. 
 
 Instead of the Spondaic base we sometimes find an Iambus, seldom a 
 Trochee : as, 
 
 Minister vetuli, puer, Falerni. — Catull. 
 Aridd modd pumice expolitum. — Catull. 
 
 A Spondee is sometimes put for the Dactyl, but very inharmoniously. 
 This Verse usually has either Dialysis after the second foot, or a 
 Cwsura after the first syllable of the third. 
 
APPENDIX. 209 
 
 (9) Archilochius Major, consisting of a Dactylic Tetrameter (always 
 with a Dactyl in the 4th place) and three Trochees (or Versus Ithy- 
 phallicus). 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 7 
 
 -w-U-|--|--.-,|-y|--|-- 
 
 Solvitur | acris hi\ems gra\td vice\\veris | et Fa\voni. — Hor. 
 Dialysis after the 4th foot is essential. 
 
 (10) Sapphicus Minor, consisting of a Dactyl and two Trochees (Dac- 
 tylus simplex dupliciter Trochaicus) preceded by a double Base (Tro- 
 chee + Spondee). 
 
 Double Base 1 2 3 
 ||_ WW |_ M |- W 
 
 Nota qua se\\des fue\rat co\lumbis. — Hor. 
 
 Sappho, the inventer of this verse (as also Catullus) often used the 
 double Trochee for Base : but Horace always lengthens the 4th syllable. 
 
 The strong Caesura after the 5th syllable is almost always found ; occa- 
 sionally the weak Caesura after the 6th (short) syllable : as, 
 
 Non semel dicemus || to triumphe. — Hor. 
 
 One or the other is essential to the harmony of the verse. 
 
 (11) Sapphicus Major Anacreontius ; which only differs from the last 
 in having a Choriambus between the Base and Dactyl. 
 
 Double Base 1 2 3 4 
 
 Scepe trans Ji\\ item jaculo \ nobilis j expe\dito. — Hor. 
 There is a Caesura after the 5th and a Dialysis after the 8th syllable. 
 
 (12) Versus Alcaicus Hendecasyllabus, consisting of Dactylus simple? 
 dupliciter Trochaicus Catalecticus, preceded by a double Base (Trochee 
 + Spondee), which is again preceded by an Anacrusis. 
 
 Anacr. Base 1 2 
 
 311 | | -" I" 
 
 Mors l| et fugacem || persequi\tur vi\rum. — Hor. 
 Vi\]des ut alta || stet nive | candi\dum. — Hor. 
 
 [The young composer may scan it as consisting of a Spondee (or 
 Iambus), an Iambus, long syllable, and two dactyls. 
 
 3=1 — 1""1 — ^|--^j 
 
 Qui pri\mus al\md \ risit a\dored. — Hor.] 
 
 The short Anacrusis is used but seldom. There is Dialysis after ihe 
 ith syllable. An elision sometimes occurs there : as, 
 
 Regum timendo\\rum in proprios greges, — Hor. 
 
 P 
 
210 APPENDIX 
 
 2. Asynartete. 
 
 (J.) Iambelegus Archilochius, composed of an Iambic Dimeter and a 
 Dactylic Penthemimer. 
 
 12 3 4 5 6 
 
 « = 1 — 1^=1 — I — |— " I- 
 
 Tu vi\n<x Tor\quato | move Jj comule \ pressa me\o. — Hon. 
 
 There is a Dialysis at the end of the Dimeter. 
 
 (2) Elegiambus Archilochius, in which a Dactylic Penthemimer goes 
 before an Iambic Dimeter. 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 
 
 — WW j -ww I — Jl w— I w- I w- |w- 
 
 Jussks ab\ire do\mutn |{ fere\bar in\certo \ pede. — Hoa. 
 
 There is a Dialysis at the end of the Penthemimer. 
 
 (a) — The Anapaestic Rhythm is the converse of the Dactylic. It 
 admits however Spondees and Dactyls ; in which the Ictus falls on the 
 second syllable. The most usual verse is the Dimeter, having a Dialysis 
 after the second foot ; as, 
 
 va\ne pudor jj falsum\que decus. 
 
 The Greek poets used this verse in systems ending with a Dimeter 
 Catalectic, called Versus Parcemiacus ; but the Roman poets have not 
 imitated them. A mono meter is sometimes introduced (in Greek always 
 before the Paroemiacus), called a Base. In Anapaestic verse alone, the 
 last syllable of a verse is not held common, and makes position with th* 
 succeeding verse. 
 
 (b) — The Saturnian Verse, an old Roman measure, not used in 
 the best ages, consisted of an Iambic Hepthemimer followed by an 
 Ithyphallic : as, 
 
 Dabunt j malum \ Mete1\li\ Navi\o pofeta. 
 
 Many licenses were admitted. 
 
 II. ON STROPHIC METRES 
 
 Metres consisting of more than one kind of verse in a recurring order 
 are called Strophic. A Metre containing two kinds is called Dicolon ; 
 ttiree, Tricolon, &c When two Verses alternate, the metre is called 
 Distichon (or Distrophon) ; when the recurrence takes place after four 
 lines, Tetrastichon (or Tetrastrophon ). The following Strophic Metres 
 occur in the Augustan poets. 
 
 a. Dicola Disticha or Distropha. 
 (I) Metrum Hipponacteum. 
 Trochaic. Dimeter Catalectic -f Iambic Trimeter Catalectic 
 
 Non e&«r Rcr/ac aureum 
 
 Me& rcuiilet in dtmo lacunar. — Hoa. 2, £&> 
 
APPENDIX. 2] i 
 
 The Trochaic Verse admits only Trochees. The Iambic has no 
 Dactyls or Anapaests; and always has the Penthemimeial Casura. 
 
 (2) Metrum Iambicum Senarium Quaternarium. 
 Iambic. Trim. Acat. + Iambic. Dim. Acat. 
 
 Beatus ille qui procul negotiis, 
 
 Ut prisca gens mortalium. — Hon. Epod. 2. 
 
 (3) Metrum Archilochium Primum. 
 
 Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Dactyl. Archilochius Minor. 
 Diffugere nives ; redennt jam gramina campis, 
 Arboribusque comet. — Hor. Od. 4, 7. 
 
 (4) Metrum Archilochium Secundum. 
 
 Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Iambelegus Archilochius. 
 
 Horrida tempestas ccdvm contraxit, et imbres 
 
 Nivesque deducunt Jovem ; nunc mare nunc silueB. 
 
 — Hor. Epod. 19 
 
 (5) Metrum Archilochium Tertium. 
 
 Iambic. Trim. Acat. + Elegiambus Archilochius. 
 Petti, nihil me 9 sicut antea,juvat 
 
 Scribere versiculos Amove percussum gravi. — Hor. Epod. 1 S . 
 
 (6) Metrum Archilochium Quartum. 
 
 Logaa&dicus Archilochius Major + Iamb. Trim. Cat. 
 
 Solvitur acris hyems grata vice verts et Favoni y 
 
 Trahuntque siccas machince carinas. — Hor. Od. 1, 4. 
 
 The Iambic line always has a Spondee in the third place, and admitf 
 no trisyllabic feet. 
 
 (7) Metrum Pythiambicum Primum. 
 Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Iamb. Dim. Acat. 
 
 Mollis inertia cur tantam diffuderit imis 
 
 OMivionem sensibus. — Hor. Epod. 14. 
 
 (8) Metrum Pythiambicum Secundum. 
 
 Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Hexapodia Iambica. 
 
 Altera jam teritur bellis civilibus <etas r 
 
 Suis et ipsa Roma viribus ruit. — Hor. Epod. 16* 
 
 (9) Metrum Alcmanium. 
 
 Dactyl. Hexam. Acat. + Dactyl. Tetram. Alcmanius. 
 Laudabunt alii claram Rhodon, ant Mifylenen 
 
 Aut Ephesum, bimarisve Corinthi. — Hon. Od* 1,7. Epod. 1 
 
 (10) Metrunj Asclepiadeum Secundum. 
 
 Versus Glyconeus ^ Versus Asclepiadeus Minor* 
 
212 APPENDIX, 
 
 Sic te Diva potent Cyprt, 
 
 Sicfratres Helenas, lucida sidera. — Hor. Od. 1, S. 
 
 Horace has twelve Odes in this measure. 
 
 (11) Metrum Sapphicum Majus. 
 
 Dactylus simplex dupliciter Trochaicus + Sapphicus Major. 
 
 Lydia, die per omnes 
 Te deos oro, Sybarin cur properes amanda. — Hor. Od. 1, 3 
 
 b. Dicola Teirasticha or Tetrastropha. 
 
 ;1) Strophe Sapphica Minor. 
 
 Terni Sapphici Minores -f- Adonius. 
 
 Integer vital scelerisque purus 
 
 Non eget Mauri jaculis, neque arcu, 
 
 Nee venenatis gravida sagittis, 
 
 Fusee, pharetrd. — Hon. Od. 1 , 2-2. 
 
 There are 26 Sapphic Odes in Horace. 
 
 The Adonian Verse is so intimately connected with the third Sapphio 
 line that Hiatus at the close of the latter is unusual, and words are some- 
 times divided between the two verses : as, 
 
 Thracio bacchante magis sub inter- 
 
 lunia vento. — Hor. 
 
 An Hypermeter is sometimes found among the Sapphic lines : as. 
 
 Dissidens plebi numero beato\rum 
 Eximit virtus Hor. 
 
 (2) Metrum Asclepiadeum Tertium. 
 
 Terni Asclepiadei Minores -f Glyconeus. 
 
 Jam verts comites, quas mare temperant, 
 
 Impellunt anim<B lintea Thracice : 
 
 Jam nee prata rigent, nee jiuvii strepunt 
 
 Hibernd nive turgidi. — Hor. Otf.4, 1£» 
 
 Horace has nine odes in this measure. 
 
 c. Tricola Tetrasticha. 
 (1) Metrum Asclepiadeum Quartum. 
 
 Bini Asclepiadei Minores -t- Pherecrateus + Glyconeus. 
 
 Prima nocte domttm elaude : neque in vias 
 Sub cantu queruloe despice tibial : 
 Et te scepe vocanti 
 
 Durum difficilis mane. — Hor. Of. 3, 7» 29 
 
 Horace has seven Odes in this Metre. 
 
APFENDIX. 213 
 
 (3) Strophe Alcaica. 
 
 Bint Alcaici Hendecasyllabi + Alcaieus Enneasyllabus -f Logacedicu* 
 Alcaicus Decasyllabus. 
 
 Qui rore puro CastalitB lamt 
 Crines solutos, qui Lycus tenet 
 Dumeta natalemque sylvam, 
 
 Delius et Patareus Apollo. — Host. 0(L 3, 4, 61. 
 Horace has written thirty-seven Odes in this Metre. 
 
 The following Rules for the rhythm of the Alcaic stanza must be ob* 
 served : — 
 
 (a.) First and second lines. 
 
 (1) The short syllable at the beginning is to be very sparingly used. 
 
 (2) The Dialysis after the 5th syllable must be generally preserved 
 The instances of its absence are few : as, 
 
 Hostile aratrum ex\ercitus t aao fe na. — Ho it. 
 Mentemque lympha\tani Mareotico. — Hor. 
 
 But an Elision often occurs after it : as, 
 
 Quo Styx et invis\i horrida Tcsnari. 
 
 (3) A Monosyllable before the Dialysis is rare (unless with another 
 preceding) but occasionally found : as, 
 
 Nil Claudia non perjicient manus. — Hgr. 
 Te fontium qui celat origirves. — Hor. 
 
 {4) A Monosyllable rarely occurs at the end of the line : as, 
 Ne forte credas interitura qua, — Hor. 
 Excepting ct, with a preceding elision, whieh is not unfrequent : as, 
 Judex honestum prcetulit utili et. — Hor. 
 
 (b.) Third line. 
 
 (1) The initial Iambus (short syllable) is to be very seldom used. 
 Horace has only 10 instances, and of these only 2 in the 3rd and 4th 
 Books of the Odes, which are his last and most finished compositions. 
 
 (2) Horace never begins with a word of four syllables, unless au 
 elision follows, as, 
 
 Funalia et vectes et arctte. — Hoe, 
 and that very seldom : never with two disyllables. Stcsh lines as ih« 
 following are therefore bad, and to be avoided entirely : — 
 
 Immobiles mansere Graih 
 
 Inter f eras horret catervas. 
 
 A Monosyllable and Oeticare also to be avoided, being but once used 
 by Hor-nce : 
 
 j&unc Le^stdc vacrai* pleci/ti. 
 
2M APPENWX. 
 
 (3) This Verse should not end with a word of four sylfab*3& F$ora** 
 kas only three instances, ail within the 1st aad 2nd Books, Nor witfc 
 two disyllables, though of this rhythm there are eight examples- m the 
 lirsi book. Avoids therefore, these Rhythms:. 
 
 Megumque matres barbarorum. 
 Proms- relahi posse vivos* 
 
 (4) No monosyllable should end the line,, except (and that raretv> et 
 jp a» with an elision : as, 
 
 Cuntftore Mcceexao rosarium, et. — Boa. 
 Insuds diffingas retusum in. — Hoiu 
 
 ^S) Hypermeters occur only twice in Horace- as. 
 
 Sors exitura y et nos in ceter\nttm 
 
 Ex ilium impositura eymb<B. 
 Cum pace delabentis Etru\scum 
 In mare, 
 
 (c.J Fourth Tine. 
 
 x i) f The -principal cautions for the structure of this vfirse have beec 
 
 already gi-en, p. 208. (7). 
 
 (2) A shy thai generally objectionable is someJisnes justified by its 
 accommodation to the sense of the passage ; as* 
 
 Juppiter ipse mens tumultu. 
 Stesiehorique gvavvs Camence* 
 
 Note >. — Modern scholars have observed that most of Horace's Odes m 
 Metra M'onocola or Dicola contain as many lines as form some multiple 
 of 4. This has justly led them to regard such Metres as Tetcastrophic r and 
 as such they are printed by Orelli, Dillenburger, &c Such are Carm. 
 1. 1. 3. 4. 8. 11. &c. 
 
 Nots 2. — A careful examination of the Odes of Horace, especially oi 
 those in the 3rd and 4th books, his last and most finished works y will show 
 that this poet earefully regarded the metrical relation of one verse to 
 another, especially in the same strophe : that a verse ending with a vowel 
 ©r m before another beginning with a vowel rarely occurs, Such juxta- 
 positions as the following are therefore ratlier to be avoided than imitated^ 
 
 Neve te nostris vitiis inicpuvm> 
 (Jcior aura. 
 
 Fitts reeantatis amkn 
 ij-pprr.briisy animumque tedd®3* 
 
 THE END 
 
 Spottisvcood'e & Co* Prin ters* New -street Square^ London* 
 L/P 
 
 ■ 
 
 university 
 ^Lcaufo* 
 
RETURN TO the circulation desk ot any 
 University of California Library 
 or to the 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
 (510)642-6753 
 
 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing 
 books to NRLF 
 
 • Renewals and recharges may be made 4 
 days prior to due date. 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 .ii in 04 1997 
 
 12,000(11/95) 
 
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 co^^eemtm